Home

Scale Tab

1. Vertical Horizontal Scale 100 00 dB Scale 50 0 MHz Position 0 00 dBm Reset Scale Position 1 9000 GHz Autoscale Log Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Scale Changes the vertical scale Position Vertical Position adjusts the top of graph amplitude value This control allows you to move pan the traces up and down in the graph without changing the Reference Level Autoscale Resets the Offset so that the trace appears below the top of the graph Horizontal Scale Allows you to change the range of frequencies shown in the graph without changing the span or measurement frequency Position Allows you pan the graph Autoscale Resets Scale to the Span setting Reset Scale Resets all settings to their default values Log scale Resets the display to show the frequency axis in a logarithmic scale Spectrogram Display The Spectrogram is a display with the vertical axis time composed of successive spectral displays each having the amplitude represented by color or intensity The horizontal axis represents frequency The most recently acquired spectrum results are added to the bottom of the spectrogram The addition of a new spectrum can occur at the fastest rate that new spectra can be plotted or if you choose new spectra can be added at a timed rate The spectrogram view is well suited to displaying long term trends of spectral data The maximum number of lines that can be displayed in a spectrogram is 125 000 The sp
2. Amplitude Scale see page 61 Selects between 2 D and 3 D sets height scale position and orientation for 3 D display Sets color parameters for the spectrogram trace Time amp Freq Scale see Sets the vertical and horizontal scale parameters for the spectrogram trace The page 61 Spectrum Monitor controls are also on this tab Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether or not certain display elements are shown SignalVu PC Printable Help 59 General Signal Viewing Trace Tab Trace Tab The Spectrogram Trace tab controls let you specify the Detection method save traces and recall saved traces for display The Spectrogram Trace tab does not have all the controls that other Trace tabs contain however it does have a unique display element the Selected Line readout For details on Detection Freeze and saving and recalling traces see the Traces Tab see page 73 Freq amp Span Bw Trace Amplitude Scale Time amp Freq Scale Prefs Selected Line SaveTrace As 6 30 2006 Freeze Save Trace As Detection Peak X Selected Line Displays the time at the Selected Line If Markers are enabled the selected line is positioned by the selected marker If no markers are enabled the selected line is the first line in the current analysis period 60 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Amplitude Scale Tab Amplitude Scale Tab The Amplitude Scale tab allows you to c
3. Magnitude v Show graticule Freq Units Subcarrier X Phase Radic Hex mmm Both V Show marker readout CSM 9 Bo Settings Description Time units Specifies whether the displayed time units are seconds or symbols Freq units Specifies whether the displayed frequency units are frequency Hz or subcarrier channel Radix Specifies whether symbol values are displayed in binary or hex format for example in the Symbol Table or markers readouts Show graphs Specifies which graphs are displayed Select from Symbols Subcarriers or Both Magnitude Phase or Both Disabled no masks Shaded Region or Line Only These selections are only available for OFDM signals Show graticule Specifies to show the graticule on the display when checked Show marker readout Specifies to show the marker readout when checked SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis Overview Overview The OFDM Analysis option provides measurements for OFDM signals specified by 802 11a g j Wifi and 802 16 2004 commonly known as Fixed WiMAX standards User controls allow you to modify signal parameters for analysis of non standard signals The analysis results give multiple views of OFDM signal characteristics to allow diagnosing signal imperfections and impairments quickly and easily Display controls provide the ability to selectively display the analysis results to help locate trouble spots in the signal The displays in OFDM Measurements
4. Burst Power Peak to Average The average power of all symbols in the packet including Preamble and Data segments The ratio of the highest instantaneous signal power level to the average signal power Burst Index The index of the analyzed packet within the analysis record IQ Origin Offset The average magnitude of the DC subcarrier level relative to total signal power It indicates the level of carrier feedthrough detected at the center DC subcarrier Frequency Error The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the measurement frequency setting Common Pilot Error The RMS magnitude error of the pilots over all data symbols Symbol CIk Error The symbol clock error in parts per million EVM The RMS and Peak values of the normalized subcarrier Error Vector Magnitude values The normalized subcarrier EVM values are calculated as the difference between the detected received signal subcarrier constellation points and ideal reference points estimated by the instrument from the received signal Values are reported in units of percent or dB Peak values include the symbol and subcarrier location RMS and Peak values are displayed for groupings of all subcarriers Pilots only and Data only Results are calculated over all Data symbols in the packet Average RMS and Peak RMS values are accumulated over multiple packet analysis cycles The Clear button on the display res
5. Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 223 Advanced Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 224 Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for page 225 analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Trace see page 227 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 227 Specifies the vertical subcarrier and symbols scale and position settings Prefs Tab see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed OFDM Phase Error Display The OFDM Phase Error display shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Phase Error values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency To show the OFDM Phase Error display 1 2 3 4 wc cop If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Phase Error icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Phase E
6. Specify vertical and horizontal scale settings Prefs see page 167 Specify appearance features of the graph area Freq amp RBW Tab 162 The Freq amp RBW tab specifies frequency parameters for some of the RF Measurements displays Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Meas Freq 1 00000 GHz RBW 30 000 kHz 7 Auto Step 2 0000 Mhz J Auto VBW Setting Description Meas Freq Specifies the measurement frequency Step The Step control sets the increment decrement size for the adjustment of the center frequency If Auto is enabled the analyzer will adjust the Step size as required RBW Select Auto or Manual Adjusts the RBW for the entire measurement This setting is Independent of the Spectrum view s RBW setting VBW Adjusts the VBW Video Bandwidth value NOTE While the measurement frequency and step settings on this control tab are shared between ACPR MCPR and Occupied Bandwidth the RBW setting is not shared The RBW setting is unique for each measurement VBW The VBW setting enables disables the Video Bandwidth filter VBW 1s used in traditional swept analyzers to reduce the effect of noise on the displayed signal The VBW algorithm in the analyzer emulates the VBW filters of traditional swept analyzers The maximum VBW value is the current RBW setting The minimum VBW value is 1 10 000 of the RBW setting SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Traces
7. 7 Span Scale Default function is Span frequency difference between the left edge of the display and the right edge If Horizontal scaling has been manually adjusted in Settings gt Scale then Scale will replace Span as the setting at the bottom right corner of the screen 8 Clear Erases the current results from the display 9 Function readout Readout of the Function selection for the Reference channel Setup gt Processing gt Function Spurious 10 Detection readout Readout of the Detection selection for the Reference channel Setup gt Processing gt Detection 11 Pass Fail readout Readout indicating whether any part of the trace has exceeded the any of the limits defined in the Offsets amp Limits table Setup gt Settings gt Offsets amp Limits Table Pass Fail Readout This readout displays either Pass or Fail XX When the signal exceeds the mask in any offset it is considered a mask violation and results in Fail XX being displayed If there are no mask violations Pass is displayed How the fail percentage is determined Each offset has two sides one lower and one upper For example Offset A has two sides AL lower side and AU upper side In the SEM display there is a maximum of six offsets A F and each offset can have a maximum of two sides if Both is selected for Side in the Offsets amp Limits table This results in a total of six offsets multiplied by two
8. Bee 1 1 2 RatioPos 2588 1 DelPos Delta Positive in Volts m RefPos Reference Positive in Volts DelNeg Delta Negative in Volts this is a positive value m RefNeg Reference Negative in Volts The Ripple measurement in Volts is calculated as follows Ripple Volts 100 x RatioPosV RatioNegV Where m RatioPosV DelPos RefPos m RatioNegV DelNeg RefNeg Secondary Marker The second marker displayed only in the Delta Marker mode SignalVu PC Printable Help 453 Glossary Sensitivity Sensitivity Measure of a analyzer s ability to display minimum level signals usually expressed as displayed average noise level DANL see page 444 Shape Factor Skirt Selectivity The ratio of the frequency separation of the two 60 dB 3 dB down points on the response curve to the static resolution bandwidth Signal As used in this help the signal refers to the input signal before it is processed The signal is an input Span Span is the range of frequencies displayed in a spectrum window Span start frequency and stop frequency are related by the following equation Span stop frequency start frequency The settings for center start and stop frequencies are related to the setting for span when one parameter is changed the others are changed automatically Span Per Division Span Div Frequency difference represented by each major horizontal division of th
9. 164 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Traces Tab 1 Navigate to the desired file and click Open 2 Check the Show Recalled Trace check box 3 Verify that the trace s Show check box is selected either on this tab or next to the drop down list located at the top left corner of the graph Gaussian Trace The Gaussian trace is a reference trace that you can compare your trace against Because the Gaussian trace is for reference there are no settings for the trace other than whether or not it is shown Parameters Traces Prefs Trace Gaussian M Show SignalVu PC Printable Help 165 RF Measurements Scale Tab Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Center Frequency Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 100 00 dB Scale 39 00 MHz Position 0 00 dBm Reset Scale Position 1 50000 GHz Autoscale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Scale Changes the vertical scale units This is only accessible when the vertical units are set to dBm Offset Adjusts the Reference Level away from the top of the trace display Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to contain the complete trace Horizontal
10. To show the WLAN Spectral Flatness display 1 2 3 4 o X dv ou If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Flatness icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN Flatness icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the WLAN Flatness display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval Subcarrier Spacing and Channel Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 185 WLAN Measurements Elements of the Display LJ 7 80 dB D 2 Posn 58 Subcarrier WLAN Spectral Flatness Settings gt 5 20 dB dB dv A 1 30 dB Pass 2 Scale 116 Subcarrier 0519 056 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph first setting Sets the Flatness value that appears at the top of the graph in dB This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Top of graph second setting Sets the lower range of the
11. 465 Index Y Z YouTube Zero Span Tektronix channel 4 DPX display 37 466 SignalVu PC Printable Help
12. Parameters Traces Prefs Measurement Time Single use Analysis Length Total Time Span 85 0 MHz Continuous Setting Description Single When Single is selected the CCDF measurement is based on the Analysis Time parameters set on Analysis control panel Setup gt Analysis gt Analysis Time shared by all displays In Single CCDF is time correlated with the other open displays Total Time When Total Time is selected you can adjust its value The value set here does not affect the Analysis Length value set in the Analysis control panel If the Total Time value is longer than the Analysis Length CCDF uses multiple acquisitions to collect signal data Continuous When Continuous is selected the CCDF measurement combines each new record Actual Analysis Length into the existing result It does not erase and start over until user presses STOP or CLEAR Span Specifies the range of frequencies used for analysis Single To have statistically meaningful results CCDF works best when calculated on at least 1 ms of data Depending on the Analysis Time setting the CCDF display may present error messages Ifthe Actual Analysis Time is greater than 1 ms the CCDF Display will calculate the trace without any problems Ifthe Actual Analysis time is less than 1 ms the CCDF Display will measure the data as best if can but if it receives fewer than 20 samples the CCDF display will clear the trace and report Not enou
13. Readout Description Ref A two part readout to the left of the table that displays information about the Reference Channel The first part of the readout displays the Measurement Type selected on the Parameters tab The second part of the readout displays the measurement result for the Reference channel Row A sequence number for ordering the offsets Click to organize by row number resort rows from high to low or low to high Offset The Offset name A combination of the offset A F and the location U for upper and L for Lower Start Freq The start frequency of the offset relative to the Measurement Freq Stop Freq The stop frequency of the offset relative to the Measurement Freq Peak Abs Absolute power peak power at worst case margin of the offset Margin Abs The worst case difference between the trace and the absolute limit line Note that an offset can have different start and stop levels thus the margin can vary if the offset start and stop levels are different Peak Rel Relative peak power of worst case margin of the offset Relative with respect to the reference power level Margin Rel The worst case difference between the trace and the relative limit line Because an offset can have different start and stop levels the margin can vary if the offset start and stop levels are different Freq The frequency at which the worst margin occurs Integ Abs The absolute integrated power of the o
14. SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Magnitude Error Settings Elements of the Display umm y l 2 Start 58 Subcarrier 2 Stop 58 Subcarrier 0519 055 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph Sets the Magnitude Error value that appears at the top of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Bottom of graph Sets the Magnitude Error value that appears at the bottom of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Pos Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position WLAN Magnitude Error Settings Application Toolbar 5 The settings for the WLAN Mag Error display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 179 WLAN Measurements Settings tab WLAN Phase Error Display Description Modulation Params see page 195 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Analysis Params see page 196 Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the sig
15. SignalVu PC Printable Help 205 OFDM Analysis OFDM Channel Response Display 206 8 Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal 9 If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the Display 2 Scale 52 Subc 051903 amp Pos 26 Subc Phase 1 00 Pos 26 Subc 2 Sce 52 Sube 051904 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Channel Response Settings Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph magnitude Sets the level that appears at the top of the magnitude graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph The Reference Level is adjusted in the Toolbar and the Ampl control panel By default Vert Position Ref Level 2 dB div magnitude Sets the vertical scale value The maximum value is 20 00 dB division 3 Display selector Selects the display type Channel Response Magnitude or Phase can be displayed as a Magnitude or Phase graph 4 Bottom of graph readout Indicates the amplitude at the bottom of the graph This value changes with magnitude the dB div and Vertical Position settings 5 Autoscale Adjusts the Vertical and Horizontal scaling to display the optimize the trace display on screen 6 Pos Shifts the trace left or right in the
16. The Advanced Params tab specifies additional parameters Find see page 346 Find tab is used to set parameters for finding bursts within the data record Analysis Time see page 346 The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Prefs see page 350 The Prefs tab enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Trellis Diagram Display To show an Trellis Diagram display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 3 From the Measurements box select GP Digital Modulation 4 Double click the Trellis Diagram icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Trellis Diagram icon to the Selected displays box d Click the OK button This displays the Trellis Diagram view 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 331 GP Digital Modul Elements ation of the Display Trellis Diagram Display Posi 0 001 j Auto Vo Freq Eror 401 8 He Auta S00 500 ition n scale 2 Scale 3 Sym 0519 040 Item Element Description 1 Check mark indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Frequency Deviation vs
17. WLAN Measurements Analysis Params Tab WLAN Settings Description Standard Specifies the standard used for the input signal Choices are 802 11a b g j nlp ac Guard Interval Specifies the guard interval used in the input signal You can select the following Auto from SIG uses the Guard Interval value extracted from the signal 1 8 allows setting the value manually 1 4 allows setting the value manually Channel Bandwidth Specifies the nominal channel bandwidth This setting affects the Subcarrier Spacing value when the Subcarrier Spacing Auto box is checked Subcarrier Spacing Specifies the spacing between subcarriers When Auto is selected this setting is automatically calculated according to the Channel Bandwidth value If Auto is unchecked a custom subcarrier spacing value can be entered for nonstandard signal definition FFT Sample Rate Indicates the FFT sample rate based on the bandwidth or subcarrier setting FFT Length Indicates the fixed FFT length Analysis Params Tab WLAN The Analysis Params tab contains parameters that control the analysis of the input signal Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Traces Scale Prefs Burst Selection Index 1 Equalizer Training Preamble x Frequency Error 0 000 Hz 7 Auto Data Modulation Auto Detect Y Symbol Analysis Offset 50 96 SwapI amp Q Pilot Tracking V Phase Amplitude Timing 196 SignalVu PC Printable
18. e Freg Error 133 3 Hz Auto 540 mV Position 0 000 V es 540 mv Autoscale 9 Position 14 00 Sym Item Element Sale 30 00 Sym 0519 034 Description Check mark indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Demod amp Q vs Time display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Top of Graph Sets the and Q amplitude value indicated at the top of the graph Changing the top value affects the bottom of graph readout Also note that the top of graph setting interacts with the internal vertical scale setting which is not user settable such that the range between the top and bottom of the graph increases or decreases automatically 3 Position Specifies the and Q amplitude value shown at the center of the graph display 4 Bottom Readout Displays the and Q amplitude value shown at the bottom of graph 5 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 6 Position Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 7 Scale Adjusts the span of the graph By decreasing the scale time per division the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the acq
19. page 157 Offsets amp Limits Table see Specifies characteristics of offsets and mask limits page 157 Scale Tab see page 160 Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale settings Prefs Tab see page 161 Specifies the appearance features of the graph area and the maximum trace points Standards Presets see Click this button to access the Standards Presets options dialog window You can select page 14 button the standard and bandwidth to apply to the standard you select Click on the link to the left for information about standards presets Parameters Tab SEM The Parameters tab specifies several characteristics that control how the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are made Parameters Processing Channels Offsets amp Limits Table Scale Prefs Meas Freq 5 5700 GHz Measurement Type Peak Step 20 0000 MHz 4 Auto Offset definition Ref center to OS center 4 Real Time Fiter shape Gaussian V Apply noise correction SignalVu PC Printable Help 153 RF Measurements Parameters Tab SEM Setting Description Meas Freq Specify the frequency of the signal to be measured Step Sets the increment size when changing the Frequency using the knob or mouse wheel Auto When Auto is enabled the step size is adjusted automatically based on the span setting Real Time When Real Time mode is enabled the entire SEM span is measured using a real time contiguous acquisition Not all described param
20. C ProgramData Tektronix RSA SignalVu PC License Restart Signal Vu PC This completes the activation process for Signal Vu PC options Managing SignalVu PC Licenses Signal Vu PC options are licensed for use on a single PC However you can move Signal Vu PC and its options from one PC to another PC by deactivating each option on the current installation and reactivating them on another PC SignalVu PC Printable Help 437 Reference Settings NOTE Each activated SignalVu PC option needs to be deactivated To deactivate SignalVu PC options 1 Launch SignalVu PC and select Tools gt Manage Licenses from the menu bar 2 Use to the drop down list under Option to select one of the SignalVu PC options that is activated on the PC For example OFDM Measurements SignalVu PC SVO NOTE If your SignalVu PC installation has options installed be sure to deactivate all options 3 Starting with each installed option click Deactivate License Continue selecting options and clicking Deactivate License until all the SignalVu PC options have been deactivated SignalVu PC options are now deactivated You can now install SignalVu PC on another PC and activate the options in the new installation Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings The Settings menu item enables access to control panels that allow you to change settings for the selected display The control panel that appears when you select Settings depends on the selected dis
21. Glossary Marker Marker A visually identifiable point on a waveform trace used to extract a readout of domain and range values represented by that point Max Hold Digitally stored display mode which at each frequency address compares the incoming signal level to the stored level and retains the greater level In this mode the display indicates the peak level at each frequency after several successive acquisitions MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio The ratio of the signal power in the reference channel or group of channel to the power in adjacent channels Min Hold Digitally stored display mode which at each frequency address compares the incoming signal level to the stored level and retains the lower level In this mode the display indicates the minimum level at each frequency after several successive sweeps Modulate To regulate or vary a characteristic of a signal typically in order to transmit information Modulating Signal The signal which modulates a carrier The signal which varies or regulates some characteristic of another signal SignalVu PC Printable Help 449 Glossary Modulation Modulation The process of varying some characteristic of a signal with a second signal Noise Unwanted random disturbances superimposed on a signal which tend to obscure it Noise Bandwidth NBW The exact bandwidth of a filter that is used to calculate the absolute power in dBm Hz Noise Floor The noise intr
22. Phase offset 128 C Auto Measurement BW 1 000 MHz C Load from marker Setting Description Parameters see page 98 Sets the Carrier Frequency Detection method You can choose either Automatic or Manual Sets burst threshold and phase detection method Trace see page 99 Sets Trace display parameters Scale see page 102 Sets vertical and horizontal scale and position parameters Prefs see page 103 Specifies whether or not certain display elements are shown Specifies the maximum number of points shown in the display graph Parameters Tab The Parameters tab enables you to specify parameters that control the carrier frequency and phase detection Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Frequency offset 383 2 Hz E Auto Burst detect threshold 100 dBc l Load from marker Phase offset 128 E Auto Measurement BW 1 000 MHz EEE Load from marker 98 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Trace Tab Setting Description Burst detect threshold Specifies the power level used to determine whether a burst is present A valid burst is required to take measurements The burst detected first is used for the analysis The units for burst detect threshold are dBc relative to the maximum acquisition sample data points level Measurement BW Specifies the bandwidth about the center frequency at which measurements are made Frequency offset Displays the carrier signal s frequency offset from the instrume
23. Position Specifies the subcarrier that appears at the left edge of the subcarrier graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to contain the complete trace Symbols Controls the scale of the Symbols graph Scale Specifies the number of symbols that appear in the symbols graph Position Specifies the symbol that appears at the left edge of the Symbols graph Autoscale Resets the scale and position settings to optimize the display Auto When Auto is checked the scale and position values for the Symbols graph are automatically adjusted to maintain the optimal display Zoom Sets the Constellation display size and position Scale Sets the magnification value for the Constellation display Vertical Position Sets the vertical location of the Constellation display within the graph Range is 3 7 to 37 Horizontal Position Sets the horizontal location of the Constellation display within the graph Range is 3 7 to 37 Signal Vu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis Prefs Tab OFDM Prefs Tab OFDM The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the OFDM Analysis displays Not all settings on the Prefs tab shown below appear for every OFDM display Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range AnalysisTime Trace Scale Prefs Showgaphs Time units Symbols M Both v Shaw graticule Freq units Subcarrier Subcarriers Radix Symbols J Show marker readout Settings
24. Save data to a file in a format other than application native FastFrame FastFrame segments the acquisition record into a series of frames and then captures acquisitions as single frames You can then view and measure each frame individually SignalVu PC Printable Help 445 Glossary FFT FFT Fast Fourier Transform a mathematical process to calculate the frequency spectrum of a discrete number of time domain sample points Filter A circuit that separates electrical signals or signal components based on their frequencies FM Acronym for Frequency Modulation Frame A series of time contiguous samples long enough in duration and at a sufficient sample rate to produce a spectrum view of a specified span and RBW Frequency A series of time contiguous samples long enough in duration and at a sufficient sample rate to produce a spectrum view of a specified span and RBW Frequency Band The continuous range of frequencies extending between two limiting frequencies expressed in hertz Frequency Domain View The representation of the power of the spectral components of a signal as a function frequency the spectrum of the signal 446 SignalVu PC Printable Help Glossary Frequency Drift Frequency Drift Gradual shift or change in displayed frequency over the specified time due to internal changes in the analyzer where other conditions remain constant Expressed in hertz per second Frequency Range The range
25. Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal 9 If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Phase Error Settings Elements of the Display scale 0 Start 58 Subcarrier Stop 58 Subcarrier 0519 054 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph Sets the Phase Error value that appears at the top of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Bottom of graph Sets the Phase Error value that appears at the bottom of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Pos Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position WLAN Phase Error Settings Application Toolbar at The settings for the WLAN Phase Error display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 181 WLAN Measurements Settings tab WLAN Power vs Time Display Description Modulation Params see pag
26. SignalVu PC Printable Help 187 WLAN Measurements WLAN Summary Display WLAN Summary Display for 802 11a g j p n ac Signals Standard 802 11n Bandwidth 40 MHz Guard Interval Auto from SIG Burst Power 0 01 dBm Peak to Average 9 80 dB L SIG Data Parity Pass Burst Index 1 1Q Origin Offset 82 25 dB Rate 13 R i 0 Frequency Error 140 27 mHz Common Pilot Error 0 337 Length 312 Parity 1 Symbol Clk Error 0 070 ppm Tail 0 Em HT SIG Data CRC Pass All Pilots Data MCS 0 CBW 1 RMS 39 91 dB 40 40 dB 39 89 dB Length 672 Smoothing 0 Peak 27 33 dB 31 09 dB 27 33 dB Not Sound 0 Reserved 1 Pk Sym Sub 32 58 85 53 32 58 Agaregation 0 STBC 0 Avg RMS 39 91 dB FEC Coding 0 Short GI 0 1 ofi Bursts Ness 0 CRC 1 Max RMS 39 91 dB UE E Packet Format HT MF Data Modulation BPSK Guard Interval 1 4 Symbols EVM Avg Power L STF 2 44 57 dB 0 00 dBm L LTF 2 40 02 dB 0 01 dBm L SIG E 40 43 dB 0 26 dBm HT SIG 2 40 34 dB 0 47 dBm HT STF 1 44 08 dB 0 01 dBm HT LTF d 42 43 dB 0 00 dBm Data 100 39 91 dB 0 01 dBm 188 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Summary Display Elements of the Display for 802 11a g j p n ac Signals Measurement Description Standard Display of the standard selected on the Setup gt Settings gt Modulation Params tab Bandwidth Display of the channel bandwidth selected on Setup gt Settings gt Modulation Parameters tab
27. ul Audio Summary FM Carrier Power 1 64 dBm Carr Freq Err 89 777 Hz Audio Freq 2 000 kHz Peak 99 990 kHz Peak 99 881 kHz Pk Pk 2 99 935 kHz RMS 70 342 kHz secs x SINAD 56 89 dB Mod Distor 0 143 S N 56 70 dB THD 0 022 73 12 dB TNHD dB Audio Summary Displayed Measurements Table 5 Audio Summary Measurements Signal type Item Description AM FM PM Carrier Power Average power of the carrier signal with modulation removed Direct Signal Power Average power of the input signal FM PM Carr Freq Err Carrier frequency error AM FM PM Direct Audio Freq Fundamental audio frequency SignalVu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Audio Summary Settings Table 5 Audio Summary Measurements cont Signal type Item Description Peak Peak modulation excursion where the modulation excursion readout depends on the signal type Peak Peak modulation excursion where the modulation excursion readout depends on the signal type 1 Peak Peak 2 Half peak peak modulation excursion where the modulation excursion readout depends on the signal type RMS RMS modulation excursion where the modulation excursion readout depends on the signal type SINAD Signal to noise and distortion Mod Distor Modulation distortion S N An estimate of the Signal level to Noise only level with the HD and NHD components removed THD Total harmonic distortion TNH
28. 37 Disconnect from instruments Live Link 425 display reference level 445 Displays arranging 27 Frequency Settling Time 133 interactions between 27 OFDM Channel Response 205 OFDM Constellation 208 OFDM EVM 209 OFDM Mag Error 213 OFDM Phase Error 215 OFDM Power 217 OFDM Spectral Flatness 211 Signal Vu PC Printable Help OFDM Summary 219 OFDM Symbol Table 221 P25 Constellation 263 P25 Eye Diagram 265 P25 Power 268 P25 Summary 270 P25 Symbol Table 273 Phase Settling Time 133 selecting 27 SEM Spectrum Emission Mask 149 WLAN Channel Response 171 WLAN Constellation 174 WLAN EVM 176 WLAN Mag Error 178 WLAN Phase Error 181 WLAN Power 182 WLAN Spectral Flatness 185 WLAN Summary 187 WLAN Symbol Table 192 distortion 445 documentation 3 DPX display DPXogram 37 Frequency 37 Phase 37 Spectrum 37 Zero Span 37 DPX Spectra Replay menu 385 DPX Spectra Acq Data 383 DPX Spectrum settings 42 DPXogram DPX display 37 Droop 35 Droop dB 35 Duty Factor measurement 34 Duty Factor Ratio measurement 34 dynamic range 445 E Elements of the display 9 Enable EQ Export Equalizer tab 341 Enable Equalization Equalizer tab 341 SignalVu PC Printable Help Equalizer tab GP Digital Modulation displays 340 error message Windows Event Viewer 433 Error messages 427 Evaluation mode for options 434 Event tab Triggering 400 Event Viewer 433 EVM 31 OFDM 29 W
29. Auto If a burst is found analyze just that burst period If a burst is not found analyze the whole analysis length On If a burst is found analyze just that burst period If a burst is not found display an error message Off Analyze the whole analysis length If the signal isn t adequate for demodulation an error message is shown Burst Detection Threshold Sets the level required for the signal to qualify as a burst Enter a value in dBc down from top of the signal Use Synch Word When enabled specifies the string of symbols to look for Enter the search string with external keyboard or the on screen keyboard Clear Blanks the search string field Analysis Time Tab The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define how the signal is analyzed in the general purpose digital modulation displays Modulation Params Freg amp BW Equalizer Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Analysis Offset 58 667 ns 7 Suto Time Zero Reference Trigger z Analysis Length 128 Sym v Auto Units Symbols v Actual 128 Sym The settings values on this tab are the same as those on the main Analysis control panel for the instrument with the only difference being that Analysis Length can be set in either Seconds or Symbols in this location 346 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Analysis Time Tab Setting Description Analysis Offset Specifies the location of the first tim
30. Edit Points ENS ul Y Margin 20 000 dBm 0 00 dBm Auto draw Enable v Upper Mask Upper Mask Table I Lowermask Offset Freq Amplitude l a 100 00 dBm Offset 1 50000 GHz 5cale 40 00 MHz MEN E A To set up and save mask test limits for a test Perform the following procedure to set up a test using the mask limits SignalVu PC Printable Help 373 Mask Testing Define Tab Mask Test 1 After choosing the desired Search in and Test for items click Edit limits to display the Mask Test Editor window 2 Click the New button to create a table This clears the existing points and loads the default table You can also click Open to open an existing table 3 To edit values add points or delete points in a table a To edit an existing value double click on the cell you want to edit and enter the desired value The active point shows as a red point on the plot Reference Spectrum Trace 1 M to be in list a trace must be showing in a display res Save Done Click in Add points graph Next X to 9 Edit Points X Margin 5 000 MHz Undo j 4 _ Y Margin 10 000 dBm KJ E gt Auto draw T 0 00 dBm v Upper Mask Upper Mask Table Lower Mask Offset Freq Amplitude 16 000 MHz 5 00 dBm 8 000 MHz 5 00 dBm 8 000 MHz 5 00 dBm 8 iesus ean 16 000 MHz 5 00 dBm Offset 0 Hz Scale 40 00 MHz i
31. Live Link 425 Length 33 Equalizer tab 341 Levels tab Pulsed RF displays 245 license activating 435 deactivating 437 moving to another PC 437 Limit lines 371 Limits P25 default 270 Limits tab P25 Analysis displays 290 Link to Span 71 LISN 448 Live Link 20 local oscillator LO 448 Lock Center Frequency of Spectrum displays 379 Lock Center Frequency of Spectrum displays to Measurement Frequency Frequency tab 380 Log Audio Spectrum display 303 Log Horizontal Spectrum display 56 Loop over all selected records Replay menu 385 LPF Audio Filters tab 300 Mag Error 31 OFDM 29 WLAN 30 Magnitude Error vs Time display 319 Magnitude Error vs Time settings 320 Main presets 13 manuals 3 marker 449 Marker Noise mode 367 Marker Properties tab 364 Marker to Center Frequency 364 Markers 366 Marker Toolbar 366 Using Markers 361 Using Markers in Noise Mode 367 Markers menu 424 Mask Editor 371 Mask tab Settling Time displays 145 Mask Test 371 mask testing settling time measurement 129 MATLAB file format 410 Max Freq Error 35 max hold 449 Max number of pulses Pulse Table display 238 Max Number of Pulses Params tab 239 SignalVu PC Printable Help Max Phase Error 35 Max total files saved per Run 402 Max trace points 67 Settling Time displays 149 MCPR P25 34 MCPR multiple carrier power ratio 449 MCPR display 111 MCPR settings 115 Meas BW Frequency Se
32. No acquisition record currently exists in memory run an acquisition or recall a file or an error has occurred Repeat the acquisition Can t replay data from swept acq The measurement could not produce results because it is a real time only measurement but was asked to reanalyze Replay an acquisition taken in swept mode Can t replay Live data needed for swept settings The measurement could not produce results because it was asked to reanalyze Replay the acquisition but it is in Swept acquisition mode Swept mode measurements cannot analyze recalled data CISPR accuracy limited by acq memory Adjust RBW or freq range The CISPR function was applied but the available data did not represent a long enough time to satisfy CISPR requirements Increasing RBW reduces the amount of time needed for analysis Reducing frequency range for example by reducing Span decreases sample rate allowing the available memory to cover a longer time period If this data is from a saved file the error cannot be cleared If this data is from a saved file this error cannot be cleared This data was acquired when the input signal contained peaks greater than 6 dB above the Reference Level setting If the data is from a file this error cannot be cleared Data from unaligned instrument The acquisition data was captured when the instrument was not aligned This message refers to the acquisition data currently being analyzed but not necessarily to t
33. Select Start gt Control Panel 2 Select Administrative Tools If your instrument displays control panels in Category View select System and Security and then select Administrative Tools 3 Double click Event Viewer 4 From the Event Viewer window select Windows Logs then select Application This displays a list of all errors that have been reported to the operating system from applications SignalVu PC Printable Help 433 Reference How to Find Out if Software Upgrades are Available M SS F Event Viewer bo o a File Action View Help e9 20H Event Viewer Local Application Number of events 1 467 Actions Custom Views P z Windows Logs Level Date and Time Source Event ID Application f Application Information 1 21 2011 4 38 07 PM gupdat S Open Saved Log amp Security Information 7 27 2011 4 38 07 PM gupdat Y Create Custom View g Setup iD Information 7 27 2011 4 38 06 PM gusvc Import Custom View i System Error 7 27 2011 4 36 17 PM TekRSA _ Forwarded Events Information 7 27 2011 4 01 46 PM Certific Clear Log Applications and Services Loli i Information 7 21 2011 4 01 46 PM Certific Y Filter Current Log C4 Subscriptions Information 7 27 2011 3 38 02 PM Certific Properties Information 7 27 2011 3 38 02 PM Certific e Find eR x bed Save All Events As E Attach a Task To this L General Details View gt
34. Select the Presets Preset Options menu to open the Options control panel This panel does the following Once you have chosen these settings you can access any preset or list of presets from Presets on the menu bar SignalVu PC Printable Help Using SignalVu PC Presets B Preset type Select the Preset type Presets Select which preset you want to display for that particular preset type B Preset action Recalling Presets results in either of two actions One action is to immediately execute a Preset The second action displays a list of Presets from which you select the Preset you want to recall You can select from Recall selected preset or Show list Recalling a Preset To recall a preset select Presets and then the desired preset type NOTE You can set which presets to recall from the Presets gt Preset Options see page 14 control panel NOTE You can also click the Preset button on the right hand side of the menu bar to load the Main preset Creating User Presets You can add your own user presets to the list that appears in the User Presets dialog box Create a Setup file and save a copy of it to C SignalVu PC Files User Presets The name you give the file will be shown in the User Presets list For instructions on how to save a Setup file see Saving Data see page 403 Standards Presets The Standards presets allow you to recall preconfigured displays for the standards that you select You can
35. Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar e The settings for the Trellis Diagram display are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Trellis Diagram display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 Settings tab Description Modulation Params see page 335 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Freq amp BW see page 339 Equalizer Tab see page 340 Specifies settings for frequency error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 Specifies additional parameters Find see page 346 Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch word Analysis Time see page 346 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Trace see page 348 Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Scale see pag
36. The description for Event ID 0 from source gupdatem cannot be found Either the compor G Refresh that raises this event is not installed on your local computer or the installation is corruptec H can install or repair the component on the local computer B Hep d If the event originated on another computer the display information had to be saved with Event gupdatem id E Event Properties Log ame ppplcston E Attach Task To This Ev Source gupdatem Logged 7 27 2011 4 38 07 PM b Save Selected Events Event ID 0 Task Category None Level Information Keywords Classic Hg Copy d User N A Computer PC BEAV 0039 global te GG Refresh OpCode Help gt More Information Event Log Online Help m Errors reported to the Event Viewer from the analyzer application appear under Source as TekRSA 5 Double click the last error reported for TekRSA to see details on the most recently reported error Please note that many items reported as errors are simply informational and do not mean that your instrument is impaired Contact the Tektronix Customer Support Center or Service Center if you are concerned about an error shown in the Event Viewer Do not send an instrument out for repair based solely on these event reports How to Find Out if Software Upgrades are Available Software upgrades might be available can be downloaded from the Tektronix Web site To see if a software upgrade is available for your
37. The results array from an analysis can be detected or decimated in a variety of ways The number of results points produced for each trace point varies with both analysis length and trace length For SignalVu PC Printable Help T3 General Signal Viewing Traces Tab 74 example the frequency transform used for the Spectrum display produces just one output value for each desired trace point In this case the detection method chosen has no effect as no decimation 1s required Increasing the Analysis Length or for the Spectrum display the Spectrum Length causes the available detection method s output traces to differ from each other because they have a larger set of samples for the various detection methods to process The available detection methods depending on the display are m Peak The highest value is selected from the results to be compressed into a trace point B Peak The lowest value is selected from the results to be compressed into a trace point m Peak Both the highest and lowest values are selected from the results to be compressed into a trace point B Avg VRMS Average Vgys Each point on the trace is the result of determining the RMS Voltage value for all of the results values it includes When displayed in either linear Volts Watts or Log dB dBm the correct RMS value results B Avg of logs The detector is used to emulate legacy spectrum analyzer results and for the specification of disp
38. amp Span 110 0 MHz Analysis Analysis Time Spectrum Time Frequency unts Measurement Frequency 2 0000 GHz C Lock Center Frequency of Spectrum displays to Measurement Frequency The following screen capture shows the measurement frequency indicator located at 2 0402 GHz while the Spectrum Center Frequency is still located at 2 0000 GHz a sees J sec s olafan09 95 xj EE 0 Peak Normal Freq Error 153 4 kHz Auto v RaW Si 1757 o PekBMs 3817 0 205m ps PJE us Actuak 33387 us ekom ae us wi 2 0 00 dBm CF 20000 GHz 2 dja 10 0 dB WT TT GIONE Freq Error 153 4 kHz Auto 2 40 0 100 00 dBm 2 Postion 0 000 s Scale 88 853 us v Trcei Show sPeskNomal 2 Postion 0 735 Postion 1 00 sm Scale 128 00 Sym 100 00 dem RMS Lai Peak 3 132 120 005ym GF 2 0000 GHz 2 Span 110 0 MHz Analysis Analysis Time Spectrum Time Frequency Units Measurement Frequency 2 0402 GHz C Lock Center Frequency of Spectrum displays to Measurement Frequency Spectrum Center Frequency 2 0000 GHz You can drag the Measurement Frequency indicator on the screen to set the measurement frequency Note the base of the Measurement Frequency indicator The width of the box indicates the widest measurement bandwidth in use among the open displays You can see how the width of this box changes with the measurement bandwidth by in this example adjusting the
39. and click Add The P25 Frequency Dev vs Time icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to display the Freq Dev vs Time display Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Modulation Type and Measurement and Reference filters as appropriate for the input signal Select the Test Patterns tab and select a test pattern The available test patterns in the drop down list depend of the standard and modulation type you have selected Elements of the Display The following image shows the P25 Freq Dev vs Time display for Phase 1 CAFM non bursty High Deviation signals 276 Signal Vu PC Printable Help MM M 2 BI APCO P25 Analysis P25 Frequency Dev Vs Time Settings NOTE For bursty HCPM signals frequency deviation analysis is done only on 160 symbols centered at every on slot region in the chosen analysis window and not on off slot regions That is why there is no information shown during off slot regions You can read more specific information about P25 measurements here see page 252 Elements of the Display Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph adjustment Adjust the frequency range displayed on the vertical axis 2 Position center Adjust the frequency shown at the center of the display 3 Autoscale button Adjusts the offs
40. of Non Harmonics 12 Averaging 10 Non Harmonics only Ignore region 0 0 Hz Threshold 65 0 dBc Excursion 6 0 dB Setting Description No of Harmonics Specifies the number of harmonics to detect The detected harmonics are tagged with a number on the spectrum trace The available range is 1 20 No of Non Harmonics Averaging Specifies the number of non harmonics to detect The detected non harmonics are tagged with a number on the spectrum trace The available range is 0 20 Specifies the number of averages used to compute the results Range 2 100 Ignore region Specifies the region about the signal frequency where the instrument will ignore non harmonics Non Harmonic Threshold Specifies the level which a spectrum peak must exceed to be declared a non harmonic signal component Non Harmonic Excursion Specifies the difference in level between a spectrum peak and the average noise level that must be exceeded for the peak to be declared a non harmonic signal component About Averaging In Audio Analysis Displays Analysis averaging is implemented using a block method This means that the entire record required for multiple spectrum computations is acquired and analyzed within one analysis cycle The result of each analysis update is a complete independent result from a set of N spectrums averaged together where N is the Averaging control value Since each update is
41. with SignalVu PC installed to the following instruments SignalVu PC Printable Help 425 Reference Window Menu MDO4000B Series instrument using USB wireless or LAN SignalVu PC with option CON required B RSA306 using USB By connecting to one of these instruments you are able to view and analyze waveforms in real time using the SignalVu PC software You can find instructions for connecting to an instrument here see page 20 Elements of the Live Link Menu Menu item Description Search for instruments Connect to instrument Manually look for LAN instrument When attempting to connect to an MDO4000B instrument use this menu to activate TekVISA to search for MDO4000B instruments that are connected by USB or through a LAN network An RSA306 connected via USB is automatically recognized by the software so you do not need to search for the instrument Select to view a list of currently connected instruments or to manually look for an instrument Available with option CON Select to open a dialog window that allows you to enter the IP address of an instrument to connect to Disconnect from instrument Select to disconnect from the currently connected instrument This is only available when you are connected to an instrument Window Menu Use the Window menu to arrange how windows are displayed Displays can be set to appear full screen one display at a time or with all selected displays
42. 00000 GHz Reflev 0 00 dem Replay Run 4 Normal dex 10 00 dem dBidy 10 00 cB 110 00 dam Autoscae Offset 1 00000 GHz Scale 39 81 MHz lIBIL r rtrt A M D AC OC Reference Ch Offset Lower Upper Power Al 125MH 60 67d8 59 15cB 8 64 dBm A2 17 5 MHz 60 07 dB 58 908 cB Stopped Acq BW 40 00 MHz Acg Length 169 240 us Real Tme Free Run Ref int Atten 185 dB Preamp Off The following table details the entries in the results table SignalVu PC Printable Help 113 RF Measurements 114 MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio Display Heading Description Ch Identifies the adjacent channels Adjacent channels are numbered according to their offset from the Main channel The closest channel is numbered 1 The next closet channel is numbered 2 and so forth The prefix L means lower U means upper Offset The offset is the difference in frequency between the Measurement Frequency and the center frequency of the channel Lower Displays the ratio of the lower adjacent channel power to the Power Reference Upper Displays the ratio of the upper adjacent channel power to the Power Reference L Limit Displays the lower power limit U Limit Displays the upper power limit Power Reference Depending on the selected Power Ref this readout displays either the power of the selected main channel or the total power in the active main c
43. 151 Pass Fail tests 372 Pause Replay menu 386 Peak Audio Summary display 295 Peak Audio Summary display 295 Peak Excursion 364 Peak FSK err 33 Peak Mag Err 33 Peak Power 34 Peak Threshold 364 Peak Avg Ratio 29 Peak Peak 2 Audio Summary display 295 Phase DPX display 37 Phase Deviation 36 Phase Error 31 462 OFDM 29 WLAN 30 Phase Error vs Time display 321 Phase Error vs Time settings 322 phase settling time 450 measuring 138 Phase Settling Time display 133 Phase Settling Time settings 141 Phase vs Time display 67 Phase vs Time settings 68 pictures saving 403 Pk M display 33 M display 34 Y ou Pk M display 33 M display 34 Pk Pk M display 33 M display 34 Pk Pk 2 FM display 33 PM 451 PM measurements 34 Power OFDM 29 Power Markers 364 power measurements 105 Power measurements 29 Power Threshold to Detect Pulses Params tab 239 Power vs Time P25 34 WLAN 30 Pre defined Filters Audio Filters tab 300 Prefs tab AM display 87 FM display 95 General Signal Viewing Displays 79 GP Digital Modulation displays 350 OFDM Analysis displays 229 Options control panel 20 P25 Analysis displays 289 m PM display 103 Pulsed RF displays 248 RF Measurements displays 167 Settling Time displays 149 WLAN Analysis displays 204 Presets 13 Application 13 Main 13 P25 15 recalling 15 Standards 13 User 13 WLAN 15 Presets t
44. 21 26 Measurement Description Standard Display of the standard selected on the Setup gt Settings gt Modulation Params tab Frequency Error IQ Origin Offset The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the measurement frequency setting The average magnitude of the DC subcarrier level relative to total signal power It indicates the level of carrier feedthrough detected at the center DC subcarrier Average Power The average power of all symbols in the analysis Calculated over only the data symbols in the packet Symbols How many symbols were analyzed Symbol CIk Error The symbol clock error in parts per million CPE CPE Common Pilot Error is the RMS magnitude error of the pilots over all analyzed symbols Peak to Average The ratio of the highest instantaneous signal power level to the average signal power Calculated over only the data symbols in the packet EVM The RMS and Peak values of the normalized subcarrier Error Vector Magnitude values The normalized subcarrier EVM values are calculated as the difference between the detected received signal subcarrier constellation points and ideal reference points estimated by the instrument from the received signal Values are reported in units of percent and dB Peak values include the symbol and subcarrier location RMS and Peak values are displayed for groupings of all subcarriers Pilots only and Data only Results
45. 2FSK 4FSK Left Right Left Right ENEEEUES 0169 014 0169 015 SignalVu PC Printable Help 355 GP Digital Modulation Overview User Defined Measurement and Reference Filters 16FSK Left Right 0169 016 C4FM Left Right Topo Te CPM Phase shift Symbol value h modulation index binary 3h 11 h 10 h 01 3h 00 Overview User Defined Measurement and Reference Filters The Modulation Parameters control tab for GP Digital Modulation displays enables you to load custom measurement and reference filters If the existing filters do not meet your requirements you can create your own filters for use in the measurement and reference settings This section describes the structure of user filters and provides two examples of customized filters See User Filter File Format see page 357 Loading a User Measurement Filter To load a your own measurement filter 1 From the Modulation Params control tab Settings gt Modulation Params click on the drop down list for Measurement Filter 2 Select one of the filter names that starts with User This displays the Manage user filters window 3 Enter a name for the filter in one of the Name editable boxes This name will appear in the drop down list on the Modulation Params tab prefaced with User The maximum number of characters for the filter name is 20 356 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation User Filter File Format 4 Click th
46. 4 Pos Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph OFDM Power Settings Application Toolbar zi essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position The settings for the OFDM Power display are shown in the following table 218 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Summary Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 223 Advanced Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 224 Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 225 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Trace see page 227 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale see page 227 Specifies the vertical subcarrier and symbols scale and position settings Prefs see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed OFDM Summary Display The OFDM Summary display shows several measurements of OFDM signal quality To show the OFDM
47. AM BW 165 000 MHz Center 1 5000 GHz Length 2 595 us Samples 519 Sample rate 200 000 MHz Measurement bandwidth and length are a subset of acquisition bandwidth and length Acquisition Data The Acquisition Data tab displays the sample rate and record length of the data received from the oscilloscope or from a recalled oscilloscope waveform file Acquisition Data Sample Rate 3 125 GS s Record Length 165 177 kSamples 420 SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Print Print Menu Bar File gt Print Print displays the Windows Print dialog box for printing a screen capture of the display To save ink when printing use the Colors tab to set the color scheme See Options Settings Print Preview Menu Bar File gt Print Preview Print Preview shows how a print out will appear when it is printed SignalVu PC Printable Help 421 Reference View Menu View Menu The View menu enables you to control the display of items in the application window Command Description Full Screen see page 422 Toggles all views between full screen size and user selected size Replay Toolbar see page 387 Shows or hides the Replay toolbar Marker Toolbar see page 366 Shows or hides the Marker toolbar Enables you to define Markers and perform Peak searches Status Bar see page 423 Shows or hides the Status bar Navigator View Selecting Navigator View
48. Analysis Params see page 283 Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Analysis Time see page 283 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for P25 Analysis displays Trig Meas see page 288 Enables you to select from various trigger measurements The trigger selections vary by signal type Test Patterns see page 285 Specifies the type of test pattern being used Some analysis differs based on the selected test pattern Available test patterns vary depending on the selected standard and modulation type Limits see page 290 Load and define P25 measurement limits for Pass Fail comparison You can save defined limits as a csv file and also load previously saved csv files P25 Symbol Table Display The P25 Symbol Table display shows decoded data values for each data symbol in the analyzed signal packet To show the P25 Symbol Table display 1 Ifyou are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step 2 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 3 Inthe Select Displays dialog select P25 Analysis in the Measurements box SignalVu PC Printable Help 273 APCO P25 Analysis P25 Symbol Table Display In the Available displays box double click the P25 Symbol Table icon or select
49. Attack Time With Busy Idle Operations Low Deviation Operating Frequency Accuracy Transient Frequency Behavior Frequency Deviation Standard Idle Transmitter Power and Encoder Attack Time With Busy Idle Operations Standard Transmitter Symbol Rate Same as High Deviation test pattern C4FM Modulation Fidelity Symbol Rate Accuracy Frequency Deviation Modulation Fidelity Standard Tone Can be used for measurements such as RF Output Power Operating Frequency Accuracy Modulation Fidelity and ACPR Other User created test pattern Can be used for measurements such as RF Output Power Operating Frequency Accuracy Modulation Fidelity and ACPR Table 4 P25 test patterns Phase 2 Inbound and Outbound TIA 102 Phase 2 test pattern Phase 2 measurement Standard Transmitter Inbound and Outbound RF Output Power Operating Frequency Accuracy Modulation Emission Spectrum Unwanted Emissions Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Modulation Fidelity Inbound Standard Tone Ch0 Can be used for measurements such as RF Output Power Operating Frequency Accuracy Modulation Fidelity and ACPR Inbound Standard Tone Ch1 Can be used for measurements such as RF Output Power Operating Frequency Accuracy Modulation Fidelity and ACPR Outbound Standard Tone Operational Frequency Accuracy SignalVu PC Printable Help 261 APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analy
50. Channel Spacing 1 Select Channel Spacing number entry box 2 Enter a value for the difference in center frequency between channels using the knob or the keypad SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio Display NOTE As you change the value for the number of adjacent pairs the analyzer will update the display to indicate the channel bandwidth 3 Select Close when you have finished making changes MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio Display Use the MCPR measurement to measure adjacent channel power ratio for multiple main channels or when adjacent channel pairs have different offsets and or bandwidths The MCPR display show the Reference Power and the ratio of each adjacent channel to the Reference Power You can select whether the Reference Power is the total of all active channels or a single channel Measuring Multiple Carrier Power Ratio 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file 2 Press the front panel Displays button 3 From the Select Displays window select RF Measurements or P25 Analysis from the Measurements box 4 Double click the MCPR icon in the Available displays box Click OK to complete your selection 5 Press the front panel Freq button and use the front panel keypad or knob to adjust the frequency to that of the main channel Select Meas Freq to set the measurement frequency Use the front panel knob to adjust the frequency 6 Press the Settings button This
51. Controls the span of the trace display and position of the trace Scale Allows you to in effect change the span Offset Allows you to pan a zoomed trace without changing the Measurement Frequency Offset is only enabled when the span as specified by Freq div is less than the acquisition bandwidth Autoscale Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to contain the complete trace Log Spurious only Resets the display to show the frequency axis in a logarithmic scale 166 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Prefs Tab Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change parameters of the measurement display The parameters available on the Prefs tab vary depending on the selected display but include such items as enabling disabling Marker Readout switching the Graticule display on off and Marker Noise mode Some parameters appear with most displays while others appear with only one display Freg amp Span BW Traces Scale Prefs Show Start Stop V 4 Show graticule v Show trace legend Setting Show graticule Trace points 8 amp 1 J Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Marker Noise mode Requires dBm Ampl units and Average trace detect Description Shows or hides the graticule Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area Max trace points In general time domain traces can include up to 100K poin
52. Description 1 Spectrums line Appears only when the display is stopped Readout of the number of spectrum lines represented by each line of the DPXOgram display This value changes when the Time div or Time resolution settings are changed 2 Color scale Legend at the right side of the DPX Spectrum display This element illustrates the relationship between the colors in the DPXogram plot and the amplitude axis of the DPX Spectrum plot This scale changes with Color DPXogram palette selection and Max and Min settings on the Ampl Scale tab 3 DPXogram trace The selected line in the DPXogram graph can be shown in the DPX Spectrum graph of the Split view The most recent DPXogram line usually at the bottom of the graph is selected by default If any markers are on the selected marker determines the selected line Time Resolution of DPXogram Display Due to the large amount of data produced by the DPX hardware during acquisitions a compressed version of the plot is shown while running This plot is limited to 500 lines with each line having 267 points However a much longer record with higher frequency resolution is being collected As soon as the instrument is stopped this underlying data 1s shown replacing the temporary version There are 50 lines in each vertical division of the 2 D DPXogram plot so the time resolution of the graph is Time div SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing DPX Display divided by 50 Howe
53. Description Time units Specifies whether the displayed time units are seconds or symbols Freq units Specifies whether the displayed frequency units are frequency Hz or subcarrier channel Radix Specifies whether symbol values are displayed in binary or hex format for example in the Symbol Table or markers readouts Show graphs Specifies which graph types are displayed Both Displays both the Subcarrier and Symbol graphs Subcarriers Displays only the subcarrier graph Symbols Displays only the symbol graph Show graticule Displays or hides the graticule in the graphs Show marker readout SignalVu PC Printable Help Displays or hides the marker readouts in the graphs 229 OFDM Analysis Prefs Tab OHDM 230 SignalVu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Overview The displays in Pulsed RF Displays gt Measurements gt Pulsed RF are Pulse Statistics m Pulse Table Pulse Trace The Pulse measurements provide deep insight into pulse train behavior Pulse Measurements Overview The analyzer takes the following pulse measurements Average ON Power Peak Power Average Transmitted Power Pulse Width Rise Time Fall Time Repetition Interval Sec Repetition Rate Hz Duty Factor Duty Factor Ratio Ripple Droop Pulse Pulse Phase Difference Pulse Pulse Frequency Difference RMS Frequency Error Maximum Frequency Error RMS Phase Error Maximum Phase Error Frequency Deviation Delta Frequency Phase
54. Dev or IQ Scale see page 286 Defines the vertical and horizontal axes Test Patterns see page 285 Enables you to select from eight different test patterns Trig Meas see page 288 Enables you to select from various trigger measurements The trigger selections vary by signal type Prefs see page 289 Specifies the radix of the marker readout and whether elements of the graphs are displayed Modulation Params Tab P25 280 The Modulation Params tab specifies the type of modulation used by the input signal and other parameters that define the signal format Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Trig Meas Test Patterns Prefs Standard Phase2 x Measurement Filter None Symbol Rate 6 kHz Channel Bandwidth 12 5 KHz Reference Filter None Modulation Type HCPM Inbound X SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Modulation Params Tab P25 Settings Description Standard Specifies the standard used for the input signal Phase 1 Phase 2 Channel Bandwidth This readout shows the nominal channel bandwidth based on the standard Modulation Type Specifies the modulation type of the input signal Choices vary depending on the selected standard Modulation types for Phase 2 are HCPM Inbound and HDQPSK Outbound Phase 1 has only C4FM as the modulation type selection Measurement Filter Specifies the filter used as a measurement Reference Fil
55. Deviation and Time See Available Measurements see page 29 for definitions Pulse Table Display The Pulse Table lists selected measurements in a spreadsheet format showing the pulse numbers and all the results for each measurement on all the detected pulses Pulses are numbered from one v Freg Error 169 1 Hz Auto Avg ON 2 3542 dBm 2 3518 dem 2 3510 dem 2 3551 dem 2 3513 dem 2 3531 dem 2 3537 dBm 2 3530 dBm 2 3547 dBm 2 3505 dBm 2 3541 dBm 2 3528 dBm 2 3561 dBm 2 3530 dBm 2 3500 dBm 2 3559 dBm 2 3563 dam 2 3558 dam 2 3564 dem 2 3509 dem 2 3566 dem 2 32541 dRm Peak 2 2729 dBm 2 2345 dBm 2 2595 dBm 2 2816 dBm 2 2713 dBm 2 2518 dBm 2 2510 dBm 2 3067 dBm 2 2646 dBm 2 2762 dBm 2 2895 dBm 2 2509 dBm 2 2638 dBm 2 3083 dBm 2 3191 dBm 2 2768 dBm 2 3134 dBm 2 2804 dBm 2 2648 dBm 2 2886 dBm 2 2565 dBm 2 24f rdRm Freq 2 700000169 GHz Avg Tx 18 732 dBm 18 187 dBm 18 619 dBm 18 731 dBm 18 192 dBm 18 587 dBm 18 727 dBm 18 157 dBm 18 667 dBm 18 735 dBm 18 198 dBm 18 556 dBm 18 444 dBm 18 730 dBm 18 193 dBm 18 572 dBm 18 668 dBm 18 740 dBm 18 195 dBm 18 573 dBm 18 669 dBm 18 735 dam m Width Rise Fall Rep Int Rep Rate Ri 5 1147485 us 70 286255 ns 69 794922 ns 220 95078 us 4 525895 kHz 0 1 7 2183543 us 70 688479 ns 70 083004 ns 275 67105 us 3 627512 kHz 0 5 2991536 us 71 052249 ns 69 77
56. E TR 7 Right Click Acton E 7 Elenients of the Display oit dee states doe Ea e ene Eo ot Eo FATUA GT sananaeber tenes 9 Using SignalVu PC Restoring Default Settings uusiin ee ense tive haut el edite pae exsul Ve dir d dans ee qus x egens 13 lac M 13 Settings OPNS saser T P 18 Connectivity sets iiien BET E OEE E E OTOR E OTE E ER 20 Using the Measurement Displays Selecting Displays isi eein irana ie enaA EE NEEE EA EKEN EE EEEE ENE EE EEEN EEEN EAE 27 Taking Measurements Measurements Available Measurements 0 0 ccc cc ccc cc cece cece cece eee ceeeeeeeeeeeneeneeueeuseuseunuseuseugueseeees 29 General Signal Viewing uc since chioiedie deen sinag eE EE EEEE EEEE REE had eda dre neatubeede obaiauind E ETES EEA EEES 37 DPX DPX Display OVervieW cocccsseene cepta ete ette ost ox ERES ERR Rs n e ed ene ret a ne eet 37 DPX Display D D 37 DPX eonUPCP Tp 42 Time Overview Tine Overview DIS play sides eer ee Ene sr ei i eu exuta Vei ed dee Eme Qus eu et 47 Time Overview Settings 2c crees brUrR Rr renee e Ri D EPA YAT POI eg E EE EEE T IR beeing 48 SignalVu PC Printable Help Table of Contents Navigator VIEW UTIMS 50 Spectrum Spectrum Display essiri aana Cet pod ee ew b e ada d EUR RR DASE ATE casa DU EE EENE 53 Spectrum Set nps eo rer eue Eee ford S re baee and dorus Mee tox eei eben n ERES e
57. Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 201 Specifies the vertical subcarrier for non b standards only and symbols scale and position settings Prefs Tab see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Summary Display The WLAN Summary display shows several measurements of WLAN signal quality The summary display and it s contents will vary by standard selected Not all of the display contents are provided in this section To show the WLAN Summary display 1 Ifyou are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 3 Inthe Select Displays dialog select WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Summary icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN Summary icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays we ox o UM Click OK to show the WLAN Summary display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal 9 If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file
58. File type isf File description Amplitude vs Time includes sample rate information 406 SignalVu PC Printable Help Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures Table 12 Bench Oscilloscope file formats supported by SignalVu PC cont What SignalVu PC Open with All Settings and can do with this settings Measurements are Recalled format Automatically Sets Span Center Frequency Open as data Uses settings from v only SignalVu PC when opened Notes Prior to opening Preset SignalVu PC Set span and center frequency After opening save as tiq file Reopen the tiq file for further changes to the measurement settings and opening additional displays Table 13 MDO4000 mixed domain oscilloscope file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by MDO4000 RF channel File type tiq File description Contains and Q time domain data Opens with spectrum analyzer and time overview What SignalVu PC Open with All Settings and can do with this settings Measurements are Recalled format Automatically Sets Span Center Frequency Open as data Uses settings from v only SignalVu PC when opened Notes Native format for SignalVu PC Opens with Time Overview and Spectrum Display active Table 14 RF Hawk file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by RF Hawk File type dqt mat File Contains and Q Contains and Q tim
59. Mask Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 7 0000 MHz Scale 1 020 ms Position 200 00 kHz Position 81 502 us J Relative Freq Autoscale J Auto Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Scale Changes the vertical scale or span of the graph Position Sets the frequency or phase at the vertical center of the graph Relative Freq Sets the vertical position display readouts to show frequency values relative to the center frequency or as absolute values Autoscale Resets the Scale and Position to center the trace in the graph Horizontal Scale Sets the range of time shown in the graph Position Allows you to pan the graph left and right Autoscale Resets Scale and Position to the automatically determined settings 148 Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Prefs Tab for Settling Time Displays Prefs Tab for Settling Time Displays The Prefs tab allows you to change display parameters of the Settling Time displays Define Time Params Mask Trace Scale Prefs Max trace points 100K M V Show graticule 4 Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Settling Time decimal places 2 The following table explains the controls that can appear on the Prefs tab Setting Description Max trace points Sets the number of trace points used for marker measurements and for results export Show graticule Select to display or hide the graticule Show Marker readout in graph Sho
60. Measurement BW setting for the Constellation SignalVu PC Printable Help 381 Analyzing Data Units Tab display Settings gt Freq amp BW tab As you adjust the setting you will see how the width of the box at the base of the Measurement Frequency Indicator changes The Measurement Frequency indicator is useful for interpreting system behavior when MeasFreq is unlocked If a measurement has a wide bandwidth relative to the spectrum span and the Measurement Frequency is far from spectrum center the measurement is likely to fail because its required frequency range exceeds the frequency range of the available data In such a case the navigation control will show that the measurement bandwidth extends outside the Spectrum s span There are interactions between frequency unlocking and RF amp IF Optimization see the Amplitude control panel see page 389 When Best for multiple displays is the selected optimization the instrument is allowed to use its full bandwidth to meet the needs of all open displays This 1s the most user friendly optimization because it decreases the number of Acq BW too small errors but it can increase noise and slightly decrease measurement accuracies For all other optimization types the instrument optimizes the acquisition bandwidth for the selected display improving measurement quality somewhat but reducing concurrent measurement capability There are also interactions with trigger settings When the Spe
61. Migs bee canes 331 vi SignalVu PC Printable Help Table of Contents Trellis Diagram Settings ccc0h0 ccs haves ee rone eno ee he RR REN SERIA RORERS ER NER RENE Eee Rd RSS dep 333 Common Controls for GP Digital Modulation Displays GP Digital Modulation Shared Measurement Settings ccc cceeeeee eee eee eee eeeeneeneeees 333 Standard Settings Button 0 ccc ccc ccc eee nee nnn nnn nen ene enne 334 Symbol Maps Symbol MAPS E 351 User Filters Overview User Defined Measurement and Reference Filters lees 356 User Filter File Format 2 3 60 o 2cscactibadeiadaaded es eee EE E a bett tuer Aaa a RE ER 357 Marker Measurements Using Markers BETTE CIRCE TL 361 Controlling Markers with the Right Click Actions Menu seseses 361 Measuring Frequency and Power in the Spectrum Display ceceeec cence eee eeneeeneees 363 Common Marker Actions Marker Action Controls e eto bees etre ee RR en EEE n VEA ERK E wns e RESO TEE EAR Fe 364 PEAKS deuegaianasstinedevdeedeeds 364 lISdu qr UELUT 364 Marker to Center Frequency te nre Fer BRE E SF ge Rer R EEEE E metra 364 Define Markers Control Panel Enabling Markers and Setting Marker Properties sss 364 Markers Toolbar Using the Markers Toolbar 0 0 0 ccc cece cece cence eee ene ene m e mH e eee 366 Noise Markers in the Spectrum Display Measuring
62. Noise Using Delta Markers in the Spectrum Display 0cceeeeeeeeees 367 Mask Testing The Mask Test TOOL 22 eee eoe traces sa estate desunt eo taie toda DEL EAE XR NR edu Dr een reina 371 Mask S UNIDDIUPCNED RT 371 Define Tab Mask Test cicci UUEMEMMMTMSMMT 371 Actions VAD 376 Analyzing Data Analysis Settings Analysis Setun gs scicsedcccansssandsacseaplecieatens redisaewbaendaa dite deedsdda a Ginecadesonabeoaenanms 377 Analysis Time Tab TET 377 Spectrum Time ti UELUT 379 Inepte 379 Init EEUU 382 Analyzing Data Using Replay Replay OVerview 2 55 rete Liane SUP Te res E e UEM UU TIE pore ee e RESET EPUM ERR 383 SignalVu PC Printable Help vii Table of Contents gba EUEEUUUTEITTEMMTMM 385 EP u 386 DPX Jc EEUU 386 Replay All Selected Records uec ect petente Pee ei em oet onea iu ee crei Mews eae 386 Replay Current Record 2 2 eee epus eL HRS UL cosas EN OUEMUUCI RE E PIRE 386 Replay from Selected esee erre edP ines e edd reet REEF pe due duet eu oU rea 387 leu deve 387 sin m ese 387 Select mc 387 Select Records from History sss ee ese she ese mener een 387 Replay Toolbar 4e teet rentrer e tree Rl ev ua Ure dto V edu Rp e n ove ace iae 387 Amplitude Corrections Ampl
63. Off the box is not checked 10 Trace Selects a trace Touching here pops up a context menu listing the available traces whether they are enabled or not If user selects a trace that is not currently enabled it will be made enabled SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Spectrum Settings Changing the Spectrum Display Settings see page 55 Spectrum Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar z The settings for the Spectrum display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Freq amp Span see page 72 Sets frequency and span parameters for the Spectrum Analysis display BW see page 76 Sets Resolution Bandwidth and windowing parameters Traces see page 73 Sets Trace display parameters Traces Math see page 76 Sets the traces used to create the Math trace Scale Tab see page 56 Sets vertical and horizontal scale and position parameters Prefs Tab see page 79 Specifies whether or not certain display elements are shown SignalVu PC Printable Help 55 General Signal Viewing Scale Tab Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Freq amp Span BW Traces Scale Prefs
64. P25 The Scale tab allows you to change the scale settings that control how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency There are three versions of the Scale tab for P25 displays 286 SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Scale Tab P25 Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Trace Scale Prefs Trig Meas Vertical Scale 20 0 Hz Position 0 000 Hz Autoscale Horizontal Scale 4 Symbol 0 Symbol Autoscale Scale tab for the P25 Eye Diagram display Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Scale Prefs Trig Meas Vertical Scale 100 00 dB Position 0 00 dBm Autoscale Horizontal Full Burst Scale 94 000 ms Reset Position 40 960 us Autoscale Scale tab for the P25 Power vs Time display Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Trace Scale Prefs Trig Meas Vertical Scale 20 0 Hz Position 0 000 Hz Autoscale Horizontal Scale 94 000 ms 51 200 us 7 Auto Autoscale Scale tab for the P25 Freq Dev vs Time display Settings Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Scale Changes the vertical scale of the graph Position Adjusts the reference level away from top of the graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to conta
65. Phase 2 HDQPSK Outbound signal Standard Phase2 Bandwidth 12 5 KHz Modulation Type HDQPSK Outbound Modulation Measurements Modulation Fidelity 0 100 Operating Freq Accuracy 0 ppm Symbol Rate Accuracy ppm Power Measurements RF Output Power 7 94 dBm For more information about specific measurement results see the P25 Measurements section here see page 252 272 Signal Vu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Elements of the Display P25 Summary Settings Element Description Standard Display of the standard selected on the Setup gt Settings gt Modulation Params tab Bandwidth Display of the channel bandwidth which is set based on the standard and modulation type Modulation Type Display of the modulation type selected on Setup gt Settings gt Modulation Parameters tab Clear Click button to reset measurement Clears all values Modulation Measurements Shows the modulation measurements associated with the signal Power Measurements Shows the power measurements associated with the signal Trigger Measurements Shows the trigger measurements associated with the signal P25 Summary Settings Application Toolbar zt The settings for the P25 Summary display are shown in the following table Settings tab Modulation Params see page 280 Description Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters
66. Pos CF Spectrum Center Frequency Adjusts the analyzer center frequency For Zero Span Frequency or Phase the Position is in seconds 7 Span Scale Sweep Scale Spectrum display Span Adjusts frequency range of the measurement Scale If Horizontal scale has been manually adjusted in Settings Scale then this control adjusts the visual graph scaling without affecting the Span Zero Span Frequency Phase displays Sweep adjusts the trace duration in seconds Scale adjusts the visual graph scaling without affecting the Sweep time 8 Clear Erases the bitmap and traces in the graph and restarts multi trace functions Avg Hold 9 Function Readout of the Detection and Function selections for the selected trace SignalVu PC Printable Help 39 General Signal Viewing DPX Display 40 Item Display element Description 10 Show Controls whether the selected Trace is visible or not When trace is Off the box is not checked 11 Trace Selects a trace Touching here pops up a context menu listing the available traces whether they are enabled or not If user selects a trace that is not currently enabled it will be made enabled Additional Elements of the DPXogram Split Display d Spectrums line 1 a Timefdiv 1255 3D Pos 0 0 div z 7 Bitmap 4 Show On 0 00 dBm a dB div 10 0 dB a RBW 100 kHz Soto 100 00 dem Autoscale 9 CF 1 85000 GHz Span 10 00 MHz 0519 046 Item Display element
67. RMS phase difference between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Mag Error The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value MER RMS The MER is defined as the ratio of I Q signal power to I Q noise power the result is indicated in dB IQ Origin Offset The magnitude of the DC offset of the signal measured at the symbol times It indicates the magnitude of the carrier feed through signal Frequency Error Gain Imbalance The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the instrument The gain difference between the and Q channels in the signal generation path Constellations with gain imbalance show a pattern with a width that is different form height Quadrature Error Rho The orthogonal error between the and Q channels The error shows the phase difference between and Q channels away from the ideal 90 degrees expected from the perfect I Q modulation Not valid for BPSK modulation type The normalized correlated power of the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Like EVM Rho is a measure of modulation quality The value of Rho is less than 1 in all practical cases and is equal to 1 for a perfect signal measured in a perfect receiver SignalVu PC Printab
68. Ref Audio Freq is set manually be aware that the automated detection is still performed but it is limited to a frequency range of 1 of the Audio BW centered around the manually specified value Carrier Freq Error Carrier FM and PM only A measured value when Auto is selected If Auto is unchecked you Freq Offset can specify the Carrier Frequency Offset RBW Displays the Resolution Bandwidth for Audio measurements This value is automatically set by default to 1 500 of the measurement bandwidth To manually specify the RBW uncheck Auto The minimum RBW value is limited to the larger of 1 Hz or AudioBW 10000 The maximum is limited to AudioBW 100 RBW Filter Specifies the windowing method used for the transform Setting Frequency for Direct Signal Types Direct unmodulated signal analysis is only possible with the instrument Frequency control set to 0 Hz You will receive a warning to set Frequency to 0 Hz when Direct signal type is selected if you haven t already done so Modulated signal types may be selected with Frequency set to 0 Hz but results are not meaningful in that case For modulated signals Frequency should always be set to a value gt Audio Bandwidth to avoid self interference of the signal due to spectral folding Setting Audio Bandwidth For AM FM and PM the Audio Bandwidth control sets not only the demodulated signal bandwidth but also determines the pre demodulation bandwidth Set it to a value at l
69. Select All to display all subcarriers in the signal Pilots Only Select Pilot to display only pilot subcarriers Data Only Select Data to display only data subcarriers Single Specifies a specific subcarrier for display Index Specifies the specific subcarrier to be displayed Range Specifies a range to subcarriers to be displayed Start Specifies the start value of the range to be displayed Stop Specifies the ending value of the range to be displayed Max symbols to analyze Specifies how many symbols are analyzed You can use this setting to speed analysis by limiting the number of symbols being analyzed Analysis Time Tab OFDM The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define how the signal is analyzed in the OFDM Analysis displays SignalVu PC Printable Help 225 OFDM Analysis Analysis Time Tab OFDM Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range AnalysisTime Trace Scale Prefs Analysis Offset 0 658 Sym V Auto Time Zero Reference Trigger M Analysis Length 66 000 Sym v Auto Units Symbols Y Actual 66 000 Sym Settings Description Analysis Offset Specifies the location of the first time sample to use in measurements Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Offset value based on the requirements of the selected display Analysis Length Specifies the length of the analysis period to use in measurements Length is specified in either symbols or seconds depending on
70. Tab Traces Tab The Traces tab enables you to select traces for display You can choose to display live traces and or recalled traces The Trace tab see page 145 for Settling Time displays is described in the Settling Time controls section NOTE Not all RF Measurements support multiple traces and or save and recall of traces Parameters Traces prefs Trace Trace 1 M J Show Freeze Save Trace As Setting Description Trace Selects a trace for display Choices are Trace 1 2 and Gaussian CCDF display only Trace 1 and 2 can be recalled traces Show Shows hides the selected trace Freeze Halts updates to the selected trace Save Trace As Saves the selected trace to a file for later recall and analysis Show recalled trace Used to select a saved trace for display Detection Phase Noise only Sets the Detector used for the trace Only Peak and Avg VRMS are available for the Phase Noise display This setting is not available for saved traces Peak detection results in a trace with two Y values for each X location with shading between Function Selects the trace processing method Spurious display only Possible settings are Normal Average VRMS Avg of logs and Max Hold Smoothing Phase Noise only When enabled diminishes point to point trace variations Smoothing Peak traces treats and lines independently The smoothing value adjusts how many points are in each filte
71. The first group of settings is Global Parameters These settings include the Measurement Frequency Acquisition Data Reference Level and others The second group of settings 1s Parameters These settings are specific parameters which vary depending on the measurement The next group is Trace Parameters which may not be present depending on the measurement Within this group there are parameters specific to a trace There will be a Trace Parameters group for each trace shown on the display The next group is Results These are scalar results for the measurement Next is Traces The Traces group consists of one or more Trace groups There is one Trace group for each trace Each Trace group contains background information about the trace units number of points x scaling and others depending on the measurement at the top of the group followed by the trace points Acquisition Data with Setup File tiq Format The file consists of two parts the header that is in XML and the data that is in binary format Header The header consists entirely of the DataFile element This element is broken down into sub elements 1 DataSetsCollection 2 Setup DataSetsCollection The DataSetsCollection contains a DataDescription element a DataSet element and a ProductSpecific element Binary data Binary data is a sequence of Int32 values which are IQ pairs LQ LQ in binary Little Endian format To convert these values to v
72. Transmission is inhibited until a status symbol indicates an idle channel This measurement result can be seen in the P25 Summary display A graphical representation of these results can be seen in the P25 Power vs Time display Transmitter Throughput Delay Phase 1 This measures the time it requires for audio changes in the microphone to be encoded and transmitted over the air A calibrated receiver with a known receiver throughput delay is used to monitor the transmitted signal The aggregate delay of the transmitter under test and calibrated receiver is measured and the desired transmitter throughput delay is then the aggregate delay less the delay of the calibrated receiver A calibrated Receiver throughput delay from the UI is needed This measurement result can be seen in the P25 Summary display Transient Frequency Behavior Phase 1 This is a measure of difference of the actual transmitter frequency and assigned transmitter frequency as a function of time when the RF output power is switched on or off This measurement appears in the P25 Freq Dev vs Time display HCPM Tx Logical Channel Time Alignment Phase 2 HCPM This measures the ratio of total transmitter power under prescribed conditions and modulation to the peak power that falls in a prescribed bandwidth centred on the nominal frequency of the adjacent channel during the transmitter power ramping interval This applies only to inbound signals This measurement result appears in the P
73. Video tutorials How to use an oscilloscope 119 684 views 2 years ago Tony and lan from Tektronix walk through what is an oscilloscope how to use an oscilloscope and other oscilloscope basics You ll see how you might use an oscilloscope to look at an RC circuit something many engineers encounter early in their studies From there learn about the most important oscilloscope controls and how to use them What is an Oscilloscope At its heart an oscilloscope is a device that sho Read more Yy About the Tektronix Signal Analyzer Video tutorials 6 SignalVu PC Printable Help Orientation Selecting Files for Analysis Selecting Files for Analysis The SignalVu PC software can analyze waveform files saved by Tektronix oscilloscopes and real time signal analyzers SignalVu PC can open several file types including wfm tiq iqt and mat files For more detailed information on opening the supported file types see Recalling Waveforms with SignalVuPC see page 404 Right Click Action Menu You can change marker settings and how waveforms are displayed by using the right click Actions menu Ik Select ne Span Zoom CF Pan A Zoom ay Pan Reset scale Marker to peak Add marker All markers off To use the right click Actions menu right click in the graph area SignalVu PC Printable Help 7 Orientation Icon Menu h Select a Span Zoom Right Click Action Menu Description Selects markers and
74. View To remove the Navigator View deselect Navigator View in the View menu View Run Replay Full Screen Replay toolbar Marker Toolbar Status Bar Navigator View SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Trace Tab Trace Tab The Trace Tab allows you to set the display characteristics of displayed traces Scale Trace Prefs 4 Show Freeze Save Trace As Detection Peak 4 Count Function Avg VRMS 10 Setting Description Show Shows hides the selected trace Detection Sets the Detection method used for the trace Not available for saved traces Available detection methods are Peak Peak Peak Avg VRMS and Sample Not all detection methods are available in all displays Function Selects the trace processing method Available settings are Normal Average Max Hold and Min Hold Number of Traces Sets the number of traces averaged to generate the displayed trace Present only when Function is set to Average Freeze Halts updates to the selected trace Save Trace As Saves the selected trace to a file for later recall and analysis Show Recalled trace Displays a saved trace instead of a live trace Detection Trace Detection occurs when the trace 1s being decimated by the measurement For example if the maximum number of trace points is 100 000 and the selected analysis region is 200 000 samples the measurement must decimate the 200 000 resulting trace poi
75. Vs Time Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters page 280 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 283 Analysis Time see page 283 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for P25 Analysis displays Trig Meas see page 288 Enables you to select from various trigger measurements The trigger selections vary by signal type Test Patterns see page 285 Specifies the type of test pattern being used Some analysis differs based on the selected test pattern Available test patterns vary depending on the selected standard and modulation type Prefs see page 289 Specifies the radix of the marker readout P25 Frequency Dev Vs Time Display The P25 Frequency Devisation vs Time Display shows how the signal frequency varies with time To display the P25 Frequency Dev vs Time Display 1 2 3 4 If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Select the Displays button or Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select P25 Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the P25 Frequency Dev vs Time icon or select the icon
76. Vu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis P25 Symbol Table Settings 16 32 48 80 m 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 Ce E UJ UJ f QJ C hN QJ NJ UJ UJ r WOON QJ WH Ww E NJON ONJ NJ NJ NJ QJ e f NJ OR NON ON m NONI GJ NJ UJ UJ UJ CO QJ hJ f QJ QO rn hN QJ hNJ QJ QC QJ hNJ WOW e lycOOF KNF Kqcoo u cocoe r tu uotuuuWNHusc Wwe Ne 0NHIPHFMFMGONUU U KN UUOUuUUuUuUOHO hNJ OO f UU OC QU CO U NJ O U hNJ hNJ O CO fe UU C OWN SCOrRrFPWNNF ON WHNN WH WWW OOF OWrROOrFRWWNHNrFOTDOOWWRrR OR WN HF lesee em p j p e Bel e e ro ial ONOWOKFRWNWHOKFP KF OWrHRHNON ONFNFWNYNNWWNRrRRPWON OTTO CN SOrRFrROOWNNOGOrHNFNOOWN OW W UJ Were WeENnNWOWWONN NN FY We eH OS WWNOrRrFRROOWNOONONKFWrHRHOON NWRrRWONNOWWWOrRTONWNWON Ce NJ UJ QJ QJ C C rf CO hN O QU hJ NJ GJ NJ e WN GJ Marker MR Symbol 152 Time 39 578 ms Vale 2 Elements of the Display Element Description Marker Displays the selected marker label Time Displays the time in ms or in Symbols based on the Units chosen in the Analysis Time tab of the Settings Control panel Symbol The value shown here reflects the symbol you have selected highlighted in the display Value Displays the value of the selected symbol P25 Symbol Table Settings Application Toolbar z The settings for the P25 Symbol Table display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 215 APCO P25 Analysis P25 Frequency Dev
77. a fully averaged result no partially averaged results are output before a final result is available so each output is fully valid However with large Averaging values acquisition record sizes and measurement times may become large so care should be taken to select the minimum amount of averaging needed Audio Filters Tab The Audio Filters tab is used to specify filters to be applied to the acquired audio signal before measurements are taken You can select from pre defined filters or use a filter you define in a text file You can also specify the de emphasis time constant applied to the audio signal and the telecom weighting filters used to measure noise SignalVu PC Printable Help 299 Audio Analysis Params1 Params2 Audio Filters Scale Prefs Pre defined Filters V LPF 300 Hz PJ HPF 50H File De emphasis 25 usec 7 Cr Audio Filters Tab Pre defined Filters You can specify low pass filter LPF and high pass filter HPF settings a de emphasis time constant and or a telecom weighting filter to match the response of your receiver Alternatively you can create a text file to specify the frequency response points To use pre defined filters 1 Select the Pre defined Filters option button 2 Select the LPF HPF De emphasis and Standard check boxes as appropriate 3 Select the desired filter parameter from the drop down list for each of the enabled filters or select User from the li
78. adds the Time Overview display to the existing measurement displays to provide a better perspective of the signal When the Navigator View is enabled the Time Overview display is always located above any other measurement displays and uses the maximum horizontal resolution of the display area regardless of the Window Tile setting Numeric Keypad When selected any time you place the cursor within a control or setting that takes an numeric value you are presented with a dialog box to easily enter a value For instance placing the cursor in the Frequency setting displays the following dialog Use the arrow buttons to change the value Press the calculator icon to display a keypad that allows you to enter values and suffixes Full Screen Menu Bar View gt Full Screen When unchecked clicking Full Screen resizes the application window to fill the screen Full Screen mode maximizes the application window and turns off the application title bar When checked clicking Full Screen restores the application window to its previous size The application title bar is restored 422 SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Status Bar Status Bar The Status Bar displays information on specific instrument settings It contains only status information it does not display any error information The Status bar has no controls It can be hidden Elements of the Status Bar Run Status Indicators Indicator Description
79. and horizontal to provide the best display 4 Maximum and Minimum Displays the maximum and minimum values as well as when those values frequency readouts occur 5 Horizontal Scale Sets the time spanned by the graph 6 Clear button Restarts Average trace 7 Trace function Displays the current trace function setting Settings gt Trace gt Function Changing Frequency vs Time Display Settings see page 66 Frequency Vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar ie The Setup settings for Frequency vs Time are shown in the following table 66 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Phase Vs Time Display Settings tab Description Freq amp BW see page 71 Sets the frequency and bandwidth parameters Trace see page 73 Sets the trace display parameters Scale see page 78 Sets the Vertical and Horizontal scale and offset parameters Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible Phase Vs Time Display The Phase vs Time display plots the signal phase against time The phase appears on the vertical axis while time is plotted along the horizontal axis Note that the trace s in the Phase vs Time display can be set to a maximum of 100 000 points however the actual number of trace points can extend up to 1 000 000 points 1f Max trace points is set to Never Decimate If the Analysis Length includes more than the selected Max trace p
80. any other test patterns or for HDQPSK signals comparisons for limits set in the Limits tab of the control panel will result in N A being shown as the measurement will not be valid This measurement is done using a FM demodulator without any filter As a result it will not be exactly the same as the result given in the P25 Frequency Deviation vs Time display That display shows the frequency deviation after complete demodulation and might use relevant shaping filters Measurement results are only available when High Deviation Low Deviation or Symbol Rate test pattern is selected The scalar result in the P25 Summary display will be shown as f1 Positive Peak and f2 Negative Peak when analyzing the High Deviation test pattern or the Symbol Rate test pattern for CAFM signals The scalar result in the P25 Summary display will be shown as f3 Positive Peak and f4 Negative Peak when analyzing the Low Deviation test pattern The scalar results in the P25 Summary display do not have a corresponding graphical view A closely representative display would be the FM display Setup gt Displays gt Analog Modulation The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail Modulation Fidelity Phase 1 and Phase 2 This measures the degree of closeness to which the modulation follows the ideal theoretical modulation determined by the rms difference between the actual de
81. are calculated over the entire signal packet analyzed covering the number of Symbols indicated in the Summary display Application Toolbar st OFDM Summary Settings The settings for the OFDM Summary display are shown in the following table Signal Vu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Symbol Table Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 223 Advanced Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 224 Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 225 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Prefs see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed OFDM Symbol Table Display The OFDM Symbol Table display shows decoded data bits for each subcarrier in each symbol in the analyzed signal packet Results are presented with subcarrier frequency indices in the horizontal dimension and symbol time intervals in the vertical dimension To show the OFDM Symbol Table display 1 2 3 wow 9 n If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next ste
82. are made 242 SignalVu PC Printable Help Define Tab Pulsed RF Ripple Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs Measurement s Ripple X Time method Relative 100 Fg IN 0 000 s L T 100 T Length L 50 0 Setting Description Length Length specifies the percentage of the top of the pulse that is used for measurements The instrument automatically determines the pulse top The measurement length is centered within the pulse ON time Only the Relative Time method is available for Ripple Overshoot Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs Measurement s Overshoot Time method Relative M Ref R 100 Start 5 0 000 s x96 RSL Length L 25 0 SignalVu PC Printable Help 243 Pulsed RF Define Tab Setting Description Time method Specifies how measurement parameters are determined The choices are Absolute and Relative Absolute time method Ref R Ref specifies the level along the pulse rising edge that is defined as the point from which Start time is counted Choices 50 60 70 80 90 100 Default 10096 Start S Start specifies the time the instrument waits after the rising edge reference before starting to measure the pulse The Start time is measured from the point along the pulse rising edge specified by the Ref setting Start Range 100 ms Resolution 3 digits inc dec smal
83. as they do in normal mode but the readouts for the markers are in dBm Hz and dBc Hz dBm Hz is the power in milliwatts referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth To make this measurement the analyzer assumes that the measured signal is random noise It then converts the measured power made at any RBW to the power that would be measured had a 1 Hz filter been applied for the measurement dBc Hz represents dBm Hz referenced to a carrier Here it is assumed that the carrier is a CW signal and its signal level does not change when the RBW is changed so the Reference Marker measurement on the carrier is unchanged from any other marker measurement However the delta marker values are converted to dBm Hz and then a difference value in dBc Hz is calculated between each delta measurement and the reference Measuring Noise To measure noise on a Spectrum trace SignalVu PC Printable Help 367 Marker Measurements Measuring Noise Using Delta Markers in the Spectrum Display 10 Select Markers gt Define to display the Markers control panel Click Add The first marker defined is always designated the Marker Reference Subsequently defined markers are Delta Markers for which readouts can be selected for Delta Power or Absolute You can also select and adjust markers by clicking on an existing marker on a trace Click Add again so that there are at least two markers defined Check that Readouts is set to Delta and check the dBe Hz box If you have
84. box is checked the rotation is removed allowing easier decoding of the underlying data content SignalVu PC Printable Help 197 WLAN Measurements Data Range Tab WLAN Data Range Tab WLAN The Data Range tab enables you to control how much signal is analyzed as well as specify the range of results that are displayed for the WLAN Constellation EVM Flatness Magnitude Error Phase Error and Symbol Table graphs The tab contents vary by standard Data Range tab for non b standards Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Traces Scale Prefs Displayed Results Symbols All v Subcariers All Mi Max data symbols to analyze 50 Symbo Settings Description Symbols Specifies which symbols are displayed in the graphs All Select All to display all symbols Range Select Range to specify a subset of symbols for display Start Specifies the first symbol to include in the display Stop Specifies the last symbol to include in the display Single Select Single to display a single symbol Index Use Index to specify the symbol you want to display Subcarriers Specifies which subcarriers are displayed All Select All to display all subcarriers in the signal Pilots Select Pilot to display only pilot subcarriers Data Select Data to display only data subcarriers Single Specifies a specific subcarrier for display Index Specifies the specific subcarrie
85. by the General Purpose Digital Modulation measurements the actual value varies with modulation type To display Magnitude Error vs Time 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Select the Displays button or Setup gt Displays This displays the Select Displays dialog box 2 3 Select GP Digital Modulation in the Measurements box 4 Double click the Mag Error vs Time icon or select the icon and click Add The icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays de Click OK 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 319 GP Digital Modulation Elements of the Display Magnitude Error vs Time Settings Vs Freq Error 401 5 Hz Auto 2 0 950 a Position autoscal Autoscale Position 1 00 Sym iy Peak 0 380 160 00 Sym o 5 Scale 120 00 Sym 0519 038 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph adjustment Use the knob to adjust the value of the vertical scale 2 Position Adjusts the level shown at the bottom of the display 3 Autoscale button Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Horizontal Position Adjusts the horizontal position of the signal Units can be either Symbols or Seconds Settings gt Analysis Time tab gt Units 5 Peak and RMS value readout Displays the Peak val
86. can vary If FastFrame is not enabled a data record consists of a single acquisition If FastFrame is enabled each acquisition can contain multiple frames and a data record consists of a single frame Select data records Acquisition Info Replay Speed Select acquisitions Select All 1 7 25 2011 17 39 29 72 7 25 2011 Start 1 17 39 29 72 7 25 2011 Stop 304 17 39 33 79 304 7 25 2011 17 39 33 79 Without FastFrame enabled SignalVu PC Printable Help 383 Analyzing Data Select data records Acquisition Info Replay Speed Select acquisitions Select All Select frames 1 3 10 2010 4 47 40 22 1 3 10 2010 4 47 40 22 3 10 2010 3 10 2010 See 4 47 40 22 Statii 4 47 40 22 3 10 2010 3 10 2010 Stop 1 4 47 40 22 top 10 4 47 51 74 1 3 10 2010 4 47 40 22 10 3 10 2010 4 47 51 74 Replay Overview With FastFrame enabled Date and Time Stamps The line that appears above each Start box one for acquisitions and one for frames when FastFrame is enabled is a date stamp that displays the date and time the first record in the current acquisition was acquired The line that appears below each Stop box is a date stamp that displays the date and time the last record in the current acquisition was acquired The line that appears to the right of each Start box displays the date and time the selected acquisition or frame was acquired The line that appears to the right of each Stop box displays the date and time
87. chosen in the analysis window then the operating frequency accuracy of only the chosen on slot is reported For non bursty data the entire duration of the analysis window is considered to obtain the operating frequency accuracy The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail This measurement result is not shown in the P25 Summary display when Trigger Measurements are selected Unwanted Emissions ACPR Phase 1 and Phase 2 This measurement is the ratio of the total power of a transmitter under prescribed conditions and modulation to that of the output power that falls within a prescribed bandwidth centered on the nominal frequency of adjacent channels This measurement is shown in the MCPR display For HCPM signals Adjacent Channel Power Ratio analysis is only done on the first on slot region When the Modulation Type is set to HCPM from any P25 display or from Standards Presets there will be a search for bursts before ACPR analysis is done If a burst is found then analysis is done only on first burst If a burst is not found it will show the results of the entire analysis length The Main Preset will remove the HCPM modulation Type setting allowing MCPR to work in its regular mode The MCPR display will only have one Main channel for P25 signals in addition to relevant adjacent channels The default adjacent channels table for Unwanted Emissions ACPR a
88. described in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 13 Using SignalVu PC Presets Preset Description Main Current This Preset sets the instrument to display a Spectrum display with settings appropriate for typical spectrum analysis tasks Original see page 13 This Preset is the original factory preset used with your original SignalVu PC software This version of the factory preset is included to allow you to maintain compatibility with existing remote control software DPX Open the DPX display The Open the DPX display opens the DPX display without closing existing displays Swept The DPX Swept Preset displays the DPX Spectrum display with the span set to maximum and the center frequency set to 1 2 the span Real Time The DPX Real Time Preset displays the DPX Spectrum display with the center frequency setto 1 5 GHz and the span set to the maximum available real time bandwidth Standards WLAN see page 169 This preset sets the instrument to display the WLAN Summary WLAN Constellation and SEM displays After you select the standards and bandwidth the software configures these displays to apply the parameters appropriate for typical WLAN analysis tasks P25 see page 249 This preset sets the instrument to display the P25 MCPR Summary P25 Constellation and Time Overview displays After you select the standard and modulation type the software configures these displays to apply
89. detection Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Carrier Amplitude Detection Measurement BW 10 00 MHz Average Median Setting Description Average Selects the Average method for computing the average baseline for measurements Median Selects the Median method for computing the average baseline for measurements Measurement BW Specifies the bandwidth about the center frequency at which measurements are made AM Modulation An amplitude modulated carrier can be described mathematically by X t A a t cos wot A in the above equation represents the carrier amplitude a t represents the time varying modulation and o represents the carrier frequency The signal modulation envelope is given by Eu t A a t There are several ways to express the AM modulation depth expressed as a percentage Peak method ia AM Modulation Depth an n any Trough Method iaia AM Modulation Depth idi a 5 Max Min Method SignalVu PC Printable Help 83 Analog Modulation Trace Tab Maz A 4 a t Min A 4 a t 2A In each case the value of the carrier amplitude A needs to be estimated from the input signal AM Modulation Depth The instrument represents signals in a sampled form The sampled envelope can be expressed as a function of sample index K and sampling period T as Ey KT A a KT The instrument allows the choice of two methods for estimating the carrier amplitude Ave
90. dialog box From the Measurements box select GP Digital Modulation Double click the EVM vs Time icon in the Available Displays box This adds the EVM vs Time icon to the Selected displays box Click the OK button This displays the EVM vs Time view Be QA Cb mm e 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the EVM vs Time Display vo Freq Error 133 3 Hz Auto 1 64 Position 0 083 autoscae position 15 00 Sym Scale 128 00 Sym RMS 0 387 Peak 1 292 135 00 Sym 0519 035 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph adjustment Use the knob to adjust the vertical scale 2 Position Adjusts the vertical position 3 Autoscale Adjusts the Horizontal and Vertical scale to show the entire trace 4 Peak and RMS value readout Shows the maximum result the time it occurred and the RMS of the result over the entire analysis length 5 Scale Sets the length of time shown in the graph Changing the EVM vs Time Display Settings see page 313 EVM vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar zt SignalVu PC Printable Help 313 GP Digital Modulation Eye Diagram Display The settings for the EVM vs Time display are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the EVM vs Time display by pressing the Standard Settings button
91. displays 5 Markers Opens or closes the Marker toolbar at the bottom of the window 6 Settings Opens the Settings control panel for the selected display Each display has its own control panel 7 Acquisition Opens the Acquisition control panel which displays the Sample Rate and Record length of the recalled waveform file 8 Analysis Opens the Analysis control panel so that you can define the analysis settings such as frequency analysis time and units 9 Amplitude Opens the Amplitude control panel so that you can specify external gain loss corrections 10 Center Frequency Displays the Center Frequency To change the value click the text and enter the frequency with a keyboard For fine adjustments you can use the mouse wheel 11 Reference Level Displays the reference level To change the value click the text and enter a number using a keyboard or use a mouse scroll wheel 12 Connection Indicates the connection status of an MDO4000B with Live Link 13 Presets Recalls the Main see page 13 preset 14 Replay Runs a new measurement cycle on the existing acquisition data record using any new settings 15 Trigger Opens the Trigger control panel so that you can define the RSA306 trigger settings 16 Audio Opens the Audio control panel so that you can define the audio demodulation settings for the RSA306 SignalVu PC Printable Help 11 Orientation Elements of the Display 12 SignalVu PC Printable Help Using SignalVu PC Restor
92. frequency value on each line gt frequency value on previous line There is no upper limit on the frequency value Column 2 amplitude values in dB units where gain is a positive value and attenuation is a negative value Values are restricted to the range 200 to 20 dB Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change acquisition control settings In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Paramsi Params2 Audio Filters Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 100 dB Left 0 0000 Hz Position 101 dBHz pessh orale Right 200 0 kHz Autoscale Log Autoscale l 302 SignalVu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Scale Tab Setting Description Vertical Scale Changes the range shown between the top and bottom of the graph Position Adjusts the level shown at the top of the graph for linear units or the top of the graph for log units for example dBm Autoscale Resets the Position so that the highest trace points are in the graph For linear units Volts Watts the Autoscale also adjusts Scale Horizontal Left Changes the frequency shown at the left side of the graph Right Changes the frequency shown at the right side of the graph Autoscale Resets the Left and Right settings to show the entire trace Log Sets the graph horizontal axis
93. latest information on available option upgrades see the Tektronix Web site Documentation In addition to the application Help the following documents are available For the most up to date documentation visit the Tektronix Web site www tektronix com downloads B SignalVu PC Read This First Tektronix part number 077 1024 XX This PDF document located on the software CD or within the downloaded software archive explains how to install the SignalVu PC software and activate the software The Instructions also provide a brief overview of the SignalVu PC software It identifies elements of the SignalVu PC screen and elements of different displays The Read This First is also available for download at www tektronix com downloads m SignalVu PC Programmer Manual 077 0721 XX This PDF document provides supplementary information about the remote commands for the SignalVu PC software Because SignalVu PC is based on the RSA6100B RSAS100B Series signal analyzers it uses the same remote commands with some limitations primarily based on hardware The SignalVu PC Programmer Manual details which RSA6100B RSA5100B SPECMONB Series commands are not supported by SignalVu PC and explains how to use the programming interface for SignalVu PC For detailed descriptions of the SignalVu PC Printable Help 3 About the Tektronix Signal Analyzer Video tutorials remote commands see the RSA6100 RSA5100 or SPECMON Series Real Time Signal Analyzers Progra
94. message can occur when the Spectrum Length is greater than required for the VBW filter If you look at the Time Overview display the Magenta line for Results Length indicates the part of the Spectrum Length that was actually used The measurement results are correct but don t include some of the data in the selected Spectrum Length To clear this message you can set the Spectrum Length to Auto Setup error lt description of error gt When this message appears it includes text that explains the problem For example the ACPR display might show Setup error channels can t overlap Setup errors are the result of conflicts in instrument settings These types of errors occur when a user makes manual changes to settings In the example above the channel settings in the Channel Power and ACPR display have been set so that the channels overlap in frequency Adjust the instrument settings or change a setting back to Auto to eliminate the error Setup error Integration BW exceeds Measurement BW When this message appears it includes text that explains the problem Setup errors are the result of conflicts in instrument settings These types of errors occur when a user makes manual changes to settings m Adjust the instrument settings or change a setting back to Auto to eliminate the error Setup error Measurement time for Freq amp Phase results The Measurement time for Freq amp Phase results see page 240 specifies how far across
95. might appear during instrument operation Messages that apply specifically to one or more measurements appear in the displays Messages that pertain globally such as those about hardware status are shown in the Status Bar at the bottom of the analyzer application window Acq BW too small for current setup The display needs a wider acquisition bandwidth than what the current data record contains This can be due to any of the following reasons The sampling parameters are being manually controlled In the Acquire control panel gt Sampling Parameters tab set the Adjust control to All Auto to allow the software to pick the sample rate and record length that it needs A display other than the one you intended has been selected The selected display has requested a smaller acquisition bandwidth to achieve a better accuracy or dynamic range for its particular measurement Select the display that contains the message Click Run if the instrument is not already acquiring data B Acquisitions are not running and the measurement now requests a wider bandwidth than the last acquisition Click Run to perform a new acquisition with a wider bandwidth The data is from a recalled TIQ file There is no way to increase the acquisition bandwidth for saved IQ data You must adjust the measurement settings so that less bandwidth is required Analysis failure lt description of error gt The instrument is unable to complete a measurement due
96. more than one trace defined use the drop down list for each marker to set it to the trace on which you want to measure noise Notice that Detection 1s set to Average for the trace you are using for this measurement Check that the Amplitude units are set to dBm that 1s the default If they are not click the hn Analysis icon select the Units tab and select dBm Click the Close button to remove the control panel Move the markers to the desired locations on the trace Read the frequency and power level for the selected marker in the upper corners of the display To display the delta measurement in dBc Hz select the delta marker M1 M2 M3 or M4 by clicking on it or by selecting it in the drop down marker list in the Markers toolbar The following image shows the Spectrum display with a Delta Marker 100 0 The following image shows the Spectrum display with Power Markers 368 SignalVu PC Printable Help Marker Measurements Measuring Noise Using Delta Markers in the Spectrum Display 0 0 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 0 MI 100 0 SignalVu PC Printable Help 369 Marker Measurements Measuring Noise Using Delta Markers in the Spectrum Display 370 SignalVu PC Printable Help Mask Testing The Mask Test Tool The Mask Test Tool You can specify pass fail and mask parameter conditions for the Spectrum Spurious Noise Figure Gain Frequency Settling Time and Phase Settling Time displays When these condi
97. mouse wheel The Peak button in the Markers toolbar and the arrow buttons to the right of it control marker peak searching on the trace 8 Read the frequency and power level of the marker position on the display 9 Read the signal density frequency and power level of the marker position on the display 10 If Power markers are selected read the point power density and the integrated power density SignalVu PC Printable Help 363 Marker Measurements Marker Action Controls Marker Action Controls Controls for enabling and moving markers and for initiating marker peak searches are found in several locations There are buttons for a few of the most common marker activities on the front panel of the instrument used along with the knob for adjusting marker positions The Markers menu contains selections for peak searches and the Marker toolbar also has buttons for peak searches All graphs that support the markers offer a pop up menu for marker actions Peak Selecting Peak from the Markers menu moves the selected marker to the highest level peak within the acquisition record Next Peak Selecting Next Peak displays a submenu that enables you to move the selected marker to the next peak Setting Description Next Left Moves the selected marker to the next peak to the left of the current marker position Next Right Moves the selected marker to the next peak to the right of the current marker position Next Lower absolute Move
98. non b standards only shown in the graph WLAN Channel Response Settings The WLAN Channel Response Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the Channel Response Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters page 195 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 196 Data Range Tab see Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display page 198 Analysis Time Tab see Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for page 199 analysis Also allows you to specify the time units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays SignalVu PC Printable Help 173 WLAN Measurements WLAN Constellation Display Settings tab Description Traces Tab see page 200 Enables you to select from magnitude or phase trace save a trace and recall an trace Scale Tab see page 201 Specifies the Zoom scale and vertical and horizontal positions of the display Prefs Tab see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Constellation Display 174 The WLAN Constellation Display shows the WLAN signal modulation amplitude and phase in I horizontal versus Q vertical form For multicarrier WLAN OFDM signals th
99. not certain display elements are shown Specifies the maximum number of points shown in the display graph SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Parameters Tab Parameters Tab The Parameters tab enables you to specify parameters for carrier detection Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Burst detect threshold 100 dBc Frequency offset 50 54 Hz iv Auto Measurement BW 100 0 kHz Load from marker Setting Description Burst detect threshold This parameter specifies the power level used to determine whether a burst is present A valid burst is required to take measurements The burst detected first is used for the analysis The units for burst detect threshold are dBc relative to the maximum acquisition sample data points level Measurement BW Specifies the bandwidth about the center frequency at which measurements are made Frequency offset Displays the carrier signal s offset from the instrument s measurement frequency Auto is used to select the method for determining the carrier frequency When Auto is selected the instrument determines the carrier frequency by analyzing the signal When Auto is deselected you can set the carrier frequency offset using Frequency Offset Load from Marker Pressing this button sets the frequency offset to the frequency offset of the selected marker Pressing this button automatically deselects Auto Frequency Offset In Auto Auto is selected the instrument sca
100. number of filter coefficients Range 3 to 100 you can set a higher number but 100 is the practical limit Length Specifies the number of symbols analyzed or filter length Selecting the Mode When enabled the Equalizer is in either Train mode or Hold mode When the equalizer is in Train mode it will update internal filter parameters whenever you adjust the Convergence Taps Symbol Taps or Length values When it is in Hold mode the Equalizer uses the parameter values both internal and the values accessible on the Equalizer tab in effect when it was placed into Hold mode NOTE The Equalizer does not need to be retrained if the modulation type is changed You can train the Equalizer by using a simpler modulation type such as QPSK place the Equalizer into Hold mode and can then measure more complex modulation types such as QAM Training the Equalizer To obtain the desired results using the Equalizer you must first train the Equalizer This is an iterative process where you adjust some filter parameters and the analyzer adjusts internal parameters to achieve the lowest error possible on the acquired signal To configure the Equalizer Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays window select GP Digital Modulation from Measurements Add Signal Quality to the Selected Displays and select OK With the Signal Quality display selected select Setup gt Settings 1 2 3 4 5 Se
101. numeric readouts To show the AM display 1 Select the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 From the Measurements box select Analog Modulation 3 Double click the AM icon in the Available Displays box This adds the AM icon to the Selected displays box 4 Click the OK button This shows the AM display Elements of the Display 4 Peak Normal Position 0519 022 SignalVu PC Printable Help 81 Analog Modulation AM Settings Item Element Description 1 Check mark indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the AM display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Top of Graph Sets the AM indicated at the top of the graph by increasing or decreasing the vertical scale Changing the top value affects the bottom of graph value because the graph scales about vertical center Also note that the top of graph setting interacts with the internal vertical scale setting which is not user settable 3 Position Specifies the AM shown at the center of the graph display 4 Bottom Readout Displays the value of the modulation factor shown at the bottom of graph 5 Measurement readouts Displays num
102. page 64 Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar zi The settings for the Amplitude vs Time display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Freq amp BW see page 65 Sets the Bandwidth Method used for setting the measurement bandwidth Traces see page 73 Allows you to select the type of trace to display and their functions Traces Math see page 76 Sets the traces used to create the Math trace Scale see page 78 Sets the vertical and horizontal scale parameters Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Freq amp BW Tab Freq amp BW Tab The Freq amp BW Bandwidth tab allows you to specify the bandwidth parameters used for setting measurement bandwidth This determines what Acq BW the measurement will request Freq amp BW Traces Scale Prefs Measurement BW no fiter 500 kHz V Link to Span Measurement Freq 500 000 MHz Set to max BW Settings Description Frequency Vs Time Display The Frequency vs Time Display shows how the signal frequency varies with time Note that the trace s in the Frequency vs Time display can be set to a maximum of 100 000 points however the actual number of trace points can extend up to 1 000 000 points if Max trace points is set to Never Decimate If the Analysis Length includes more than the selected Max
103. peak e Table x 208 0519 002 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Constellation Settings Item Display element Description 1 Plot Constellation graph 2 Marker Readout If markers are enabled the marker readout shows the selected Marker Symbol Subcarrier Type Value Magnitude and Phase for the symbol at the marker location Located to the left of the constellation plot or below it depending on the size of the window OFDM Constellation Settings Application Toolbar zx The OFDM Constellation Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the Constellation Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters page 223 Advanced Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 224 Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for page 225 analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Trace see page 227 Enables you to freeze the display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 227 Specifies the Zoom scale and vertical and horizontal positions of the display Prefs Tab s
104. peak to peak ripple on the pulse top It does not include any preshoot overshoot or undershoot By default the first 25 and the last 25 of the pulse top is excluded from this measurement to eliminate distortions caused by these portions of the pulse If the Amplitude units selected in the Amplitude panel affects all amplitude measurements for the analyzer are linear the Ripple results will be in 9o Volts For log units the Ripple results will be in Watts The default for the general Units control is dBm so the Ripple results default is Watts See also Ripple see page 452 Ripple dB The Ripple measurement expressed in dB Droop Droop is the power difference between the beginning and the end of the pulse On time A straight line best fit is used to represent the top of the pulse The result is a percentage referenced to the Average ON Power Droop dB The Droop measurement expressed in dB Overshoot The amount by which the signal exceeds the 100 level on the pulse rising edge Units are Watts or Volts Overshoot dB The Overshoot measurement expressed in dB Pulse Pulse Phase Difference The phase difference between the selected pulse and the first pulse in the analysis window The instantaneous phase is measured at a user adjustable time following the rising edge of each pulse Pulse Pulse Freq Difference The difference between the frequency of the current pulse and frequency of the previous pulse The instantaneous fr
105. pulses 100 SignalVu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Params Tab Setting Description Measurement Filter Specify whether a filter is used to limit the bandwidth of the input signal Bandwidth Sets the bandwidth of the measurement filter Power threshold to detect Specifies the level used for locating pulses in the data pulses Minimum OFF time between Specifies the time the signal must fall below the power threshold for two pulses to be pulses considered separate pulses Max number of pulses Specifies the number of pulses to measure within the analysis time Measurement Filter Three choices are available for the measurement filter No Filter Max BW The widest acquisition bandwidth available is used The Bandwidth setting is disabled but shows the value in use No Filter This is the default The Bandwidth control is enabled for you to specify an acquisition bandwidth m Gaussian The Bandwidth control is enabled for you to specify a value The instrument uses an acquisition bandwidth two times wider than the entered value Power Threshold to Detect Pulses Specifies the minimum power level the trace must exceed to be detected as a pulse The range for this setting is 3 to 70 dBc The setting resolution is 1 dB The default value is 10 dB Max Number of Pulses If the Analysis Time contains fewer pulses than specified the analyzer will measure all the pulse within the analysis time If there are more p
106. reference signal magnitude Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value MER RMS The MER is defined as the ratio of I Q signal power to I Q noise power the result is indicated in dB IQ Origin Offset The magnitude of the DC offset of the signal measured at the symbol times It indicates the magnitude of the carrier feed through signal Frequency Error Gain Imbalance The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the instrument The gain difference between the and Q channels in the signal generation path Constellations with gain imbalance show a pattern with a width that is different form height Quadrature Error Rho The orthogonal error between the and Q channels The error shows the phase difference between and Q channels away from the ideal 90 degrees expected from the perfect I Q modulation Not valid for BPSK modulation type The normalized correlated power of the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Like EVM Rho is a measure of modulation quality The value of Rho is less than 1 in all practical cases and is equal to 1 for a perfect signal measured in a perfect receiver SignalVu PC Printable Help Taking Measurements Available Measurements Measurements for nFSK modulation types Measurement Description Peak FSK err Peak value of the frequency deviation error at the symbol point RMS FSK Err RMS va
107. sample or symbol Analysis Length Use the analysis length to specify how long a period of time is analyzed As you adjust this value the actual amount of time for Analysis Length in Symbol or Seconds units is shown below the control in the Actual readout This setting is not available when Auto is checked Range minimum value depends on modulation type Resolution 1 symbol 226 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis Trace Tab OHDM Time Zero Reference All time values are measured from this point such as marker position or horizontal position in Y vs Time displays Choices are Acquisition Start or Trigger Parameter Description Acquisition Start Offset is measured from the point at which acquisition begins Trigger Offset is measured from the trigger point Trace Tab OFDM The Trace tab allows you to set the trace display characteristics of the selected display This tab is not available for all OFDM displays Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range AnalysisTime Trace Scale Prefs Trace Mag Error xj v Show Freeze Settings Description Trace Use this drop down list to select whether or not the Average trace or the measurement trace is displayed The measurement trace depends on the selected display Show Select or deselect this checkbox to show or hide the trace selected in the Trace drop down list Freeze Selecting Freeze halts updates to the trace Scale Tab OFDM T
108. specify which records are to be replayed First record Previous Replays the first record within the selected set Replays the previous record within the selected set Next Replays the next record within the selected set SignalVu PC Printable Help 385 Analyzing Data Acq Data Menu item Description Last record Replays the last record within the selected set Pause Suspends replay of the data records as soon as the current record s replay action is completed Press Pause again to begin replay with the next record in the sequence Stop Halts the replay of acquisitions If replay is started after Stop has been selected replay starts from the first acquisition Select all Selects all acquisitions for replay Select records from history Displays the Select data records tab of the Replay control panel Use the Select data records tab to specify which acquisitions and frames you would like to replay Replay toolbar Displays or hides the Replay toolbar Acq Data Selecting Acq Data selects acquisition data as the source for replay Selecting Acq Data does not start replay it only selects the type of acquisition data that will be replayed DPX Spectra Selecting DPX Spectra selects DPX spectra as the source for replay Selecting DPX Spectra does not start replay it only selects the type of acquisition data that will be replayed Replay All Selected Records Selecting Replay all selected records repla
109. supported file formats waveform 404 symbol maps 351 Symbol Rate 33 Symbol Rate Error 33 Symbol Table P25 34 WLAN 30 Symbol Table display 329 Symbol Table display settings 330 T Taps Equalizer tab 341 Taps Symbol Equalizer tab 341 Target Reference Frequency Settling Time 143 Test For 372 Test Patterns tab P25 Analysis displays 285 SignalVu PC Printable Help Test using a mask 373 THD Audio Summary display 295 Thunderstorm color scheme 20 Time 36 Time amp Freq Scale tab Spectrogram display 61 Time measurement 455 Time Overview 47 P25 34 Time Overview display settings 48 Time Params tab Settling Time displays 144 time reference 456 time scale status readout 59 Time Frequency analysis application presets 17 TIQ acquisition data files 19 TIQ acquisition data files parameters 19 TNHD Audio Summary display 295 Tolerance Frequency Settling Time 143 Tools Menu 425 Total AM AM display 33 Touch screen Actions 7 trace 456 Trace 2 Constellation display 349 Trace tab AM display 84 FM display 92 GP Digital Modulation displays 348 OFDM Analysis displays 227 P25 Analysis 286 PM display 99 Settling Time displays 145 Time Overview display 51 WLAN Analysis displays 200 Traces tab DPX display 42 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing displays 73 RF Measurements display 163 Spectrogram display 60 WLAN Channel Response display 200 Trace
110. test you need to click the Edit limits button and set the desired test limits The procedure is the same if you select is inside mask f rm Mask Test Define Actions T 5 y be Search in Spectrum Trace 1 x Test for i outside mask x Edit limits Load from fie Setting Description Search in Specifies which result to test Test for Specifies what to test for You can specify a test based on a signal level is greater than is less than or a mask is outside mask is inside mask Options for Spurious and Settling Time are Pass and Fail Search In The possible choices for Search in include traces from Spectrum DPX Noise Figure Spurious and Setting Time displays The available choices are Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Math Spectrogram Trace Spurious and Settling Time The available choices include only results from displays that are currently open NOTE Ifyou select a result that is not the selected trace or result in the target display you will not see the results of the test To see the results select the trace from the drop down menu in the target measurement v 7 Trace1 V Show Normal display and check the Show box D Test For The Test for setting has selections that vary based on which display s results you are testing Pass Fail Tests for Spurious and Settling Time The Frequency Settling Time Phase Settling Time measurements and Spurious measurements
111. the Frequency Deviation vs Time view 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the Display Displays Markers J Settinas Trig Aca j Ana gt Freq 1 000000 GHz RefLev 0 00 dBm Vs Freq Error 6 506 mHz Auto o 27 7 kHz Position 1 35 Hz o 27 7 kHz o Autoscale 9 Position 44 00 Sym Scale 30 00 Sym Stopped Acq EV 312 50 kHz Acq Length 4 014 ms Real Time Free Run Ref Int Atten 25 dB 0169 006 SignalVu PC Printable Help 317 GP Digital Modulation Item Element 1 Check mark indicator Frequency Deviation vs Time Settings Description The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Frequency Deviation vs Time display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Top of Graph Sets the frequency deviation value indicated at the top of the graph Changing the top value affects the bottom of graph readout Also note that the top of graph setting interacts with the internal vertical scale setting which is not user settable such that the range between the top and bottom of the graph increases or decreases automatically 3 Position Specifies the frequency deviation value shown at t
112. the Units setting Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Length value based on the requirements of the selected display Actual This is a displayed value not a setting It is the Analysis Length time or symbols being used by the analyzer this value may not match the Analysis Length requested in manual mode Time Zero Reference Specifies the zero point for the analysis time Units Specifies the units of the Analysis Length to either Symbols or Seconds Analysis Offset Use analysis offset to specify where measurements begin Be aware that you cannot set the Analysis Offset outside the range of time covered by the current acquisition data all time values are relative to the Time Zero Reference You can set the Analysis Length so that the requested analysis period falls partly or entirely outside the current range of acquisition data settings When the next acquisition is taken its Acquisition Length will be increased to cover the new Analysis Length as long as the Sampling controls are set to Auto If the Sampling parameters are set to manual or if the instrument is analyzing saved data the actual analysis length will be constrained by the available data length but in most cases measurements are able to be made anyway The instrument will display a notification when measurement results are computed from less data than requested Range 0 to end of acquisition Analysis Length Resolution 1 effective
113. the greater value is retained for display and subsequent comparisons SignalVu PC Printable Help 125 RF Measurements CCDF Display CCDF Display The CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function is a statistical characterization that plots power level on the x axis and probability on the y axis of a graph Each point on the CCDF curve shows what percentage of time a signal spends at or above a given power level The power level is expressed in dB relative to the average signal power level The CCDF Display also shows the Average power level and the Peak Average ratio To show the CCDF display Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box From the Measurements box select RF Measurements me lib ds Double click the CCDF icon in the Available Displays box This adds the CCDF icon to the Selected displays box Click the OK button e Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the CCDF Display v Trace 1 Wlshow 1 000ms 100 95 5 300dB 16 44 0 0001 ode 20 dB Avg 8 76 dBm 35 72 Pk Avg 4 82 dB 10 1 01 0 01 0 001 0 0001 dB 385 453 466 474 0519 027 126 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements CCDF Settings Item Display element Description 1 10096 The top of the graph represen
114. the instrument will save 100 acquisitions if only acquisitions are saved or only pictures are saved But if both acquisitions and pictures are saved then 50 acquisitions and 50 pictures will be saved 402 Signal Vu PC Printable Help Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures You can save different types of data for later recall and analysis Data type Description Save as type Setup files Saves all of the setup information for Setup Setup all displays except those settings that are not part of Preset Picture of Selected Display Saves a capture of the screen in the Picture BMP PNG JPG PNG JPG BMP specified format This option is useful for including the graphic in reports or other applications Marker readouts and other information are included Results Export files Saves the trace and numeric data for Results export various the selected display The trace and numeric data are saved as CSV files Measurement Settings Saves a list of settings relevant to the Measurement settings export TXT selected measurement to a text file This option is useful for including the measurement settings in reports Trace Saves a trace for later recall into the Selected trace various display from which it was saved Data Saves data for reanalysis later or as Acquisition data with setup TIQ or da
115. the instrument to set the Spectrum Length value based on the RBW setting Actual This is a displayed value not a setting It is the Spectrum Length time being used by the analyzer this value may not match the Spectrum Length requested in manual mode The actual spectrum length is always an integer multiple of the time needed to support the RBW value Frequency Tab The Frequency tab specifies two frequency values the Measurement Frequency and the Spectrum Center Frequency The Measurement Frequency is the frequency at which most displays take measurements The Spectrum Center Frequency is the center frequency used by the Spectrum DPX Spectrum Spectrogram and Time Overview displays Analysis Time Spectrum Time Frequency Units Measurement Frequency 1 500000 GHz 4 Lock Center Frequency of Spectrum displays to Measurement Frequency Spectrum Center Frequency 1 500000 GHz SignalVu PC Printable Help 379 Analyzing Data Frequency Tab The following screen capture shows a display with both the Measurement Frequency and the Spectrum Center Frequency locked together fre 20000 Gz Ret 0 00 din M4orb limu 7 10 8 4 2009 9 43 35 19 Spectrogram Bagman Overlap 0 Peak Normal Freq Error 1 794 kHz Auto PeakEVM 5 416 22 00 Sym IE 53387 us Actuat 33 387 us 4Peak Normal 2 Pos 2 0 00 dBm 5 dB div 10 0 dB 344105 vj Ck 20000 GHz v Span 110 0 MHz Freq Error 1 794 kHz
116. the oscilloscope bandwidth will be attenuated When processing the waveform SignalVu PC automatically sets the bandwidth to twice the entered span to allow for increasing the span in later analysis Set the span of the spectrum analyzer to 2 the calculated maximum span In the case of the example of above this is 5 x 400 MHz or 200 MHz 3 Set the center frequency to 4 of the span This puts the analysis frequency within the first Nyquist zone to prevent aliasing of the signal 4 Open the ISF or WFM file with the settings above 5 Set the span to the calculated maximum in the example above 0 4 x Sample Rate 400 MHz and reanalyze 6 Save the results as a TIQ file This preserves all of the settings in the analyzer and associates them with the data set SignalVu PC Printable Help 409 Managing Data Settings and Pictures Data Settings and Picture File Formats Setup Files You can set up the instrument as desired and then save the settings in a setup file This enables you to quickly setup the instrument by recalling previously saved setups Exporting Results Save for further analysis of results in other programs such as MATLAB or Excel Pictures of the Selected Display You can save pictures of the instrument display for documentation purposes When saving pictures of the display you can select from three file types BMP JPG or PNG Measurement Settings You can save a list of settings relevant to the select
117. the pulse top the instrument should wait before measuring the Phase Difference and Frequency Difference for each pulse If this value is set too large for any of the pulses in the signal the measurement point ends up on the falling edge or during the pulse off time m Decrease the Measurement time for Freq amp Phase results setting Settings gt Define tab Unexpected software error Please cycle power and try again If the problem persists contact your Tektronix Service Center Signal Vu PC Printable Help Reference Displaying the Windows Event Viewer An unrecoverable error has occurred and the instrument application software will shut down Relaunch the SignalVu PC application VBW not applied Acq BW too small Increase VBW or measurement bandwidth Make sure Sampling Parameters are set to Auto VBW not applied Spectrum Length too short This message occurs when the requested VBW can t be produced because the Spectrum Length is too short To clear this problem set the Spectrum Length to Auto or manually increase the Spectrum Length see Setup gt Analysis gt Spectrum Time tab If Spectrum Length is coupled to Analysis Length set Analysis Length to Auto or manually increase it see Setup gt Analysis gt Analysis Time tab Displaying the Windows Event Viewer When the analyzer generates an error message information about the error is logged to the Windows Event Viewer To display the Windows Event Viewer 1
118. the view as Freq Dev or IQ Scale see page 286 Defines the vertical and horizontal axes Prefs see page 289 Specifies the radix of the marker readout and whether elements of the graphs are displayed P25 Power vs Time Display The P25 Power vs Time display shows the signal power amplitude versus time To show the P25 Power vs Time display 1 2 3 4 268 If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select P25 Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the P25 Power vs Time icon or select the icon and click Add The P25 Power vs Time icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the P25 Power vs Time display Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Modulation Type and Measurement and Reference filters as appropriate for the input signal Select the Test Patterns tab and choose a test pattern appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Elements of the Display 2 15 00 dBm View Ful Burst v 135 00 di Autoscale P25 Power vs Time S
119. their 6 dB point as required by military EMI regulations CISPR These filters comply with the requirements specified in the P CISPR 16 1 1 document for EMI measurements Blackman Harris 4B Good side lobe level Uniform None Best frequency resolution poor side lobe level and amplitude accuracy Flat Top Best amplitude accuracy best representation of brief events captured near the beginning or end of the time domain data frame poor frequency resolution Hanning Good frequency resolution high side lobe roll off rate SignalVu PC Printable Help TT General Signal Viewing Scale Tab VBW The VBW setting enables disables the Video Bandwidth filter VBW 1s used in traditional swept analyzers to reduce the effect of noise on the displayed signal The VBW algorithm in the analyzer emulates the VBW filters of traditional swept analyzers The maximum VBW value is the current RBW setting The minimum VBW value is 1 10 000 of the RBW setting VBW is disabled when the Filter shape is set to CISPR Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls The Scale tab values are unique to each display Also note that each display uses horizontal and vertical units that are appropriate for the display For e
120. tiq and click OK Saving the file in tiq format preserves all of the settings in the analyzer and associates them with the data set 4 Recall the saved tiq file and add measurements and change settings If you choose to save the file in mat format SignalVu PC automatically adds all of the SignalVu PC settings needed for your analysis into the stored mat file Opening files saved with oscilloscopes Oscilloscopes acquire and store data in an amplitude vs time format that must be converted by SignalVu PC into an IQ format for further processing Sample rate and amplitude information is available in these files but no other information is available to SignalVu PC To open files stored in either ISF or WFM format saved by Tektronix oscilloscopes use the following procedure 1 Preset SignalVu PC This resets the analysis so that only the spectrum analyzer display is present with a center frequency of 250 MHz and a span of 200 MHz 2 Setthe Span of SignalVu PC to 0 2 x Sample Rate of the acquisition How to determine the maximum available span for your ISF or WFM file The maximum span is calculated to be 0 4 x Sample Rate For example a waveform sampled at 1 GSample second will have a maximum span of 0 4 x 109 400 MHz This represents the Nyquist bandwidth of the sampling system plus an allowance for filter bandwidth Note that this span may exceed the bandwidth of the oscilloscope used and results at frequencies higher than
121. to MATLAB format will result in a file that exceeds 2 GB in MATLAB level 5 format A PC with sufficient memory is required to open the file If memory is not sufficient MATLAB will warn the user To check how much acquisition memory is filled select Setup gt Acquire gt Sampling Parameters When the instrument is stopped or you are analyzing a recalled data file you can find the acquisition length under File gt Acquisition Data Info Printing Screen Shots 414 You can print screen shots screen captures two ways use File gt Print or save a picture file and print the file using a separate graphics program Printing a screen capture is the same as printing with any windows program For details on the available file formats for saving a screen capture refer to Data Settings and Picture File Formats see page 410 For details on saving a picture to a file see Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures see page 403 To print a screen shot 1 Select File gt Print 2 Select File gt Print Preview if you wish to review the screen shot before sending it to the printer 3 Select File gt Print to print the file to a printer SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Online Help Online Help Menu Bar Help gt User Manual This menu item displays this help The help is a standard Windows help system The Online Help menu item is the only method available to display the help there are no other links to the
122. to a logarithmic scale Reset Scale Resets the Vertical and Horizontal settings to their default values SignalVu PC Printable Help 303 Audio Analysis Hum amp Noise Tab Hum amp Noise Tab 304 Hum amp Noise available only when the Audio Summary display is the active display is useful for comparing residual power or modulation if the Ref value is captured when the Signal is On Direct or modulated AM FM PM When the signal is turned off Direct or modulation turned off AM FM PM Diff indicates how much residual Hum and Noise are still present in the measurement value Paramsi Params2 Audio Filters Hum amp Noise V Measure Hum amp Noise Capture reference now To display Hum amp Noise measurement 1 Select Setup gt Displays 2 In the Select Displays window select the Audio Analysis folder 3 Double click the Audio Summary icon so that it appears in the Selected displays box 4 Click OK 5 With the Audio Summary display selected select Setup gt Settings 6 Select the Hum amp Noise tab Click on the Measure Hum amp Noise checkbox so that it is checked The Hum amp Noise values appear at the bottom list of measurements in the Audio Summary display 7 Acquire an appropriate signal 8 While the analyzer is analyzing a signal you want to use as a reference click the Capture reference now button to save a reference value The Hum amp Noise measurement compares the value of
123. to difficulty in characterizing the signal For example due to either the signal or settings the instrument may not be able to recognize a pulse so it can compute the pulse measurements Try changing settings to improve analysis For example when Pulse Trace is displayed try changing the settings on the Settings gt Params Analysis failure Carrier detection failed SignalVu PC Printable Help 427 Reference Error and Information Messages 428 The instrument was unable to locate a carrier signal Try adjusting the Carrier Threshold or Integration BW values if the measurement has these controls Analysis Length was limited This message appears if the Results Length the time over which the measurement computed its results is less than the Actual Analysis Length reported in the Analysis Time control panel tab and the Time Overview display The Results Length is indicated by the magenta line below the Time Overview graph This can occur because the acquisition contained more data samples than a measurement can process for example digital demodulation is limited to 80 000 samples or the measurement had to use some of the first and last samples for pre measurement processes Analysis length too small for current setup Increase the Analysis Length or decrease the RBW Spectrum ACPR MCPR Avg Tx not available in Volts units The Average Transmitted Power measurement is not defined for Volts Can t get acquisition data record
124. type The selections for modulation type are CW constant phase CW changing phase Linear Chirp and Other Select the method of frequency method based upon a best match to your signal based on the following descriptions CW constant phase The signal is not designed to change in either frequency or phase during the measured pulse train CW changing phase The signal does not change the carrier phase within each pulse although it could change the phase from one pulse to another pulse The signal is not designed to make frequency changes Linear Chirp The signal changes frequency in a linear manner during each pulse The signal has the same carrier phase at the same time offset from the rising edge of the pulse m Other The signal is not one of the listed types You must manually enter the Frequency Offset value The following table maps the appropriate signal type selection with the signal characteristics Signature Phase offset from one pulse to another Any unknown CW CW Constant Phase CW Changing Phase LFM Linear Chirp N A Signal Vu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Scale Tab Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Params Define Levels Freg Esti
125. used Some analysis differs based on the selected test pattern Available test patterns vary depending on the selected standard and modulation type Trace see page 286 Specifies the trace type Vectors Points and Lines the number of points per symbol when chosen to view as Vectors or Lines and to control the view as Freq Dev or IQ Prefs see page 289 Specifies the radix of the marker readout and whether elements of the graphs are displayed Trig Meas see page 288 Enables you to select from several different trigger measurements P25 Eye Diagram Display The P25 Eye Diagram display shows a digitally modulated signal overlapped on itself to reveal variations in the signal SignalVu PC Printable Help 265 APCO P25 Analysis P25 Eye Diagram Display To show the P25 Eye Diagram display 1 2 3 4 tA 10 If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays From the Measurements box select P25 Analysis Double click the P25 Eye Diagram icon in the Available Displays box This adds the P25 Eye Diagram icon to the Selected displays box Click OK button This displays the P25 Eye Diagram view Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Modulation Type and Measurement and Reference filters as appropriate for the inp
126. used for analysis Analysis Time Spectrum Time Frequency Units Analysis Offset 80 000 ns V Auto Time Zero Reference Acquisition Start Analysis Length 2 000 us Vl Auto Actual 1 000 us SignalVu PC Printable Help 377 Analyzing Data Analysis Time Tab 378 Setting Description Analysis Offset Specifies the location of the first time sample to use in measurements Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Offset value based on the requirements of the selected display Analysis Length Specifies the length of time to use in measurements Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Length value based on the requirements of the selected display Time Zero Reference Specifies the zero point for the analysis time Actual This is a displayed value not a setting It is the Analysis Length time being used by the analyzer this value may not match the Analysis Length requested in manual mode Analysis Offset Use analysis offset to specify where measurements begin Range 0 to end of acquisition Analysis Length Resolution 1 effective sample or symbol Analysis Length Use the analysis length to specify how long a period of time is analyzed by a measurement After you enter a value this box changes to show the actual value in use which is constrained by Acquisition Time This setting is not available when Auto is checked Range minimum value depend
127. vertical and horizontal to provide the best display 4 Maximum and Minimum level Displays the maximum and minimum values within the Analysis Time as well readouts as the times at which they occurred 5 Scale Sets the time spanned by the graph 6 Clear button Restarts multi trace functions Avg Hold 7 Trace function Displays the current trace function setting Settings gt Trace gt Function If the traces are averaged the number of averages is displayed 8 Trace Control Selects which trace is displayed using the drop down list and which trace is active click on the trace name to display a menu Changing the RF I amp Q vs Time Display Settings see page 70 RF amp Q vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar i i The Setup settings for RF I amp Q vs Time are shown in the following table 70 Signal Vu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing General Signal Viewing Shared Measurement Settings Settings tab Description Freq amp BW see page 71 Sets the frequency and bandwidth parameters Trace see page 73 Sets the trace display parameters Scale see page 78 Sets the Vertical and Horizontal scale and offset parameters Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible General Signal Viewing Shared Measurement Settings The control panel tabs in this section are identical or very similar for each of the displays in the Ge
128. visible at once When all displays are visible at once you can rearrange the displays by dragging the title bar of a window deselect Window gt Lock Windows to move displays around Command Description Close View Closes the selected view Cascade Positions windows in a cascade view not available when Lock Windows is selected Tile Horizontally Positions widows in a horizontal orientation top to bottom Tile Vertically Positions widows in a vertical orientation side by side Lock Windows Locks the windows into their current position preventing them from being moved If the windows are locked the Cascade arrangement is not selectable List of windows A numbered list of open windows Help Menu The Help menu provides access to the help and version information about SignalVu PC 426 SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Error and Information Messages Command Description User Manual On line Displays the help User Manual PDF Displays a PDF version of the help Application Reference PDF Displays a PDF version of the RSA Application Manual Quick Start Manual PDF Displays a PDF version of the SignalVu PC Read This First manual About Tektronix Real Time Displays information about the SignalVu PC software and installed options Signal Analyzer Software Error and Information Messages The following list describes some of the common error and information messages that
129. when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export FM Display The Frequency Modulation Display shows Frequency Deviation vs Time The vertical axis units are Hertz and the horizontal axis units are seconds When taking measurements only the first burst in the Analysis period is analyzed No trace points are shown for data outside the first detected burst nor are measurements made on data outside the first detected burst To show the FM display 1 Select the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 From the Measurements box select Analog Modulation 3 Double click the FM icon in the Available Displays box This adds the FM icon to the Selected displays box 4 Click the OK button This shows the FM display SignalVu PC Printable Help 87 Analog Modulation 88 Elements of the Display Freq Error 697 6 Hz Auto Peak Normal r 100 kHz js Position 0 000 Hz o kHz Autoscale J RMS 70 1 kHz Position 51 200 us FM Display Scale 1 000 ms 0519 023 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Item 1 Element Check mark indicator FM Settings Description The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the FM display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple wi
130. word Analysis Time see page 346 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Trace see page 348 Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Scale see page 350 Specifies the horizontal and vertical scale settings Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Signal Quality Display The Signal Quality display shows several measurements of signal quality The measurements displayed depend on the modulation type There is a set of measurements displayed for all modulation types except nFSK and C4FM There is a second set of measurements displayed for nFSK and CAFM modulation types SignalVu PC Printable Help 323 GP Digital Modulation 324 Phase Error Mag Error RMS 47 893 6 395 dB 25 803 18 943 Peak 97 092 D 256 dB 46 376 954 693 Signal Quality Display Location 4 14 kSym 4 26 kSym 848 00 Sym MER RMS IQ Origin Offset Gain Imbalance 6 395 dB 48 637 dB 0 019 dB Rho Frequency Error Quadrature Error 0 783798 542 2 kHz 0 211 Signal Quality display for all modulation types except nFSK C4FM OQPSK and SOQPSK ho ii y c pS X jJ v RMS Peak Location EVM 0 213 96 0 562 161 50 Sym 53 426 dB 45 012 dB Offse
131. 0 000 us Autoscale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Scale Changes the range shown between the top and bottom of the graph Position Adjusts the level shown at the center of the graph Autoscale Resets the Position so that the entire trace is in the graph Horizontal Scale Changes the range shown between the left and right sides of the graph Position Adjusts the position of the acquisition record shown at the left edge of the graph Autoscale Resets the Scale and Position settings to provide the optimum display 86 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Prefs Tab Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the AM display Parameters Trace Scale Prefs V Show graticule Setting Max trace points 100K M 4 Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Description Show graticule Shows or hides the graticule Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area Max trace points The trace in the AM display can be set to a maximum of 100 000 points however the actual number of trace points can extend up to 500 000 points if Max trace points is set to Never Decimate If the Analysis Length includes more than the selected Max trace points value the trace is decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except
132. 0 11 Quaternary 0 1 2 3 and Modulation Symbols 1 3 1 3 SignalVu PC Printable Help 289 APCO P25 Analysis Limits Tab P25 Limits Tab P25 290 The Limits tab is only available for the P25 Summary display It enables you to load an existing limits table save a limits table or edit limits values p eid Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Trig Meas Test Patterns Limits On Measurement Name Limit B ModulationFidelity 4 000 FrequencyAccuracy 1 500 SymbolRateAccuracy 10 00 RFOutputPower 3 0000 FrequencyDeviationPosPeakUp 3111 0000 Save Standard FrequencyDeviationPosPeakLow 2544 0000 Setting Description Load Click to load a saved Limits table from a csv file Save Click to save the current Limits table to a csv file Edit Limits To directly edit measurement limits in the table click on the value in the Limit column that you want to change The following table describes the parameters that are set in the Limits Table Limits Table Settings Setting Description On Click on the cell in the On column next to the measurement to specify whether ofrnot measurements are selected for limit comparison to indicate Pass or Fail A check mark means the measurement will be taken An empty box means it will not be taken Measurement Name Specifies the name of the measurement related to the limit Not editable Limit Specifies the value of the limit
133. 00 000 points if Max trace points is set to Never Decimate If the Analysis Length includes more than the selected Max trace points value the trace is decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export You can set the Max trace points on the Settings gt Prefs tab To display an RF I amp Q vs Time display 1 2 3 Select the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box From the Measurements box select General Signal Viewing Double click the RF I amp Q vs Time icon in the Available Displays box This adds the RF I amp Q vs Time icon to the Selected displays box Click the OK button SignalVu PC Printable Help 69 General Signal Viewing Elements of the Display RF I amp Q vs Time Settings 7 ITrace ViShow Peak Normal 2 250 mv 250mv T Autoscale Position 71 300 ns 2 Max 191 8 mV 246 7ns Min 134 4 mY 120 0ns Scale 667 000 ns 06 19 021 Item Display element Description 1 Top of Graph adjustment Use the knob to adjust the vertical scaling 2 Vertical offset adjustment Adjusts the level shown at the center of the display 3 Autoscale button Adjusts the offset and scale for both
134. 01 point spectra collected is 20 000 and for 4001 point spectra the number is 12 000 When the limit is reached the oldest spectra are discarded as newer spectra are captured Touchscreen Actions on Markers in the Graph Area Action Description Mouse click within 1 2 div of Selects the marker and updates the marker display to show the selected marker s values a marker Click on a marker to select Adjust the setting associated with the Marker and then use the arrow keys to move the marker Click and drag a marker Changes marker position to the drop point You can use Tools gt Options gt Prefs to change whether markers jump from one peak to the next while dragging or move smoothly along the trace Available Traces for Display in SignalVu PC The DPX display shows two types of displays the DPXogram and Split display The Split display consists of a DPXogram display on the top half of the display and a DPX Spectrum display on the bottom half of the display For the DPXogram display only one trace is available the DPXogram trace For the Split display the DPX Spectrum display shows only the Ogram Line the selected line in the DPXogram display on the bottom half of the display Reference Changing the DPX Spectrum Display Settings see page 293 SignalVu PC Printable Help 41 General Signal Viewing DPX Settings DPX Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Front Panel Application Toolbar Settin
135. 02 15 4 OQPSK 1e6 None Half sine NA SBPSK MIL SBPSK 2 4e3 None SBPSK NA MIL SOQPSK MIL SOQPSK 2 4e3 None SOQPSK NA 1 MIL CPM MIL CPM 19 2e3 None None NA SOQPSK ARTM Tier 1 SOQPSK 2 5e6 None SOQPSK NA 1 ARTM Project25 Phase 1 C4FM 4 8e3 C4FM P25 RC 0 2 CDMA2000 Base QPSK 1 2288e6 IS 95 TXE IS 95 REF NA Q_MEA W CDMA QPSK 3 84e6 RRC RC 0 22 1 Center Symbol Position Half Shift Removed Modulation Params Tab Menu bar Setup gt Settings gt Modulation Params The Modulation Params tab specifies the type of modulation on the input signal and other parameters that control the demodulation of the input signal Modulation Params Freq amp BW Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Modulation type QPSK Measurement Filter Root raised cosine Symbol Rate 40 kHz Reference Filter Raised cosine Y Filter Parameter 0 300 Parameter Description Modulation type Specifies the type of modulation on the input signal Symbol Rate Specifies the symbol rate in Hertz Measurement Filter Specifies the filter used for measurements Reference Filter Specifies the filter used as a reference Filter Parameter Enter a value used for defining the Reference Filter Not present for some filter types Modulation index Present only for CPM modulation type Modulation Type The modulation types that can be demodulated and analyzed are SignalVu PC Printable Help 335 GP Digi
136. 023 003 Marker toolbar Horizontal scale controls Status bar Measurements area Specific elements of the display are shown in the following figure SignalVu PC Printable Help 9 Orientation Two additional elements available when connected to an RSA306 Elements of the Display eo File View e 000 Tools Live Link Window Help RefLev 0 00 dBm Select All Select 1 Bx Preset bi Replay T Connection Bi 1 1 0001 0 0 0 00 qu Bie A op g amp S TAS Frequency 600 0000 MHz Replay Acq Data i44 0 b bx 25 Time 15 4 Analysis Offset 7 520 ms Length 4 6 94 000 ms dB div 10 0 dB 24 6 JPreliminary 001 44 6 0623 000 64 6 84 6 p Autoscale position 0 000 s Stopped Acq BW 96 00 kHz Acq Length 111 946 ms Scale 120 000 ms 10 1023 004 SignalVu PC Printable Help Orientation Elements of the Display Ref Setting Description number 1 Recall Displays the Open window in order to recall setup files acquisition data files or trace files 2 Save Opens the Save As dialog in order to save setup files pictures screen captures acquisition data files or export measurement settings 3 Undo Redo Undoes or redoes the previous edit to a display or measurement settings a preset or a measurement change 4 Displays Opens the Select Displays dialog box so that you can select measurement
137. 03 31 16 36 16 12 33 aJ 7 3 miie i ce Marker Mi Symbol 12 Value 100010 Subcarier 1 L 0519 053 Item Description 1 Subcarrier identifiers OFDM only Yellow column indicates Pilot subcarrier locations Symbol identifiers Subcarrier data values w Pp Marker readout when markers are enabled WLAN Symbol Table for 802 11b signals Preamble Header Data 0 lo o 1 o lo o wioieiwiololusimviomiwieiuwoioleo Wintel ee TE i lolwiy iyi iwlolwlolololo Biniwlwlole ini wlolwlalelolo iniRicloio ololwlelPlololn wlolo nielelwle le Hel ONE lwinlolHlolHlolwininiwlwlelollolo Nin wlelole wlolwlolo nin Hlo inielololo O mW e u o loin iy e 0 lw le V O lwo wIwNIwieiwieiwiwiviei leiwi lei M Oe Nw e oln e t lw wn we SignalVu PC Printable Help 193 WLAN Measurements WLAN Symbol Table Settings Item Description 1 Symbol number index from beginning of packet or segment of first Symbol data value on the line 2 Symbol values with the value in column 2 of each row corresponding to the symbol number index in column 1 and then the symbol value in column 3 corresponding to the next symbol number index etc to the end of each row For example The symbol number index 130 0 in column 2
138. 1 7 SignalVu PC Printable Help 231 Pulsed RF Pulse Table Settings Displaying the Pulse Table 1 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 Select Pulsed RF in the Measurements box 3 Double click Pulse Table in the Available displays box to add the display to the Selected displays box 4 Click OK Selecting the Measurements to Show 1 With the Pulse Table selected press the Settings button 2 Inthe Pulse Table Settings control panel select the Measurements tab Measurements Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Show in Pulse 7 average ON Power Select al iV Peak Power dearal V Average Transmitted Power V Pulse Width IV Rise Time z 3 Select the measurements you wish to take from the list of measurements or click Select all to choose all measurements 4 Click the close box to remove the Settings control panel Changing the Pulse Table Display Settings see page 232 Pulse Table Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar zi The Settings control panel tabs for the Pulse Table Display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Measurements see page 233 Selects the measurements to be show in the Pulse Table Params see page 238 Specifies several parameters that control how pulses are counted and defined Define see page 240 Specifies parameters that control where measurem
139. 100 1 complete acquisition Triggered not valid when swept Save picture on Trigger PNG Action tab settings Setting Description Save acq data on Trigger Enables the Save on Trigger function The list box to the right of the Save acq data on Trigger check box specifies the format of the saved file Acquisition data files can be saved in TIQ native format CSV format and MAT MATLAB format For descriptions of these file formats see Data Settings and Picture File Formats see page 410 When TIQ is the selected file type a file is saved after a complete acquisition which can include multiple frames When CSV or MAT is the selected file type a separate file is saved for each frame Files are saved in the last location a file was saved The default location is C SignalVu PC Files Save picture on Trigger Enables saving a picture of the display when a trigger event occurs Files can be saved in PNG JPG and BMP format For descriptions of these file formats see Data Settings and Picture File Formats see page 410 Max total files saved per Run Specifies the number of times a Save on Trigger action stores a file After this limit is reached no more files are saved The instrument will continue to run but no additional files are saved when a trigger event occurs Keep in mind when setting this number that picture files are counted as part of the total number of files For example if you set Max total files to 100
140. 11 001110 010010 8 110010 001110 010011 100001 001111 D 101001 001001 101110 000101 001000 3 Il 001101 011011 011010 110110 011100 n 111011 100000 100001 101111 100100 10 101001 010100 010101 101010 110101 0 001011 011010 011011 001001 101101 ii 101111 100010 D00011 000000 000100 D 001110 110111 000000 110010 110100 12 000004 011101 100110 110100 100000 i 000011 010101 000001 011100 110100 tone a a a Marker M1 Value 100010 Subcarier 1 o 0519 014 Item Description 1 Subcarrier identifiers 2 Symbol identifiers 3 Subcarrier data values 4 Marker readout when markers are enabled OFDM Symbol Table Settings Application Toolbar E The settings for the OFDM Symbol Table display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Modulation Params see page 223 Advanced Params see page 224 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 225 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Prefs see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are disp
141. 19 700 MHz 19 0 dBm 100 00 dBm 19 750 MHz 21 4 dBm Offset 0 Hz Scale 40 00 MHz 20 000 MHz 21 4 dBm NOTE Units may be changed for measurements other than Noise Figure in Setup gt Analysis gt Units 4 To delete a point from the table select the point to be removed and click the X button 5 To save the mask to a file for later recall click Save As 6 From the Save As dialog name the file and save it in the desired location NOTE Masks are saved in XML format with a msk extension 7 To dismiss the Mask Test Editor window click Done Mask Test Result Example The following figure shows the results of a Spectrum is outside mask test with Upper Mask enabled The vertical red bar highlights results that have exceeded the test limits The shaded region shows the mask area 7 Trace 1 V Show Peak Normal Clear dB div 0 0 10 0 dB RBW 100 kHz VBW A 40 0 60 0 80 0 100 0 Autoscale CF 1 50000 GHz Span 10 00 MHz SignalVu PC Printable Help 375 Mask Testing Actions Tab 376 Actions Tab The Actions tab allows you to trigger the application when a signal in the frequency domain violates the mask Define Actions During Run or Replay Beep Stop Setting During Run only Save acquisition data TIQ X v Max files 100 Save trace Save picture Description During Run or Replay Actions specified here will occur in either Run mode or Re
142. 2 Marker readout If markers are enabled the marker readout shows the selected Marker Symbol Subcarrier Type Value Magnitude and Phase for the symbol at the marker location Located to the left of the constellation plot or below it depending on the size of the window 3 Marker controls Define and position markers WLAN Constellation Settings Application Toolbar Gt The WLAN Constellation Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the Constellation Display SignalVu PC Printable Help 175 WLAN Measurements WLAN EVM Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters page 195 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 196 Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for page 199 analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Trace Tab see page 200 Enables you to freeze the display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 201 Specifies the Zoom scale and vertical and horizontal positions of the display Prefs Tab see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether eleme
143. 25 Summary display SignalVu PC Printable Help 255 APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis NOTE The following information is important when trigger measurements are taken with SignalVu PC interfaced with an MDO4000B Series instrument 1 The RF signal should be connected to the RF Input of the MDO 2 One of the 4 analog channels of the MDO can be set as Trigger input Refer to the Trigger Setup section on how to set a channel as trigger in the MDO manual 3 In SignalVu PC set Triggered mode in the Setup gt Acquisition control panel Common information The following information applies to all of the measurements in the previous list Select the relevant Trigger measurement from the Trig Meas tab of the control panel When this measurement is chosen from the Trig Meas tab of the control panel only this result will be populated in the P25 Summary display and everything else will have no result The Time Zero Reference under the Analysis Time tab in the control panel is forced to Trigger Align the Trigger to the RSA MDO4000B as described in the measurement methods standard document When a trigger measurement is chosen from the Trig Meas tab of the control panel the following status message will appear P25 Set instrument in Triggered Mode Use the Acquisition control panel to select enough acquisition length to ensure that sufficient data is available when the acquisition is triggered This measurement operates in Single Acqu
144. 25 Summary display shows a summary of all the scalar measurements done on the acquired test pattern The summary display and contents will vary according to the selected standard Pass Fail information is also provided in this display for all enabled scalar measurements You can set limits and choose which measurement to compare for Pass Fail from the Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel The default limits come from the performance recommendation limits given by the Standard document The default limits can be reloaded by selecting the P25 Standards Preset option or by loading the default limits table To show the P25 Summary display you can select Presets gt Standards gt P25 or do the following 1 Ifyou are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 3 In the Select Displays dialog select P25 Analysis in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the P25 Summary icon or select the icon and click Add The P25 Summary icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the P25 Summary display 6 Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel 7 Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Modulation Type and Measurement and Reference filters as appropriate for the input signal 270 Signal Vu PC Printabl
145. 30 96 Phasel Tx Attack Time Operating Freq Accuracy 0 ppm Avg Tx Pwr Attack Symbol Rate Accuracy 0 00 ppm Avg Tx Encoder Attack Frequency Deviation Symbol Rate Pattern aoe f1 Positive Peak 2768 93 Hz Phase1 Tx Attack Time Busy Idle f2 Negative Peak 2865 77 Hz Avg Tx Pwr Attack E Avg Tx Encoder Attack Power Measurements ES Phase1 Tx Throughput 3 RF Output Power 10 00 dBm une De M The following image shows an example of the display for a Phase 2 HCPM Inbound signal SignalVu PC Printable Help 271 APCO P25 Analysis Standard Phase Bandwidth 12 5 KHz Modulation Type HCPM Inbound Modulation Measurements Trigger Measurements Modulation Fidelity 0 477 5 HCPM Tx Logic Ch Time Alignt Operating Freq Accuracy 0 ppm PASS fe A Pass tOB sync measured Symbol Rate Accuracy ppm of Frequency Deviation Avg t_error_0 T of5 Positive Peak H Avg t error 1 T Negative Peak Hz of5 Power Measurements RF Output Power 10 00 dBm HCPM Tx Logic Ch Off Slot 62 45 dBm HCPM Tx Logic Ch Pwr Env Limits Time ms Power Pmaxon 0 2 to 1 0 0 004 dB Pse max 1 0t029 0 0 001 dB Pssmin 1 0t029 0 0 001 dB Pmax off 29 0t030 2 0 005 dB HCPM Tx Logic Ch Pk ACPR P ACP HI 37 96 dBm P ACP LOW 40 13 dBm Min Pk ACPR 47 964 dB P25 Summary Display The following image shows an example of the display for a
146. 36 17 3E l uf 30 20 24 OD 18 10 25 04 00 22 OC 08 26 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 15 30 20 24 05 08 00 25 04 00 23 0C 00 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 16f 30320 25 05 01 jo0 25 04 00 23 0C 00 26 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 38 20 25 05 01 00 25 04 00 22 1C 08 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 18 38 20 2C 0D 00 38 24 04 00 23 0C 00 27 17 32 12 32 36 17 3E el 38 20 24 0D 18 00 24 04 00 222 0C 00 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 20 30 20 24 41D 00 00 27 04 00 21 joc 09 27 35 32 12 32 36 17 3E 21 3097 20 24 0D 08 00 25 04 00 26 OC 08 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 229 30 20 i25 oF 00 00 27 04 00 23 OC 08 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 23 01 00 21 35 06 06 20 24 04 30 2C 06 21 3F 12 16 12 32 3F 3A z 064 03 10 27 1C 04 18 27 34 00 26 1C 18 2B 12 16 16 32 3A 33 25 14 04 01 238 25 24 03 28 24 05 38 2c 03 11 16 36 16 12 33 41A zl iC 04 00 29 24 3C 03 20 24 07 28 3C 02 31 16 36 16 12 33 41A 27 ic 04 00 20 j2C 24 03 20 24 07 28 2C 02 31 16 36 16 12 33 1A 28 icf 04 jo 28 24 24 03 j 20 24 06 29 2C 03 31 16 36 16 12 33 12 a 1Cg 04 01 21 2C 24 01 20 24 06 29 24 03 33 16 36 16 12 33 1A 30 lt 04 01 29 24 24 03 20 24 05 38 2C 03 13 16 36 16 12 33 41A 31 14 04 01 28 24 24 01 20 25 06 28 24 03 31 16 36 16 12 33 1A l 3 1C G 03 28 24 24 03 120 24 05 39 2C
147. 4167 ns 223 23629 us 4 479559 kHz 0 5 1165252 us 70 684202 ns 70 438233 ns 220 96363 us 4 525632 kHz 0 1 7 2066669 us 71 347657 ns 70 579837 ns 275 49471 us 3 629834 kHz 0 1 5 4644311 us 70 315551 ns 70 734863 ns 228 46991 us 4 376944 kHz 0 1 5 1185839 us 71 486205 ns 70 560304 ns 220 90306 us 4 526873 kHz 0 7 2754278 us 70 033572 ns 69 621585 ns 275 90856 us 3 624389 kHz 0 1 5 1216639 us 70 291136 ns 69 699709 ns 218 00389 us 4 587074 kHz 0 1 5 1066654 us 69 887697 ns 70 510254 ns 220 97585 us 4 525381 kHz 0 1 7 1933723 us 70 523072 ns 70 412597 ns 275 21345 us 3 633543 kHz 0 5 7297557 us 70 941773 ns 69 781493 ns 237 95580 us 4 202461 kHz 0 1 6 0395946 us 71 277462 ns 70 528564 ns 244 25826 us 4 094027 kHz 0 1 5 1135430 us 70 236204 ns 69 981688 ns 220 97836 us 4 525330 kHz 0 7 2002217 us 71 079711 ns 71 169431 ns 275 33952 us 3 631880 kHz 0 5 6117051 us 69 582519 ns 70 191653 ns 233 68913 us 4 279189 kHz 0 5 1218622 us 70 316162 ns 69 885253 ns 218 00520 us 4 587046 kHz 0 1 5 1066395 us 70 247189 ns 69 825440 ns 220 96526 us 4 525598 kHz 0 1 7 2042967 us 71 071774 ns 70 909422 ns 275 35643 us 3 631656 kHz 0 5 6055314 us 70 825806 ns 70 736085 ns 233 68525 us 4 279260 kHz 0 5 1220964 us 71 097411 ns 70 708005 ns 218 00013 us 4 587153 kHz 0 5 1116199 us 71 083370 ns 69 742434 ns 220 9734 us 4 525430 kHz I
148. 5 Click Open Recalling Waveforms with SignalVu PC SignalVu PC can recall waveform files saved by Tektronix oscilloscopes and spectrum analyzers It can also read files saved in MATLAB Level 5 format Waveform files can be recalled two ways as Data and setup and as Data only When recalled as Data and setup only the tiq file format opens with all settings and measurements recalled Because only the tiq file is recalled with all settings and measurements you should save any non tiq file as a tiq file once you have recalled the file with SignalVu PC The following tables lists the supported file formats and includes notes about using the files Table 7 RSA5000 RSA6000 SPECMON file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by RSA5000 RSA6000 SPECMON File type liq mat File Contains corrected and Q Contains and Q description time domain data all settings time domain data and measurement setup center frequency sample rate What Open All Settings and v SignalVu PC with Measurements are can do with settings Recalled this format Automatically 4 Sets Span Center Frequency Open as Uses settings from v v data only SignalVu PC when opened Notes This is the native format for Recommend saving as SignalVu PC It contains all tiq file after opening information needed to open and analyze all displays available SignalVu PC Printable Help Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings
149. 500 0 kHz Signal transition Start 3 1 000 ms 500 0 kHz Stop 13 18 ms Enable Mask Test Enables or disables mask testing Start 1 2 3 Sets the starting point for the time zone of interest If you don t want to use all three zones set the Start Time for the unneeded zones to a time after the end of the Measurement Length Stop Sets the end point for the final time zone of interest Limit Sets the mask violation limits for each time zone Mask Time Reference When mask testing is enabled the Mask time reference selection specifies the starting point of the mask You can choose to start the mask test at the trigger point or at the point on the trace where the signal began its transition from its previous settled frequency or phase level to the level you intend to measure This capability is useful because some applications do not have a trigger signal available For those situations where a trigger signal is available the specification for the device under test may require that measurements be referenced to that signal Trace Tab for Settling Time Displays The Traces Tab allows you to set the display characteristics of displayed traces SignalVu PC Printable Help 145 RF Measurements Trace Tab for Settling Time Displays 146 Define Time Params Mask Trace Scale Prefs T poeni 2 Trace Trace 1 v Show Freeze m Average count 2 a Save Trace As Smooth Smooth is a low pass filte
150. 52 m P25 Test Patterns see page 260 Reference Table of Supported P25 Measurements TIA 102 transmitter Tektronix measurement display s value name if measurement different from TIA 102 measurement name Phase 1 Phase 2 RF output power P25 Summary Yes Yes P25 Power vs Time Operating frequency P25 Summary Operating Freq Accuracy Yes Yes accuracy Modulation emission SEM The SEM display can be found in Select Yes Yes spectrum Displays RF Measurements Unwanted emissions Non MCPR The MCPR display can be found in Select Yes Yes spurious adjacent channel Displays gt P25 Analysis power ratio SignalVu PC Printable Help 249 APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis TIA 102 transmitter Tektronix measurement display s value name if measurement different from TIA 102 measurement name Phase 1 Phase 2 Frequency deviation P25 Summary Freq Dev Yes HCPM Modulation fidelity P25 Summary Yes Yes P25 Constellation Symbol rate accuracy P25 Summary Yes Yes Transmitter power and P25 Summary Phase1 Tx Attack Time Yes N A encoder attack time P25 Power vs Time Power Attack Time and Encoder Attack Time Transmitter power and P25 Summary Phase1 Tx Attack Time Busy ldle Yes N A encoder attack time with P25 Power vs Time Power Attack Time Busy Idle busy idle operations and Encoder Attack Time Busy Idle Transmitter throughput P25 Summary Phase1 Tx Throughput Delay Yes N A delay Trans
151. 6 us 0619 031 Item Display element Description 1 Check mark indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Pulse Trace display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Result Use this list to select the measurement to show The measurement chosen here selects the same result to be displayed in the Statistics view and highlighted in the Table view Selecting a result in any of these views causes the same result to be selected in all of them 3 Pulse Selects which pulse result is shown Like the Result this selection is shared with the Statistics and Table views The maximum number of pulses that can be measured is limited to 10000 4 Pulse threshold indicator This green triangle indicates the power threshold used to detect pulses See Settings gt Params gt Power threshold to detect pulses 5 Autoscale Set the axes to values that show all trace points 6 Horizontal offset and scale Located along the bottom edge of the trace display these controls specify the offset and scale on the horizontal axis 7 Top of graph adjustment Sets the power level shown at the top of the graph If the number is greater than the Ref Level a white line will appear in the graph
152. Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Frequency Error 4301 8 Az J Auto Measurement BW 640 0 Au Freq amp BW tab with SOQPSK modulation type selected and Frequency Offset enabled Auto deselected SignalVu PC Printable Help 339 GP Digital Modulation Setting Equalizer Tab Description Frequency Error Frequency Offset When Auto is enabled this readout displays frequency error and the measurement is made at the calculated frequency When Auto is disabled this setting changes to Frequency Offset When set to Frequency Offset this setting is used to demodulate a signal that is not at the center frequency The measurement is made at the user entered offset The Measurement Filter if any specified on the Modulation Params tab is applied about the offset frequency whether set automatically or manually Measurement BW This setting allows you to override the automatic bandwidth calculation and directly enter a bandwidth value If you enter a value for the measurement bandwidth be aware that the actual bandwidth of data provided to the measurement will be at least as wide as the value you request and may be as much as two times wider than requested This override of the selected measurement bandwidth is done so that the instrument uses sufficient bandwidth relative to the chosen symbol rate to ensure good signal quality measurements Frequency Deviation For nFSK modulation types this setting specifies
153. Auto 2 40 0 100 00 dBm 2 poston 0 000 2 Sole 69 853 us v Trace1 show Peak Normal 0 00 dBm dB div 10 0 dB RBW poston Ans M Poston 1 00 Sym v Scale 128 005m 100 00 dam Fu odes esee peer 2 cr 2 0000 GHz Span 110 0 MHz Normally the Measurement Frequency and the Spectrum Center Frequency are locked together so that both have the same setting But in some situations for example where a signal contains a set of channels it is useful to unlock the Measurement Frequency from the Spectrum Center Frequency When the Spectrum Center Frequency is unlocked from the Measurement Frequency you can adjust the Measurement Frequency so that measurements can be taken at different frequencies without resetting the center frequency The following screen capture shows the magenta colored measurement frequency indicator still located at the center frequency 380 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analyzing Data Frequency Tab ems esed Timea Wem 20000 He e Rees 0 00 dim M4 eo b j imu 7 10 8 4 2009 9 43 35 19 bg Peak Normal PeakEVM 5 416 Q 22005ym ES Actual 33 387 us Peak Normal 100 00 dBm 2 Postion 0 000 s Scale 88 853 us 7 Trace 1 Show Peak Normal 0 00 dam 2 dB dv 10 0 dB RBW 1 00 MHz o vew Position T k 100 00 dBm Y Postion 1 00 Sym 2 Scale 128 00 Sym RMS 1 83 amp Peak 3 904 amp 63 00 Sym Autoscale CF 2 01
154. D Total non harmonic distortion Ref Ref is the RMS modulation value stored when the Capture Reference button is pressed Displayed only when Hum amp Noise is enabled Diff Diff is the difference between the current RMS mod value and the Ref value captured previously Displayed only when Hum amp Noise is enabled 1 For AM signal types modulation excursion is Modulation Depth For FM signal types modulation excursion is Frequency Deviation For PM signal types modulation excursion is Phase Deviation For Direct there is no modulation excursion it is actually signal excursion Audio Summary Settings Application Toolbar i The measurement settings for the Audio Summary display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Params Tab see page 296 Specifies signal type Audio Bandwidth RBW RBW filter and Ref Audio Frequency Params2 Tab see page 299 Specifies Harmonics and Non Harmonics measurement parameters Audio Filters Tab see Specifies the audio filter characteristics page 299 Hum Noise Tab see page 304 Specifies whether or not Hum amp Noise is measured and enables the capture of a signal to be used as a reference of the Hum amp Noise measurement SignalVu PC Printable Help 295 Audio Analysis Audio Analysis Measurement Settings Audio Analysis Measurement Settings The control panel tabs in this section are shared by the displays in the Audio An
155. DF Complimentary Cumulative Distribution Function The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF represents the probability that the peak power above average power of a measured signal exceeds a threshold CCDF is a plot of the percent of time that a signal s power value exceeds it average value versus the amount by which it exceeds the average The CCDF plot has a log of probability on the Y axis 100 at the top and dB above average amplitude on the X axis 0 at the left CDMA Acronym for Code Division Multiple Access Center Frequency The frequency corresponding to the center of a frequency span of the analyzer display Check Mark Indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left corner of the display indicates the display for which the acquisition hardware is optimized When you have more than one display open the display with the check mark indicator has control over the acquisition hardware To give a display priority over any others click its title bar When Best for multiple windows 1s selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement CISPR International special committee on radio interference Comit international sp cial des perturbations radio lectriques CW Acronym for Continuous Wave SignalVu PC Printable Help 443 Glossary CW Signal CW Signal Continuous wave
156. DPXogram display 45 Connect to instruments LAN USB 425 Connect to MDO Live Link 425 458 Connect to RSA306 Live Link 425 Connection to an MDO4000B 21 to an RSA306 20 Connectivity 20 Live Link 425 Constellation OFDM 29 P25 34 WLAN 30 Constellation display 308 displaying a second trace 349 Constellation display settings 309 Convergence Equalizer tab 341 correction tables 389 Creating presets 13 CW 443 CW signal 444 D DANL 444 Data file formats 410 Data properties File menu 420 Data Range tab OFDM Analysis displays 225 WLAN Analysis displays 198 dBfs 444 dBm 444 dBmV 444 dBuV 444 De emphasis Audio Filters tab 300 deactivating SignalVu PC 437 decibel 444 Default P25 limits table 270 default settings restore 13 Define Markers 364 Define Peaks tab 365 Define tab 371 Pulsed RF displays 240 Settling Time displays 142 Delta Frequency 36 Delta Markers 364 Demod I amp Q vs Time display settings 312 Demodulation audio 291 detect AM display 85 FM display 92 General Signal Viewing displays 73 PM display 100 Time Overview 51 detection 445 AM display 85 FM display 92 General Signal Viewing displays 73 PM display 100 Time Overview 51 Detection DPX display 43 detector AM display 85 FM display 92 General Signal Viewing displays 73 PM display 100 Time Overview 51 Deviation 33 Diff Audio Summary display 295 Digital Phosphor Spectrum
157. Description 1 Top of graph Sets the EVM value that appears at the top of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Bottom of graph Sets the EVM value that appears at the bottom of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Pos Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 9 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position OFDM EVM Settings Application Toolbar i i The settings for the OFDM EVM display are shown in the following table 210 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Spectral Flatness Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 223 Advanced Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 224 Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 225 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Trace see page 227 Enables you to freeze the displa
158. Displays gt Measurements gt OFDM Measurements are OFDM Channel Response see page 205 OFDM Constellation see page 208 m OFDM EVM see page 209 W OFDM Spectral Flatness see page 211 m OFDM Mag Error see page 213 m OFDM Phase Error see page 215 m OFDM Power see page 217 B OFDM Summary see page 219 B OFDM Symbol Table see page 221 OFDM Channel Response Display The OFDM Channel Response display plots the channel response magnitude or phase versus the subcarrier or frequency Here the channel refers to all sources of signal frequency response impairment up to the analyzer input including the transmitter itself as well as any transmission medium through which the signal travels between the transmitter and the analyzer To show the OFDM Channel Response display 1 Ifyou are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step 2 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 3 Inthe Select Displays dialog select OFDM Analysis in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Chan Response icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Chan Response icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Chan Response display 6 Setthe Frequency appropriate for the signal 7 Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel
159. Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 3 From the Measurements box select GP Digital Modulation 4 Double click the Constellation icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Constellation icon to the Selected displays box tA Click the OK button This shows the Constellation display 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file 308 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Constellation Settings Elements of the Constellation Display Displays Markers Settings Trig Aca Ana Freq 2 00000 GHz gt RefLev 0 00 dBm Time Mag 0 998 Phase 134 8 Symbol 12 4 Freq Eror 1 112 Hz Auto Marker MR 12 00 Sym Value 00 RMS 0 278 Peak EVM 0 521 49 00 e f o um EE Stopped Item RA Gis 3 00 Mrz Acg Lengen 147 540 US Display element Real Time Free Run ifef Int Atten 25 dB 0169 024 Description Check mark indicator Marker Readout The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Constellation display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement Located to the left of the con
160. Error Settings 00 cece cece nee eee semen 214 OFDM Phase Error OFDM Phase Error Display 5 eere bee rre e eR ends OET daceeeetershendaeves tour 215 OFDM Phase Error Settings coner 0 0 0 ccc cece cece PEE E ee messe e hne nens 216 OFDM Power OFDM Power Display ertet eterne eee an EE eoe ete IDEEN TERR en mu ret tape d 217 OPDM POWSr Set ngs nee tero eere retra rU ERE IAEUe S Te TORRE CF E Nbr oH Re ene e ined 218 OFDM Summary OFDM Summary Display rr rS EE REN ER suede ceviad PERSE RET DUE S redd 219 OFDM Summary Settngs es cents aH ETRAS EUER TERRE ES INE RE Edere pb EE SYT AN TR OS i oa 220 OFDM Symb Table OFDM Symbol Table Display 0 0 0 ccc cece cence nee I e me emen emen 221 OFDM Symbol Table Settings csse me meme mesh nes 222 Common Controls for OFDM Analysis Displays OFDM Analysis Shared Measurement Settings sess 222 iv SignalVu PC Printable Help Table of Contents Pulsed RF OVERVIEW FERT 231 Pulse Table Display Pulse Table Display uiii see tae cones d eR EET Rer E A eo EEEE VETERA REDI slaaneneuneess 231 Pulse Table Settin 9S ie eere reete oerte i e e D ER e VAN IARE CARA ORA Fre Vie eh a e d de 232 Pulse Trace Display Pulse Trace Display ease ntis ssi eo Otia conte eO Eau eO RR A EN SRES ARTE S OUI du wA o aen 233 Pulse Trace S Cttin GS 5c cs Maan eer rE E E E EET E E 235 Pulse Statistics Pulse Statistics Display i ec ped d eedem cas cabin Geena era gu ERE
161. Flatness value that appears at the top of the graph in dB div This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 Bottom of graph Shows the Flatness value set at the bottom of the graph 4 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 5 Posn Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 6 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position WLAN Spectral Flatness Settings Application Toolbar x The settings for the WLAN Spectral Flatness display are shown in the following table 186 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements Settings tab WLAN Summary Display Description Modulation Params see page 195 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Analysis Params see page 196 Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis NOTE The Units control on this tab only affects the Analysis Length AFAIK Use the Units control in the Prefs tab to affect the displays Trace see page 200
162. Frequency Offset or Bandwidth click within the value box and use the front panel knob or your keyboard to set the value Click Close to save your changes NOTE Frequency Offset is the difference between the center frequency of the selected channel and the Measurement Frequency All channels Main or Adjacent are specified by their offset from the Measurement Frequency 13 To enable and define power limits check the Enable Power Limits box and enter the desired Upper and Lower limits You can read more about power limits here see page 114 G ag Frequency Offset 262 500 kHz Bandwidth 6 000 kHz LowerLimit 80 00 dB UpperLimit 80 00 dB Enable Power Limits 112 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio Display 14 After you have configured the Main and Adjacent channels click the close button ea in the Settings panel or the Settings button to remove the settings panel 15 Click the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Viewing Results MCPR measurement results are displayed both in the spectrum graph and in a table below the spectrum display Individual Main channel power measurements appear in the graph under their channel identifiers Individual adjacent channel power ratios also appear in the graph under the adjacent channel identifier Displays Markers Settings rn aca Aana Freq 1
163. Help WLAN Measurements Settings Analysis Params Tab WLAN Description Burst Selection Index Allows specifying the burst you want to measure when multiple bursts are present in an acquisition Index number of the first burst is 1 second burst is 2 etc Frequency Error When the Auto box is checked the analysis determines the Frequency Error and the measured Frequency Error is displayed When the Auto box is unchecked the entered value is used by the analysis as a fixed frequency offset This is useful when the exact frequency offset of the signal is known Symbol Analysis Offset Specifies the analysis offset in the symbol interval This value is a percentage of the Guard Interval The allowable range is 100 to 0 100 positions the FFT to start at the beginning of the Guard Interval 0 positions it to start at the end of the Guard Interval Default value is 50 which usually gives the best measurement results Swap amp Q Select the checkbox to swap the and Q components of a signal This compensates the input signal for spectral inversion Equalizer Training Specifies the method used to estimate channel frequency response and equalization This control can be used to diagnose changes in frequency response over the signal packet Preamble The instrument uses only the Preamble to estimate channel frequency response This response is then used to equalize the entire signal packet
164. L Prx is an input expected from the user and this can be given from the Analysis Params tab in the Settings control panel The absolute level of the off slot power is then calculated as Porr Prx Ponrex Porrret dBm SignalVu PC Printable Help 259 APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis B This measurement is only done for bursty HCPM data and not for High Deviation or Low Deviation test patterns B The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail B This measurement result is not shown in the P25 Summary display when trigger measurements are chosen NOTE Read about important information related to HCPM bursty data measurements here see page 262 HCPM Transmitter Logical Channel Power Envelope Phase 2 HCPM This is a measure of how well a portable radio controls the transmitter power as it inserts an inbound HCPM TDMA burst into a frame on a voice channel This measurement applies to inbound signals only B All scalar results relevant to this measurement are shown both in P25 Power vs Time display and the P25 Summary display B The measurement results and the duration in which the measurements are made are shown graphically in P25 Power vs Time display The results are grouped under Power Info and Time Info in the table at the bottom of the display B This measurement is only done for bursty HCPM data and not for High Deviation or Low Deviati
165. LAN 30 EVM tab WLAN Analysis displays 203 EVM vs Time display 312 EVM vs Time Settings 313 export 445 External Gain value 389 External Gain Loss Correction tab 389 External Loss Tables 389 Eye Diagram P25 34 Eye Diagram display settings 316 F Fall Time 34 FastFrame 445 FFT 446 File formats 410 file formats supported waveform 404 File Menu 417 filter 446 Filter Parameter GP Digital Modulation displays 335 Filter Shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 Find tab GP Digital Modulation displays 346 finding bursts in data GP Digital Modulation displays 346 Index Flatness OFDM 29 WLAN 30 FlatTop CW ampl Filter Shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 FM 446 FM display 87 FM measurements 33 frame 446 Freq amp BW tab RF I amp Q vs Time display 71 Freq amp BW Tab GP Digital Modulation displays 339 Freq amp Span tab General Signal Viewing displays 72 Freq Dev vs Time P25 34 Freq Deviation 33 Freq Diff Phase Diff setting 242 Freq Error 33 Freq Estimation tab Pulsed RF displays 245 Freq Span amp RBW tab Channel Power amp ACPR display MCPR display 117 RF Measurements displays 162 Freq domain Linearity setting 240 frequency 446 Frequency DPX display 37 frequency band 446 Frequency Dev vs Time P25 display 276 Frequency Dev vs Time P25 Settings 278 Frequency Deviation vs Time settings 318 frequency domain view 446 frequency drift 447 Frequency Erro
166. Occupied BW amp x dB BW Display 1 Select Add This displays the Edit Channel Parameters dialog box 2 Use the knob to enter values for the Frequency Offset Bandwidth and upper and lower Limits as required The Frequency Offset is measured from the Meas Frequency of the Main channels 3 Click the Close button when you have finished making changes Deleting Channels To delete a main channel 1 Select the Number entry box 2 Usethe knob to reduce the number of channels or enter a new value using the front panel keypad 3 Click the Close button when you have finished making changes To delete an adjacent channel 1 Select the channel to be deleted in the channel definition table 2 Select Delete This removes the selected channel from the channel table 3 Click the Close button when you have finished making changes Occupied BW amp x dB BW Display The Occupied BW display shows the bandwidth within which 99 a user defined value the default is 99 of the power transmitted within the measurement bandwidth falls To show the Occupied BW display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file 2 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 3 Inthe Select Displays dialog select RF Measurements in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the Occupied Bandwidth icon or select the icon and click Add The Occupied Bandwidth icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will n
167. Phase Error display are shown in the following table 216 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Power Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 223 Advanced Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 224 Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for page 225 analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Trace see page 227 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 227 Specifies the vertical subcarrier and symbols scale and position settings Prefs Tab see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed OFDM Power Display The OFDM Power display shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Power values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency To show the OFDM Power display 1 2 3 4 weg oo If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM Analysis in the Measure
168. Preamble Data The instrument makes an initial channel frequency response estimate from the Preamble It then estimates the channel response for each data symbol using the decoded data content to derive equalization for each symbol individually This allows compensation for time varying channel response over the packet Data Modulation Allows choice of automatic or manual method of data symbol modulation identification as follows Auto Detect estimates the modulation from the data symbol IQ content Auto from SIG sets the modulation as indicated by the embedded SIG preamble symbol format data Manual allows specifying the modulation type regardless of the signal content Pilot tracking Subcarrier derotation Specifies if pilot subcarriers should be used to correct amplitude phase and symbol timing variations over the packet The choices available are Phase Amplitude and Timing The default setting is Phase correction enabled Amplitude and Timing correction disabled Allows some displays to show subcarriers with or without Gamma subcarrier phase rotation removed Gamma phase rotation is applied to 802 11n and 802 11ac subcarriers in defined subranges depending on the selected Channel Bandwidth gt 40 MHz Only Constellation and Symbol Table results are affected by this control When the box is unchecked the rotation is not removed which provides a direct view of the physical modulation on the channel When the
169. QT iqt in the Open dialog Select the desired file and click OK to open the file 3 Save the file by selecting File gt Save As and set the file type to Acq data with setup TIQ tiq Save the file by clicking OK Saving the file in tiq format preserves all of the settings in the analyzer and associates them with the data set After saving the file in tiq format recall the saved tiq file and add measurements and change settings The iqt file format contains I and Q waveforms plus instrument amplitude phase correction data analysis bandwidth and center frequency When SignalVu PC opens an iqt file the amplitude and phase SignalVu PC Printable Help Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures corrections are applied to the IQ data to produce a corrected data set The span and center frequency information present in the iqt file are used to set the SignalVu PC span and center frequency However no information about analysis length offset or type 1s preserved in the iqt file Opening mat files saved by RSA5000 6000 SPECMON series and third party waveforms To open a mat file from these instruments 1 Select File gt Preset Main 2 Select File gt Recall and select Acq Data with Setup MAT mat in the Open dialog Select the desired file and click OK to open the file 3 Save the file by selecting File gt Save As and set the file type to Acq data with setup TIQ
170. Readouts Measurement Description Freq Error The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the analyzer OBW Level left The signal level at the left edge of the occupied bandwidth OBW Level right The signal level at the right edge of the occupied bandwidth OBW Ref Power The total power measured within the measurement bandwidth x dB BW Ref Power The peak power measured within the measurement bandwidth SignalVu PC Printable Help 123 RF Measurements Occupied Bandwidth Changing the Occupied Bandwidth Settings see page 124 Occupied Bandwidth Bandwidth within which some defined percentage of the power transmitted on a single channel lies Occupied BW amp x dB BW Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings The control panel tabs for the Occupied Bandwidth display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Freq amp RBW see page 162 Allows you to specify the Center Frequency Step size and RBW Parameters see page 125 Allows you to specify the Occupied BW Power x dB level Measurement BW enable averaging and the Max Hold function Scale see page 166 Allows you to set the vertical and horizontal scale parameters Prefs see page 167 The Prefs tab enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display 124 Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Parameters Tab Parameter
171. Replay Toolbar Displays or hides the Replay toolbar that appears below the main tool bar Replay Acq Data 144 0 P b 2 Select All Select Q9 1 20 9 21 2011 11 27 36 27 Replay toolbar SignalVu PC Printable Help 387 Analyzing Data Replay Toolbar Item Description Replay Selects data type to be replayed Select DPX Spectra to replay a DPXogram Select Acq Data for all other types of replay Replays the first record in the selected set I4 4 Replays the previous record in the selected set e Replays the current record in the selected set gt Replays the next record in the selected set Replays the last record in the selected set rl Replays all records in the selected set a Replays all records in the selected set continuously until stopped Pauses replay Pressing pause suspends replay with the current record Selecting pause again starts Replay with the next record Stops replay Starting any replay action after pressing stop starts a new Replay action a rather than continuing from the record at which the previous replay action was stopped Se All Pressing Select all selects all records in history for replay Selecting Select all resets the elect Start and Stop values on the Select data records tab of the Replay control panel Pressing Select displays the Select data records tab of the Replay control panel The select Select data records tab allows you to select records from acquisition hi
172. Replaying SignalVu PC is analyzing recalled waveform or acquisition records Stopped If Stopped is displayed no analysis being performed This can occur because the Stop button has been pressed when Replay is set to Loop or because the software has just been launched and no analysis has been performed yet Showing or Hiding the Status Bar B Select View gt Status Bar to toggle the display of the Status bar Run Menu The Run menu is available only when connected to an RSA306 Spectrum Analyzer or an MDO4000B instrument The Run menu provides access to commands that control the signal acquisition SignalVu PC Printable Help 423 Reference Replay Menu Command Description Run Single Sets the acquisition mode to Single and runs one measurement acquisition cycle If acquisition mode is already Single selecting Run Single begins a new measurement acquisition cycle If acquisition mode is Continuous selecting Run Single halts the current measurement acquisition cycle after it completes Run Continuous Sets the acquisition mode to Continuous and starts the measurement acquisition cycle If acquisition mode is already Continuous selecting Run Continuous toggles the measurement acquisition cycle between Run and Stop Resume Restarts data acquisition but does not reset accumulated results such as Average or MaxHold This allows you to stop acquisitions temporarily then continue If the accumulation is already compl
173. S s Continuous 7 17 9 nsec Sample 40 00 MHz Capacity 1 s 1 906 us 56 6 MSamples 107 Samples Using 1 91 us 107 Samples 0 0 of capacity SignalVu PC Printable Help 393 Controlling the Acquisition of Data Acquisition Data Tab Description IQ Sampling Parameters see Sets the controls for real time acquisition page 395 Frequency Reference see Specifies the source of the reference frequency page 396 Record see page 396 Records the acquisition data directly to a file Run Run mode specifies whether the analyzer will stop acquiring data after it completes a measurement sequence Continuous In Continuous mode once the analyzer completes a measurement sequence it begins another m Single In Single mode once the analyzer completes a measurement sequence it stops NOTE A measurement sequence can require more than one acquisition If the analyzer is configured to average 100 traces together the measurement sequence will not be completed until 100 traces have been acquired and averaged Acquisition Data The Acquisition Data tab lists the Sample Rate and Record length of the recalled acquisition data file Acquisition Data Sample Rate 3 125 GS s Record Length 165 177 kSamples 394 SignalVu PC Printable Help Controlling the Acquisition of Data IQ Sampling Parameters IQ Sampling Parameters The IQ Sampling Parameters tab enables you to set the controls for real time acquis
174. SignalVu PC Vector Signal Analysis Software Printable Help DELETED TE Tektronix 077 0720 03 S SignalVu PC Vector Signal Analysis Software Printable Help www tektronix com Tektronix 077 0720 03 S Copyright Tektronix All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Online help version 076 0281 03 Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14150 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support n North America call 1 800 833 9200 Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Table of Contents Table of Contents Welcome ASIE ETNIDUTT O 1 About the Tektronix Signal Analyzer Product evil D 3 Options DII RPM m 3 Documentation and support genre n eeen N E NEENA EE A T A AE E 3 Video titorial MNT EE 4 Orientation Selecting Files for Analysis recreio mieri a onn err ER EE E OTE
175. Standard defined response as well as completely user definable filter response Filtering can be applied as needed to modify the audio spectrum result before measurement to remove unwanted spurs or noise Flexible control parameters are provided to allow setting the Audio Bandwidth for analysis the Resolution Bandwidth RBW and RBW filter type of the spectral analysis and number and level qualifications for Harmonic and Non harmonic spur detection Multiple spectrum averaging can be enabled to provide a smoothed spectrum for results with less variability than single spectrum results The Audio Spectrum display shows the frequency spectrum waveform with detected harmonic and non harmonic components identified by markers and a corresponding table of frequency and level values for the spur components The markers and table provide easy visualization of the significant spurs and their relation to the fundamental Audio frequency signal Audio Demod Tab Menu Bar Setup gt Audio Application Toolbar LP Selecting Audio displays the Audio control panel The Audio control panel is only available when SignalVu PC is connected to an RSA306 NOTE Audio Demodulation is available only in real time acquisition mode not swept acquisition and the Trigger mode must be set to Free Run not Triggered SignalVu PC Printable Help 291 Audio Analysis Audio Spectrum Display Audio Audio Demod L Demodulation Volume S
176. Summary display 1 2 3 4 9 c 9 U If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Summary icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Summary icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Summary display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 219 OFDM Analysis Elements of the Display OFDM Summary Settings SD ROT x J Frequency 5 90000 GHz RefLev 0 00 dBm FRR pp Replay O Run 802 11a g j Symbols 13 Frequency Error 1 75 Hz Symbol Clk Error 0 502 ppm IQ Origin Offset 74 31dB CPE 1 509 Average Power 24 31 dBm Peak to Average 9 53 dB Subcarriers All Pilots Data RMSEVM 35 17dB 36 43 dB 35 08 dB 1 744 1 509 1 763 Peak EVM 2375dB 27 80 dB 23 75 dB 6 492 4 074 6 492 at symbol 1 5 1 at subcarrier 26
177. Table Settings secs ese estes e heh a rra e e an ERE E e eR TEN densae nd 275 P25 Frequency Deviation Vs Time P25 Frequency Dev Vs Time Display 0 cece cece ence eee nee me meme mener 276 P25 Frequency Dev Vs Time Settings sess se emen 278 Common Controls for P25 Analysis Displays P25 Analysis Shared Measurement Settings sss menn 279 SignalVu PC Printable Help V Table of Contents Audio Analysis OVEIVICW sons se aE TR E E A A E E N 291 Audio Spectrum Audio Spectrum Displ y 55 5 tronie REEL Pede euer E A E ETE EE 292 Audio Spectrum Settings icasi issseeeseeces eser edad conn ee dsadousde edet ara E ERR AER REN dA Rear a 293 Audio Summary Audio Summary Display eere ee rea reor ke epa mete re ea PIER I E TET ER sour 294 Audio Summary Settings e esdesa tee ioes anainte KNEE TOR DO E er HA ee pae Den DOO ER A ERA SERRE ERA 295 Common Controls for Audio Analysis Displays Audio Analysis Measurement Settings csse esee eese 296 GP Digital Modulation OVErVIEW croio dee s we EEEE tadana ana EEEE E EEEE EEE E E E EEE EG 307 Constellation Constellation Display EET 308 Constellation Set mngs 2 roine eo REO a antes PEE NERIS RE EAT EE TIE Ead 309 Demod I amp Q vs Time Demod I amp Q vs Time Display eie ceceee totu erento opererk Dd ED e UE TOpbR dU UE DE 310 Demod I amp OQ vs Time Settings 5 cere I REESE HOS Tees E RUE TES ERES E EE d e 312 EVM vs Time EVM vs Time Displa
178. The symbol number index for column 3 is 131 which equals 0 The symbol number index for column 4 is 132 which equals 1 This pattern continues to the end of the row WLAN Symbol Table Settings Application Toolbar zi The settings for the WLAN Symbol Table display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 195 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 196 Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Prefs see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Analysis Shared Measurement Settings Application Toolbar z The control panel tabs in this section are shared between the displays in the WLAN Analysis folder Setup 7 Displays Some tabs are shared by all the displays some tabs are shared by only a subset of displays The settings available on some tabs change depending on the selected display 194 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements Modulation Params Tab WLAN Common controls for WLAN analysi
179. Three readouts can appear here depending on settings Time update Spectrums line and Overlap See Time Scale Status Readout see page 59 Time Scale Status Readout Three types of readouts can appear in the display depending on settings Time update Displays minutes seconds when Spectrum Monitor is selected in the Settings gt Time amp Freq Scale tab in the Vertical Time section Spectrums line Displays an integer number when vertical scale is Normal and each line contains the results from one or more frequency transforms whether zoomed out or not m Overlap Displays the overlap percentage when vertical scale is Normal and each line s transform shares some points with the transforms of lines before and after it zoomed in Overlap can only be done when the Analysis Length gt 2x RBW frame length The Spectrogram can show results from one or multiple acquisitions and it can show one or multiple lines for each acquisition Changing the Spectrogram Display Settings see page 59 Spectrogram Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar e The Setup settings for the Spectrogram display are visible when Spectrogram is the selected display Settings tab Description Freq amp Span see page 72 Sets frequency and span parameters for the Spectrogram display BW see page 76 Sets Resolution Bandwidth and windowing parameters Trace see page 60 Sets Trace display parameters
180. Time display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Top of Graph Sets the phase value indicated at the top of the graph Changing the top value affects the bottom of graph readout Also note that the top of graph setting interacts with the internal vertical scale setting which is not user settable such that the range between the top and bottom of the graph increases or decreases automatically 3 Position Specifies the phase value shown at the center of the graph display 4 Bottom Readout Displays the value of the phase value shown at the bottom of graph 5 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 6 Position Displays the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 7 Scale Adjusts the span of the graph in symbols 8 Freq Error Displays the difference between the maximum and minimum measured 332 values of the signal frequency during the Measurement Time The displayed frequency error is followed by either Auto or Manual This indicates the selected carrier frequency detection method see Settings gt Freq amp BW Signal Vu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Trellis Diagram Settings Changing the Trellis Diagram Settings see page 333 Trellis Diagram Settings Menu Bar
181. Tx Power and Encoder Attack Time Phasel Tx Power and Encoder Attack Time with Busy Idle Operations Phase1 Tx Throughtput Delay Phase1 Transient Frequency Behavior The following image shows the tab for Phase 1 HCPM Inbound signals Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Trace Scale Prefs Trig Meas Trigger Measurements None None Time Alignment tOB_sync measurement Time Alignment t error 0 calculation Time Alignment t error 1 calculation Settings Description Trigger Measurements Select the trigger measurement test SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Prefs Tab P25 Prefs Tab P25 The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the P25 Analysis displays Not all settings on the Prefs tab shown below appear for every P25 display The Summary display does not have a Prefs tab Modulation Params l Analysis Params l Analysis Time rest Patterns Trace Scale Prefs Trig Meas Radix Binary Y v Show graticule V Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Setting Description Show graticule Shows or hides the graticule Show Marker readout in graph Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area selected marker Radix Specifies how symbols are displayed in the Symbol Table display and in the Marker readout in the display There are three choices for Radix Binary 00 01 1
182. X Spectra of the current acquisition The Stop value is reset to the last DPX Spectra in the current acquisition SignalVu PC Printable Help Analyzing Data Acquisition Info Tab Replay Menu Displays information about acquisition settings and sets the number of decimal places used for displaying the time stamp Timestamp decimal places 2 Delete all Acq Delete all DPX data spectra Acq Center Freq 1 90 GHz Preamp Acq Bandwidth 85 0 MHz RF Atten 15 00 dB Sampling Rate 150 MHz Ref Level 0 00 dBm Dither On Acq Length 5 19 us Replay Speed Tab Sets the speed at which data records are replayed Slow Fast Replay Menu The Replay menu provides controls that let you choose how to replay acquisitions The replay function enables you to in effect rerun an analysis while applying different measurements to the same set of acquisition data Menu item Description Acq Data Select Acq Data to replay acquisitions DPX Spectra Select DPX Spectra to replay a DPXogram display Replay all selected records Replays the sequence of records specified by Start and Stop on the Select data records tab Loop overall selected records Replays the sequence of records specified by Start and Stop on the Select data records tab continuously Replay current record Replays the currently selected acquisition or frame Replay from selected Displays a submenu that you use to
183. a specific signal quantity captured by the Capture reference now button with the current measured value of that quantity For Direct signal types set on the Params tab the Signal Level is captured and compared The Diff measurement is SignalLevel current SignalLevel Ref in dB For AM FM and PM signal types the RMS modulation value related to Modulation Depth Frequency Deviation or Phase Deviation is captured and compared The Diff measurement is 20 x logio RMS current RMS Ref in dB SignalVu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Prefs Tab Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the Audio Spectrum display Params1 Params2 Audio Filters Scale Prefs Units daH Trace points eor V Show graticule v Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Show Non Harm Threshold LIne Ony x Setting Description Units Specifies the vertical scale units The units available depend on the signal type selected Show graticule Select to display or hide the graticule Trace points Sets the number of trace points used for marker measurements and for results export Show Marker readout in graph Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area selected marker Show Non Harm Threshold Shows or hides the non harmonic threshold line SignalVu PC Printable Help 305 Audio Analysis Prefs Tab 306 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Di
184. ab Options control panel 18 primary marker 451 Print 421 Print Preview 421 Processing tab SEM display 156 PSK 451 Pulse analysis application presets 16 Pulse measurements 231 Pulse Statistics display 235 Pulse Statistics display settings 237 Pulse Table display 231 Pulse Table settings 232 Pulse Trace display 233 Pulse Trace display settings 235 Pulse Width 34 Pulse Pulse Freq Difference 35 Pulse Pulse Phase Difference 35 pulses how many can be analyzed 239 QAM 451 Quadrature Error 31 R Range file 410 SignalVu PC Printable Help RBW 452 Channel Power amp ACPR display MCPR display 117 real time analysis 451 real time bandwidth 451 real time seamless capture 452 recalling Presets 15 Record 396 red text settling time measurements 136 Ref Audio Summary display 295 Ref Channel tab SEM display 157 Ref level Internal Settings tab 389 Reference Filter GP Digital Modulation displays 335 Reference Level 452 Repetition Interval 34 Repetition Rate 34 Replay all selected records Replay menu 385 Replay control panel 383 Replay current record Replay menu 385 Replay from selected Replay menu 385 Replay menu 385 Replay Speed tab 385 Replay toolbar 387 Replay menu 386 Reset Equalization Equalizer tab 341 residual FM incidental FM 452 residual response 452 results saving 403 RF Channel Power measurement 107 RF I amp Q vs Time display 69 RF I amp Q vs T
185. about the Tektronix YouTube channel here see page 4 USB connection To establish a Live Link connection using USB perform the following procedures in the order given 1 Check that the MDO4000B is on 2 Connect a USB cable to the MDO 3 Connect the other end of that USB cable to the PC NOTE Your PC may notify you that it has found a new USB device and has loaded the device drivers If you see these notifications wait until the drivers are loaded before continuing to the next step 4 Double click the SignalVu PC icon on the Desktop to start the application 5 Click Live Link on the menu bar to view the drop down menu NOTE See Elements of the Display see page 9 for information about menus and toolbars 6 Select Connect To Instrument You should see the USB connected MDO in the Connect To Instrument list NOTE If the PC is currently connected by LAN or USB to another MDO4000B that connection will also show in the Connect To Instrument list You must select Disconnect From Instrument to end that connection before connecting to the newly found instrument 7 Ifyou do not see the USB MDO click Search for Instrument TekVISA is now searching for instruments A notification will briefly appear stating that the instrument was found Check that the newly found instrument now appears in the Connect To Instrument list 8 Select the instrument 9 A Connect Status dialog box will appear to confirm the instrum
186. ace selected by the Trace setting Present for the Constellation display only Content Selects whether to display the trace as vectors points connected by lines points symbols only without lines or lines lines drawn between symbols but no symbols are displayed The choices available depend on the display Q Offset For traces with offset modulation OQPSK and SOQPSK this setting enables the trace to be displayed with Q offset or without Q offset Choices available are Remove Q offset Include Q Offset and Use Shared Pref Selecting Use Shared Pref causes the analyzer to add or remove Q offset according to the Remove Q Offset setting located on the Prefs tab Setting the Q Offset on the Traces tab changes the Q offset only for the Constellation display If other GP Digital Modulation displays are shown they will use the use the Remove Q Offset setting on the Prefs tab regardless of the Q Offset setting on the traces tab for the Constellation display The Q Offset setting is available only when the modulation type is set to OQPSK or SOQPSK Points symbol Select how many points to use between symbols when connecting the dots Values 1 2 4 8 Symbol point location Selects whether to evaluate the symbol value at the center or the end of the eye opening This control is only present for some of the supported modulation types Phase Multiplier Sets the multiplication constant for the phase multiplication displ
187. adjusts their position Zooms the graph area about the selected point Right click in the graph display at a point of interest and drag to increase or decrease the span about the point of interest Span Zoom adjusts the span control CF Pan Adjusts the Center Frequency according to horizontal movement eJ Zoom Adjusts horizontal and vertical scale of the graph The first direction with enough movement becomes the primary scale of adjustment Adjustment in the secondary direction does not occur until a threshold of 30 pixels of movement is crossed Dragging to the left or down zooms out and displays a smaller waveform increases the scale value Dragging to the right or up zooms in and displays a larger waveform decreases the scale value e Pan Adjusts horizontal and vertical position of the waveform The first direction with enough movement becomes the primary direction of movement Movement in the secondary direction does not occur until a threshold of 30 pixels of movement is crossed Reset Scale Marker to peak Returns the horizontal and vertical scale and position settings to their default values Moves the selected marker to the highest peak If no marker is turned on this control automatically adds a marker Add marker Defines a new marker located at the horizontal center of the graph All markers off Removes all markers SignalVu PC Markers Menu The SignalVu PC Marke
188. al Modulation User Filter File Format Gaussian BT 0 5 Row 1 to 18 Row 19 to 36 Row 37 to 54 Row 55 to 68 Rate 0 00191127 0 0 978572 0 0 000401796 0 8 0 00390625 0 0 917004 0 0 000172633 0 Filterl FilterQ 0 00764509 0 0 822878 0 7 10E 05 0 2 33E 10 0 0 0143282 0 0 707107 0 2 80E 05 0 9 11E 10 0 0 0257149 0 0 581862 0 1 06E 05 0 3 42E 09 0 0 0441942 0 0 458502 0 3 81E 06 0 1 23E 08 0 0 0727328 0 0 345977 0 1 32E 06 0 4 21E 08 0 0 114626 0 0 25 0 4 37E 07 0 1 39E 07 0 0 172989 0 0 172989 0 1 39E 07 0 4 37E 07 0 0 25 0 0 114626 0 4 21E 08 0 1 32E 06 0 0 345977 0 0 0727328 0 1 23E 08 0 3 81E 06 0 0 458502 0 0 0441942 0 3 42E 09 0 1 06E 05 0 0 581862 0 0 0257149 0 9 11E 10 0 2 80E 05 0 0 707107 0 0 0143282 0 2 33E 10 0 7 10E 05 0 0 822878 0 0 00764509 0 0 000172633 0 0 917004 0 0 00390625 0 0 000401796 0 0 978572 0 0 00191127 0 0 000895512 0 1 0 0 000895512 0 SignalVu PC Printable Help 359 GP Digital Modulation User Filter File Format 360 SignalVu PC Printable Help Marker Measurements Using Markers Using Markers Markers are indicators in the display that you can position on a trace to measure values for the X and Y axes such as frequency power and time A Marker always displays its position and if enabled will display the difference between its position and that of the Marker Reference MR You can display up to five markers including the reference marker Marke
189. al and the ideal reference signal Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Power shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Power values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency SignalVu PC Printable Help 29 Taking Measurements 30 WLAN measurements Measurement Available Measurements Description Channel Response Plots the channel response magnitude or phase versus the subcarrier or frequency Here the channel refers to all sources of signal frequency response impairment up to the analyzer input including the transmitter itself as well as any transmission medium through which the signal travels between the transmitter and the analyzer Constellation Measure of the signal power leaking from the main channel into adjacent channels EVM The normalized RMS value of the error vector between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal over the analysis length The EVM is generally measured on symbol or chip instants and is reported in units of percent and dB EVM is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed These estimates are made over the analysis length Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Flatness Ratio of the peak power in the transmitted signal to the average power in the transmitted signal Mag Error The RMS magnitude difference between the measured
190. ale and position 5 Scale indicators Shows the vertical scale 6 Autoscale button Resets the horizontal scale to display the entire acquisition record and the vertical scale to show all trace points 7 Horizontal offset Adjusts the horizontal offset 8 Results Timeline This fuchsia line indicates the portion of the record actually used for calculating the selected result For example if a pulse measurement is selected it shows the period of the specific pulse For a constellation display it shows the points included in the demodulation 9 Amplitude vs Time graph The trace represents the entire acquisition record at full horizontal scale The graph indicates the Analysis Length or Spectrum Length on the graph with a darker background 10 Horizontal Scale Adjusts the span of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the acquisition record by adjusting the offset 11 Spectrum Length and Offset This red line indicates the Spectrum Length and Offset The longer the time Indicator red line top of the longer the bar Adjusting the offset shifts the bar left or right graph 12 Analysis Length and Offset The blue line indicates the Analysis Length and Offset The longer the time Indicator blue line top of graph below red line the longer the bar Adjusting the offset shifts the bar left or right NOTE The area with black background not gray in the Amplitude vs Time Graph
191. alue format Loading an External Loss Table To load an external loss table file 1 Click Edit to display the Table Editor 2 Click Load to display the Open dialog box 3 Navigate to the location of the desired file select it and click Open 4 Click OK SignalVu PC Printable Help 391 Amplitude Corrections External Gain Loss Correction Tab 392 SignalVu PC Printable Help Controlling the Acquisition of Data Acquire Acquire Menu Bar Setup gt Acquire Application Toolbar Selecting Acquire displays the Acquire control panel The Acquire control panel changes based on whether you are connected to an RSA306 or not Acquire RSA306 not connected The Acquire control panel contains the Acquisition Data tab This is an information only tab that displays the sample rate and record length of the recalled acquisition data file Acquire Acquisition Data Sample Rate 3 125 GS s Signal Input RF Record Length 165 177 kSamples Signal Input The Signal Input control is not used by SignalVu PC Setting Description Acquisition Data see Displays the sample rate and record length reported by the oscilloscope page 394 Acquire RSA306 connected Selecting Acquire displays the Acquire control panel These settings control the hardware acquisition parameters for the RSA306 signal analyzer Acquire IQ Sampling Parameters t Frequency Reference Record Run e Adjust All Auto recommends v 56 0 M
192. alue shown at the center of the graph display 4 Bottom Readout Displays the value indicated by the bottom of graph 9 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 6 Position Displays the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 7 Scale Adjusts the span of the graph in symbols 8 Freq Error Displays the difference between the maximum and minimum measured values of the signal frequency during the Measurement Time The displayed frequency error is followed by either Auto or Manual This indicates the selected carrier frequency detection method see Settings gt Freq amp BW SignalVu PC Printable Help 315 GP Digital Modulation Eye Diagram Settings Changing Eye Diagram Settings see page 316 Eye Diagram Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar i The settings for the Eye Diagram display are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Eye Diagram display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 335 Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings for frequency error measurement BW and Freque
193. alysis application preset opens the following displays m DPX The DPX display is opened with the maximum available span m Time Overview Shows amplitude vs time over the analysis period Pulse Table This shows a full report for the user selected pulse measurements B Pulse Trace Shows the trace of the selected pulse and a readout of the selected measurement from the pulse table You can make a selected pulse and measurement appear in the Pulse Trace display by highlighting it in the Pulse Measurement Table Key pulse related parameters that are set by the Pulse Analysis application preset are Measurement Filter No Filter Max BW Measurement Bandwidth This is set to the maximum real time bandwidth of the instrument NOTE The label on the Measurement Bandwidth setting is just Bandwidth Like the main instrument Preset command and the other application presets the Pulse Analysis application preset also sets most other instrument controls to default values B Power threshold to detect pulses This is set to 10 dBc Minimum OFF time between pulses This is set to 400 000 ns o ensure a good probability of catching several pulses for typical signals Max number of pulses Check this box to limit the number of pulses to measure To use the Pulse Analysis preset assuming the Preset action is set to Show list in the Presets tab of the Options control panel 1 Select Presets gt Application Select Pulse Ana
194. alysis folder Setup gt Displays Common controls for Audio Analysis displays Settings tab Description Params1 Tab see page 296 Specifies characteristics about the audio signal and how measurements are made Params2 Tab see page 299 Specifies parameters that control how measurements are made on harmonics Audio Filters Tab see Specifies characteristics of filters applied to the signal before measurements are taken page 299 Scale Tab see page 302 Sets vertical and horizontal scale and position parameters Prefs Tab for Audio Analysis The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the Audio Analysis see page 305 displays Params1 Tab The Params tab is used to specify characteristics of the audio signal to be measured and how the signal will be measured Params1 Params2 Audio Filters Hum amp Noise Signal Type AM Audio BW 20 000 kHz RBW 40 0 Hz 7 Auto Ref Audio Freg 2 000 kHz 7 Auto RBW Filter Kaiser x Params1 tab for AM signal types 296 SignalVu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Params1 Tab Setting Description Signal Type Specifies the type of signal to be analyzed The available choices are AM FM PM and Direct Audio BW Specifies the bandwidth used for audio analysis Ref Audio Freq A measured value when Auto is selected If you want to specify the reference audio frequency uncheck Auto and enter a value manually If
195. alysis length is short the blue line appears as a thin line much like the selected indicator line When the analysis length is relatively long the blue line appears more like a blue bar 13 Position scroll bar Changes the position of the trace in the window Changing the position scroll bar is the same as adjusting the Pos setting 14 Selected indicator This inverse colored line indicates the Spectrogram line that will appear in the Spectrum display when the Spectrogram trace is enabled This line is attached to the selected marker 15 Clear Clears the spectrogram display however data records in acquisition history remain in memory and are available for replay To clear memory select File gt Acquisition Data Info gt Delete All Data 16 Marker indicators These icons indicate the position of markers in the spectrogram You can move markers by dragging the desired marker indicator 17 Detection setting Displays the selected Detection method see Settings gt Trace see page 60 tab 58 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Spectrogram Settings Item Display element Description 18 Marker readout Marker readout for the selected marker In the Spectrogram display the marker readout includes a date and timestamp The time is displayed in a 24 hour format The timestamp readout can be shown or hidden independently of the other marker readouts see Settings gt Prefs see page 79 19 Time Scale status readout
196. ameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 224 Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for page 225 analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Trace see page 227 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 227 Specifies the vertical subcarrier and symbols scale and position settings Prefs Tab see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed OFDM Magnitude Error Display The OFDM Mag Error display shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Magnitude Error values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency To show the OFDM Magnitude Error display 1 2 3 4 weg oo If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Mag Error icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Mag Error icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Mag Error display Set the Frequency appropria
197. an 1 in all practical cases and is equal to 1 for a perfect signal measured in a perfect receiver SignalVu PC Printable Help 31 Taking Measurements 32 Available Measurements Measurements for OQPSK and SOQPSK modulation types Measurement EVM Description The normalized RMS value of the error vector between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal over the analysis length The EVM is generally measured on symbol or chip instants and is reported in units of percent and dB EVM is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed These estimates are made over the analysis length Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Offset EVM Offset EVM is like EVM except for a difference in the time alignment of the and Q samples For EVM and Q samples are collected at the same time for every symbol decision point twice the symbol rate for offset modulations For Offset EVM the and Q symbol decision points are time aligned before collecting the and Q samples In this case one and one Q sample is collected for each symbol half as many samples as the same number of symbols for non offset EVM Phase Error The RMS phase difference between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Mag Error The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the
198. an Power amp Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs ACPR j Settings Number of adjacent pairs 1 Channel Bandwidth 1 000 MHz Restore Channel Spacing 2 000 MHz Defaults 7 To set the number of adjacent channels select the Channels tab Enter the number of channels in the Number of adjacent pairs value box If zero is entered for the number of adjacent pairs the resultant measurement will be channel power only NOTE As you add adjacent channels the span of the display is adjusted so that all the channels can be seen Use the horizontal scale and offset to zoom the display in on any portion of the trace 106 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements RF Channel Power Measurement 8 To set the spacing between channel centers enter the required value in the Channel Spacing value box 9 To set the channel bandwidth enter the required value in the Channel Bandwidth value box 10 After you have configured the channel settings click the close button gt in the Settings panel or press the Settings button again to remove the settings panel 11 Press Replay to take measurements on the recalled acquisiton data Viewing Results Measurement results are displayed in a table below the graph and within the graph itself which can be enabled disabled in the Settings gt Prefs tab To see all measurements you might need to scroll the table The size of the results table can be changed by dragg
199. analyzed record in the display Print see page 421 Print Preview see page 421 Prints the selected display Displays a preview of the print output Exit Closes the SignalVu PC application Recall Menu Bar File gt Recall Application Toolbar E Use the Recall command to load previously saved acquisition data setups or trace data To Recall Data or Setups 1 Select File gt Recall This displays the Open dialog box SignalVu PC Printable Help 417 Reference Save Save As r EN Open pen Weg d RSA5100B Files Sample Data Records X 4 Search Sample Data Records 5 Organize v New folder tue Name Type Size _ 256 QAM EQ tiq Q File _ ACPRDemo tiq Q File _ FMDemo tiq Q File _ FreqHopDemo tiq Q File _ IPR for 100 MHz LFM chirp at 1GHz CF 10 _ PulseDemo tiq _ QPSKDemo tiq _ TimeFrequency tiq Q File Q File Q File Q File 2 000 KB ENTE m D File name Aca data with setup TIQ tic v 2 Select the file type to be recalled and click Open Save Save As Menu Bar File gt Save Save As Use Save Save As to store acquisition data setups and traces Save is also used to export traces results and pictures of the display for use in other programs Difference Between Save and Save As Use Save As to specify what kind of data you want to save and where t
200. ance of the marker indicators as they appear on the trace Whichever marker is active will appear as a solid diamond Marker Reference Absolute Delta and Power Marker MR M1 Controlling Markers with the Right Click Actions Menu In addition to controlling the marker actions from the menu controls you can use the right click actions menu to move markers or add and delete markers Some items are not available for certain displays SignalVu PC Printable Help 361 Marker Measurements Controlling Markers with the Right Click Actions Menu 362 Ik Select es Span Zoom CF Pan amp Zoom S Pan Reset scale Marker to peak Add marker All markers off You display the Right click Action menu by clicking the right mouse button Menu item Description Marker to peak Moves the selected marker to the highest peak If no marker is turned on this control automatically adds a marker Next Peak Moves the selected marker to the next peak Choices are Next left Next right Next lower absolute and Next higher absolute Add marker Defines a new marker located at the horizontal center of the graph Delete marker Removes the last added marker All markers off Removes all markers Markers Context Menu The Markers context menu appears when you right click or touch and hold on a marker The Markers context menu enables you to assign a marker to a different trace and pan the trace to place the m
201. and Pictures Table 8 RSA3000 and WCA200 file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by RSA3000 WCA200 File type qt mat File Contains and Q time domain Contains and Q description data center frequency sample time domain data center rate amplitude and phase frequency sample rate corrections What Open All Settings and SignalVu PC with Measurements are can do with settings Recalled this format Automatically 4 4 Sets Span Center Frequency Open as Uses settings from v v data only SignalVu PC when opened Notes Recommend saving as tiq file Recommend saving as after opening tiq file after opening Table 9 WCA300 file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by WCA300 File type iqt File description Contains and Q time domain data center frequency sample rate amplitude and phase corrections What SignalVu PC Open with All Settings and can do with this settings Measurements are Recalled format Automatically Sets Span 4 Center Frequency Open as data Uses settings from v only SignalVu PC when opened Notes Recommend saving as tiq file after opening Table 10 SignalVu on oscilloscopes file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by SignalVu on oscilloscopes File type tiq mat File tiq format as used by SignalVu Contains and Q description all versions includes and Q time domain data time domain data all settings and measuremen
202. and the ideal reference is calculated The reference filter is applied to the internally generated ideal reference signal before the modulation fidelity is calculated SignalVu PC Printable Help 281 APCO P25 Analysis Modulation Params Tab P25 282 How to Select Filters In a signal transmitter receiver system the baseband signal might be filtered for bandwidth limiting or for another kind of necessary shaping that needs to be applied Normally a filter in the transmitter Ft and a filter in the receiver Fr are applied The Measurement Filter setting in the analyzer corresponds to the baseband filter in the receiver Fr This setting tells the analyzer what filter your receiver uses When the analyzer is set to the same filter used by the receiver the analyzer sees the signal as your receiver would The Measurement Filter setting should be the same as the filter used in the receiver under normal operation as opposed to testing The Reference Filter setting in the analyzer corresponds to the baseband filter in the transmitter receiver combination Fr Ft The baseband filter for the transmitter receiver combination is often referred to as the System Filter This filter is called the reference filter because it is used to recreate a reference signal that is compared to the received signal This recreated reference signal is the ideal signal with Fr Ft applied differences between this ideal signal and the received signal enables th
203. annel Choices are None and Root raised Cosine Filter param Specifies the alpha value or roll off factor of the Root raised cosine filter Present only when Channel Filter is set to Root raised Cosine Chip rate Specifies the chip rate used for the Root raised Cosine filter Present only when Channel Filter is set to Root raised Cosine Offsets amp Limits Table Tab SEM The Offsets amp Limits Table tab is used to specify parameters that define Offsets and masks SignalVu PC Printable Help 157 RF Measurements 158 On Start Hz Stop Hz Sde RBW H quus fee VBW Hz IE s oo0000 11 000000M 100 000k 100 000k 30 000k 11 000000M 20 000000M 100 000k 100 000k 30 000k 20 000000M 30 000000M 100 000k 100 000k 30 000k 30 000000 50 000000 100 000k 100 000k 30 000k 50 000000 100 000000M 100 000k 100 000k 30 000k 100 000000M 150 000000M 100 000k 100 000k J Expanded display of Offsets amp Limits Table 30 000k Offsets amp Limits Table Tab SEM Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Offsets amp Limits Table Tab SEM Setting Description Buttons Expand Displays the Offsets amp Limits Table in a new resizeable window Reset Layout You can reorder columns in the Offsets amp Limits Table by dragging the columns to a new position Cl
204. application preset opens the following displays Time Overview Shows a time domain view of the analysis time window m Spectrogram Shows a three dimensional view of the signal where the X axis represents frequency the Y axis represents time and color represents amplitude m Frequency vs Time This display s graph plots changes in frequency over time and allows you to make marker measurements of settling times frequency hops and other frequency transients B Spectrum Shows a spectrum view of the signal The only trace showing in the Spectrum graph after selecting the Time Frequency Analysis preset is the Spectrogram trace This is the trace from the Spectrogram display that is selected by the active marker Stop acquisitions with the Run button because its easier to work with stable results In the Spectrogram display move a marker up or down to see the spectrum trace at various points in time The analysis period scale is set to 5 ms To use the Time Frequency Analysis preset assuming that Time Frequency Analysis is the selected preset on the list of Application Presets and Preset action is set to Recall selected preset 1 Select Presets gt Application Select Time Frequency Analysis and then click OK 2 When the preset s displays and settings have all been recalled and acquisitions are running adjust the center frequency and span to capture the signal of interest SignalVu PC Printable Help 17 Using SignalVu PC Se
205. ared to the time between the two markers This function is useful for removing frequency slope from the phase modulated signal Phase Offset In Auto Auto is selected the instrument sets the phase offset to fit the waveform to the screen centering 0 phase on the vertical axis The actual phase offset 1s indicated on the Phase Offset readout In Manual Auto is deselected the instrument sets the phase offset using the value specified in Phase offset For example when Phase offset is set to 10 the waveform shifts upward by 10 on screen Selecting Load from marker sets the phase offset to the value of the selected marker Range 180 to 180 Trace Tab The Traces Tab allows you to set the display characteristics of displayed traces SignalVu PC Printable Help 99 Analog Modulation Trace Tab Parameters Trace Scale Prefs 4 Show Freeze Save Trace As Detection Peak M Function Normal z um Setting Description Show Shows hides the trace If the instrument continues to run the measurement results below the graph display continue to update even if the trace is hidden Detection Sets the Detection method used for the trace Available detection methods are Peak Peak and Avg VRMS Not available for saved traces Function Selects the trace processing method The only available setting is Normal Freeze Halts updates to the trace Save Trace As Saves the trace to a file for later recall a
206. arker at the measurement frequency Pan to marker Attach to trace Trace 1 Trace 7 Trace 3 SignalVu PC Printable Help Marker Measurements Measuring Frequency and Power in the Spectrum Display Measuring Frequency and Power in the Spectrum Display To measure the frequency and power at a point on a Spectrum trace 1 Select Markers gt Define Markers 2 Select the Marker Properties tab 3 Click Add This displays a drop down list under MR Marker Reference found inside the Reference box The first marker defined is always designated the Marker Reference Subsequently defined markers are Delta Markers for which readouts can be selected for Delta Power or Absolute You can also select and adjust markers by clicking on an existing marker on a trace 4 From the drop down list select the trace to which you want to assign the marker Trace 1 Show Avg VRMS Avg 100 0 pan 40 00 MHz Autoscale CF 1 46000 GHz Defne Markers Marker Properties Define Peaks Markers Deme v m Frequency 1 47 GHz To center Peak 9 e Table x 5 Click the close control panel button to remove the Define Markers control panel 6 Click on the marker on the trace to activate that marker 7 Drag the marker in the graph using a mouse to move the marker to the desired location on the trace You can also click on the marker location text box in the Markers toolbar at the bottom of the screen and adjust it with your
207. arkers Add Marker MR 7 Attach to Trace Delete in selected display ETS Readouts Delta E dBgHz Markers v MR Frequency 1 5 GHz To Center Peak gt Tabie 1 Select Markers gt Define Markers to display the Define Markers control panel 2 Select Add to turn on the next marker A drop down list under the marker label allows you to assign the marker to a trace NOTE The first marker defined will always be MR The MR marker is the reference for delta marker readouts 3 Select the trace to which the marker should be attached from the drop down list 4 Click Add to add additional markers 5 Click on the Readouts drop down menu to select the readout to view If you select Delta from the drop down menu you can check the dBc Hz box to measure noise in dBc Hz and show that for the delta value Checking this box if other readouts are selected will force the readout to Delta You can read more about dBc Hz mode here see page 367 6 Click the close button to remove the Define Markers control panel Defining Peaks You can specify two amplitude values that define peaks For the DPX display you can also define peaks based on signal density characteristics Define Markers Marker Properties Define Peaks Amplitude DPX Signal Density Di Threshold 500 l ada Peak Threshold 150 dBm ILLIS Minimum Excursion 50 pocie Minimum Excursion 6 dB E Smoot
208. asured on symbol or chip instants and is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed Prefs see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Symbol Table Display The WLAN Symbol Table display shows decoded data values for each data symbol in the analyzed signal packet For OFDM signals all standards except 802 11b results are presented with subcarrier frequency indices in the horizontal dimension and symbol time intervals in the vertical dimension For 802 11b signals the Preamble Header and Data PSDU symbol values are presented sequentially with symbol indices in the left column To show the WLAN Symbol Table display 1 2 3 we m ow 192 If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Symb Table icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN Symbol icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the WLAN Symbol Table display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Int
209. at does have internet access to contact the license server and use it to download a license file The license file can then be transferred to the PC on which SignalVu PC is to be activated NOTE In order to use any options you have purchased for SignalVu PC you must activate each option individually Activating with Internet Access To activate an option SignalVu PC Printable Help 435 Reference Activating SignalVu PC Options 1 Launch SignalVu PC 2 Go to Tools gt Activate License displaying the License Activation dialog 3 In the dialog select Auto License Activation m Auto recommended Enter Activation Key Requires an Internet connection Manual 874d44e C ProgramData Tektronx RSA SignalVu PC License 4 Inthe Enter Activation Key text box enter the option activation key provided when you purchased the option 5 Click OK in the License Activation window Signal Vu PC will contact the license server and install a license file provided by the license server 6 Repeat the steps above to activate each option using the activation key specific to each option Activating without internet access To activate SignalVu PC options on a PC without internet access you need use the Offline Activation Tool The tool is provided with Signal Vu PC as a separate installation file To activate SignalVu PC using a second PC to access the Internet 1 Launch SignalVu PC 2 In the License A
210. at is transmitted into a vector signal analyzer for analysis Assume that a signal is transmitted using a baseband filter Ft It then travels through a transmission medium air cable etc where it may affected by the communication channel Fc The signal is received and filtered by the receiver s filter Fr At this point the signal has passed through Ft and Fr and in addition the communication channel might have affected it so Ft Fr Fc This double filtered signal is demodulated as it was received to determine the symbols bits in it The obtained bits are used to regenerate a baseband ideal signal that can be compared against the received signal to determine signal quality However to determine the effect of the environment on the signal quality the 1deal signal must be filtered by the REFERENCE FILTER Ft Fr so that the ideal signal and the filtered signal differ only by the effect of the environment So the received signal is the ideal signal filtered by Ft Fr Fc and the reference signal is the ideal signal filtered by Ft Fr since they only differ by the effect of Fc the comparison will show the effect of the communication channel on the signal The communication channel can also include the hardware path the signal follows after Tx or before Rx digitizing this would account for Tx Rx hardware linear and non linear distortion Common examples of how these filters are used are shown below 338 SignalVu PC Printable Hel
211. ation of Public Safety Communication Officials APCO P25 Compliance Testing and Analysis option allows you to evaluate radio signals to ensure they meet the standards set for the public safety communications community for interoperable LMR equipment This complete set of push button Telecommunication Industry Association TIA 102 standard based transmitter measurements includes modulation measurements power measurements and timing measurements These measurements are also compared with the limits that best fit the signal for which the standard applies to provide pass fail results The P25 measurements available with this option can be made on signals defined by the Phase 1 CAFM and Phase 2 HCPM HDQPSK P25 standards With this test suite test engineers can simplify the execution of a number of transmitter tests while still allowing for controls to modify signal parameters for signal analysis The analysis results give multiple views of P25 signal characteristics to allow the diagnosis of signal imperfections and impairments quickly and easily Display controls allow you to selectively display the analysis results to help locate trouble spots in the signal P25 Topics The following information about the P25 Analysis option is available m Reference table of supported P25 measurements see page 249 m P25 Standards Presets see page 250 m P25 Displays see page 251 m P25 Settings see page 279 m P25 Measurements see page 2
212. average power in the transmitted signal located in the CCDF display CCDF The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF CCDF shows how much time a signal spends at or above a given power level relative to the average power of a measured signal Channel Power and ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Display Use the Channel Power and ACPR measurement to measure channel power by itself or adjacent channel leakage ratio with one main channel SignalVu PC Printable Help 105 RF Measurements Channel Power and ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Display Vv Avg Freq 10 Clear 5 0 00 dBm dB div 10 0 dB LA1 M 70 10 dB 1 12 dBm 100 00 dBm Autascale 2 Pos 1 50000 GHz Scale 5 16 MHz Avg Channel ch offset Lower Upper Power Main A1 2 000 MHz 70 10dB 69 20 dB 1 12 dBm i E b Measuring Adjacent Channel Power Ratio 1 Recall the acquisition data file you wish to analyze 2 Select the Displays button 3 Select RF Measurements from the Measurements box 4 Double click Chan Power and ACPR in the Available displays box Click OK to complete your selection 5 Press the front panel Freq button and use the front panel keypad or knob to adjust the frequency to that of your main channel 6 Press the Settings button This displays the control panel for Chan Power and ACPR the tab displayed will be the tab displayed the last time the Settings panel was opened Ch
213. averaging is performed on the linear Voltage values resulting in the correct average for RMS values Trace Processing Traces can be processed to display in different ways The Function setting controls trace processing 100 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Trace Tab Normal Each new trace is displayed and then replaced by the next trace Each data point contains a single vertical value B Average Each trace point is computed by averaging together the multiple results points it represents m Peak Each trace point is represents the highest vertical value among the results it includes B Peak Each trace point is represents the lowest vertical value among the results it includes Saving Traces To save a trace for later analysis 1 Select the Save Trace As button This displays the Save As dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired folder or use the default 3 Typea name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces You can recall a previously saved trace for analysis or comparison to a live trace To select a trace for recall 1 Click the button to display the Open dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired file and click Open 3 Check the Show Recalled Trace check box 4 Verify that the Show check box is selected SignalVu PC Printable Help 101 Analog Modulation Scale Tab Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale setti
214. aving Traces To save a trace for later analysis 1 Select the Save Trace As button This displays the Save As dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired folder or use the default 3 Typea name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces You can recall a previously saved trace for analysis or comparison to a live trace To select a trace for recall 1 Select the trace into which the recalled trace will be loaded from the Trace drop down list 2 Check the Show check box 3 Click the button to display the Open dialog box m 4 Navigate to the desired file and click Open SignalVu PC Printable Help 15 General Signal Viewing Traces Tab Math Trace 5 Check the Show Recalled Trace check box 6 Verify that the trace s Show check box is selected either on this tab or next to the drop down list located at the top left corner of the graph Traces Tab Math Trace This tab is not a distinct tab it is just how the Traces tab appears when Math is selected in the Traces drop down list Freq amp Span Bw Traces Scale Prefs Trace Math J Show Freeze Save Trace As Trace2 v minus Tracei z ua Trace 4 1s a mathematically derived trace defined as Trace A minus Trace B You can select Trace 1 2 or 3 to serve as either Trace A or Trace B Setting Description Trace When set to Trace 4 Math this tab is displayed Show Shows hides the selected trace Freeze Halts update
215. ay x1 default x2 x4 x8 x16 or x32 The phase multiplication display facilitates observation of noisy CPM signals by multiplying measurement signal phase by the constant to reduce the number of phase states and expand the phase difference between adjacent symbols Comparing Two Traces in the Constellation Display When the Constellation display is the selected display you can use the Traces tab to enable the display of a second trace The second trace is a version of the current acquisition You can choose to freeze a trace in order to display the current live trace to an earlier version of itself you can display the trace as a second trace with or without Q Offset or you can choose to display both traces frozen in order to compare the trace to itself at different times To display a second trace in the Constellation display 9v Se e c 9c om Trace 1 SignalVu PC Printable Help Select the Traces tab If more than one display is present select the Constellation display to ensure it is the selected display Click the settings icon or select Setup gt Settings from the menu bar Select Trace 2 from the Trace drop down list Click the Show checkbox so that it is checked Specify the Content as desired Trace 2 lines appear in blue to aid in distinguishing Trace 2 from 349 GP Digital Modulation Scale Tab Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale setting
216. ays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 3 In the Select Displays dialog select GP Digital Modulation in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the Phase Error icon or select the icon and click Add The Phase Error icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays SignalVu PC Printable Help 321 GP Digital Modulation Phase Error vs Time Settings 5 Click OK to display the Phase Error 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the Phase Error vs Time Display Vs Freq Error 401 5 Hz Auto 950 m e a Position 49 9 m Autoscale Position 0 00 Sym ak 0 422 161 50 Sym 5 Scale 128 00 Sym 0519 039 Item Display element Description 1 Freq Error Freq Error is the difference between the Center Frequency and the measured frequency of the signal being tested This readout will be Freq Offset if the Freq Offset parameter on the Settings gt Advanced Params see page 342 tab is set to Manual 2 Top of graph adjustment Adjusts the phase angle shown at the top of the graph 3 Position Adjusts the vertical offset 4 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings so that the entire trace fits in the graph 5 Offset Adjusts the horizontal offset 6 Peak and RMS readouts Displays the Peak value of the phase
217. ays dialog select General Signal Viewing in the Measurements box 3 Inthe Available displays box double click the Amplitude vs Time icon or select the icon and click Add The Amplitude vs Time icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK gt Elements of the Display Trace 1 iV Show Peak Normal dB div 0 0 10 0 dB Span 20 0 40 00 MHz 40 0 60 0 80 0 Autoscale 100 0 RMS 51 84dBm Position 200 000 ns 2 Scale 2 020 us Max 44 23 dBm 520 0ns Min 72 81dBm 0 0000s 1023 006 SignalVu PC Printable Help 63 General Signal Viewing Amplitude Vs Time Settings 64 Amplitude Vs Time Settings Item Display element Description 1 Vertical scale adjustment Adjusts the vertical scaling 2 Span Adjust the bandwidth of the data to be analyzed Not the period of time shown in the display 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Offset Adjust the horizontal offset 5 Max and Min readouts Displays the maximum and minimum amplitudes as well as when those values occur 6 Scale Sets the time spanned by the graph 7 Clear button Restarts multi trace functions Avg Hold 8 Trace function Displays the current trace function setting Settings gt Trace tab gt Function Reference Changing Amplitude vs Time Display Settings see
218. ber can be expressed by fixed point or floating point For example 0 01 and 1 0E 2 are both valid m 0 zero and 0 comma zero can be omitted For example 1 5 0 1 5 and 1 5 are equivalent m Lines with only a comma and blank lines are skipped SignalVu PC Printable Help 357 GP Digital Modulation User Filter File Format Example filters For your reference two example filters Raised Cosine and Gaussian are shown here Both filters contain 65 data points with an oversampling rate of 8 Raised Cosine a 7 0 3 Row 1 to 18 Row 19 to 36 Row 37 to 54 Row 55 to 68 Rate 0 0383599 0 0 973215 0 0 0743803 0 8 0 0 0 895591 0 0 0720253 0 Filterl FilterQ 0 047715 0 0 774975 0 0 0594205 0 0 0 0 0984502 0 0 623332 0 0 0405144 0 0 0062255 0 0 143898 0 0 455249 0 0 0194761 0 0 0136498 0 0 174718 0 0 286147 0 0 0 0 0209294 0 0 181776 0 0 130455 0 0 0151973 0 0 0263419 0 0 157502 0 0 0 0 0246357 0 0 0280807 0 0 0971877 0 0 0971877 0 0 0280807 0 0 0246357 0 0 0 0 157502 0 0 0263419 0 0 0151973 0 0 130455 0 0 181776 0 0 0209294 0 0 0 0 286147 0 0 174718 0 0 0136498 0 0 0194761 0 0 455249 0 0 143898 0 0 0062255 0 0 0405144 0 0 623332 0 0 0984502 0 0 0 0 0594205 0 0 774975 0 0 047715 0 0 0720253 0 0 895591 0 0 0 0 0743803 0 0 973215 0 0 0383599 0 0 063548 0 1 0 0 063548 0 358 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digit
219. ble Editor Ext Loss Table 1 c J amp Ex Add Point Frequency Interpolation X Frequency Y Loss Atten 2 000000 GHz 0 0000000 dB Linear Log affects only Trace Correction Save s Apply OK Cancel New Table Load 2 Click New Table to create a table This clears all entries in the existing table and loads the default table 3 To edit values in the table a To edit an existing value double click on the cell you want to edit b To add a new point to the table click on Add Point Edit the values as required c Click Apply if you want to test your table without closing the editor the table must be enabled with the check box in the control panel and measurements must already be running To specify a frequency multiplier you can type K M or G 4 To delete a point from the table select the point to be removed and click Delete 5 Select the Frequency Interpolation method Select Linear when the frequency scale of the spectrum or spurious measurements are linear Select Log when the frequency scale of the spectrum is logarithmic 6 When you have entered all the necessary values click Save As to save the table in a file or click OK 7 From the Save As dialog name the file and save it in the desired location SignalVu PC Printable Help Amplitude Corrections External Gain Loss Correction Tab External loss tables are saved in CSV Comma Separated V
220. ble for OFDM non 802 11b signals To show the WLAN Channel Response display 1 2 3 4 we v moU If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Chan Response icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN Chan Response icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the WLAN Chan Response display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval Subcarrier Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 171 WLAN Measurements WLAN Channel Response Display Elements of the Display Stop 58 Subcarrier 0519 048 172 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements Item 1 Display element Magnitude graph top graph WLAN Channel Response Settings Description 1a Top of graph Sets the level that appears at the top of the magnitude graph This is only a visual control for panning the gra
221. cale Prefs Trace Magnitude m Save Trace As m Recall Trace Settings Description Trace Selects the Magnitude or Phase trace for saving or recalling Save Trace As Select to save a trace Recall Trace Select to recall a trace 200 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements Scale Tab WLAN Scale Tab WLAN The Scale tab allows you to change the scale settings that control how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency There are four versions of the Scale tab for WLAN displays One version is used for the Constellation display one for the Spectral Flatness display one for the Power vs Time display and one for the EVM Magnitude Error Phase Error and Channel Response displays Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Ful Burst Scale 100 00 dB Scale 100 000 us Position 11 00 dBm Position 0 000 s Scale tab for the WLAN Power vs Time display Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Symbol Horizontal Subcarrier Scale 7 80 Start 0 Symbol Start 58 Subcarrier Position 3 90 Stop 99 Symbol Stop 58 Subcarrier Scale tab for WLAN EVM Magnitude Error Phase Error and Channel Response displays Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Trace Scal
222. carrier Spacing and Channel Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 211 OFDM Analysis OFDM Spectral Flatness Settings Elements of the Display 6 50 Scale 12 Sym 2 a 4 60 autoscale 9 26 Subc 0519 005 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph Sets the Flatness value that appears at the bottom of the graph in dB This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Bottom of graph Shows the Flatness value set at the top of the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Pos Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position OFDM Spectral Flatness Settings Application Toolbar 99 The settings for the OFDM Spectral Flatness display are shown in the following table 212 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Magnitude Error Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 223 Advanced Params see Specifies par
223. cify whether or not files are saved with an automatically generated name and how much data is saved in an acquisition data file All files The Automatically increment filename number function can automatically name saved files by appending a number to a base file name Use this tab to enable disable automatic naming of files For SignalVu PC Printable Help 19 Using SignalVu PC Connectivity example if Automatically Increment Filename Number is disabled when you select Save from the File menu you will have to enter a name for the file Acquisition data files This setting specifies whether saved data files include the entire acquisition record or only the data for the analysis length a subset of the acquisition record TIQ acquisition data files Specifies which data records to save You can choose from the following Current acquisition Saves the current acquisition m Current frame If Fast Frame is enabled saves only the current frame The current frame is the one most recently analyzed B Selected frames If Fast Frame is enabled saves the specified frames m All in history Saves all acquisition records in the history E Save TIQ file now Invokes the Save As dialog box with the Save as type drop down list set to TIQ Security The Security tab enables you to hide sensitive readouts in displays with readouts such as the OFDM Summary display Prefs The Prefs tab enables you to set properties that apply to all displa
224. coed a bbe ged ganweeaegeaadeewe 235 Pulse Sta stics Settmps onec te Dente bre ea Eee e ELE S Pega Hub ee e dance duns me EYE Te stare 237 Common Controls for Pulsed RF Displays Pulsed RF Shared Measurement Settings csse eee me een 238 APCO P25 Analysis APCO EE UL PM 249 is 22 E c 249 P25 Standards WII P EA 250 P25 Displays P HUE 251 P25 Measurements E em 252 P25 Test Patterns eode eei eeu on SR RR Fee oie dE Peck ped AE EAE ERU pF Ped a ES 260 P25 Constellation P25 Constellation Display oce erri ee e e e tree x Rae UR RE ERR ti ie eR Ka er a n 263 P25 Constellation Setting S sesinin open rove e NER eR FEE ARD deer Fere ese Deeds 265 P25 Eye Diagram P25 Eye Diagram Display Leve UL ade WE Eben eb vnu SE EE UP EE YE 265 P25 Eye Diagrain Settings ieren ddd eai bee td Ur bera ade Pope rd Oe ese UE ATE ER 267 P25 Power vs Time P25 Power vs Time Display oesessee stessa tes aqoa er oa aa P Sue E DO ERRARE Ee OR ENA 268 P25 Power vs Time Settings iiec PA Eee EQ UR Sandie detec ehe E Tee Tex S Ere BEES E iUd ews 269 P25 Summary P25 S mmary Display teste D Ee ees RE ERR HN ERE cach banda EVE RR dees IER Rada 270 P25 Summary Settings eec eode cep disse barces ious EE RDUEPU EIQUE Ehed re eI roris T E poH d a IEEE NE 273 P25 Symbol Table P25 Symbol Table Display o eire reet en epe E EEE AES EEEE EURO re A Se 273 P25 Symbol
225. comparison to a live trace To select a trace for recall 1 Click the button to display the Open dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired file and click Open 3 Check the Show Recalled Trace check box 4 Verify that the Show check box is selected SignalVu PC Printable Help 93 Analog Modulation Scale Tab Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 10 0 kHz Scale 35 280 us Position 0 000 Hz Position 92 160 us Autoscale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Scale Changes the range shown between the top and bottom of the graph Position Adjusts the frequency shown at the center of the graph Autoscale Resets the Position so that the entire trace fits within the graph Horizontal Scale Changes the range shown between the left and right sides of the graph Position Adjusts the position of the acquisition record shown at the left edge of the graph Autoscale Resets the Scale and Position settings to provide the optimum display 94 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Prefs Tab Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the FM display Paramet
226. connected to the RSA306 in the Connect To Instrument list NOTE If the PC is currently connected to another instrument that connection will also show in the Connect To Instrument list You must select Disconnect From Instrument to end that connection before connecting to the newly found instrument 6 Select the RSA306 instrument 7 A Connect Status dialog box will appear to confirm the instrument is connected NOTE You can quickly verify connection status by looking at the Connection indicator square on the menu bar It is green when an instrument is connected It is red when it is not You can also view the name of the instrument that is connected by hovering the mouse indicator over the E 8 Connect a DUT device under test to the RSA306 9 Use SignalVu PC to configure the RSA306 NOTE Press F1 on your keyboard to open the SignalVu PC help for information about configuring and using the application You can also click on Help gt User Manual in the SignalVu PC menu bar to open the help 10 When you want to connect to a different instrument select Disconnect From Instrument to end the current connection SignalVu PC Printable Help 21 Using SignalVu PC Connectivity 22 Connecting to an MDO4000B Series instrument NOTE You can watch a video tutorial about using Live Link Option CON to connect to an MDO4000B Series instrument and about WLAN Presets at www youtube com user tektronix Learn more
227. ctivation window select Manual 436 SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Managing SignalVu PC Licenses License Activation x Auto recommended Manual Host ID 874d44e 1 Copy the Host ID shown above and enter it in the Activation Assistant application running on a computer with Internet access 2 Copy the generated license file into the directory shown below 3 Restart the application C ProgramData Tektronix RSA SignalVu PC License Write down the Host ID shown Click Cancel to close the License Activation window Install the Activation Assistant software on a PC that has internet access The Activation Assistant software is located at Ifyou installed SignalVu PC from a DVD or USB flash drive navigate to the device open the Offline Activation Tool folder and run the Setup file located there Ifyou downloaded SignalVu PC from the Web navigate to the location you extracted the installation files Open the Offline Activation Tool folder and run the Setup file located there Launch the Activation Assistant application Follow the instructions to generate a license file Repeat this step for each option that you have purchased You will also need the option activation key you received Activation keys are specific to each option therefore you must acquire a license file for each option purchased Copy the license file or files to the following location the PC on which SignalVu PC is to be activated
228. ctrum Center Frequency is unlocked from Measurement Frequency the RF triggers Trigger Source RF Input can tune to either Spectrum Center Frequency or Measurement Frequency When a spectrum display is selected the trigger frequency is the same as the Spectrum Center Frequency When one of the other displays that uses Measurement Frequency is selected the trigger is tuned to the Measurement Frequency also This allows you to trigger on the signal you are measuring But there is an exception when the selected RF amp IF Optimization is Best for multiple displays the trigger is always tuned to the Spectrum Center Frequency The reason the trigger frequency is affected by Measurement Frequency and RF amp IF Optimization is that these functions control how the acquisition 1s tuned The optimization Best for multiple displays keeps the acquisition centered about the Spectrum Center Frequency at all times To accommodate off center Measurement Frequencies it just widens the acquisition bandwidth Other optimizations tune the acquisition frequency to match that of whichever display is currently selected The RF trigger module receives the same acquisition data as all the measurements tuned to the center of the current acquisition bandwidth Units Tab 382 The Units tab specifies the global Amplitude units for all the views in the analysis window Analysis Time Spectrum Time Frequency Units Amplitude dBm Z note select rn un
229. cy Deviation and the Fundamental Frequency Carsons rule This is a parallel condition along with setting Audio Bandwidth large enough for the maximum audio bandwidth to analyze Therefore for FM Audio Bandwidth should be AudioBW FM MAX MaxAudioAnalysisFreq FreqDeviation FundamentalFreq where MaxAudioAnalysisFreq is the highest audio frequency desired in the analysis For example for an FM signal with fundamental signal of 5 kHz and peak frequency deviation one sided of 10 kHz Acquisition Bandwidth should be at least 2 10k 5k 30 kHz or an Audio Bandwidth of 15 kHz Also if the analysis should extend to the 8th harmonic then the Audio Bandwidth needs to be at least 8 5 kHz 40 kHz So Audio Bandwidth should be set to 40 kHz Using the equation AudioBW FM MAX 8x5kHz 10 5 kHz MAX 40 kHz 15kHz 40 kHz The formula for PM is AudioBw PM MAX MaxAudioAnalysisFreq PMFreqDeviation FundamentalFreq where PMFreqDeviation PMPhaseDeviationInRadians x FundamentalFreq RBW Filter Shape Select Kaiser in most cases for best measurement performance Select Flattop only if you want to use standard markers to measure signal amplitude with highest accuracy SignalVu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Params2 Tab Params2 Tab The Params2 tab is used to specify how the signal harmonics are measured and to control spectrum averaging Paramsi Params2 Audio Filters Scale Prefs No of Harmonics 12 No
230. cy error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 Specifies additional parameters Find see page 346 Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch word Analysis Time see page 346 Trace see page 348 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Scale see page 350 Specifies the horizontal and vertical scale settings Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display The EVM vs Time Display shows the Error Vector Magnitude plotted over Time NOTE A maximum of approximately 80 000 samples can be analyzed by the General Purpose Digital Modulation measurements the actual value varies with modulation type To show an EVM vs Time display SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation EVM vs Time Settings Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays
231. d the IF bandwidth of a Real Time Signal Analyzer SignalVu PC Printable Help 451 Glossary Real Time Seamless Capture Real Time Seamless Capture The ability to acquire and store an uninterrupted series of time domain samples that represent the behavior of an RF signal over a long period of time Reference Level The signal level represented by the uppermost graticule line of the analyzer display Residual FM Incidental FM Short term displayed frequency instability or jitter due to instability in the analyzer local oscillators Given in terms of peak to peak frequency deviation and expressed in hertz or percent of the displayed frequency Residual Response A spurious response in the absence of an input signal Noise and zero pip are excluded RBW The RBW determines how well the analyzer can resolve or separate two or more closely spaced signal components Ripple The Ripple measurement result is displayed in either Watts or Volts The amplitude units selected on the Setup gt Analysis gt Units tab determine whether the measurement is presented in Watts or Volts Volts are shown for linear units for example volts or amps Watts are shown for non linear units for example watts or dBm 452 SignalVu PC Printable Help Glossary Secondary Marker DelPos DelNeg RefPos 0070 031 The Ripple measurement in Watts is calculated as follows Ripple Watts 100 x RatioPos RatioNeg Where 2 RatioNeg
232. d wait for the IP Address to display on the screen Write down the IP address to help you identify the MDO in the SignalVu PC application 4 Double click the SignalVu PC icon on the Desktop to start the application 5 Click Live Link on the menu bar to view the drop down menu NOTE See Elements of the Display see page 9 for information about menus and toolbars 6 Select Search For Instrument TekVISA is now searching for instruments 7 A notification will briefly appear stating that the instrument was found Check that the newly found instrument now appears in the Connect To Instrument list and then click on the instrument name to connect NOTE If the PC is currently connected by LAN wireless or USB to another MDO4000B that connection will also show in the Connect To Instrument list You must select Disconnect From Instrument to end that connection before connecting to the newly found instrument 8 If you do not see the LAN address of the MDO click Manually Search for LAN Instrument You will then need to enter the IP address of the MDO into the IP Address dialog box and click Connect 9 A Connect Status dialog box will appear to confirm the instrument is connected NOTE You can quickly verify connection status by looking at the Connection indicator square on the menu bar It is green f when an instrument is connected It is red W when it is not You can also view the name of the instrument that is connected b
233. display Scale Changes the vertical scale units Position Adjusts the reference level away from top of the graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to contain the complete trace Horizontal Controls the span of the trace display and position of the trace Scale Specifies the frequency range displayed in the graph Position Specifies the frequency shown at the center of the graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to optimize the display of the trace Reset Scale Resets all settings to their default values 160 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Prefs Tab SEM Prefs Tab SEM The Prefs tab enables you to change parameters of the measurement display The parameters available on the Prefs tab vary depending on the selected display but include such items as enabling disabling Marker Readout switching the Graticule display on off and Marker Noise mode Some parameters appear with most displays while others appear with only one display Parameters Processing Ref Channel Offsets amp Limits Table Scale Prefs Max Trace points 801 x per range Wl Show graticule v Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Show limits Line only X Setting Description Show graticule Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Max Trace points per range When the spectrum analysis produces more than the selected maximum number of points the method specified in Detection con
234. display Only Position is affected by Autoscale when Spectrum Monitor is selected Time div Sets the time displayed per division Visible elapsed time Displays the length of time visible in the display This does not represent the total time available to view Position Time at position Adjusts vertical position of the trace within the graph area Setting represents the offset in divisions between the bottom of the graph and the bottom most recent line in the results trace Displays the time of the spectrogram line shown at the bottom of the graph This time is relative to the Time Zero Reference of the current acquisition Horizontal Frequency Scale Sets the frequency range of the graph without changing the Span value Position Sets the frequency displayed at the center of the graph Changing this value does not change the Freq setting Autoscale Sets the frequency scale to the Spectrogram Span value Spectrum Monitor Spectrum Monitor performs long term monitoring The monitor mode compresses time into each line of the spectrogram which enables you to monitor long periods of time from 1 second per line up to 600 minutes per line With extended memory Option 53 installed in the instrument you can capture up to 125 000 lines With standard memory installed in the instrument the maximum number of lines you can capture is 31 250 During each line s collection period spectrum transforms are comp
235. displays the control panel for MCPR the tab displayed will be the tab displayed the last time the Settings panel was opened Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Main Channels Adj Chans t Chan BW Offset L Limit U Limit Number 1 Mi Add ma 12 500 kHz 0 000 Hz Al 6 000 kHz 12 500 kHz 67 00 dB 67 00 dB A2 6 000 kHz 62 500 kHz 67 00 dB 67 00 dB A3 6 000 kHz 87 500 kHz 67 00 dB 67 00 dB A4 6 000 kHz 150 000 67 00 dB 67 00 dB ac nnn Lus 1 950 ann 67 nn do 67 nn do BW 12 500 kHz 7 Click on the Channels tab To set the number of Main channels enter the number of Main channels in the Number text entry box under Main Channels NOTE As you add channels the span of the display will be adjusted so that all the channels can be seen 8 To set the bandwidth of all main channels enter a value in the BW value box 9 To set the spacing between the main channels enter a value in the Spacing value box SignalVu PC Printable Help 111 RF Measurements MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio Display 10 To prevent a main channel power level from being included in the Power Reference Total calculation select the channel to be excluded in the Inactive box 11 To add adjacent channels click the Add button under Adj Chans Frequency Offset 262 5 kHz Bandwidth 6 000 kHz 80 00 dB 80 00 dB Enable Power Limits 12 To edit
236. djusted to maintain the optimal display Zoom Sets the Constellation display size and position Scale Sets the magnification value for the Constellation display Vertical Position Sets the vertical location of the Constellation display within the graph Range is 3 7 to 3 7 Horizontal Position Sets the horizontal location of the Constellation display within the graph Range is 3 7 to 37 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements EVM Tab WLAN EVM Tab WLAN The EVM Tab enables you to chose between dB and percent for the EVM units and to select to set the maximum bursts to average The EVM Tab is only available for the WLAN Summary display i Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time EVM Prefs EVM Unis dB Max Bursts to Avg 20 Count Settings Description EVM units Specifies whether the displayed EVM units are dB or percent Max Bursts to Avg Specifies the maximum number of bursts to average when Count is selected Count Enables the Max Bursts to Avg function SignalVu PC Printable Help 203 WLAN Measurements Prefs Tab WLAN Prefs Tab WLAN 204 The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the WLAN Analysis displays Not all settings on the Prefs tab shown below appear for every WLAN display Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Traces Scale Prefs Show graphs dme Units Smbb
237. dr version file has two data values with the second one always being 0 lt linel gt Number_of Header Lines 0 lt line2 gt EQ Sample Rate Hz 0 lt line3 gt Demod Symbol Rate Sps 0 lt line4 gt EQ Samples per Symbol 0 lt line5 gt Number_of EQ Taps Following 0 Advanced Params Tab The Advanced Params tab specifies additional parameters that control the demodulation of the signal 342 Signal Vu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Advanced Params Tab Modulation Params Freq amp BW Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Mag Normalize RMS Symbol Magnitude x Swap I and Q User Symbol Map per Modulation Type Advanced Params tab for all modulation types except nFSK and CAFM Modulation Params Freq amp BW Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Swap I and Q E Symbol rate search User Symbol Map per Modulation Type Advanced Params tab for modulation type nFSK Modulation Params Freq amp Bw Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs 7 Swap I and Q User Symbol Map per Modulation Type m Advanced Params tab for modulation type C4FM Parameter Mag Normalize not present for nFSK or C4FM modulation types Description Select RMS Symbol Magnitude or Max Symbol Magnitude This setting applies to Mag Error and EVM Swap I and Q When enabled the and Q data are exchanged before demodulat
238. e 195 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Analysis Params see page 196 Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Trace see page 200 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 201 Specifies the vertical subcarrier for non b standards only and symbols scale and position settings Prefs Tab see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Power vs Time Display The WLAN Power vs Time display shows the signal power amplitude versus time For 802 11b signals the packet Power On and Power Down ramp times are also measured To show the WLAN Power vs Time display 1 Ifyouare analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 3 Inthe Select Displays dialog select WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Power vs Time icon or select the icon and cl
239. e 350 Specifies the horizontal and vertical scale settings Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display GP Digital Modulation Shared Measurement Settings The displays in the GP Digital Modulation folder Setup gt Displays are each a different format for presenting the results of a single underlying analysis For this reason all controls that affect the analysis parameters are shared by all the displays in the GP Digital Modulation folder Changing a setting on one tab changes that setting for all the GP Digital Modulation displays For example if you change the Modulation Type for the Constellation Display it also changes the Modulation type setting for the Signal Quality display There are some controls that affect only the way an individual display presents its results such as graph scaling SignalVu PC Printable Help 333 GP Digital Modulation Standard Settings Button Common controls for GP digital modulation displays Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation symbol rate and filters to be used in demodulating page 335 the input signal Freq amp BW see page 339 Sets values for frequency error offset measurement bandwidth and frequency deviation not every control is present for every modulation type Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params
240. e Browse button and navigate to the directory containing the filter you want to load Select the filter and click Open If you wish to use a filter that 1s not in the list select User other and locate and open the file you wish to use 5 Click OK to load the filter and return to the Modulation Params page User Filter File Format The filter file is selected on the Modulation Params control panel tab used by the GP Digital Modulation displays Option 21 only It stores the user defined measurement or reference filter coefficient data in CSV format The following figure shows the file structure Rat d 10 a Oversampling rate of the filter samples symbol Filiter FilterQ 0 97321 0 01947 0 89559 0 04051 0 77497 0 05942 0 62333 0 07202 0 45524 0 07438 IQ pairs 1 to 1024 of the filter coefficient in time domain 0 28614 0 06354 0 13045 0 01947 0169 023 User filter file structure A filter file is a plain text file in comma separated variable format The file extension must be CSV The filter file contains the following variables Rate Specifies the oversampling rate the number of samples per symbol The filter coefficient data will be interpolated by the specified rate Filterl FilterQ Specifies IQ pairs 1 to 1024 of the filter coefficient in time domain Rules for Creating a Filter File B Aline beginning with is a comment line Enter a positive value for the oversampling rate B A decimal num
241. e Help APCO P25 Analysis P25 Summary Display 8 Select the Test Patterns tab and select a test pattern The available test patterns in the drop down list depend of the standard and modulation type you have selected 9 If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file P25 Summary Display The Modulation Measurements Power Measurements and Trigger Measurements components of this display vary depending on which modulation type is selected The following image shows an example of the display for a Phase 1 CAFM signal Standard Phasel Bandwidth 12 5 KHz Modulation Type C4FM Modulation Measurements Trigger Measurements Modulation Fidelity 0 465 Phasel Tx Attack Time Operating Freq Accuracy 0 ppm Avg Tx Pwr Attack Symbol Rate Accuracy ppm Avg Tx Encoder Attack of 10 Frequency Deviation Positive Peak hs Phase1 Tx Attack Time Busy Idle Negative Peak Hz Avg Tx Pwr Attack Avg Tx Encoder Attack of10 Power Measurements Phase1 Tx Throughput Delay RF Output Power 10 00 dBi PASS utpu m PASS m The following image shows an example of the display for a Phase 1 CAFM High Deviation signal Standard Phasei Bandwidth 12 5 KHz Modulation Type C4FM Modulation Measurements Trigger Measurements Modulation Fidelity 0 0
242. e Prefs Zoom Scal 3 Vertical Position 0 Horizontal Position 0 Scale tab for WLAN Constellation display Signal Vu PC Printable Help 201 WLAN Measurements 202 Scale Tab WLAN Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Tme Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Scale 100 00 dB Position 5 00 dB Autoscale Horzontal Scale 52 Subcarner Postion 26 Subcarrier Autoscale Scale tab for WLAN Spectral Flatness display Settings Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Scale Changes the vertical scale of the graph Position Adjusts the reference level away from top of the graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to contain the complete trace Subcarrier Controls the scale of the subcarrier graph and position of the trace Scale Specifies how many subcarriers are displayed horizontally Position Specifies the subcarrier that appears at the left edge of the subcarrier graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to contain the complete trace Symbols Controls the scale of the Symbols graph Scale Specifies the number of symbols that appear in the symbols graph Position Specifies the symbol that appears at the left edge of the Symbols graph Autoscale Resets the scale and position settings to optimize the display Auto When Auto is checked the scale and position values for the Symbols graph are automatically a
243. e band The start reference can be any of three points B The trigger point B The beginning of the analysis period This result can only be computed when the instrument can find a previous settled state within the measurement period B The point at the end of the previous frequency hop where the frequency first leaves the tolerance band This result can only be computed when the instrument can find a previous settled state within the measurement period Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Settling Time Displays Tolerance band Point where signal transitions out of the tolerance band centered on previous settled frequency x Trigger Point Measurement Length is Control Beginning of analysis period 0070 041 Settling time start reference points All measurements are now complete and the numeric settling time values can be sent to the display However no result traces have been produced yet Detection is used to reduce the measured points which can number up to 10 million to a number more easily processed by the display processor Peak detection is always used preserving the maximum positive and negative excursions for display Reducing the number of points in the result reduces the time resolution of the markers If averaging is on the measurement results are computed on the average of the undecimated results Phase Settling Time Overview Phase settling time
244. e color scheme used for the DPXogram trace Freq amp Span BW Traces Ampl Scale Time amp Freq Prefs Audio Demod Height Color DPXogram Scale 100 00 dB a Coon A Offset 0 00 dBm Northeast Max 37 00 dBm Autoscale Reset Scale Min 82 00 dBm Setting Description Height Height controls apply only to the 3 D Waterfall display Scale Changes the vertical scale for trace Amplitude in the graph not the vertical scale for Time Position Specifies the level displayed at the bottom edge of the graph Bottom front edge in the 3 D view Autoscale Adjusts the vertical position bottom for linear units like Amps and Volts Adjust the vertical position top for log units like dBm dBm is the default 3 D Waterfall Displays the DPXogram in a 3 D format Northeast Shifts the perspective of the 3 D graph so that the oldest traces move back and to the right Northwest Shifts the perspective of the 3 D graph so that the oldest traces move back and to the left Reset Scale Resets the Height and Color settings to their default values Color DPXogram Color Displays a drop down list that allows you to set the color scheme used for the DPXogram trace Max Sets the power level represented by the top of the color scale Min Sets the power level represented by the bottom of the color scale SignalVu PC Printable Help 45 General Signal Viewing Time amp Freq Scale Tab Time amp Freq Scale Tab T
245. e determination of signal quality such as modulation fidelity measurements Filter Parameter C4FM only The filter parameter specifies the alpha for the Raised Cosine filter when selected as the Reference filter Some filter types have a fixed parameter value that is specified by industry standard while other filter types by definition have no filter parameter For filter types with no filter parameter there is no filter parameter control present in the control panel The recommended Reference filter for CAFM is Raised Cosine and the corresponding filter parameter for CAFM is 0 2 SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Analysis Params Tab P25 Analysis Params Tab P25 The Analysis Params tab contains parameters that control the analysis of the input signal Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Prefs Trig Meas Frequency Error 223 0 uz V Auto PTX 30 00 dBm Measurement BW 153 6 kHz Auto X Settings Description Frequency Error When the Auto box is checked the analysis determines the Frequency Error and the measured Frequency Error is displayed When the Auto box is unchecked the entered value is used by the analysis as a fixed frequency offset This is useful when the exact frequency offset of the signal is known Measurement BW Specifies the bandwidth about the center frequency at which measurements are made Select Manual Auto or Link to Span PTX Specifi
246. e determined The choices are Absolute and Relative Absolute time method Ref R Ref specifies the level along the pulse rising edge that is defined as the point from which Start time is counted Choices 50 60 70 80 90 100 Default 100 Start S Start specifies the time the instrument waits after the rising edge reference before starting to measure the pulse The Start time is measured from the point along the pulse rising edge specified by the Ref setting Start Range 100 ms Resolution 3 digits inc dec small 1 ns large 1 2 5 10 Default 0 Length L Amount of time that should be included in the measurement The measurement time begins at the Start point and continues for the amount of time specified by Length Relative time method In the Absolute time method Length specifies the period of time that is used for pulse measurements Length In the Relative time method Length specifies the percentage of the top of the pulse that is used for measurements The instrument automatically determines the pulse top The measurement length is centered within the pulse ON time Freq Diff Phase Diff Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs Measurement s Freq Diff Phase Diff 7 Setting Measure point iut Measurement point 1 000 us Description Specifies the period in time after the 50 rising edge at which frequency and phase difference measurements
247. e domain description time domain data center data center frequency frequency sample rate sample rate SignalVu PC Printable Help 407 Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures 408 Table 14 RF Hawk file formats supported by SignalVu PC cont What Openwith All Settings and SignalVu PC settings Measurements are can do with Recalled this format Automatically 4 Y Sets Span Center Frequency Open as Uses settings from v v data only SignalVu PC when opened Notes Recommend saving as tiq Recommend saving as tiq file after opening file after opening Table 15 User generated including Agilent 89601 software file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by User generated including Agilent 89601 software File type mat File description MATLAB Level 5 format must contain at least InputCenter InputZoom Xdelta and Y What SignalVu PC Open with All Settings and can do with this settings Measurements are Recalled format Automatically Sets Span v Center Frequency Open as data Uses settings from v only SignalVu PC when opened Notes Recommend saving as tiq file after opening To recall a acquisition data file see Recalling Files see page 404 above Opening tiq files saved by RSA3000 and WCA300 analyzers To open an iqt file 1 Select File gt Preset Main 2 Select File gt Recall and select Acq Data with Settings I
248. e edge of the reference channel to the center of the filter BW of the offset 154 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Parameters Tab SEM Setting Description Ref Edge to OS edge Specifies that the start stop frequencies are defined from the edge of the reference channel to the inner edge of the filter BW of the offset Filter Shape Specifies the shape of the filter determined by the window that is applied to the data record in the spectrum analysis to reduce spectral leakage 3GPP specifies a Gaussian window shape be applied to the reference channel measurements Gaussian This filter shape provides optimal localization in the frequency domain Rectangular This filter shape provides the best frequency worst magnitude resolution This is essentially the same as no window SignalVu PC Printable Help 155 RF Measurements Processing Tab SEM Processing Tab SEM The Processing tab controls the Detection settings for the Reference Channel and Offsets as well as selecting the Function Parameters Processing Ref Channel Offsets amp Limits Table Scale Prefs Detection in each record Function across multiple records wies mM s m s Offsets Avg VRMS Y Processing settings affect all SEM numeric and trace results Settings tab Description Detection in each sweep Ref Channel Specifies the Detection method used for the Reference Channel Detection is used to prod
249. e graticule Spectrogram Frequency vs time vs amplitude display where the frequency is represented on the x axis and time on the y axis The power level is indicated by variations in color 454 SignalVu PC Printable Help Glossary Spectrum Spectrum The frequency domain representation of a signal showing the power distribution of its spectral component versus frequency Spectrum Analysis The technique or process of determining the frequency content of an RF signal Spectrum Analyzer A device for determining the frequency components of a signal Spectrum Time Analysis Time for spectrum analysis views Spectrum time can be the same as Analysis Time but it can be different Spur A spur is a signal peak that exceeds a user definable threshold See Spurious gt Settings gt Ranges and excursion setting A spur that also exceeds a limit either Absolute or Relative specified on the Settings 7 Limits tab is considered a violation Spurious Response A response to a analyzer wherein the displayed frequency is not related to the input frequency Time Measurement This is the time in seconds relative to the time reference point in the first acquisition record in the data set SignalVu PC Printable Help 455 Glossary Time Reference Time Reference The point in time during the acquisition record used as the zero point for counting time The time reference can be set to either the start of the acquisition record or t
250. e points show all data symbol subcarriers modulation For single carrier 802 11b each point corresponds to a single modulated chip To show the WLAN Constellation display 1 2 3 4 SSF Oy u If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select WLAN Constellation in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Constellation icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN Constellation icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the WLAN Constellation display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval Channel Bandwidth and Subcarrier Spacing controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Constellation Settings Elements of the Display l Symbols 52 Subcarrier 2 Type Data Value 20 Magnitude 3 272 44 09 Phase Markers Define J MR Time 30 Symbol Xo Center Peak gt Table J 0519 050 Item Display element Description 1 Plot Constellation graph
251. e sample to use in measurements Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Offset value based on the requirements of the selected display Analysis Length Specifies the length of the analysis period to use in measurements Length is specified in either seconds or symbols depending on the Units setting For most modulation types the Analysis Length set when Auto is enabled is 128 symbols For some modulation types a longer length is used Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Length value based on the requirements of the selected display Time Zero Reference Specifies the zero point for the analysis time Actual This is a displayed value not a setting It is the Analysis Length time or symbols being used by the analyzer this value may not match the Analysis Length requested in manual mode Units Sets the units of the Analysis Length to either Symbols or Seconds Analysis Offset Use analysis offset to specify where measurements begin Be aware that you cannot set the Analysis Offset outside the range of time covered by the current acquisition data all time values are relative to the Time Zero Reference You can set the Analysis Length so that the requested analysis period falls partly or entirely outside the current range of acquisition data settings When the next acquisition is taken its Acquisition Length will be increased to cover the new Analysis Length as long a
252. e trace display characteristics of the selected display Modulation Pararns Freq amp Bw Equalizer Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Traces Prefs Trace Trace2 V Show V Freeze All GP Digital Modulation displays Content Points symbol 4 Q Offset Use shared Pref Symbol point location Center v Example traces tab for constellation display set to SOQPSK modulation type Note that some settings are not present for all modulation types and some settings are not present for all displays Modulation Params Freq amp BW Equalizer Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Traces Prefs Trace Trace 1 V Show Freeze mami f All GP Digital Madulation displays Content Points symbol 4 X Phase multiplier Example trace tab for constellation display set to CPM modulation type Modulation Params Freq amp gw Equalizer Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Trace NEN 4 Show Points symbol Content Symbol point location Example trace tab for Demod I amp Q display 348 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Setting Trace Tab Description Trace Show Selects the trace that is hidden or displayed based on whether or not Show is selected Specifies whether the trace selected by Trace is displayed or hidden Freeze Halts updates to the tr
253. east half the pre demodulation signal bandwidth as in this equation Audio BW gt Signal Bandwidth 2 NOTE When performing audio analysis you should allow the Audio BW control to automatically set the acquisition bandwidth rather than manually adjusting the Acq BW control on the Sampling Parameters tab of the Acquire control panel The audio measurement will cause the Acq BW setting to be gt Audio BW Direct or 2 2 x Audio BW AM FM PM For Direct signals set Audio Bandwidth large enough to include any significant harmonics non harmonics or other signal component of interest For example to measure up to the 10th harmonic of a signal with a 5 kHz fundamental component set Audio Bandwidth to 10 x 5 kHz 50 kHz For modulated signals Audio Bandwidth must be set wide enough to include all significant signal modulation components in addition to the desired audio analysis bandwidth For AM this is similar to Direct For example to measure up to the 10th harmonic of an AM signal with 3 kHz fundamental component set Audio Bandwidth to 10 x 3 kHz 30 kHz This ensures that the bandwidth of the data provided by the system to the measurement will be at least of 60 kHz 2 x 30 kHz which is sufficient for this signal and analysis requirement SignalVu PC Printable Help 297 Audio Analysis Params1 Tab 298 FM and PM are more complex For FM the analysis bandwidth needs to be at least twice as wide as the the sum of peak Frequen
254. easurements and MCPR measurement Freq amp RBW Measurement Params channels Scale Prefs Meas Freq 1 00000 GHz RBW 30 000 kHz 7 Auto Step 2 0000 MHz 4 Auto 7 VBW Setting Description Meas Freq Specifies the center measurement frequency Step The Step control sets the increment decrement size for the adjustment of the center frequency If Auto is enabled the analyzer will adjust the Step size as required RBW Select Auto or Manual Adjusts the RBW for the entire measurement This setting is Independent of the Spectrum view s RBW setting VBW Adjusts the VBW Video Bandwidth value VBW Maximum current RBW value VBW Minimum 1 10 000 RBW setting NOTE While the center frequency and step settings on this control tab are shared between ACPR MCPR and Occupied Bandwidth the RBW setting is not shared The RBW setting is unique for each measurement VBW The VBW setting enables disables the Video Bandwidth filter VBW is used in traditional swept analyzers to reduce the effect of noise on the displayed signal The VBW algorithm in the analyzer emulates the VBW filters of traditional swept analyzers The maximum VBW value is the current RBW setting The minimum VBW value is 1 10 000 of the RBW setting Measurement Params for ACPR and MCPR Displays The Measurement Params tab is where you set parameters that control the ACPR and MCPR measurements SignalVu PC Printable Help 117 RF Measureme
255. ecifies the type of modulation used by the input signal and other parameters that control the demodulation of the input signal Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range AnalysisTime Trace Scale Prefs Standard 802 16 2004 FFT Length 256 Spacing and Bandwidth Subcarrier Spacing 90 000 kHz Channel Bandwidth 20 160 MHz Guard Interval 1 8 v FFT Sample Rate 23 040 MS s Settings Description Standard Specifies the standard used for the input signal Choices are 802 11a g j and 802 16 2004 Guard Interval Specifies the guard interval used in the input signal Choices are 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 and User When you select User you can enter a percentage value to specify the size of the guard interval as a percentage of the useful symbol interval The Guard Interval range is 0 100 Spacing and Bandwidth Specifies the spacing between subcarriers and the nominal channel bandwidth Only one of these settings can be set at a time the other setting is automatically calculated Sample Rate Indicates the FFT sample rate based on the bandwidth or subcarrier setting SignalVu PC Printable Help 223 OFDM Analysis Advanced Params Tab OFDM Advanced Params Tab OFDM The Advanced Params tab contains parameters that control the analysis of the input signal Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range AnalysisTime Trace Scale Prefs Constellation determinati
256. ecify whether or not save files are named automatically and what information is saved in acquisition data files Security Selecting the Hide Sensitive readouts check box causes the instrument to replace measurement readouts with a string of asterisks Prefs Use this tab to select different color schemes for the measurement graphs and specify how markers should react when dragged Presets The Presets tab in the Options control panel allows you to specify actions taken when you press the Preset button You can read more about this tab here Analysis Time The Analysis Time tab in the Options control panel is used to specify the method used to automatically set the analysis and spectrum offsets when the Time Zero Reference see page 377 is set to Trigger The available settings are Include trigger point Selects an algorithm that uses the measurements to determine how far in advance of the trigger to set the analysis offset The analyzer tries to ensure that data about the trigger point is included in the analyses B Start at trigger point legacy The method used by the instrument in prior versions which sets the Analysis Offset to zero when possible The analyzer tries to ensure that data following the trigger point is included in the analyses Use this method if your measurements or procedures depend on past behavior of the Auto Analysis Offset function Save and Export The Save and Export tab allows you to spe
257. ectrogram can also be displayed in a 3 D waterfall format In the 3 D waterfall format the spectrogram displays the time axis along a simulated Z axis NOTE Spectrogram data is shared with the Spectrum display There is no linkage between DPX and Spectrogram 56 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Spectrogram Display To display a Spectrogram 1 2 3 Select the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This displays the Select Displays dialog box From the Measurements box select General Signal Viewing Double click the Spectrogram icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Spectrogram icon to the Selected displays box Click the OK button This displays the spectrogram view To display a 3 D version of the spectrogram select the 3 D checkbox Elements of the Spectrogram Display is avs Time di 72 0 us o RBW O 250 kHz OO ven o RefLev 0 00 dBm CF 2 44700 GHz JLrno ca 2 Freq 2 44530 Gt Overlap 84 Peak i j 0070_016 2 RefLev OO dem o v 0 7 Pos A 7 0 div amp CF 2 44530 GHz Span 10 00 MHz SignalVu PC Printable Help 57 General Signal Viewing Spectrogram Display Item Display element Description 1 Check mark indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Spectrogram di
258. ed display to a file for documentation purposes The exported file uses tab characters to separate values The settings included in the file depend on the selected display The contents of the file are the same as a Results export except it does not include the results Saving Acquisition Data with Setup Save for later analysis with the analyzer The setup is saved as part of the acquisition data file so you can choose when recalling data whether or not to also recall the associated acquisition and analysis parameters Saving Acquisition Data Export in CSV Format Save for examining results in other programs such as MATLAB or Excel Data Settings and Picture File Formats You can save different types of data for later recall and analysis 410 SignalVu PC Printable Help Saved File Types Managing Data Settings and Pictures Data Settings and Picture File Formats File type File extension Description Setup files setup Setup files enable you to save instrument settings for later recall Using these files saves setup time and ensures consistent measurements Picture png jpg bmp Screen capture of SignalVu PC application window They are useful for documenting results in test reports Results Export CSV Results files contain the trace points and numeric values that were produced by the selected measurement The header of a Results file includes key acquisition and analysis settings to aid in the interpretation
259. ee page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed OFDM EVM Display The OFDM EVM display shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Error Vector Magnitude values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency To show the OFDM EVM display 1 2 3 4 If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM EVM in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM EVM icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM EVM icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM EVM display SignalVu PC Printable Help 209 OFDM Analysis OFDM EVM Settings 6 Setthe Frequency appropriate for the signal 7 Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel 8 Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard as appropriate Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal 9 If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the Display f l cant SPERE 2 Posn 0 Sym 9 Scale 12 Sym fo Roses 9 Posh 26 Subc Scale 52 Subc 051908 Item Display element
260. ellation display 309 Demod I amp Q vs Time display 312 DPX Spectrum 42 EVM vs Time display 313 Eye Diagram display 316 FM display 89 Frequency Deviation vs Time 318 Frequency Settling Time 141 Frequency vs Time 66 Magnitude Error vs Time 320 MCPR 115 Occupied Bandwidth 124 OFDM Channel Response 205 OFDM Constellation 209 OFDM EVM 210 OFDM Flatness 212 OFDM Mag Error 214 OFDM Phase Error 216 OFDM Power 218 OFDM Summary 220 463 Index OFDM Symbol Table 222 Options control panel 18 P25 Constellation 265 P25 Eye Diagram 267 P25 Frequency Dev vs Time 278 P25 Power vs Time 269 P25 Summary 273 P25 Symbol Table 275 Phase Error vs Time 322 Phase Settling Time 137 Phase vs Time 68 Pulse Statistics display 237 Pulse Table display 232 Pulse Trace display 235 restoring defaults 13 RF I amp Q vs Time 70 Signal Quality 328 Spectrogram display 59 Spectrum display 55 Spectrum Emission Mask 153 Symbol Table display 330 Time Overview display 48 Trellis Diagram display 333 Trigger 399 WLAN Channel Response 171 WLAN Constellation 175 WLAN EVM 177 WLAN Mag Error 179 WLAN Phase Error 181 WLAN Power vs Time 184 WLAN Spectral Flatness 186 WLAN Summary 191 WLAN Symbol Table 194 Settled Frequency definition 129 Settled Phase definition 129 settling time measuring 138 Settling Time 128 definition 129 Settling Time decimal places Settling Time displays 149 s
261. ements of P25 signal quality Symbol Table Pulse measurements Measurement Shows decoded data values for each data symbol in the analyzed signal packet Results are presented with subcarrier frequency indices in the horizontal dimension and symbol time intervals in the vertical dimension Description Average ON Power The average power transmitted during pulse on Peak Power Maximum power during pulse on Average Transmitted Power The average power transmitted including both the time the pulse is on and the time it is off and all transition times Pulse Width The time from the rising edge to the falling edge at the 3 dB 6 dB level 50 of the user selected 100 level Level is user selectable for Volts or Watts Rise Time The time required for a signal to rise from 10 to 90 or 20 to 80 of the user selected 100 level Fall Time The time required for a signal to fall from 90 to 10 or 80 to 20 of the user selected 100 level Repetition Interval The time from a pulse rising edge to the next pulse rising edge Repetition Rate The inverse of repetition interval Duty Factor Duty Factor Ratio The ratio of the width to the pulse period expressed as a percentage The ratio of the pulse width to the pulse period Signal Vu PC Printable Help Taking Measurements Available Measurements Measurement Description Ripple Ripple is the
262. eneral Signal Viewing 54 Elements of the Spectrum Display e 9 Autoscale CF 1 50000 GHz 2 Trace 1 dB div 10 0 dB RBW 20 0 300 kHz VBW 40 0 60 0 80 0 100 0 4 Show Peak Normal Spectrum Display Span 40 00 MHz 1023 007 Item Display element Description 1 dB div Sets the vertical scale value The maximum value is 20 00 dB division 2 RBW Sets the resolution bandwidth Note that when the RBW is set to Auto its value is italicized 3 VBW Enables the VBW Video Bandwidth filter See Setup gt Settings gt BW Tab see page 76 4 Autoscale Adjusts the Vertical and Horizontal scaling to display the entire trace on screen 5 Position Default function is CF center frequency equivalent to the Freq setting If Horizontal scaling has been manually adjusted in Settings gt Scale then Offset will replace CF as the setting at the bottom left corner of the screen 6 Span Scale Default function is Span frequency difference between the left edge of the display and the right edge If Horizontal scaling has been manually adjusted in Settings gt Scale then Scale will replace Span as the setting at the bottom right corner of the screen 7 Clear Restarts multi trace functions Avg Hold 8 Function Readout of the Detection and Function selections for the selected trace 9 Show Controls whether the selected Trace is visible or not When trace is
263. ent is connected NOTE You can quickly verify connection status by looking at the Connection indicator square on the menu bar It is green f when an instrument is connected It is red W when it is not You can also view the name of the instrument that is connected by hovering the mouse indicator over the W SignalVu PC Printable Help Using SignalVu PC Connectivity 10 Connect a DUT device under test to the MDO 11 Use SignalVu PC to configure the MDO Frequency Amplitude Span Bandwidth and Time Scaling parameters for the RF channels can only be changed using SignalVu PC NOTE Press F1 on your keyboard to open the SignalVu PC help for information about configuring and using the application You can also click on Help gt User Manual in the SignalVu PC menu bar to open the help 12 When you are ready to connect to a different instrument select Disconnect From Instrument to first end the current connection NOTE For more search options using TekVISA go to the Visa Resource Manager double click in the applications tray SignalVu PC Printable Help 23 Using SignalVu PC 24 Connectivity LAN or wireles connection To establish a Live Link connection using a LAN or wireless connection perform the following procedures in the order given 1 Check that the PC has a working LAN or wireless network connection 2 Usean Ethernet cable to connect the MDO to the network 3 Check that the MDO is on an
264. ent result appears in the P25 Summary display This measurement is done by calculating power in the adjacent channels for the entire duration of data chosen by the user including the power ramp up and ramp down portions The standard recommends 360 ms of data for this measurement unlike the other ACPR measurements for which the analysis 1s done only for the on slot region The higher and lower adjacent channel power is reported in the P25 Summary display under Power Measurements The two results are then subtracted from the calculated RF output power and the minimum of the two results is presented as the Min Pk ACPR in the P25 Summary display This measurement is only done for bursty HCPM data and not for High Deviation or Low Deviation test patterns The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail This measurement result is not shown in the P25 Summary display when trigger measurements are chosen NOTE Read about important information related to HCPM bursty data measurements here see page 262 HCPM Transmitter Logical Channel Off Slot power Phase 2 HCPM This measures the power of a TDMA transmitter during the off portion of the TDMA pulse This measurement only applies to inbound signals This result can be viewed in P25 Summary and P25 Power vs Time displays The measurement is done as suggested by the standard to calculate PonreL and Porrre
265. ents are taken on a pulse Levels see page 245 Specifies parameters that control the method and levels used to calculate some pulse values Freq Estimation see Specifies the reference used for computing frequency errors page 245 Restore defaults Sets the Pulse Table parameters to their default values 232 SignalVu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Measurements Tab Measurements Tab The Measurements tab is used to specify the measurements that appear in the Pulse Table Measurements Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Show in Puse 9 average ON Power 1 V Peak Power dexal V Average Transmitted Power V Pulse Width V Rise Time x Show in Pulse Checked measurements appear in the Pulse Table Select all Click Select all to choose all measurements for display in the Pulse Table Clear all Click Clear all to remove all measurements from the Pulse Table display Pulse Trace Display The Pulse Trace display shows one measurement result and a trace graph illustrating that measurement for a selected pulse number You can also choose to display arrows and lines in the graph that illustrate where on the pulse the measurement is being taken SignalVu PC Printable Help 233 Pulsed RF Pulse Trace Display 234 Elements of the Pulse Trace Display pn 5 2 73 dem Result dBidiv Widths ino ae 2 Pulse 1 5 115us P 97 27 dam T Autescale 2 973 us Scale 7 1
266. equency is measured at a user adjustable time following the rising edge of each pulse RMS Freq Error The RMS Frequency Error measurement is the RMS average of the Freq Error vs Time trace computed over the Measurement Time Max Freq Error The maximum frequency error is the difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the analyzer RMS Phase Error The RMS Phase Error measurement is the RMS average of the Phase vs Time trace computed over the Measurement Time Max Phase Error The phase is measured at each point during the pulse s ON time The phase error for each point is the difference between the measured phase value and the calculated ideal phase value After the phase error is calculated for all points in the acquisition record the largest error in the positive direction and the largest in the negative direction are determined Whichever of these two values has the greater absolute value is designated the Max Phase Error Freq Deviation The Frequency Deviation measurement is the difference between the maximum and minimum measured values of the signal frequency during the Measurement Time SignalVu PC Printable Help 35 Taking Measurements 36 Measurement Delta Frequency Non chirped pulse Available Measurements Description The Delta Frequency measurement is the difference from the measurement frequency to each pulse frequenc
267. er 121 Occupied Bandwidth 124 Occupied Bandwidth settings 124 Occupied BW display 121 OFDM Channel Response display 205 settings 205 OFDM Constellation display 208 settings 209 Index OFDM EVM display 209 settings 210 OFDM Mag Error display 213 settings 214 OFDM Phase Error display 215 OFDM Power display 217 settings 218 OFDM Spectral Flatness display 211 settings 212 OFDM Summary display 219 settings 220 OFDM Symbol Table display 221 settings 222 Offset amp Limits Table tab SEM display 157 Offset EVM 327 online help 415 Open Recall 450 Optimization Channel Power amp ACPR display MCPR display 117 Options installed 3 Options control panel 18 OQPSK 450 OQPSK and SOQPSK modulation type measurements 32 Overlap 59 Overshoot 35 Overshoot dB 35 Overshoot settings 243 P P25 presets 15 P25 Constellation display 263 settings 265 P25 Eye Diagram display 265 461 Index settings 267 P25 limits 270 P25 measurements 34 P25 Power vs Time display 268 settings 269 P25 Summary display 270 settings 273 P25 Symbol Table display 273 settings 275 Parameters tab AM display 83 CCDF display 128 FM display 91 Occupied BW display 125 PM display 98 SEM display 153 Params tab Pulsed RF displays 238 Params tab Audio Analysis displays 296 Params2 tab Audio Analysis displays 299 Pass Fail readout SEM display
268. er Tabs Use the Trigger tabs to access controls for setting the different trigger parameters Tab Description Event see page 400 Sets parameters that control triggering on the selected trigger source Advanced see page 401 Sets controls for triggering in swept acquisitions Actions see page 402 Sets parameters for Save on trigger function SignalVu PC Printable Help 399 Controlling the Acquisition of Data Event Tab Event Tab 400 The Event tab is used to set the parameters that define trigger events The parameters that appear on the Event tab change depending on the selected Trigger source and type Trigger Event Advanced Actions Slope Free Run se Level 10 0 dBm i RF Input x Rise jj T Triggered Type Trigger BW 40 MHz Power Fall Mf Force Trigger T Source Source specifies the source of the signal to be monitored for a trigger event The choices available are RF Input and External The Source drop down list is always visible on the Event tab Type Type defines the trigger type Power is the only selection available With Power as the trigger type the trigger event is determined by the transition through an adjustable level The Type selection is only present when Source is set to RF Input For the Power setting if the RF input signal crosses the specified level in the direction set by Slope a trigger event occurs trigger event does not occur if the power
269. er of points per symbol when chosen to view as Vectors or Lines and to control the view as Freq Dev or IQ Scale see page 286 Defines the vertical and horizontal axes Prefs see page 289 Specifies the radix of the marker readout and whether elements of the graphs are displayed P25 Analysis Shared Measurement Settings Application Toolbar i The control panel tabs in this section are shared between the displays in P25 Analysis Setup gt Displays Some tabs are shared by all the displays some tabs are shared by only a subset of displays The settings available on some tabs change depending on the selected display SignalVu PC Printable Help 279 APCO P25 Analysis Modulation Params Tab P25 Common controls for P25 analysis displays Settings tab Description Modulation Params see page 280 Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters Analysis Params see page 283 Specifies parameters used by the application to analyze the input signal Analysis Time see page 283 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for P25 Analysis displays Trace see page 286 Specifies the trace type Vectors Points and Lines the number of points per symbol when chosen to view as Vectors or Lines and to control the view as Freq
270. er of symbols in the analysis area Changing the Signal Quality Display Settings see page 328 Signal Quality Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar x The Setup settings for Signal Quality are accessible only when the Signal Quality display is selected NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Signal Quality display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 328 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Symbol Table Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see The Modulation tab specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other page 335 parameters Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings for frequency error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 The Advanced Params tab specifies frequency offset magnitude normalization method and allows you to swap the and Q signals Find see page 346 Find tab is used to set parameters for finding bursts within the data record Analysi
271. erage trace Scale see page 201 Specifies the vertical subcarrier for non b standards only and symbols scale and position settings Prefs see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Magnitude Error Display The WLAN Magnitude Error display shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Magnitude Error values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency NOTE For 802 11b analysis the subcarrier graph is not displayed To show the WLAN Magnitude Error display 1 2 3 4 we qx om ow 178 If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Mag Error icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN Mag Error icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the WLAN Mag Error display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file
272. ered violations The available choices are shown below Abs Start dBm Specifies the mask level at the inner edge of the selected offset Abs Stop dBm Specifies the mask level at the outer edge of the selected offset Abs Same Specifies whether the value for the inner and outer edges of the offset must be the same value When enabled the Abs Stop cell is grayed out and set to the value of the Abs Start cell Rel Start dBm Specifies the mask level for the Relative mask at the inner edge of the selected offset Rel Stop dBm Specifies the mask level for the Relative mask at the outer edge of the selected offset Rel Same Specifies whether the inner and outer edges of the offset must be the same value When enabled the Rel Stop cell is grayed out and its value is set to the value of the Rel Start cell SignalVu PC Printable Help 159 RF Measurements Scale Tab SEM Scale Tab SEM Use the Scale tab to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Parameters Processing Ref Channel Offsets amp Limits Table Scale prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 100 00 dB Scale 100 0 MHz Position 0 00 dBm Reset Scale Position 1 5000 GHz Autoscale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace
273. erence is a calculated or user specified value of final settled frequency within the measurement period When set to Auto the instrument determines this value by averaging at least the last 256 samples at the end of the measurement period When set to Meas freq the Target Reference is set to the Measurement Frequency of the instrument You can enter a manual offset from the target frequency to fine tune the Target Reference when Meas freq is selected Tolerance The Tolerance is the frequency or phase range within which the signal must remain to be considered settled This is set as a value by the user In the frequency settling time measurement the tolerance band is centered about the target value In the phase settling time measurement the tolerance band is centered about the settled phase value The target frequency depends on the Target reference value setting m If Target Reference is set to AUTO then the target value is the settled value the frequency at which the signal is considered settled m If Target Reference is set to MeasFreq then the Target value Meas Frequency Offset Offset Offset is used for fine tuning the Target Reference when Meas freq is selected The value for Offset is entered manually SignalVu PC Printable Help 143 RF Measurements Time Params Tab for Settling Time Displays Time Params Tab for Settling Time Displays The Time Params tab is used to set the Measurement length and minimum set
274. erfect I Q modulation Not valid for BPSK modulation type Rho The normalized correlated power of the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Like EVM Rho is a measure of modulation quality The value of Rho is less than 1 in all practical cases and is equal to 1 for a perfect signal measured in a perfect receiver SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Signal Quality Display Measurements for OQPSK and SOQPSK modulation types Measurement EVM Description The normalized RMS value of the error vector between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal over the analysis length The EVM is generally measured on symbol or chip instants and is reported in units of percent and dB EVM is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed These estimates are made over the analysis length Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Offset EVM Offset EVM is like EVM except for a difference in the time alignment of the and Q samples For EVM and Q samples are collected at the same time for every symbol decision point twice the symbol rate for offset modulations For Offset EVM the and Q symbol decision points are time aligned before collecting the and Q samples In this case one and one Q sample is collected for each symbol half as many samples as the same number of symbols for non offset EVM Phase Error The
275. eric values for the AM positive modulation factor AM negative modulation factor and Total AM 6 Position Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 7 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale time across the entire graph the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the trace by adjusting the position 8 Clear Erases the trace from the graph 9 Trace Detection readout Displays the Settings gt Trace gt Detection setting Changing the AM Settings see page 82 AM Settings 82 Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar zi The AM Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the AM Display Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Carrier Amplitude Detection Average Median Measurement BW 10 00 MHz SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Parameters Tab Setting Description Parameters see page 83 Sets the Carrier Amplitude Detection method You can choose either Average or Median Trace see page 84 Sets Trace display parameters Scale see page 86 Sets vertical and horizontal scale and position parameters Prefs see page 87 Specifies whether or not certain display elements are shown Specifies the maximum number of points shown in the display graph Parameters Tab The Parameters tab enables you to specify two parameters that control the carrier amplitude
276. error and the time at which it occurred Also displays the RMS value over the analysis length 7 Scale Sets the time spanned by the graph Changing the Phase Error vs Time Display Settings see page 322 Phase Error vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar E 322 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Signal Quality Display The settings for the Phase Error vs Time display are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Phase Error vs Time display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 Settings tab Description Modulation Params see page 335 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings for frequency error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 Find see page 346 Specifies additional parameters Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch
277. ers Trace Scale Prefs V Show graticule Setting Max trace points 100K M 4 Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Description Show graticule Shows or hides the graticule Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area Max trace points The trace in the FM display can be set to a maximum of 100 000 points however the actual number of trace points can extend up to 500 000 points if Max trace points is set to Never Decimate If the Analysis Length includes more than the selected Max trace points value the trace is decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export PM Display The Phase Modulation Display shows Phase vs Time The vertical axis units are degrees and the horizontal axis units are seconds When taking measurements only the first burst in the Analysis period is analyzed No trace points are shown for data outside the first detected burst nor are measurements made on data outside the first detected burst SignalVu PC Printable Help 95 Analog Modulation 96 Elements of the Display 114 Position 24 7 m hs Bice Autoscale Y Fre
278. ers to display the Define Markers control panel Select the Define Peaks tab To define the level for Peak Threshold enter a value in the Peak Threshold number entry box To define the amount the trace must dip enter a value in the Peak Excursion number entry box UV ume OM cR m Click the close button to remove the Define Markers control panel Using the Markers Toolbar Application toolbar cP Menu bar View gt Marker Toolbar Select Marker Toolbar to display or hide the Marker Toolbar in the application window The Marker Toolbar enables you to operate existing markers or define new markers Markers Define v MR Frequency 1 900335 GHz To center Peak e Table x Enabling a marker or adjusting the position of a marker automatically opens the Markers toolbar 366 SignalVu PC Printable Help Marker Measurements Measuring Noise Using Delta Markers in the Spectrum Display Icon Readout Description Opens the Define Markers control panel y Mi Selected marker readout This readout shows which marker is selected The pop up menu allows you to choose the selected marker add markers and turn all markers off Frequency 1 5 GHz Marker position controls For frequency displays this readout shows the marker position in Hertz For time displays this readout shows the marker position in seconds The position of the selected marker can be changed by selecting the numeric readout and usin
279. erval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Signal Vu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Symbol Table Display WLAN Symbol Table for OFDM signals Subcarriers horzontal vs Symbols vertical 2 eee 57 56 55 54 52 51 50 EX Jag 47 47 re 45 4 43 rwn Ali A 40 39 38 34 em T A T eM el a m pS 20 j 3F OF 18 18 24 04 00 21 04 00 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 20 24 OF 18 18 24 04 00 26 04 o0 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 j3El8 l 20 2D 1F 18 00 j 24 04 00 22 OC 08 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E a 25 07 18 30 24 04 00 26 04 08 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3 25 07 18 08 24 04 00 22 04 00 26 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 2C OF 18 j00 24 04 00 26 04 00 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 25 F 18 00 22 04 00 21 04 00 26 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 38 20 2C 05 08 10 24 04 00 23 0C 08 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 28 25 05 08 08 27 04 00 23 0C 00 26 35 32 12 32 36 17 3E 0 38 20 2D OF 08 08 24 04 00 26 04 00 26 15 32 12 32 36 17 _ 3E 11 38820 24 0E 08 18 24 04 00 22 0C 00 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 2l 309 20 24 OD 18 30 24 04 00 22 0D 00 27 15 32 12 32 36 17 3E 13 38 l 20 25 OD 08 18 24 04 00 23 04 08 27 17 32 12 32
280. es can be analyzed than narrow pulses all other things being equal Define Tab 240 The Define tab enables you to specify parameters that control where measurements are made on a pulse The settings available depend on the measurement selected Params Define Levels Freg Estimation Scale Prefs Measurements Impulse Response X Time method Absolute Y Ref R 100 V Apply ampl corrections E und Start S 0 000 s Keep out time 0 000 s R SL fh Length L 1 00 us The following paragraphs describe the settings that appear on the Define tab according to the Measurement s selection Freq Domain Linearity Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs Measurement s Freg domain Linearity Time method Absolute Ref R 100 a LAN Start 5 0 000 s R SL Length L 1 00 us SignalVu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Define Tab Setting Description Time method Specifies how the measurements duration is determined The choices are Absolute and Relative Absolute time method Ref R Ref specifies the level along the pulse rising edge that is defined as the point from which Start time is counted Choices 50 60 70 80 90 100 Default 10096 Start S Start specifies the time the instrument waits after the rising edge reference before starting to measure the pulse The Start time is measured from the point along the pulse risi
281. es instruments Saves the selected trace for later analysis by the analyzer Data is saved in a format readable only by SignalVu PC oscilloscopes running SignalVu software or RSA6100 RSA5100 SPECMON Series instruments Exported Traces and Numeric Results Save traces and results in a file format that can be used by other programs Pictures of the Display Save screen images in graphic image file formats that can be used in other programs Exported Acquisition Data Save acquisition data records in a file format that can be used by other programs Acquisition data can be saved in either comma separated variable format or MATLAB format Data Settings and Picture File Formats see page 410 Options for Saving Pictures of the Display Option Setting Description Image PNG Saves exported screen captures in Portable Network Graphics format Format JPG Saves exported screen captures in Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG format BMP Saves exported screen captures in Windows bitmap format SignalVu PC Printable Help 419 Reference Measurement Data Info Measurement Data Info The Measurement Data Info command in the File menu displays a listing of acquisition related information about the last data analyzed by the selected measurement The last data can be from the current acquisition or it could be from a recalled data file Last record analyzed in selected Display Timestamp 3 10 2014 8 33 50
282. es the RF Output Power as recommended for transmitters This is only used in the computation of off slot power in HCPM modulated signals Analysis Time Tab P25 The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define how the signal is analyzed in the P25 Analysis displays Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Prefs Trig Meas Analysis Offset 204 800 us 7 Auto Time Zero Reference Analysis Length 94 000 ms 7 Auto Units Available 31 816 ms SignalVu PC Printable Help 283 APCO P25 Analysis Analysis Time Tab P25 284 Settings Description Analysis Offset Specifies the location of the first time sample to use in measurements Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Offset value based on the requirements of the selected display Analysis Length Specifies the length of the analysis period to use in measurements Length is specified in either symbols or seconds depending on the Units setting Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Length value based on the requirements of the selected display Actual This is a displayed value not a setting It is the Analysis Length time or symbols being used by the analyzer this value may not match the Analysis Length requested in manual mode Time Zero Reference Specifies the zero point for the analysis time Units Specifies the units of the Analysis Length to either Symb
283. es until pressed File Length File Length is enabled by default This determines how much data time in milliseconds seconds or minutes is recorded when recording starts File Length uses the Max saved files per run setting to determine how many data files are captured per each recording session Disabling File Length allows the recording to continue until the Stop button is pressed or the specified save location runs out of space Location Base file name Sets the location for the recorded file s Enter a base name that will be used for all recorded files This base name is appended with additional information creating unique file names Max saved files per run This determines how many times a record is created of the specified File Length setting If the File Length is not enabled this setting is ignored Data structure Choose the output data file structure Refer to the RSA306 API programming manual for information about the data files created with the Record feature Formatted Formatted files are created ending with a r3f suffix Raw Triggering Unformatted files are created Two files are created for each recording a header file r3h and the data file 13a Triggering is available in SignalVu PC when connected to an RSA306 Spectrum Analyzer The RSA306 analyzer has two triggering modes Free Run and Triggered Free Run In Free Run mode the RSA306 initiates acquisitio
284. et and range for both vertical and horizontal to provide the best display 4 Position Displays the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Scale Adjust the horizontal scale time Changing Frequency vs Time Display Settings see page 278 P25 Frequency Dev Vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar zi The Setup settings for P25 Frequency Dev vs Time are shown in the following table 278 Signal Vu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis P25 Analysis Shared Measurement Settings Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters page 280 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 283 Analysis Time see page 283 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for P25 Analysis displays Trig Meas see page 288 Enables you to select from various trigger measurements The trigger selections vary by signal type Test Patterns see page 285 Specifies the type of test pattern being used Some analysis differs based on the selected test pattern Available test patterns vary depending on the selected standard and modulation type Trace see page 286 Specifies the trace type Vectors Points and Lines the numb
285. ete for example 10 acquisitions or 10 averages have already been completed each subsequent Resume command will cause one more acquisition to be taken and its results added to the accumulation Resume is not available if instrument settings have been changed Abort Immediately halts the current measurement acquisition cycle Replay Menu The Replay Menu see page 385 allows you to run measurements using the data in a recalled acquisition data file You can use this to compute new results for old data after you change settings or measurements Markers Menu The Markers menu provides to settings that define and control the location of markers Setting Description Peak see page 364 Moves the selected marker to the highest peak on the trace Next Peak gt Moves the selected marker to next peak depending on the setting chosen Marker to Center Frequency Sets center frequency to the frequency of the selected marker Define Markers see page 364 Displays the Define Marker control panel Setup Menu The Setup menu provides access to control panels that specify parameters for numerous signal analyzer functions 424 Signal Vu PC Printable Help Reference Presets Menu Command Description Displays see page 27 Displays the Displays control panel Settings see page 438 Displays the Settings control panel for the selected display Trigger see page 399 Displays the Trigger co
286. eters are available in Real Time mode Noise correction controls NOTE The following two noise correction controls are only available when SignalVu PC is connected to an MDO4000B instrument Measure Noise floor Takes preliminary acquisitions to measures the instrument noise floor This initiates a noise correction A noise correction signal is created by switching off the RF input to the MDO4000B and performing acquisitions of the instrument s internal noise Fifty acquisitions are averaged to create the noise reference signal The noise reference signal is measured for the Reference channel and each Offset is defined by the measurement settings Apply noise correction This item is enabled and the check box automatically checked after the noise reference signal is taken when the Measure Noise floor button is clicked This initiates noise reference subtraction from the incoming signal power for each region to create the corrected result All calculations are performed in Watts and then converted to the desired units The amount of noise correction is limited to 20 dB to avoid the possibility of a negative power measurement This is a rare condition that could occur if the subtraction of the reference power from the channel power results in a negative value or infinite dBm The noise reference for a region is subtracted from each trace point in the channel rather than offsetting the entire region by a single amount This produce
287. ets the time represented by each line in the graph to be adjusted by the analyzer checked or manually when unchecked When Auto is enabled Time Resolution change based on Time div Capacity Readout of the total length of time that can be captured This readout is provided so that you can see how changing the Trace Points and Time resolution affects the amount of data that can be captured Capacity is represented in the format dd hh mm ss Horizontal frequency Scale Sets the displayed frequency range of the graph This control affects only visual scaling and does not change the acquisition or analysis parameters Position Sets the frequency displayed at the center of the graph Changing this value does not change the Frequency setting Autoscale Sets the frequency scale to the Spectrogram Span value SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Time Overview Display Time Overview Display The Time Overview display shows the entire acquisition record and shows you how the spectrum time and analysis time fit within the acquisition record This enables you to see how you can adjust the spectrum time and analysis time to measure portions of the data You can specify the maximum number of trace points in the Time Overview display You can set the maximum number of trace points to 1K 10K 100K 1M points or to Never decimate If the Acquisition Length includes more than 10 000 sample points and Max trace points
288. ets these values by clearing the result memory Packet Format Data Modulation Displays the packet format AG HT MF HT GF VHT Displays the modulation used in the Data symbols BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 256QAM Guard Interval Displays the Guard Interval used by the Data symbols 1 4 1 8 Symbols EVM Avg Power Displays the type and number of symbols EVM RMS and average power of the Preamble and Data portions of the packet SIG Data L SIG Data HT SIG Data VHT SIG Data Displays he decimal values of the received packet SIGNAL HT SIGNAL and VHT SIGNAL symbols fields The Pass Fail result in each heading line indicates whether the calculated Parity or CRC value matches the received Parity or CRC value of the corresponding SIGNAL symbol grouping SignalVu PC Printable Help 189 WLAN Measurements WLAN Summary Display WLAN Summary Display for 802 11b Signals Standard 802 11b Packet Format Auto Detect Burst Power 1 22 dBm Peak to Average 1 50 dB Header Data CRC Pass Burst Index 1 IQ Origin Offset 39 12 dB Signal 20 cu 0 Giap n LEDa Ife Length 400 CRC 17735 EVM All 1k Chips RMS 39 12 dB 39 02 dB Peak 30 29 dB 30 32 dB Pk Chip 2992 66 Avg RMS 39 12 dB 1 of1 Bursts Max RMS 39 12 dB Packet Format DSSS 2M Data Modulation DSSS 2M Chips EVM Avg Power Preamble 1584 38 96 dB 1 72 dBm Header 528 39 06 dB 1 23 dBm Data 4400 39 19 dB 1 23 dB
289. ettings 2 Scale 59 990 ms Power Info PTX Item 36 00 dBm PONREL 10 00 d8m PmaxOn 0 2 to 1 0 004 dB Off Slot Power 62 45 dBm POFFREL 88 45 dam Pmaxoff 29 to 30 2 0 005 dB Pssmax 1 to 29 0 001 dB Display element Pssmin 1 to 29 0 001 dB RampUp 1 200 ms Onsbt 28 000 ms RampDown 1 198 ms _Offslot 29 592 ms Description Top of graph first settting Top of graph second setting Sets the Power level that appears at the top of the graph in dBm This is only a visual control for panning the graph Sets the vertical Scale of the graphs in dB div This is only a visual control for panning the graph View Only available for bursty HCPM data Selects the specific view of the packet burst within the display Full Burst displays the entire packet with vertical lines indicating Power ramp up On Slot Power ramp down and Off slot regions Ramp Up zooms the display into the interval around the packet rising edge Ramp Down zooms the display into the interval around the packet falling edge Bottom of graph readout Shows the Power level at the bottom of the graph in dBm Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display Bottom of graph left side Sets the starting time of the graph in seconds COoOl N OD on Bottom of graph right side Table below graph Sets the scale width of the graph in seconds This table sh
290. ettings see page 124 OFDM Constellation Settings see page 265 OFDM EVM Settings see page 177 OFDM Magnitude Error Settings see page 212 OFDM Phase Error Settings see page 181 OFDM Power Settings see page 184 OFDM Summary Settings see page 273 OFDM Symbol Table Settings see page 194 Phase Error vs Time Settings see page 322 Phase vs Time Settings see page 68 PM Settings see page 97 Pulse Statistics Settings see page 237 Pulse Table Settings see page 232 SignalVu PC Printable Help 439 Reference 440 Pulse Trace Settings see page 235 RF I Q vs Time Settings see page 70 Mask Test Limits Settings see page 371 Settling Time Settings see page 141 Signal Quality Settings see page 328 Spectrogram Settings see page 59 Spectrum Settings see page 55 Symbol Table Settings see page 330 Time Overview Settings see page 48 Trellis Diagram Settings see page 333 Settings SignalVu PC Printable Help Glossary Accuracy Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value ACLR Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio is the ratio of the RRC Root Raised Cosine filtered mean power centered on the assigned channel frequency to the RRC filtered mean power centered on an adjacent frequency defined in 3GPP ACPR Measurement Adjacent Channel Power Ratio ACPR is the ratio of t
291. ettling time measurement text color 136 464 Setup Menu 424 setups saving 403 shape factor skirt selectivity 454 Show graticule General Signal Viewing Displays 79 Pulsed RF displays 248 Settling Time displays 149 Show Marker Readout in Graph General Signal Viewing Displays 79 Pulsed RF displays 248 RF Measurements displays 167 Settling Time displays 149 Show recalled trace 73 AM display 84 FM display 92 PM display 99 Time Overview display 51 signal 454 Signal Power Audio Summary display 294 Signal Quality display 323 Signal quality measurements 326 Signal Quality settings 328 SINAD Audio Summary display 295 span 454 span per division 454 Span RBW Ratio Spectrum display BW tab 76 spectrogram 454 Spectrogram display 56 Spectrogram display settings 59 spectrum 455 Spectrum DPX display 37 spectrum analysis 455 Spectrum analysis application presets 17 spectrum analyzer 455 Spectrum Center Frequency 379 Frequency tab 380 Spectrum display 53 Spectrum display settings 55 Spectrum Emission Mask display 149 settings 153 Spectrum Monitor Spectrogram 62 spectrum time 455 Spectrum Time tab 379 Spectrums line 59 Split DPX display 37 spur 455 spurious response 455 Standard Audio Filters tab 300 Standard Settings button 334 Standards presets 13 Standards presets P25 15 WLAN 15 Status Bar 423 Stop Replay menu 386 Summary P25 34 WLAN 30
292. etween the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Magnitude Error The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal IQ Origin Offset The magnitude of the DC offset of the signal measured at the symbol times It indicates the magnitude of the carrier feed through signal Gain Imbalance The gain difference between the and Q channels in the signal generation path Constellations with gain imbalance show a pattern with a width that is different from height Rho p The normalized correlated power of the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Like EVM Rho is a measure of modulation quality The value of Rho is less than 1 in all practical cases and is equal to 1 for a perfect signal measured in a perfect receiver Frequency Error The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the analyzer Quadrature Error The orthogonal error between the and Q channels The error shows the phase difference between and Q channels away from the ideal 90 degrees expected from the perfect I Q modulation Constellations with quadrature error will show some leakage of into Q and vice versa Constellation Display The Constellation Display shows a digitally modulated signal in constellation form To show the Constellation Display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Select the
293. ference Online Help P t 415 About the Vector Signal Analysis Software c cece cece cence ence eee ene nent eene eene 415 Mapping Measurements Mapping Measurements oe repe e ees Lr Te phD ER ERE UU LAN TH Qon ET UV ED IRE EE PUE 416 viii SignalVu PC Printable Help Table of Contents Menus Men OVervI6W co ssoetusddt ota tacto bee eddie E bb Deas ten xb npete ad vbbes da diva pts 416 File Menu Jo 417 View Menu Vew Mei oaraid aco sesesvendex usb ledeta tante cetexnmdda einsam i ted qb ce cx ad Ones HE 422 Run Menu Eun Menu erene a Uie dccus ME MetisEbE s LM E ede crAA Eee edd 423 Replay Replay Men EET 424 Markers Menu Markets Menu 5e eor ene ieguiot naadde ierann A epe borea e ed beo te ibt esa e qud Es 424 Setup Menu SOUP MGM m 424 Presets Menu Presets MENU PME 425 Tools Menu Tools MENU coe Pesan oorr ke xu Ere CREE dex eens derma panes dine auaaa emus o P E a 425 Live Link Menu Live Link Menu icio dere PRAE AS REA RENS ERE detest senbuaoeasdanend XE YA ERUPERERE ene 425 Window Menu Window Men o rae t brit Pete e nri teduboR uten on sapete dad obest ta qiva tis 426 Help Menu Ie In 426 Troubleshooting Error and Information Messages isssssssssssssssssssee eme emen messer enn 427 Displaying the Windows Event Viewer sssssssssessseess
294. ffset Integ Rel The relative integrated power of the offset with respect to the reference power Reordering results in the results table You can sort the results in the Results table by clicking the column heading containing the values you want to sort on You can sort results for the following columns Row Offset Start Frequency Stop Frequency Peak Abs and Peak Rel 152 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask Settings Rearranging columns in the results table You can rearrange the order of the columns and their size To rearrange columns select the column heading you want to move and drag it to the new position the new location is indicated by a dark blue bar that appears between column headings You can resize the columns by selecting the divider between columns and dragging it to a new position Spectrum Emission Mask Settings Application Toolbar zt The settings for the Spectrum Emission Mask display are visible when SEM is the selected display To display the SEM Settings select Setup gt Settings Settings tab Description Parameters Tab see Specifies several characteristics that control how the measurement is made page 153 Processing Tab see page 156 Specifies settings for detection on the Reference channel and the offsets Specifies the function setting Ref Channel Tab see Specifies how the measurements on the reference channel are performed
295. fies the reference used for computing frequency errors page 245 Scale see page 247 Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale settings Prefs see page 248 Specifies whether or not certain elements of the display are shown Pulsed RF Shared Measurement Settings The control panel tabs in this section are shared by the displays in the Pulsed RF folder Setup gt Displays Changing a setting on one tab changes that setting for all the Pulsed RF displays Common controls for pulsed RF displays Settings tab Description Params see page 238 Specifies several parameters that control how pulses are counted and defined Define see page 240 Specifies parameters that control where measurements are taken on a pulse Levels see page 245 Specifies parameters that control the method and levels used to calculate some pulse values Freq Estimation see Specifies the reference used for computing frequency errors page 245 Scale see page 247 Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale settings Prefs see page 248 Specifies whether or not certain elements of the display are shown Params Tab 238 The Params tab enables you to adjust several measurement parameters for Pulsed RF displays Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs Measurement Filter Gaussian X Power threshold to detect pulses 12 dBc Bandwidth 10 MHz Minimum OFF time between pulses 0 000 s Max number of
296. from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 Settings tab Description Modulation Params see page 335 Specifies the type of modulation used in the input signal and other parameters that controls the demodulation of the input signal Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings for frequency error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 Find see page 346 Specifies Freq Offset Magnitude normalization parameters and enables swapping and Q The Find tab is used to set parameters for finding bursts within the data record Analysis Time see page 346 The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define how the signal is analyzed in the general purpose digital modulation displays Trace see page 348 Scale see page 350 Specifies the display characteristics of the displayed trace Specifies the horizontal and vertical scale settings Prefs see page 350 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible Eye Diagram Display The Eye Diagram Display shows a digitally modu
297. ful if you need to contact Tektronix about the software Mapping Measurements The RSA Map software lets you record measurements on a geo referenced map or a bitmap map for documentation purposes If an external GPS receiver is connected to the analyzer measurements can be mapped at the GPS coordinates where the measurement was taken Using an external GPS receiver RSA Map can perform repeat measurements using either time or distance to initiate measurements RSA Map software can also save results for future reference or analysis To map measurements m Select Tools gt RSA Map This launches the RSAMap software in a separate window cs File View Tools Help 5 RHA Bo eE E Ly u u Spectrogram Li OBW Lat 83 288849 Long 18 667365 Scale 1 236830785 WorldMap bmp Not calibrated Full documentation on how to use RSA Map is provided in the RSA Map Help In RSA Map select Help gt User Manual Menu Overview 416 The main menus are Menu Description File see page 417 Select measurements open and save files print documents and preset View see page 422 Change display size display the Marker toolbar and Status bar Signal Vu PC Printable Help Reference File Menu Menu Description Replay see page 385 Replay measurements select which record s to play Replay Stop Pause or enable continuous loop Mar
298. g Error 383 2 He Auto Position 160 000 us Peak Normal Clear Scale 1 840 ms 0519 024 PM Display SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Item 1 Element Check mark indicator PM Settings Description The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the PM display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement Top of Graph control Sets the phase value indicated at the top of the graph Since the Position value at the vertical center of this graph remains constant as the Top of Graph value is adjusted the Vertical Scale increases as the Top of Graph value increases which also affects the bottom of graph readout Vertical Scale can also be controlled from the Settings control panel s Scale tab Position Specifies the phase shown at the center of the graph display Changing this value moves the trace up and down in the graph which affects the Top of Graph and Bottom of Graph values as well Bottom of Graph Readout Displays the phase value at the bottom of the graph Measurement readouts Displays numeric values for the Pk positive phase deviation Pk negative phase deviation Pk Pk peak to peak phase deviation and RMS RMS
299. g the knob to adjust the value Changes the analyzer s Center Frequency to the frequency of the selected marker Not selectable for time markers Peak Moves the marker to the highest peak on the signal On displays that scale about zero on the vertical axis for example Magnitude Error EVM and Frequency vs Time the highest peak selected by the Peak button is an absolute value therefore negative peaks are included in the search for the highest peak Moves the selected marker to the next peak to the left of the current position Moves the selected marker to the next peak to the right of the current position t E9 EJ Moves the selected marker to the next lower peak value The peak value here refers to the numeric value of the peak amplitude Thus when repeatedly moving the marker it can move to the right or left depending on the location of the next lower value Moves the selected marker to the next higher peak value The peak value here refers to the numeric value of the peak amplitude Thus when repeatedly moving the marker it can move to the right or left depending on the location of the next higher value Displays hides the marker table from the display x Removes the Marker Toolbar from the display Measuring Noise Using Delta Markers in the Spectrum Display In the Spectrum display you can set Markers to dBc Hz to measure noise on the trace Markers in this mode operate just
300. gh samples Settling Time Measurement Overview 128 The Settling Time measurement Option SVT is used to measure frequency and phase settling time of frequency agile oscillators and subsystems Automated measurements can reduce user to user measurement variations improve repeatability and measurement confidence and save time in gathering results SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Settling Time Measurement Overview Measurement Definitions Settling time The time measured from a reference point to when the signal of interest settles to within user defined tolerance Settled frequency The final reference frequency determined automatically or manually The tolerance band is centered about this settled frequency Settled phase The final reference phase determined automatically or manually The tolerance band is centered about this settled phase Mask Testing Mask testing is a tool to automatically determine the pass fail state of the Device Under Test The mask is defined over three or fewer user defined time zones with an independent limit band for each time zone If the mask is violated the area of violation is highlighted in red on screen and a Fail message is displayed The pass fail status of the mask test can be queried over GPIB for rapid results To configure Mask testing see the Mask tab see page 145 The instrument s Search function can watch the Settling Time measurement for either pass or fail res
301. gital Modulation Symbol Maps Modulation Params Freq amp BW Equalizer Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Show graticule Setting Radix Binary Y 4 Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Description Show graticule Shows or hides the graticule Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area Radix Specifies how symbols are displayed in the Symbol Table display and in the Marker readout in the Constellation display Remove Q offset The and Q data traces are displayed with an offset of half a symbol when the modulation type is set to SOQPSK or OQPSK You can remove this offset by selecting Remove Q offset Which is only present when the modulation type is set to OQPSK or SOQPSK Show EVM and Offset EVM results Adds EVM results in the display when enabled Offset EVM is always displayed Present only in Signal Quality display and with SOQPSK and OQPSK modulation types only Symbol Maps This topic shows the symbol mapping for each digital modulation technique QPSK OQPSK SOQPSK lire 0169 018 Right SignalVu PC Printable Help 0169 008 351 GP Digital Modulation Symbol Maps BPSK SBPSK D8PSK Phase shift Symbol value radians binary 0 000 T 4 001 Ti 2 011 3r
302. gital Modulation Overview Overview The displays in General Purpose GP Digital Modulation Displays gt Measurements gt GP Digital Modulation are Constellation Demod I amp Q vs Time B EVM vs Time m Eye Diagram B Frequency Deviation vs Time amp Magnitude Error vs Time m Phase Error vs Time B Signal Quality Symbol Table Trellis Diagram The General Purpose Digital Modulation Analysis Option 21 provides vector signal analyzer functionality A wide variety of modulation types are supported allowing you to view your signals in Constellation Eye and Trellis diagrams measure the quality of the modulation display time domain waveforms for demodulated I amp Q signals EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error and more Modulation Measurements NOTE A maximum of approximately 80 000 samples can be analyzed by the General Purpose Digital Modulation measurements the actual value varies with modulation type SignalVu PC Printable Help 307 GP Digital Modulation Measurement EVM Constellation Display Description The normalized RMS value of the error vector between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal over the analysis length The EVM is generally measured on symbol or chip instants and can be reported in units of percent or dB EVM is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed Phase Error The RMS phase difference b
303. gnitude Error vs Time Display Description Modulation Params see page 335 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings for frequency error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 Specifies additional parameters Find see page 346 Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch word Analysis Time see page 346 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Trace see page 348 Scale see page 350 Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Specifies the horizontal and vertical scale settings Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Magnitude Error vs Time Display The Magnitude Error displays the magnitude of the symbol error The amplitude appears on the vertical axis while time is plotted along the horizontal axis NOTE A maximum of approximately 80 000 samples can be analyzed
304. graph The readout indicates the subcarrier or frequency shown at the left edge of the display Scale Specifies the number of subcarriers shown in the graph Top of graph phase Sets the phase value indicated at the top of the graph Since the Position value at the vertical center of this graph remains constant as the Top of Graph value is adjusted the Vertical Scale increases as the Top of Graph value increases which also affects the bottom of graph readout 9 Position phase Specifies the phase shown at the center of the graph display Changing this value moves the trace up and down in the graph which affects the Top of Graph and Bottom of Graph values as well 10 Bottom of graph phase Indicates the phase at the bottom of the graph This value changes with the Position setting OFDM Channel Response Settings The OFDM Channel Response Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the Channel Response Display Settings tab Modulation Params see page 223 Description Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters Advanced Params see page 224 Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Data Range Tab see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time Tab see page 225 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is
305. graph readout Displays the bottom of graph value 6 Non harmonic threshold Displays the threshold for detecting non harmonic components indicator 7 Analysis results Display of the audio analysis results Audio Spectrum Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar zx The measurement settings for the Audio Spectrum display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 293 Audio Analysis Settings tab Audio Summary Display Description Params1 Tab see page 296 Params2 Tab see page 299 Specifies signal type Audio Bandwidth RBW RBW filter and Ref Audio Frequency Specifies Harmonics and Non Harmonics measurement parameters Audio Filters Tab see page 299 Specifies the audio filter characteristics Scale Tab see page 302 Sets vertical and horizontal scale and position parameters Prefs Tab see page 305 Specifies vertical units and whether on not some features are displayed in the graph Audio Summary Display 294 To display the Audio Summary display 1 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 From the Measurements box select Audio Analysis 3 Double click the Audio Summary icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Audio Summary icon to the Selected displays box 4 Click the OK button This shows the Audio Summary display The Audio Summary Display
306. gs The measurement settings for the DPX display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Freq amp Span see page 72 Sets frequency and span parameters for the DPX display This tab appears for the Spectrum and DPXogram displays BW see page 76 Sets Resolution Bandwidth Traces Tab Allows you to select the number and types of traces to display and their functions Amplitude Scale Tab see page 45 Time amp Freq Scale Tab see page 46 The Amplitude Scale tab allows you to change the vertical scale and offset enable the 3 D Waterfall display and set the color scheme used for the DPXogram trace The Time and Freq Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings number of points in the trace and Time resolution Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible Traces Tab 42 The Traces Tab allows you to set the display characteristics of the DPXOgram and Ogram traces in the DPX display Freq amp Span Bw Traces Ampl Scale Time amp Freq Prefs Trace DPXogram Detection sPek gt Setting 4 Show Freeze Description Trace drop down list Selects which trace to configure In SignalVu PC the only configurable traces are DPXogram and Ogram Show Specifies whether or not the trace shown in the Trace setting is displayed Freeze Halts updates to the selected trace Detection Set
307. gth The EVM is generally measured on symbol or chip instants and is reported in units of percent and dB EVM is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed These estimates are made over the analysis length Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Phase Error The RMS phase difference between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Mag Error The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value MER RMS The MER is defined as the ratio of I Q signal power to I Q noise power the result is indicated in dB IQ Origin Offset The magnitude of the DC offset of the signal measured at the symbol times It indicates the magnitude of the carrier feed through signal Frequency Error The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the instrument Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error The gain difference between the and Q channels in the signal generation path Constellations with gain imbalance show a pattern with a width that is different form height The orthogonal error between the and Q channels The error shows the phase difference between and Q channels away from the ideal 90 degrees expected from the p
308. hange the vertical and horizontal scale settings enable the 3 D Waterfall display and set the color scheme used for the spectrogram trace Freq amp Span BW Trace Amplitude Scale Time amp Freq Scale Prefs Height 3 D only Color Power Scale 100 00 dB 4 3 D Waterfall Color Temperature Position 5 00 dBm Northeast 7j Max 0 00 dBm Autoscale Reset Scale Min 100 00 dBm Setting Description Height 3 D only Scale Changes the vertical scale for trace Amplitude in the graph not the vertical scale for Time Position Specifies the level displayed at the bottom edge of the graph Bottom front edge in the 3 D view Autoscale Adjusts the vertical position and scale of the trace lines to bring them into the visible portion of the graph 3 D Waterfall Displays the spectrogram in a 3 D format Northeast Shifts the perspective of the 3 D graph so that the oldest traces move back and to the right Northwest Shifts the perspective of the 3 D graph so that the oldest traces move back and to the left Reset Scale Resets the Height and Color settings to their default values Color Power Color Displays a drop down list that allows you to set the color scheme used for the spectrogram trace Max Sets the maximum power level represented by the top of the color scale Min Sets the minimum power level represented by the bottom of the color scale Time amp Freq Scale Tab The Time and F
309. hannels Depending on the number of adjacent channels to see all the measurements you might need to drag the divider bar between the main display and the results table at the bottom of the window to change the height of the results table Setting MCPR Measurement Parameters see page 117 Setting Power Limits When power limits are enabled Settings gt Channels gt Add the comparison of the actual results of an adjacent channel is done against the limits If there is a failure the Lower and Upper power cells in the MCPR table will be red and the failure segments of the trace display will be red The words Fail in red will also appear in the top left corner of the display even if one adjacent band fails See the following image for an example Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Multiple Carrier Power Ratio Fai gt 0 00 dBm dB div 10 0 dB ivi 4 5 me ron nur 100 00 dBm Autoscale Pos 120 000000 MHz Scale 1 031550 MHz Reference Ch Offset Lower Upper Limit U Limit Power i da Al 937562 IEENCEDEELERE 50048 55000 A2 15 625kHz 76 71 dB 76 07 dB 65 00dB 65 00 dB A3 21 875kHz 76 47 dB 76 82 dB 65 00dB 65 00 dB A4 37 500kHz 77 88 dB 77 21 dB 65 00 dB 65 00 dB AS 62 500 kHz 77 70dB 76 79 dB 65 00 dB 65 00 dB Multiple Carrier Power Ratio The ratio of the signal power in an adjacent channel to the power in one or more main channels MCPR Setting
310. hat the entire trace fits in the graph Trace function readout Displays either Normal or MaxHold to indicate trace function Clear Resets count for Average and MaxHold functions Enabled only when Averaging or MaxHold is enabled Pressing Clear will clear the trace and if acquisition is running restart the averaging or hold process Graph Displays the input signal Shaded areas indicate the measurement bandwidth Settings gt Parameters tab gt Measurement BW Blue lines The blue lines indicate where the selected results selected in the Main results area are being measured on the trace Grid divider Determines the portion of the display allocated to the graph and detailed results area You can move the grid divider all the way to the top or bottom and any position in between Detailed results area Position and dB div Displays additional measurements results Position sets the top of graph value The dB div setting is the vertical scale value Main results area Displays results for Occupied Bandwidth OBW and x dB bandwidth Use the two radio buttons to select which of the two results are illustrated in the graph with the blue lines and arrows There are also controls for adjusting OBW Power x dB BW and RBW VBW Enables the VBW Video Bandwidth filter Displays current VBW filter setting See Setup gt Settings gt Freq amp RBW tab see page 117 Detailed Results
311. he Scale tab allows you to change the scale settings that control how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency There are two versions of the Scale tab for OFDM displays One version is used only for the Constellation display and the other version is used for the OFDM EVM OFDM Magnitude Error OFDM Phase Error and OFDM Power displays SignalVu PC Printable Help 227 OFDM Analysis Scale Tab OFDM Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Scale 41 8 Position 21 9 96 Autoscale Symbols Scale 200 Subc Scale 12 Sym 100 Subc Position 0 Sym Autoscale v Auto Autoscale Scale tab for OFDM EVM OFDM Mag Error OFDM Phase Error and OFDM Power displays Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range AnalysisTime Trace Scale Prefs Zoom Scale 3 Vertical Position 0 Horizontal Position O Scale tab for OFDM Constellation display Settings Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Scale Changes the vertical scale of the graph Position Adjusts the reference level away from top of the graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to contain the complete trace Subcarrier Controls the scale of the subcarrier graph and position of the trace Scale Specifies how many subcarriers are displayed horizontally
312. he Time and Freq Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings set the time resolution and number of trace points of the DPXogram display Freq amp Span BW Traces Ampl Scale Time amp Freq Prefs Audio Demod vertical time Horizontal frequency Timefdiv 10 05 Trace Points 801 v Scale 85 0 MHz Position 0 0 div Time resolution 200 ms 7 Auto Time at position 0 000 s Offset 1 9000 GHz Capacity 3 16 36 48 Reset Scale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical time Time div For most Spectrogram applications Primary time scale control is Time div Time scale can be zoomed in or out when acquisitions are stopped Position The position of the DPXOgram record at the bottom of the display Position cannot be changed while acquisitions are active and is reset to zero when acquisitions are started again Time at position Displays the time of the DPXogram line shown at the bottom of the graph This time is relative to the Time Zero Reference of the current acquisition If Position is set to a negative value the Time at position readout will be blanked Reset Scale Sets the Time div and Position settings to their default values Trace Points Sets the number of trace points computed for each DPXogram line These are the points used for marker measurements and for results export Time resolution Specifies the length of time represented by each line in the graph Auto S
313. he center of the graph display 4 Bottom Readout Displays the value of the frequency deviation value shown at the bottom of graph 5 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 6 Position Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 7 Scale Adjusts the span of the graph By decreasing the scale time per division the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the acquisition record by adjusting the offset 8 Freq Error Displays the difference between the maximum and minimum measured values of the signal frequency during the Measurement Time The displayed frequency error is followed by either Auto or Manual This indicates the selected carrier frequency detection method see Settings gt Freq amp BW Changing Frequency Deviation vs Time Settings see page 318 Frequency Deviation vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar tt The Setup settings for Frequency Deviation vs Time are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Frequency vs Time display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 318 Signal Vu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Settings tab Ma
314. he current status of the instrument Measurements made on this data might not be accurate Disabled data is from swept acquisition SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Error and Information Messages The display needs to run in real time mode The display associated with this message cannot run now because it is not the selected display and the selected display is performing multiple acquisitions it is in swept mode m Change the settings of the selected display so it is performing real time acquisitions B Select the associated display to make it the selected display When it 1s selected it will force the acquisition parameters to change to meet its own needs Frequency exceeds preamp range This is a warning that signals below the minimum preamp operating frequency are likely to be severely attenuated this is 100 kHz for option 51 1 MHz for option 50 Needs swept acq or larger AcqBW Acquire data while display is selected The display is not running because it needs to perform multiple acquisitions it must be in swept mode but it is not the selected display Only the selected display can perform multiple acquisitions m Select the display showing this message to give it control of acquisitions parameters Sometimes only one display can work and the others will be blank and show errors This happens when different displays have conflicting demands on the acquisition data record Export failure file not saved An error
315. he data should be saved Use Save to quickly save the same data as you saved the last time you executed a Save without having to specify the data type and location For example suppose you want to save a picture of a spectrum trace each time you adjust a circuit to document how the adjustments affect the output of the circuit The first time you want to save a picture of the display you will need to select Save As From the Save As dialog box you specify the type of data you want to save Picture of Selected Display and specify the location of the saved file As long as the Save and Export option is set to automatically name saved files the next time you want to save a picture of the display you can just press Save on the front panel and a picture of the selected display will be saved without requiring you to type a file name or the location of the file to be saved 418 SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Save Save As What Data Types Can Be Saved Data type Description Acquisition Data Acquisition data previously recalled can be exported with different settings Data is saved in a format readable only by SignalVu PC oscilloscopes running SignalVu software or RSA6100 RSA5100 SPECMON Series instruments Setup Selected Trace Configuration information detailing instrument settings Data can be saved in a format readable only by SignalVu PC oscilloscopes running SignalVu software or RSA6100 RSA5100 SPECMON Seri
316. he entire 9 k through 1 GHz range To use the Spur Search Multi Zone 9k 1GHz preset assuming that Preset action is set to Recall selected preset 1 Select Presets gt Application Select Spur Search Multi Zone 9k 1GHz and then click OK 2 Click Setup gt Settings when the preset s display and settings have all been recalled and acquisitions are running 3 Select the Ranges and Limits tab in the Spurious Settings control panel to view the spur information You can click the Expand button to view the table in a separate window NOTE You can read more about the Spurious display and its various parameters and settings in the RF Measurements section Settings Options Menu Bar Tools gt Options There are several settings you can change that are not related to measurement functions The Option settings control panel is used to change these settings 18 SignalVu PC Printable Help Using SignalVu PC Settings Options Presets Analysis Time Save and Export Securty Prefs Preset type Presets Main Current Preset action Recall selected preset Settings tab Description Presets Use this tab to configure Presets You can select Presets and specify the action to take when a preset is recalled Analysis Time Use this tab to specify the method used to automatically set the analysis and spectrum offsets when the Time Zero Reference see page 377 is set to Trigger Save and Export Use this tab to sp
317. he mean power centered on the assigned channel frequency to the mean power centered on an adjacent channel frequency In the 3GPP specification it is called ACLR Adjacent Channel Level Ratio and both the main channel and adjacent channels are required to be filtered with RRC Root Raised Cosine filters Acquisition A series of time contiguous frames This is also called a Block Analysis Length The length of time in the Analysis Time Analysis Time The portion of the acquisition record over which one or more measurements are calculated SignalVu PC Printable Help 441 Glossary ASK ASK Acronym for Amplitude Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the amplitude of the carrier is varied in accordance with the state of a digital input signal Block An integer number of time contiguous frames See also Acquisition Calibrator A signal generator producing a specified output used for calibration purposes Carrier The RF signal upon which modulation resides Carrier Frequency The frequency of the CW component of the carrier signal Carrier Signal The electrical signal typically a sine wave upon which modulation is impressed Carrier to Noise Ratio C N The ratio of carrier signal power to average noise power in a given bandwidth surrounding the carrier usually expressed in decibels 442 SignalVu PC Printable Help Glossary CCDF Complimentary Cumulative Distribution Function CC
318. he trigger point Trace As used in this help trace refers to the displayed signal The displayed signal can be a processed version of the input signal for example it may be averaged The trace is a result or output Vector Signal Analyzer Like a spectrum analyzer a device for determining the frequency components of a signal However unlike a standard spectrum analyzer the vector signal analyzer is optimized for analyzing digitally modulated RF signals Vertical Scale Factor Vertical Display Factor The number of dB volts etc represented by one vertical division of a spectrum analyzer display screen Violation A violation is a spur that exceeds either an Absolute or Relative limit depending on the selected mask specified on the Settings gt Limits tab A spur is a signal peak that exceeds a user definable threshold See Spurious gt Settings gt Ranges and excursion setting 456 SignalVu PC Printable Help Index Symbols and Numbers 6dB RBW MIL Filter shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 3 D Spectrogram display 56 3 D Waterfall Spectrogram DPXogram 61 Spectrogram DPXogram display 45 A About the Software 415 accuracy 441 ACLR 441 ACLR measurement 108 ACPR measurement 441 Acq Data Replay menu 385 Acq Data DPX Spectra 383 Acquire control panel 393 acquisition 441 acquisition data saving 403 Acquisition data files 19 Acquisition Data tab 420 Acquisition Info tab 384 acquisition mem
319. help within the software About the Vector Signal Analysis Software This window displays information about the SignalVu PC software About Tektronix Real Time Signal Analyzer Tek Tektronix Real Time Signal Analyzer Signalvu PC v2 7 0228 ektronix Copyright 2006 2012 Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Enabling Innovation Installed Options Essentials Signalvu PC SVE Pulse Measurements Signalvu PC SVP General Purpose Modulation Analysis Signalvu PC SYM Settling time measurements SignalVu PC SVT OFDM measurements SignalVu PC SYO gt 4 m Hardware Information Serial Number ax ifs Warning This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or Copy Info distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Version At the top of the window is a line that displays the version of the SignalVu PC software Installed Options This text box lists the software options installed Hardware Information This text box lists the serial number of the software and information about connected instruments SignalVu PC Printable Help 415 Reference Mapping Measurements Copy Info The Copy Info button copies the information to the Windows clipboard which you can then paste into a document This information may be use
320. highlights the control selected in the Analysis Time Control drop down list Changing the Time Overview Display Settings see page 48 Time Overview Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar i The Setup settings for Time Overview are shown in the following table 48 Signal Vu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Settings tab Time Overview Settings Description Scale see page 78 Trace see page 51 Adjusts the vertical and horizontal scale and offset of the display Allows you to select the types of trace to display and its function Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether or not certain display elements are shown SignalVu PC Printable Help 49 General Signal Viewing Navigator View Navigator View 50 The Time Overview Navigator View places the Time Overview display across the top of the application screen This allows you to adjust the area of interest in the Navigator View and see the results simultaneously in the other displays For example in the following image adjusting the mask in the Navigator View moves the trace and markers in all of the other displays El Tire Overview 2E Bo Securus 1 Pom mw Trrevev m 19 Ac we tes 2 vi he fi 1 59600 Git Spa D Trace 1 Stow Of Osx 2 10 ctr 14 Dem A ts K al 13 poraa Fi 158600 GM Spar 40 00 Mee Show Navigator View To show the Navigator View select View gt Navigator
321. hing pixels squared 5 mm Markers Define v MR Frequency 1 5 GHz To Center Peak e gt Table SignalVu PC Printable Help 365 Marker Measurements Using the Markers Toolbar NOTE The settings shown in the DPX Signal Density section of the Define Peaks tab are not used by SignalVu PC Amplitude Peak Threshold Peak Threshold specifies the level that the signal must exceed to be considered a peak Minimum Excursion Minimum Excursion specifies how much the signal must decrease and then increase before another peak can be declared DPX Signal Density Density Threshold Density Threshold specifies the signal density number of hits per displayed pixel that the DPX bitmap must exceed to be considered a trigger event Minimum Excursion Minimum Excursion specifies how much the signal density must decrease and increase again before another peak can be declared Smoothing pixels squared Smoothing specifies the number of pixels around the marker that are averaged together to reduce noise in the readout of signal density The value of this control is the number of pixels on each side of the square area used for averaging With Smoothing 7 1 no averaging is done and the marker z axis readout is the hit count density of a single pixel Use this control to characterize how wide or narrow a range of pixels should be averaged to determine the signal density Select Markers gt Define Mark
322. ialog box 2 3 From the Measurements box select Audio Analysis 4 Double click the Audio Spectrum icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Audio Spectrum icon to the Selected displays box gi Click the OK button This shows the Audio Spectrum display 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file 292 SignalVu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Audio Spectrum Settings Elements of the Audio Spectrum Display Peak Normal gea 100 dBHz o did 15 0 dB Audio BW 50 000 kHz v Table 5 8 10 A E Y d Af aen 1 ji j Bu 50 0 dBHz Autoscale 0 0000 Hz 50 00 kHz bk HDFreg Hz zc E Sc eon TET EET TET TAT B ET a H HD Level dBc 88 97 dEHz 52 24 79 08 88 34 89 46 80 20 84 42 79 73 85 74 80 18 103 31 NHD Freg Hz 40 000k 34 000k 43 987k 30 000k 28 000k 32 000k NHO evel dBc E H 75 67 7704 _ 77 14 _ 77 47 j 77 81 Item Display element Description 1 Vertical position Sets the top of graph value 2 dB div Sets the vertical scale value The maximum value is 20 00 dB division 3 Audio BW Specifies the measurement bandwidth of the Audio Spectrum display which in turn can influence the acquisition bandwidth 4 Table Displays a table that shows the distortion measurement results and displays indicators on the graph that highlight the location of the harmonics on the trace 5 Bottom of
323. ick Add The WLAN Power vs Time icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays we E Gs UU Click OK to show the WLAN Power vs Time display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal 9 If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Power vs Time Display Elements of the Display 5 01 dm dB div e o View Ful Burst m 94 99 dBm Autoscale 5 Burst Power 123 dam Power On Ramo Time 60 000 ns l Burst width 512 000 us Power Down Ramo Time 80 000 ns u P M A a Scale 646 880 us 0519 058 SignalVu PC Printable Help 183 WLAN Measurements WLAN Power vs Time Settings Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph first settting Sets the Power level that appears at the top of the graph in dBm This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Top of graph second setting Sets the vertical Scale of the graphs in dB div This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 View Selects the specific view of the packet burst within the display Full Burst displays the entire packet with ve
324. icking Reset Layout returns the column order to the factory default order Load Click to load a saved Offsets amp Limits table from a file Save As Click to save the current Offsets amp Limits table to a file Done When the table is expanded click Done when you have finished editing the table to save your changes and close the expanded table display Table columns On Specifies whether or not measurements are taken in the specified offset Start Hz Start Frequency of the selected offset Stop Hz Stop Frequency of the selected offset Side Specifies whether the specified range appears on both side of the carrier frequency or just one side left or right RBW Hz Specifies the RBW for the selected range n RBWS An integer value that specifies how many times to multiply the RBW to set the Filter bandwidth Filter BW n x RBW Displays the Filter BW Filter BW is the equivalent BW of each point in the offset When n gt 1 an integration technique is used to achieve the Filter BW using narrower RBWs For most SEM measurements this value is setto 1 The 3GPP standard suggests n greater than 1 VBW Hz Adjusts the VBW Video Bandwidth value VBW Maximum RBW current value VBW Minimum 1 10 000 RBW setting VBW On Specifies whether the VBW filter is applied Mask Select the type of limits used for Pass Fail testing Signal excursions that exceed the mask settings are consid
325. iedio 55 Spectrogram Spectrogram Display ge te CENE aA EEEa EE AREE ARER AE KANANE EE EENAA EAR 56 Spectropram Settings rsssdieie eee eri ean a AE EE ENER DO Y ke Vx E EE NEEE ANEN EEEE 59 Amplitude Vs Time Amplitude Vs Time Display 52 erre neret S rere EEE E EEEE E R Ens 63 Amplitude Vs Time Settings eere re EAEE contasvanrece ved dundee scees sans 64 Frequency Vs Time Frequency Vs Lime Display eese tere ee Pere a DIOE Ea eer EP Apett dO antes 65 Frequency Vs Time Settings 0 ccc cece ene ence ene nee nen eens sse he esee ese rennes 66 Phase Vs Time Phase Vs Time Display ei rere rb PE Ea acnadsninnnardeaseaeeeeneebvaned EE 67 Phase Vs Time IUPCREUP HE u m 68 RF I amp Q Vs Time RET amp O vs Time Display cioe reo Rea EE eR RR REN IESU FED NAR Vie an i ERI RARUS 69 REI amp Q Vs Time Settings recre ertet tania eode sten erem iet I aee x rer dede 70 Common Controls for General Signal Viewing Displays General Signal Viewing Shared Measurement Settings esce 71 Analog Modulation OVELVIEW AMI IH EEEEUMMMMMTMME 81 AM LW BNLJ 81 AM SGttin gs SPME 82 FM FM Display T s 87 EM Settings ie ERU IRURE EM RUE IRE baw cides UUEE RA I IQ ae E DU EUCH PODES 89 PM PM DiS play c RIRT 95 PM Settings s ffs shhsce
326. ield in a line 2 A symbol map begins and ends with a line containing the name of the modulation type These names must exactly match the name of one of the modulation types in the RSA software 3 Empty cells may be included to preserve the constellation shape SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Advanced Params Tab 4 Blank lines are ignored 5 A modulation type which does not match the name of an existing type will be ignored Usage 1 The file is intended to be edited with Notepad or similar text editor The following text is an example of a symbol map Symbol Map for 32 QAM Resembles the shape of the constellation 32QAM 00011 00010 00001 00000 01001 01000 00111 00110 00101 00100 01111 01110 01101 01100 01011 01010 10101 10100 10011 10010 10001 10000 11011 11010 11001 11000 10111 10110 11111 11110 11101 11100 32QAM SignalVu PC Printable Help 345 GP Digital Modulation Find Tab Find Tab The Find tab is used to set parameters for finding bursts within the data record This is a post acquisition operation Synch Word search controls are also on this tab Modulation Params Freg amp gw Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Burst Detection Z Use Synch Word Gea Mode Off 000 00 O0 Ol 00 100 11 16 Threshold 10 dBc 24 Setting Description Burst Detection Mode Select whether to analyze bursts
327. ient frequency P25 Freq Dev vs Time Yes N A behavior HCPM transmitter logical P25 Summary HCPM Tx Logic Ch Pk ACPR N A HCPM channel peak adjacent channel power ratio HCPM Transmitter logical P25 Power vs Time Off Slot Power N A HCPM channel off slot power P25 Summary HCPM Tx Logic Ch Off Slot HCPM Transmitter logical P25 Power vs Time Power Info N A HCPM channel power envelope P25 Summary HCPM Tx Logic Ch Pwr Env Limits HCPM Transmitter logical P25 Summary HCPM Tx Logic Ch Time Alignt N A HCPM channel time alignment P25 Standards Presets The P25 standards preset allows you to access displays preconfigured for the P25 standards you select You can read more about how Presets work here 250 The P25 standards preset allows you to access displays preconfigured for the P25 standards you select You can read more about how Presets work here see page 13 The following table shows the bandwidth modulation type and displays that are automatically loaded for each of the listed standards MCPR masks are also loaded and are explained here see page 251 Table 2 P25 standards modulation type bandwidth and displays Bandwidth Standard Modulation type kHz Displays loaded with preset Phase 1 C4FM 12 5 MCPR Time Overview P25 Constellation P25 Summary Phase 2 HCPM inbound 12 5 MCPR Time Overview P25 Constellation P25 HDQPSK outbound 12 5 Summary Signal Vu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysi
328. ifies the frequency width of each channel all channels share the same value Channel Spacing Specifies the difference in frequency between the centers of each channel The following figure illustrates the settings controlled from the Channels tab SignalVu PC Printable Help 109 RF Measurements Channels Tab for ACPR 110 Lower Lower Upper Upper Adjacent 2 Adjacent 1 Main Adjacent 1 Adjacent 2 Adj Chan Adj Chan Main Chan Adj Chan Adj Chan Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth md gt p p gt md gt p Channel Spacing Channel Spacing Channel Spacing Channel Spacing E S a Tt o ts i mee Changing the Number of Adjacent Pairs 1 Select Number of adjacent pairs number entry box 2 Enter a value for the number of adjacent pairs using the knob or the keypad NOTE As you change the value for the number of adjacent pairs the analyzer will update the spectrum display to identify the adjacent channels 3 Select the Close box when you have finished making changes Changing the Channel Bandwidth 1 Select the Channel Bandwidth number entry box 2 Entera value for the number of adjacent pairs using the knob or the keypad NOTE As you change the value for the number of adjacent pairs the analyzer will update the display to indicate the channel bandwidth 3 Select the Close box when you have finished making changes
329. ifies the location of symbols in the display The symbol map is unique for each modulation type The easiest way to create a custom symbol map is to start with the default symbol map and modify it The default symbol map file is located at C SignalVu PC Files The default symbol map file is named DefaultSymbolMaps txt See Symbol Maps see page 351 for illustrations of the default symbol mapping To specify a user symbol map 1 Click the button 2 Navigate to the directory containing the user symbol text file you want to use 3 Select the desired file in the Open window and click Open 4 Select User Symbol Map to enable the user symbol map Editing the User Symbol Map The symbol map is a plain text file and can be edited with any plain text editor CAUTION Whenever you reinstall the program software the existing DefaultSymbolMaps txt file will be overwritten To create a custom symbol map you should make a copy of the default symbol map file edit the copy to suit your needs and save it with a new name Guidance on how to edit the symbol map file is contained within the default symbol map file The following excerpt from the default symbol map file explains the structure of the file and how to edit it Symbol Mapping Definitions Version 1 2 This file defines the mapping of modulation states to symbol values File Format 1 Comments begin with and may appear after the last f
330. iguring Save on trigger Setting Up Triggering To set up triggering use the Trigger control panel To display the Trigger control panel m Click Trig in the Application toolbar or select Setup gt Trigger Trigger Event Advanced Actions Slope Source e LR diede External Rise 3 T D Triggered External Impedance 10 kQ Fall Mf Force Trigger Triggers at TTL threshold Using Free Run To set Triggering to Free Run B Click the Free Run option button The signal analyzer will acquire a signal without regard to any triggering conditions Using Power Trigger To trigger acquisitions based on the power of the signal SignalVu PC Printable Help Controlling the Acquisition of Data Trigger Settings Click the Triggered option button Select RF Input from the Source drop down list Select Power from the Type drop down list Bo YS oe For further information on setting the power level parameters see Event Tab Triggering see page 400 Trigger Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Trigger Application Toolbar i The Trigger control panel allows you to set the parameters that define trigger events and how the instrument responds to them Trigger Modes There are two trigger modes Free Run and Triggered Mode Description Free Run Acquires and displays the signal without triggering Triggered Acquires a data record after the defined trigger event is recognized Trigg
331. ime settings 70 Rho 326 Ripple 35 Ripple dB 35 SignalVu PC Printable Help Ripple measurement calculation 452 Ripple settings 243 Rise Time 34 RMS Audio Summary display 295 FM display 33 PM display 34 RMS Error Magnitude 33 RMS FSK Err 33 RMS Mag Err 33 RMS Phase Error 35 Run menu 423 S S N Audio Summary display 295 Save acq data on Trigger 402 Save and Export tab 18 Options control panel 19 Save on trigger 402 Save picture on Trigger 402 saved file types 403 saving acquisition data 403 pictures 403 results 403 setups 403 Saving presets 13 Saving and Recalling Data 403 Scale tab AM display 86 Audio Analysis displays 302 FM display 94 General Signal Viewing displays 78 GP Digital Modulation displays 350 OFDM Analysis displays 227 P25 Analysis displays 286 Phase Noise display 102 Pulsed RF displays 247 RF Measurements displays 166 SEM display 160 Settling Time displays 148 Index Spectrogram display 61 Spectrum display 56 WLAN Analysis displays 201 Search control panel 376 Search for instruments Live Link 425 Search In 372 secondary marker 453 Security tab 18 Options control panel 19 Select all Replay menu 386 Select data records tab 383 Select records from history Replay menu 386 SEM display 149 sensitivity 454 Set to max BW 71 Settings 438 AM display 82 Audio Spectrum display 293 Audio Summary display 295 CCDF display 127 Const
332. in the Symbol Table colored cells indicate the location of markers The selected Marker is highlighted with a light green background All other markers are highlighted with a light gray background In the Symbol Table the marker readout below the table shows the marker location in time symbol numbers and symbol value Changing the Symbol Table Display Settings see page 330 Symbol Table Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar zi The Setup settings for the Symbol Table view are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Symbol Table display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 330 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Trellis Diagram Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see The Modulation tab specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other page 335 parameters Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings for frequency error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342
333. in the complete trace Horizontal Controls the span of the trace display and position of the trace Horizontal Full Burst Scale Allows you to in effect change the span Position Allows you to pan a zoomed trace without changing the Measurement Frequency Autoscale Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to contain the complete trace Auto When Auto is checked the scale and position values for the Symbols graph are automatically adjusted to maintain the optimal display Reset Resets the vertical and horizontal settings SignalVu PC Printable Help 287 APCO P25 Analysis Trig MeasTab P25 NOTE The Units used for the horizontal scale can be either Seconds or Symbols To set the units for the horizontal scale display the Analysis Time tab On the tab select the appropriate units from the Units drop down list Trig MeasTab P25 288 The Trig Meas tab enables you to chose a trigger measurement The available measurements in the drop down menu depend on the standard and modulation type selected in the Modulation Params tab The Trig Meas tab is not available for Phase 2 HDQPSK Outbound signals You can read more about P25 trigger related measurements here see page 255 The following image shows the tab for Phase 1 CAFM signals Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Trace Scale Prefs Trig Meas Trigger Measurements None 0 ow None Phasel
334. ing Symbol rate search Present only for nFSK modulation types Determines whether to automatically detect or manually set the symbol rate When selected automatically detects the symbol rate to perform analysis The calculated symbol rate is displayed in the Signal Quality display The Symbol Rate Error is also calculated and displayed when Symbol rate search is enabled User Symbol Map per Modulation Type Enables the use of custom symbol maps This enables you to specify the location of symbols in the display This control can be set independently for each of the modulation types Mag Normalize Specifies whether Magnitude Normalization uses the RMS Symbol Magnitude or the Maximum Symbol Magnitude as the basis for normalization Use RMS Symbol Magnitude on QPSK modulations equal SignalVu PC Printable Help 343 GP Digital Modulation Advanced Params Tab 344 magnitude symbol locations and use Maximum Symbol Magnitude for signals that have a large difference in magnitude among the symbol locations such as 128QAM It prevents the instrument from using the very low magnitude center symbols when normalizing the constellation The outer symbols are a better normalization reference than the center in this case Swap and Q Use the Swap I and Q control to correct a signal sourced by a downconverter that inverts the frequency of the signal under test User Symbol Map A User Symbol Map is a text file that spec
335. ing Default Settings Restoring Default Settings To restore the software to its factory default settings 1 Select Presets Preset Options 2 Inthe Presets tab of the Options control panel click to the view the Preset type drop down menu and select Main 3 Click to the view the Presets drop down menu and select Original 4 Click the red X icon in the top right corner of the Options control panel to close the panel 5 Select Presets gt Main from the menu bar to return the software to its original factory default settings NOTE You can also click the Preset button on the right hand side of the menu bar to load the Main preset NOTE The Original Main preset resets all settings and clears all acquisition data previously recalled waveform files Settings that have not been saved will be lost Presets Menu Bar Presets SignalVu PC includes a set of configurations or presets that are tailored to specific applications or types of analysis These configurations referred to as Presets open selected displays and load settings that are optimized to address specific application requirements Available Presets Select Presets from the menu bar to access the types of factory presets Main Standards and Application DPX is added when connected to an RSA306 spectrum analyzer In addition to these factory defined presets you can create your own presets called User presets All of these presets types and their subtypes are
336. ing is calculated The calibrated receiver throughput delay entered by the user in the Trig Meas tab in the Settings control panel this option appears when Throughput Delay is selected is subtracted from the calculated time difference and reported as Throughput Delay A limit comparison can be performed by selecting the appropriate limits from the Limits tab in the Settings control panel Transient Frequency Behavior Phase 1 The following information is specific to this measurement Select Transmitter Frequency Behavior from the Trig Meas tab of the Settings control panel to get this measurement This measurement can be done for On to Off and Off to On behaviors Select which behavior to measure by selecting the desired behavior from the Transient Frequency drop down list that appears SignalVu PC Printable Help 257 APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis 258 when the Transient Frequency Behavior measurement is selected in the Trig Meas tab of the Settings control panel Select enough acquisition length from the Acquisition control panel to ensure that sufficient data is available when the acquisition is triggered For a transient frequency behavior there is a need for tit amount of time after ton as defined in the measurement methods standard document Approximately 100 ms of data after trigger should ensure that all cases are taken care of as suggested by the standard ti 6 and t durations are fetched based on the RF frequency
337. ing the horizontal divider bar between the graph and table areas Channel Ch Offset Lower Upper Power Main Al 2 000 MHz 65 69 dB 64 82 dB 1 94 dBm Heading Description Channel Identifies the displayed channels A1 means the first adjacent channel A2 means second adjacent channel Adjacent channels are numbered according to their offset from the Main channel The closest channel is numbered 1 The next closest channel is numbered 2 and so forth Lower The power measured for the lower adjacent channel Adjacent channel power measurements are displayed in dB relative to the Main channel Upper The power measured for the upper adjacent channel Adjacent channels power measurements are displayed in dB relative to the Main channel Avg Channel Power Main The power measured for the Main channel The detection type used for measuring channel power and adjacent channel powers is Average This means that the average of the linear pre log samples is used to determine the power The Main channel power is displayed in dBm Setting Channel Power and ACPR Settings Parameters see page 108 RF Channel Power Measurement The RF channel power gives an indication of the total average and other measures RF power in a given channel For some communications systems there is an out of service total power measurement defined in the specifications that calls for a specified constant modulation In this case the output po
338. insic to a system that represents the minimum limit at which input signals can be observed ultimately limited by thermal noise kTB The analyzer noise floor appears as a grassy baseline in the display even when no signal is present Open Recall Bring data into the application from a file of application native format OQPSK Acronym for Offset QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Phase Settling Time The time measured from a reference point to when the signal of interest settles to within user defined tolerance 450 SignalVu PC Printable Help Glossary PM PM Acronym for Phase Modulation Primary Marker The marker displayed in the Single Marker mode whose frequency and or position is changed when tuning with the general purpose knob PSK Acronym for Phase Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the carrier phase is varied discretely in accordance with a digital code QAM Acronym for Quadrature Amplitude Modulation The process or result of a process in which the amplitude and phase of the carrier are varied concurrently by synthesizing two orthogonal ASK waves see ASK Real Time Analysis Measurement technique based on triggering on an RF signal seamlessly capturing it into memory and analyzing it in the frequency time and modulation domains Real Time Bandwidth The frequency span over which real time seamless capture can be performed which is a function of the digitizer an
339. io Summary settings 295 Auto trigger position 401 automatically generate filenames 18 Automatically increment filename number 19 Average Channel Power measurement 108 Average ON Power 34 Average Transmitted Power 34 Averaging Audio Analysis displays 299 Params2 tab 299 B black text settling time measurements 136 Blackman Harris 4B Filter Shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 Blizzard color scheme 20 block 442 Burst detect threshold 91 BW Tab Amplitude vs Time display 65 DPXOgram display 76 Spectrum display 76 C C4FM modulation type measurements 33 457 Index C4FM signal quality measurements 328 calibrator 442 Carr Freq Err Audio Summary display 294 carrier 442 carrier frequency 442 Carrier frequency detection 98 Carrier Frequency Error 33 Carrier Power Audio Summary display 294 carrier signal 442 carrier to noise ratio C N 442 CCDF 29 CCDF Complimentary Cumulative Distribution Function 443 CCDF display 126 CDMA 443 center frequency 443 Channel Power 29 Channel Power and ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio display 105 Channel Power and ACPR Settings control panel 108 Channel Power measure ment 108 Channel Response OFDM 29 WLAN 30 Channels tab Channel Power amp ACPR display 109 Channels tab MCPR 119 check mark indicator 443 Check mark indicator 9 CISPR 443 CISPR Filter shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 Classic color scheme 20 Color DPXogram
340. ion Clears the trace and numeric measurement results Trace Detection readout Displays the Settings gt Trace gt Detection setting Freq Error This readout can show Freq Error or Freq Offset When it displays Freq Error it shows the difference between the instrument Frequency setting and the measured value of the signal s carrier frequency When it displays Freq Offset it shows the frequency offset specified on the Settings gt Parameters tab If Freq Error is displayed it also indicates that the Carrier frequency detection setting is Auto If Freq Offset is displayed it indicates that the Carrier frequency detection setting is manual Changing the FM Settings see page 89 FM Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar at The FM Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the FM Display SignalVu PC Printable Help 89 Analog Modulation 90 Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Burst detect threshold 100 dBc Measurement BY 100 0 kHz Setting FM Settings Frequency offset 50 54 Hz J Auto d from marker Description Parameters see page 296 Sets the burst detection threshold measurement bandwidth and carrier frequency detection method Trace see page 92 Sets Trace display parameters Scale see page 94 Sets vertical and horizontal scale and position parameters Prefs see page 95 Specifies whether or
341. ion type If a particular filter 1s not practical for a selected modulation type it is not presented as an available filter To determine which filters are available make certain that your desired modulation type is selected See the following table 336 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Modulation type Measurement filters Modulation Params Tab Reference filters BPSK None None PI 2DBPSK RootRaisedCosine RaisedCosine 8PSK RaisedCosine Gaussian D8PSK Gaussian User DQPSK User Rectangular freq PI 4DQPSK Rectangular freq IS 95REF 16QAM IS 95TX MEA 320AM IS 95TXEQ MEA 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK MSK None None Root Raised Cosine Gaussian RaisedCosine User Gaussian User Rectangular freq OQPSK None None RootRaisedCosine Half sine User RaisedCosine IS 95TX MEA User IS 95TXEQ MEA IS 95REF HDQPSK HDQPSK P25 None RaisedCosine Gaussian User Rectangular freq SOQPSK None SOQPSK MIL User SOQPSK ARTM User CPM None None User User 2FSK None None 4FSK Gaussian Gaussian 8FSK RootRaisedCosine RaisedCosine 16FSK RaisedCosine User Rectangular freq User SignalVu PC Printable Help 337 GP Digital Modulation Modulation Params Tab Modulation type Measurement filters Reference filters C4FM C4FM P25 RaisedCosine User SBPSK None SBPSK MIL User User The measurement filter is applied before the demodulation bit is detected and the ideal
342. iple data points are combined into each trace point Each trace point ends up with a single vertical value B Average Each trace point is computed by averaging together the multiple results points it represents B Peak Each trace point represents the highest vertical value among the results it includes m Peak Each trace point represents the lowest vertical value among the results it includes Saving Traces To save a trace for later analysis 1 Select the Save Trace As button This displays the Save As dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired folder or use the default 3 Typea name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces You can recall a previously saved trace for analysis or comparison to a live trace To select a trace for recall SignalVu PC Printable Help 85 Analog Modulation Scale Tab Click the button to display the Open dialog box Navigate to the desired file and click Open Check the Show Recalled Trace check box Bs pb Verify that the Show check box is selected Scale Tab The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 143 Scale 4 600 ms Position 1 00 9o Position 40
343. is determined as described previously with the addition of tilt correction The instrument estimates tilt or slope of the phase using linear least square fitting over at least 256 samples of the phase vs time waveform looking backwards from the point set by the Measurement Length The instrument adjusts the phase waveform so that its phase is of zero value at the point set by the Measurement Length Settling Time Displays The Frequency Settling Time measurement is used to measure the frequency settling time of frequency agile oscillators and subsystems The Phase Settling Time measurement is used to measure the phase settling time of phase agile oscillators and subsystems Automated measurements can reduce user to user measurement variations improving repeatability and measurement confidence and saving time in gathering results To measure phase settling a phase reference is required This means that the measurement tool must be frequency referenced to the device under test or must act as the frequency reference to the device under test To lock the reference to an external source go to Setup gt Configure In Out gt Frequency Reference and choose External Values from 1 MHz to 25 MHz in 1 MHz steps can be used as an external reference SignalVu PC Printable Help 133 RF Measurements 134 To show a Settling Time display 1 m B tM e Position Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Click the Displays b
344. is not set to Never decimate the trace is decimated using the Peak method similar to Peak detection in a Spectrum display to 10 000 points This decimated trace is what is used for marker measurements The Time Overview window displays the Spectrum Length and Analysis Length The Spectrum Length is the period of time within the acquisition record over which the spectrum is calculated The Analysis Length is the period of time within the acquisition record over which all other measurements such as Amplitude vs Time are made The Spectrum Length and Analysis Length can be locked together so that the data used to produce the Spectrum display is also used for measurement displays however they do not have to be tied together They are by default specified separately and used to analyze different parts of the acquisition record Elements of the Time Overview Display 200 000 ns Length 2 020 us e dB div 10 0 dB Autoscale Scale 34 980 us 1023 002 Position 5 580 ijs SignalVu PC Printable Help 47 General Signal Viewing Time Overview Settings Item Element Description 1 Time Select the type of time analysis to be performed You can select Analysis Spectrum or Linked 2 Offset Sets the offset of the selected analysis time control 3 Length Sets the length of the selected analysis time control 4 Position and Scale Adjusts the vertical sc
345. isition mode as the acquisition is triggered You can select to do the same experiment multiple times and this measurement will produce an average result of the last 10 single acquisitions Clicking the Clear button on the P25 Summary display will clear the results and start a new measurement Transmitter Power and Encoder Attack Time and Transmitter Power and Encoder Attack Time with Busy Idle Operations Phase 1 The following information is specific to these two measurements 256 The Transmitter Power Attack Time analysis is done by measuring the time taken from the trigger point to the point where the transmitter output power will reach 5096 of its maximum value For Encoder Attack Time the initial frame synchronization word is searched in the demodulated output and the time taken from trigger to the start of the synchronization word is reported as the result When a clear power ramp up is not available the analysis will report the following error indicating that no power ramp was received as expected Input data too short When the synchronization word is not found the analysis will report the following error Q Processing error The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail The P25 Power vs Time display shows marking from trigger point to 50 ramp point and also up to the Synchronization word for Transmitter Power and Encoder Attack Time Frequency Dev v
346. ition Normally the best results are achieved by leaving the Adjust control set to the recommended setting of All Auto This allows the settings to be automatically adjusted for selected measurements Depending on the setting chosen for Adjust two additional parameters can be set IQ Sampling Parameters Frequency Reference Record Adjust all Auto recommend 56 0 MS s 17 9 nsec Sample 40 00 MHz Capacity 1 s 1 906 us 56 6 MSamples 107 Samples Using 1 91 us 107 Samples 0 0 of capacity Adjust User Sets Analyzer Calculates All Auto N A N A All values based on the selected measurement Acq BW Acq Samples Acq BW Acq Samples Acq Length Acq BW Acq Length Acq BW Acquisition Length Acq Samples Acquisition Memory Usage The center portion of the tab shows how the acquisition memory is used Readout Description Samples s sec Sample Readout of the acquisition sample rate and sample period Capacity The maximum period of time and number of samples that can be acquired with the current sampling parameters Using The total amount of acquisition memory that will be used based on the current settings SignalVu PC Printable Help 395 Controlling the Acquisition of Data Frequency Reference Frequency Reference Specifies the source of the reference frequency You can select between an Internal 10 MHz source and an external source 10 Sampling Parameters Frequency Reference Record So
347. its Symbols x Settings Description Analysis Length Specifies the length of the analysis period to use in measurements Length is specified in either symbols or seconds depending on the Units setting Use this to specify how long a period of time is analyzed Range minimum value depends on modulation type Resolution 1 symbol Auto When enabled causes the instrument to set the Analysis Length value based on the requirements of the selected display Units Specifies the units of the Analysis Length in either Symbols or Seconds SignalVu PC Printable Help 199 WLAN Measurements Trace Tab WLAN Trace Tab WLAN The Trace tab allows you to set the trace display characteristics of the selected display This tab 1s not available for all WLAN displays Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Trace Average v Show Freeze Settings Description Trace Use this drop down list to select whether or not the Average trace or the measurement trace is displayed The measurement trace depends on the selected display Show Symbols Select or deselect this checkbox to show or hide symbols Freeze Selecting Freeze halts updates to the symbols Traces Tab WLAN Channel Response The Traces tab allows you to set the trace display characteristics of the WLAN Channel Reponse display gt Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Traces S
348. its when using antenna table SignalVu PC Printable Help Analyzing Data Replay Overview Replay Overview The Replay function enables you to reanalyze data with different settings and even different measurements You can replay all the acquisitions in memory a single acquisition a single frame within an acquisition if Fast Frame was enabled when the waveform file was saved or any contiguous set of data records from acquisition history Replay Select data records Select DPX Spectra Acquisition Info Replay Speed Select acquisitions Select All Select frames ectra v p 1 10 24 2011 12 4 30 26 1 10 24 2011 12 4 30 26 i 10 24 2011 10 24 2011 rm SEM 12 4 30 26 E 12 4 30 26 10 24 2011 10 24 2011 Sea a25 12 4 46 60 sum E 12 4 46 60 E Show toolbar 825 10 24 2011 12 4 46 60 1 10 24 2011 12 4 46 60 Displaying the Replay Control Panel To display the Replay control panel From the menu bar select Replay gt Select data records from history Selecting the Data Type to Replay You can choose to replay either acquisition data or DPX spectra providing DPX Spectra were saved in the waveform file Choose Acq Data to replay any acquisitions except DPXogram acquisitions Choose DPX Spectra to replay a DPXogram acquisition Select Data Records Tab The Select data records tab is used to select which data records to replay A data record is the smallest unit that can be replayed Note that what constitutes a data record
349. itude Settings o estesa re doo EU ER RR RANA ARCA AES E E RLENS CHAR E Bea Re UE d dn 389 External Gain Loss Correction Tab 0ccc ccc cece eee een nee een ee meme esse e eene 389 External Gain Value Jie roo E Fer v ETE Eoo spp E aqu Tee E TR bad V oua ei daga 389 External Loss Tables eoo rte ouo tte ERE NS e E ere toos ette edet iste a e 389 Controlling the Acquisition of Data Acquisition Controls in the Acquire Control Panel Pdl EUST 393 Acqg isiton DIL 394 IQ Sampling Parameters ecce toe raa covert casts e eoa he xa wea re e pa tent Led s va 395 Frequency Reference accisaceictiiedagitanstesnndobhidds Aud daeanacaeab bana ddeiiaawstdewnbhaneasdndebides 396 Recordi cheer ep I IPM MM LU II DM dA LUE 396 Triggering Mog pM 397 Trigger Settings siete xv peteet ned Freier aen reed petatur nec d ae td PUER EE 399 Event Tab isi eed er eR he xn ARE RR E V WARE EAR SERE Ti Fe SA E NEN COE NER RUE fedem 400 Advanced Tab Trigpering tese co eee eo Ue pe nave Doe Het ete iie ES EEEE ee Ue 401 Actions Tab Ingpermg ccteusdisveeeet eee otope E ENNE CRT UNDO xb xe E a 402 Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures sess eee 403 Data Settings and Picture File Formats 0 cce ccc c ec ee eee cent eee eee ese mense ese 410 Printing Screen Shots icici swveickadeaneadivcadsdas Agent sad ea s EUER AEN E chat IRE EN REUS EAR Re uA OLOR gla 414 Re
350. justing this value changes the frequency phase at the top of the graph by adjusting the scale setting Phase Settling Time Sets 2 Vertical Position Sets the frequency phase value at the vertical center of the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the Vertical and Horizontal scaling to display the entire trace on screen 4 Horizontal Position Sets the horizontal position of the trace on the graph 5 Measurement readouts Displays measurement results See Measurement Readout Text Color below 6 Signal transition start indicator A blue vertical line that indicates the staring point of the Settling Time measurement that is based on the signal transition away from the previous settled state if a previous settled state is found within the measurement period T Trigger point indicator An orange line and T which appears below the graph that indicates the location of the trigger point in time 8 Tolerance indicators A pair of blue horizontal lines that show the tolerance range 9 Settled time indicator A blue vertical bar that shows the point on the trace at which the measurement has determined the signal frequency or phase to be settled 10 Measurement length indicator A magenta vertical line that specifies the end of the allowed measurement period This is a control not a result 11 Scale Adjusts the horizontal time scale of the graph 12 Clear Restarts multi trace functions Avg Hold and erases the trace 13 Function Displays the Detection and Fu
351. kers see page 424 Define markers and search for signal peaks Setup see page 424 Change settings for acquisition analysis and measurements Presets see page 13 Load and configure presets Tools see page 425 Perform searches and configure user preferences Window see page 426 Controls the size and layout of displays within the SignalVu PC application File Menu Command Description Recall see page 417 The Recall dialog enables you to recall saved data setups and traces Save see page 418 Save As see page 418 Saves a file without asking for a file parameters based on most recent settings Displays the Save dialog enabling you to specify the parameters of the save operation Save on trigger see page 402 Displays the Actions tab of the Trigger control panel which allows you to configure the Save on Trigger function Acquisition save options see page 19 Acquisition data info see page 385 Displays the Save and Export tab of the Options control panel which allows you to specify how much data is saved in acquisition files Displays the Acquisition Info tab see page 385 of the Replay control panel The info on this tab describes such acquisition parameters as acquisition bandwidth sampling rate RF attenuation and acquisition length Measurement Data Info see page 420 Displays the characteristics of the most recently
352. l 1 ns large 1 2 5 10 Default 0 Length L Relative time method Amount of time that should be included in the measurement The measurement time begins at the Start point and continues for the amount of time specified by Length Ref Start Ref specifies the level along the pulse rising edge that is defined as the point from which Start time is counted Choices 50 60 70 80 90 100 Default 100 Start specifies the time the instrument waits after the rising edge reference before starting to measure the pulse The Start time is measured from the point along the pulse rising edge specified by the Ref setting Start Range 100 ms Resolution 3 digits inc dec small 1 ns large 1 2 5 10 Default 0 Length In the Relative time method Length specifies the percentage of the top of the pulse that is used for measurements The instrument automatically determines the pulse top The measurement length is centered within the pulse ON time 244 Signal Vu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Levels Tab Levels Tab Use the Levels tab to set parameters that control the method and levels used to calculate some pulse values Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs 100 Level 50 Level Rise Fall Levels 10095 Pulse Average T Both Amplitude Voltage 10 90 100 Independent Ri 100 e for droop af NM Power 20 80 Setting Description 100 Level Specifies the
353. l Signal Viewing Select DPX from the Available displays box Click the Add button This will add the DPX icon to the Selected Displays box and remove it from the Available displays box Click the OK button This displays the DPX Spectrum view Signal Vu PC will display the Split view of the recalled acquisition data Spectrums l 1 2 0 00 dBm dB div 10 0 dB RBW Bitmap J Show On Clear 100 kz Spit gt 100 00 dBm Autoscale CF 1 85000 GHz Span 10 00 MHz DPX Split View 38 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing DPX Display Elements of the DPX Display Show Off 998 2 12 00 dBm 2 dB div 12 0 dB 3 RBW 1 00 MHz Spectrum 108 00 dBm Autoscale 9 CF 1 500 GHz Span 1 000 GHz 0233 001 Item Display element Description 1 Vert Position Sets the top of graph value This is only a visual control for panning the graph The Reference Level is adjusted in the Toolbar and the Ampl control panel By default Vert Position Ref Level 2 dB div Sets the vertical scale value The maximum value is 20 00 dB division 3 RBW Sets the resolution bandwidth Note that when the RBW is set to Auto its value is italicized 4 DPX view Selects the DPX view Choices are Spectrum Zero Span Frequency Phase DPXogram and Split 5 Autoscale Adjusts the Vertical and Horizontal scaling to display the entire trace on screen 6
354. l viewing displays Max Span Sets the Span to the maximum value Center Start Stop and Span Frequencies Are Correlated Changing the values for Center frequency Start frequency Stop frequency or Span will change the values for the other settings depending on which setting you change For example if you change the Center frequency the Start and Stop frequencies will be adjusted automatically to maintain the same Span Note however that if the Start and Stop frequencies are changed so that they are closer than the minimum span setting the Start and Stop frequencies will be adjusted to maintain the minimum Span setting Setting Changed Manually Settings Changed Automatically As Setting Not Automatically Changed a Result Start Center Span Stop Stop Center Span Start Center Start Stop Span Span Start Stop Center SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Traces Tab Traces Tab The Traces Tab allows you to set the display characteristics of displayed traces Freg amp Span Bw Traces Scale Prefs Trace Trace 1 J Show Freeze Save Trace As Detection 4Peak Function Normal x uu Setting Description Trace Selects a trace This setting is not present for every display Show Shows hides the selected trace Function Selects the trace processing method Available settings are Normal Average Max Hold and Min Hold Count Sets the number of traces a
355. lVu PC Printable Help 247 Pulsed RF Prefs Tab 248 Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change parameters of the measurement display The parameters available on the Prefs tab vary depending on the selected display Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs Show graticule Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Time Trend only Histogram readout Count X Bins 10 v Auto Settings on the Pulsed RF Displays Prefs Tab The following table describes the settings that appear on the Prefs tab of the Pulsed RF displays Pulse Statistics and Pulse Trace There is no Prefs tab for the Pulse Table display Setting Description Show graticule Displays or hides the graticule in the trace display Show Marker readout in graph When a marker is enabled this setting displays or hides the maker readout but not the maker itself on Time Trend plots Histogram readout present only when Histogram is the selected plot type Controls the parameters Histogram readout and Bins Histogram readout can be set to either Count or Count indicates the number of hits that fell into each bin indicates percentage of the total count for the acquisition that fell into each bin Bins Specifies how many bins or histogram bars the results are distributed into SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis Overview The Associ
356. lated signal overlapped on itself to reveal variations in the signal To show an Eye Diagram display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 3 From the Measurements box select GP Digital Modulation 4 Double click the Eye Diagram icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Eye Diagram icon to the Selected displays box xd Click the OK button This displays the Eye Diagram view 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Elements of the Display Eye Diagram Display AE GEL v Freq Error 401 5 He Auto 1 00 Position 82 4 m 1 16 Autoscale Scale 7 Sym 0519 036 Item Element Description 1 Check mark indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Frequency Deviation vs Time display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Top of Graph The vertical scale is normalized with no units except for nFSK and C4FM modulation types where the vertical units are Hz 3 Position Specifies the v
357. layed OFDM Analysis Shared Measurement Settings Application Toolbar 2 222 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis Modulation Params Tab OHDM The control panel tabs in this section are shared between the displays in the OFDM Analysis folder Setup 7 Displays Some tabs are shared by all the displays some tabs are shared by only a couple of displays The settings available on some tabs change depending on the selected display Common controls for OFDM analysis displays Settings tab Modulation Params see page 223 Description Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Advanced Params see page 224 Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Data Range see page 225 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 225 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Trace see page 227 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale see page 227 Specifies the vertical subcarrier and symbols scale and position settings Prefs see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed Modulation Params Tab OFDM The Modulation Params tab sp
358. layed average noise level In older swept analyzers a voltage envelope detector is used in the process of measuring signal level and the result is then converted to Watts and then to dBm Averaging is then applied to the resultant traces For CW signals this method results in an accurate power measurement However with random noise and digitally modulated carriers errors result from this average of logs method For random noise the average of logs methods results in power levels 2 51 dB lower than that measured with a power meter or with a signal analyzer that measures the rms value of a signal and performs averaging on the calculated power in Watts and not dBm or other log power units This detector should be used when following a measurement procedure that specifies it or when checking the Displayed Averaged Noise Level DANL of the instrument The average of logs detection and trace function is used for DANL specification to provide similar results to other spectrum signal analyzers for comparison purposes Use of the Average of Logs method of measurement is not recommended for digitally modulated carriers as power measurement errors will occur NOTE The Detection setting does not affect the trace until the spectrum length is longer than the Auto setting m Sample The first value is selected from the set of results to be compressed into a trace point B CISPR Peak The trace value is calculated by the methods described fo
359. le 184 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Spectral Flatness Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 195 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 196 Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Scale see page 201 Specifies the vertical subcarrier for non b standards only and symbols scale and position settings Prefs see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Spectral Flatness Display The WLAN Spectral Flatness display shows the average power levels of subcarriers across the signal bandwidth and indicates 1f they remain within the limits defined for a particular standard The averaged subcarrier level is shown as a line on the display while the individual subcarrier levels are shown as points The Pass or Fail result indicates whether the average line remains between the upper and lower limit mask boundaries NOTE WLAN Spectral Flatness is only available for OFDM non 802 11b signals
360. le Help 327 GP Digital Modulation Signal Quality Settings Measurements for nFSK modulation types Measurement Description Peak FSK err Peak value of the frequency deviation error at the symbol point RMS FSK Err RMS value of the frequency deviation error at the symbol point Peak Mag Err The Peak magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude RMS Mag Err The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude Freq Error The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the instrument Freq Deviation Frequency distance from the center frequency at the symbol point Symbol Rate Error This compares the user entered symbol rate to the instrument calculated symbol rate of the analyzed signal Symbol Rate When in Auto symbol rate the instrument calculates the symbol rate of the signal and the instrument calculates the error between the user entered value and the instrument calculated value Measurements for C4FM modulation type Measurement Description RMS Error Magnitude RMS value of the frequency deviation error at the symbol point Carrier Frequency Error Frequency difference between averaged signal frequency and the center frequency Deviation Frequency distance from the center frequency at the symbol point Length Numb
361. lear eee 110 00 dBm _ Autoscale Pos 2 110000 GHz Scale 25 00 MHz 150 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Elements of the Display Item Display element SEM Display Description 1 Check mark indicator Indicates the display for which the acquisition hardware is optimized NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Top of graph setting Sets the level that appears at the top of the graph 3 dB div Sets the vertical scale value The maximum value is 20 00 dB division 4 Bottom of graph readout Indicates the amplitude at the bottom of the graph This value changes with the dB div and Vertical Position settings 5 Autoscale Properly offsets the peak of the display from the top of the screen If the screen has been enlarged through a manual vertical dB div setting entry the view is not vertically rescaled when Autoscale is used 6 CF Pos Default function is CF center frequency equivalent to the Measurement Freq setting If Horizontal scaling has been manually adjusted in Setup gt Settings gt Scale then Pos replaces CF as the setting at the bottom left corner of the screen Adjusting Pos shifts the trace left or right in the graph but does not change the measurement frequency
362. lect the Modulation Params tab set the parameters as necessary for the signal 6 Select the Equalizer tab 7 Setthe Convergence value to 0 0005 8 Set Taps Symbol to 2 9 Click the Reset Equalization button to reset the equalizer 10 Set the Mode to Train SignalVu PC Printable Help 341 GP Digital Modulation Advanced Params Tab 11 Click Enable Equalization so it is checked 12 On the Signal Quality display examine the value for EVM 13 Change the Convergence Taps Symbol and Taps values iteratively to achieve a minimum EVM value NOTE Changing the Taps symbol or Taps values resets the equalizer Using the Equalizer To use the equalizer 1 Select and configure a GP Digital Modulation display Select Setup gt Settings Select the Equalizer tab Select Enable Equalization so it is checked m des Us B9 Verify that Mode is set to Hold if you have previously trained the Equalizer If you have not previously trained the Equalizer train the Equalizer see page 341 and then set the Mode to Hold Exporting EQ Files If the Enable EQ Export box is checked the following outputs files are automatically generated to these locations after each measurement update cycle if the EQ coefficients change c temp EqTaps txt and c temp EqTapsHdr txt These files have EQ taps in I Q pairs one pair per row The Hdr version file has a five line header before the EQ tap data Each line in the five line header of the H
363. led frequency particularly when the instrument Measurement Frequency is not locked to the spectrum Center Frequency Analysis control panel gt Frequency tab Set the Target reference see page 143 to Auto or Meas freq as appropriate If you select Meas freq also set Offset to fine tune the measurement frequency if necessary Set the Tolerance see page 143 as required for your measurement If your signal must be settled for a period of time before it is considered settled you can specify a minimum settled duration for the settling time measurement SignalVu PC Printable Help 139 RF Measurements Settling Time Displays 16 Select the Time Params tab Adjust the Min settled duration see page 144 as required To get the measurement made in the correct location on the signal you must adjust the measurement length You do this by dragging the magenta line in the Settling Time graph 17 Drag the measurement length indicator magenta line to the correct location on the signal Choose a point at which the signal appears to be well settled The measurement will then find the exact time at which the signal actually settled to within the specified tolerance Note the difference in the settling time in the two illustrations that follow In both examples the Target reference is set to Auto The only difference is the measurement length as shown by the magenta line v Tracei i
364. level of the signal simply exceeds the level setting there must be a power level transient that crosses the specified level SignalVu PC Printable Help Controlling the Acquisition of Data Advanced Tab Triggering Advanced Tab Triggering Menu Bar Setup gt Trigger gt Advanced Application Toolbar Trig gt Advanced Allows you to set parameters for trigger position and holdoff settings Trigger Event Advanced Actions Fee RM Trigger Position 50 V Auto Trigger each segment of Swept acquisitions Triggered Force Trigger Setting Description Trigger Position Sets the point along the acquisition record the trigger event should occur Auto Enables the instrument to set the position of the trigger event To manually specify the position of the trigger event unselect Auto Trigger each segment of Sets the analyzer to wait for a trigger for each acquisition in a swept spectrum or other Swept acquisitions measurement requiring multiple acquisitions worth of span SignalVu PC Printable Help 401 Controlling the Acquisition of Data Actions Tab Triggering Actions Tab Triggering The Actions tab sets parameters for the Save on trigger function The Save on trigger function allows you to save an acquisition data file and or a screen capture when a trigger event occurs Trigger events are defined on the Event tab Trigger Event Advanced Actions Aem Save acq data on Trigger TIQ X 7 REA
365. limits recommended for best performance comparison by the Standard document All channel and limit parameters are derived from the TIA 102 standard and loaded for you This provides you the assurance that you are evaluating the signal with the most appropriate parameters NOTE Changing analysis and display parameters recalculates the measurement results but does not affect acquisitions P25 Displays The displays in P25 Analysis Setup gt Displays gt Measurements P25 Analysis are m MCPR m P25 Constellation see page 263 SignalVu PC Printable Help 251 APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis P25 Power vs Time see page 268 P25 Eye Diagram see page 265 P25 Freq Dev vs Time see page 276 P25 Symbol Table see page 273 P25 Summary see page 270 Time Overview see page 47 P25 Measurements 252 The following topics contain important information you should know about specific P25 measurements RF Output Power Phase 1 and Phase 2 This is a measure of RF output power when the transmitter is connected to the standard load during defined duty cycle This measurement is presented as a scalar result in the P25 Summary display Power variation is shown in the P25 Power vs Time display Information of note about this measurement For bursty HCPM Phase 2 Inbound signals the RF Output Power is measured only during the on slot regions centered at the middle of the on slot The result shown in
366. lue and the lesser value is retained for display and subsequent comparisons Saving Traces To save a trace for later analysis 1 2 3 ve Select the Save icon This displays the Save As dialog box Navigate to the desired folder or use the default Type a name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces You can recall a previously saved trace for analysis or comparison to a live trace 52 Signal Vu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Spectrum Display To select a trace for recall 1 Select the trace into which the recalled trace will be loaded from the Trace drop down list 2 Check the Show check box 3 Click the button to display the Open dialog box 4 Navigate to the desired file and click Open 5 Check the Show Recalled Trace check box 6 Verify that the trace s Show check box is selected either on this tab or next to the drop down list located at the top left corner of the graph Spectrum Display To display a spectrum 1 Click the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 From the Measurements box select General Signal Viewing 3 Double click the Spectrum icon in the Available displays box This adds the Spectrum icon to the Selected displays box and removes it from the Available displays box Alternatively you can click the Spectrum icon and then click the Add button to select Spectrum for display 4 Click the OK button SignalVu PC Printable Help 53 G
367. lue of the frequency deviation error at the symbol point Peak Mag Err The Peak magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude RMS Mag Err The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude Freq Error The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the instrument Freq Deviation Frequency distance from the center frequency at the symbol point Symbol Rate Error This compares the user entered symbol rate to the instrument calculated symbol rate of the analyzed signal Symbol Rate When in Auto symbol rate the instrument calculates the symbol rate of the signal and the instrument calculates the error between the user entered value and the instrument calculated value Measurements for C4FM modulation type Measurement Description RMS Error Magnitude RMS value of the frequency deviation error at the symbol point Carrier Frequency Error Frequency difference between averaged signal frequency and the center frequency Deviation Frequency distance from the center frequency at the symbol point Length Number of symbols in the analysis area Analog Modulation measurements Measurements for AM modulation Measurement Description AM Positive peak AM value AM Negative peak AM value Total AM Total AM value which is e
368. ly This allows compensation for time varying channel response over the packet Pilot tracking Specifies if pilot subcarriers should be used to correct amplitude phase and symbol timing variations over the packet The choices available are Phase Amplitude and Timing The default setting is Phase Swap amp Q Select the checkbox to swap the and Q components of a signal This compensates the input signal for spectral inversion 224 Signal Vu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis Data Range Tab OFDM Data Range Tab OFDM The Data Range tab enables you to control how much signal is analyzed as well as specify the range of results that are displayed in the Constellation EVM Magnitude Error Phase Error Power and Symbol Table graphs Modulation Params Advanced Params Data Range AnalysisTime Trace Scale Prefs Displayed Results Symbols all Subcarriers al 7 Max symbols to analyze 1004 Settings Description Symbols Specifies which symbols are displayed in the graphs All Select All to display all symbols Range Select Range to specify a subset of symbols for display Start Specifies the first symbol to include in the display Number Specifies how many symbols to display in the graphs Single Select Single to display a single symbol Index Use Index to specify the symbol you want to display Subcarriers Specifies which subcarriers are displayed All
369. lysis and then click OK 2 Setthe Center Frequency control to the carrier frequency of your pulsed signal 3 Setthe Reference Level to place the peak of the pulse signal approximately 0 10 dB down from the top of the Time Overview display SignalVu PC Printable Help Using SignalVu PC Presets You may need to trigger on the signal to get a more stable display This is set up in the Trigger control panel Trig button Using the Power trigger type with the RF Input source works well for many pulsed signals 4 Setthe Analysis Period to cover the number of pulses in your signal that you want to analyze To do this click in the data entry field of the Time Overview window and set the analysis length as needed Application Preset Spectrum Analysis The Spectrum Analysis application preset opens a Spectrum display and sets several parameters The Spectrum Analysis preset sets the analyzer as follows Spectrum Analysis Sets the frequency range to maximum for the analyzer and sets the RF IF optimization to Minimize Sweep Time To use the Spectrum Analysis preset assuming the Preset action 1s set to Show list in the Presets tab of the Options control panel 1 Select Presets gt Application Select Spectrum Analysis and then click OK 2 Setthe measurement frequency using the front panel knob or keypad 3 Adjust the span to show the necessary detail Application Preset Time Frequency Analysis The Time Frequency Analysis
370. lysis length and trace length For example with Spectrum Length set to Auto in the Analysis menu the instrument analyzes just enough samples to produce one IQ sample pair per trace point In this case the detection method chosen has very little effect as the Peak Peak and Avg VRMS are all equal Changing the Spectrum Length causes the available detection methods to differ in value because they have a larger set of samples for the various detection methods to process The available detection methods are W Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the positive peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point BW Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the negative peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point m Avg VRMS Average Vrus Each point on the trace is the result of determining the RMS Voltage value for all of the IQ samples available to the trace point When displayed in either linear Volts Watts or Log dB dBm the correct RMS value results When the averaging function is applied to a trace the averaging is performed on the linear Voltage values resulting in the correct average for RMS values Trace Processing Traces can be processed to display in different ways The Detection setting controls trace decimation when needed When the trace points each cover more than one sample data point the vertical results values for mult
371. m 190 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Summary Settings Elements of the Display for 802 11b Signals Measurement Description Standard Display of the standard selected on the Setup gt Settings gt Modulation Parameters tab Burst Power The average power of the entire packet Peak to Average Burst Index The ratio of the highest instantaneous packet signal power level to the average signal power The index of the analyzed packet within the analysis record IQ Origin Offset The amount of power at the signal carrier frequency relative to the total power of the signal Frequency Error EVM The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the measurement frequency setting The RMS and Peak values of the normalized Error Vector Magnitudes taken at signal chip intervals The normalized EVM values are calculated as the difference between the detected received signal constellation points and ideal reference points estimated by the instrument from the received signal Values are reported in units of percent or dB Peak values indicate the associated chip locations RMS and Peak values are displayed for groupings of All chips and the first 1000 1k chips Average RMS and Peak RMS values are accumulated over multiple packet analysis cycles The Clear button on the display resets these values by clearing the result memory Packet F
372. mation Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 100 00 dB Scale 348 ns Full scale lected Position 2 73 dBm Reset Scale Position 6 99 ms vais Max pulse Autoscale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Scale Changes the vertical scale The units for this setting depend on the statistic selected from the Result drop down list in the Pulse Statistics display Position Adjusts the Reference Level away from the top of the trace display The units for this setting depend on the statistic selected from the Result drop down list in the Pulse Statistics display Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to contain the complete trace Horizontal Controls the span of the trace display and position of the trace Scale Allows you to change the span Position Allows you to pan a zoomed trace Full Scale Pulse Trace Specifies the Horizontal scale default display only Selected Sets the horizontal scale default to be based on the result value for the currently select pulse Max Pulse Sets the horizontal scale default to be based on the largest value for the selected pulse measurement Autoscale Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to contain the complete trace Plot Pulse Statistics display only Specifies the FFT Trend Time Trend or Histogram plot Reset Scale Restores all settings to their default values Signa
373. ments Settling Time Displays 10 Select the Trig button In the Trigger control panel select Triggered Configure the trigger settings an needed to achieve a triggered signal For the next step in measuring settling time you must set the starting point of the measurement To do this you will use the Time Overview display Select the Time Overview display At the left edge of the graph drag across the graph to adjust the analysis offset Adjust the Analysis Offset to locate the start of the settling time measurement just ahead of the signal transition where you want to measure the settling time Any portion of the signal in the gray area will be excluded from the settling time measurement es LJE peti Peak Normal 0 00 dBm 9 dB div 1 40 dB 14 00 dBm an LEEREN Position 0 000 s Scale 1 020 ms Setting the starting point of the settling time measurement 11 12 13 14 15 Even if the signal transition is difficult to see on the Time Overview display you can set the starting point based on the location of the Trigger indicator below the graph Or open the Frequency vs Time graph to see the frequency transition Click in the Settling Time display to select it Select the Settings button to display the Settling Time Settings control panel On the Define tab adjust the Meas BW see page 142 to improve the signal to noise ratio as appropriate Make sure the bandwidth covers the sett
374. ments box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Power icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Power icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Power display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 217 OFDM Analysis Elements of the Display OFDM Power Settings LJ 35 97 dim dBjdiv 10 0 dB 135 97 de i Autoscale gt Posn 26 Subc v Scale 12 Sym Scale 52 Subc 0519 006 Item Display element Description 1 Vertical Position Sets the top of graph value This is only a visual control for panning the graph The Reference Level is adjusted in the Toolbar and the Ampl control panel By default Vert Position Ref Level 2 dB div Sets the vertical scale value The maximum value is 20 00 dB division 2 Bottom of graph readout Indicates the amplitude at the bottom of the graph This value changes with the dB div and Vertical Position settings 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display
375. method used to determine the 100 level s 50 Level Specifies the method used to determine the 50 level on the pulse Rise Fall Levels Select whether to use the 10 to 90 or 20 to 80 points based on voltage level to define the rise and fall times 100 Level Use the 100 Level settings to select the method used to determine the 100 level s used for calculating pulse parameters for example Rise Fall and Width The Pulse Average Amplitude defines the pulse top as the average of the values of all the points along the pulse top This average is used as the 100 level from which the 10 20 50 80 and 90 levels are calculated Pulse measurements are referenced against these various levels For example Rise is the time between the 10 and 90 or 20 and 80 levels on the rising edge of the pulse When the Pulse Average Amplitude method is selected the same 100 level is used for both rising and falling edges Because some RF pulse types have droop a height difference between the beginning and ending points of the pulse top the 100 percent level on the rising edge may not be equal to the 100 level on the falling edge The Independent method of pulse point location is designed for pulses with different 100 levels at their rising and falling edges The Independent method calculates the 100 level for the rising edge separately from the 100 level of the falling edge As a result the 10 20 50 80 and 90 levels are also differe
376. mining the RMS Voltage value for all of the IQ samples available to the trace point When displayed in either linear Volts Watts or Log dB dBm the correct RMS value results When the averaging function is applied to a trace the averaging is performed on the linear Voltage values resulting in the correct average for RMS values Sample The result is calculated based on the first sample available in the set of IQ samples for each trace point Trace Processing Traces can be processed to display in different ways The Function setting controls trace processing Normal Each new trace is displayed and then replaced by the next trace Each data point contains a single vertical value Average Multiple traces are averaged together to generate the displayed trace There is one vertical value for each underlying frequency data point Once the specified number of traces have been acquired and averaged to generate the displayed trace each new trace takes the place of the oldest trace in the calculation The Number of Traces setting specifies how many traces averaged Max Hold Displays the maximum value in the trace record for each display point Each new trace display point is compared to the previous maximum value and the greater value is retained for display and subsequent comparisons Min Hold Displays the minimum value in the trace record for each display point Each new trace display point is compared to the previous minimum va
377. mmer Manual B SignalVu PC Printable Help Document PDF 077 0720 XX A PDF file version of the help that can easily be printed The most recent versions of the product documentation in PDF format can be downloaded from www tektronix com manuals You can find the manuals by searching on the product name Video tutorials You can browse the Tektronix YouTube channel www youtube com user tektronix to find video tutorials about various topics related to your product You can also subscribe to the Tektronix YouTube channel to keep up with new postings Searching for topics For example you can watch a video tutorial about WLAN Presets and using Live Link Option CON to connect to an MDO4000B To find a video on this topic do the following The following image shows you what the Tektronix YouTube Channel looks like 1 Click on the search icon located just above the video you see when the page first loads NOTE This icon allows you to search the Tektronix YouTube channel specifically The search icon located at the top of the page allows you to search all of YouTube 2 Type in the keyword WLAN in the search field 3 Click the search icon to start the search 4 Videos related to the topic will appear Click a video to view it 4 SignalVu PC Printable Help About the Tektronix Signal Analyzer Tektronix Tektronix Tektronix E Subscribe Tektronix Tutorials Te SignalVu PC Printable Help
378. n The second group Parameters are measurement specific parameters Another group which can occur is Trace Parameters Within this group there will be a set of parameters one for each trace that is currently shown Another group is Results These are scalar results for the measurement Another group is Traces It has Trace groups under it one for each trace Each Trace group has some background information about the trace units number of points x scaling etc and the trace points themselves Acquisition Data Files mat The acquisition data files saved in MATLAB format contain the following MATLAB variables InputCenter The center frequency in Hertz m XDelta The sample period in seconds B Y A complex array containing IQ pairs nputZoom The acquisition bandwidth in Hertz The MATLAB format used to save acquisition data has the following properties and limitations amp Files are stored in MATLAB Level 5 format m MATLAB Level 5 file size is limited to 2 GB SignalVu PC Printable Help 413 Managing Data Settings and Pictures Printing Screen Shots B The instrument acquisition memory limit is 1 GB 1 024 Gigabytes Because of the way acquisition data is processed 1 GB of acquisition memory requires 2 GB of memory to store When header information instrument settings 1s added to the acquisition data the resulting file size is gt 2 GB Ifacquisition memory is filled 1 GB exporting the data
379. n the measurement results below the graph display continue to update even if the trace is hidden Detection Sets the Detection method used for the trace Available detection methods are Peak Peak and Avg VRMS Not available for saved traces Function Selects the trace processing method The only available setting is Normal Freeze Halts updates to the trace Save Trace As Saves the trace to a file for later recall and analysis Show Recalled trace Displays a saved trace instead of a live trace Detection Detection refers to the method of processing the data acquisition points when creating a trace The IQ samples in a data acquisition can be detected in a variety of ways The number of IQ samples available to each trace point varies with both analysis length and trace length For example with Spectrum Length set to Auto in the Analysis menu the instrument analyzes just enough samples to produce one IQ sample pair per trace point In this case the detection method chosen has very little effect as the Peak Peak and Avg VRMS are all equal Changing the Spectrum Length causes the available detection methods to differ in value because they have a larger set of samples for the various detection methods to process The available detection methods are m Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the positive peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point B Peak Each
380. n and Eye Diagram displays For the other trace displays the Trace Type setting is not available Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Test Patterns Trace Prefs Trig Meas Trace Tracei Points Symbol 4 4 Show Freeze Trace Type Freq Dev Y Content Vectors X Setting Description Trace Select the trace to display P25 Constellation and P25 P25 Constellation display only Select the trace that is hidden or displayed based on Eye Diagram displays only whether or not Show is selected Show Specifies whether the trace selected by Trace is displayed or hidden P25 Constellation and P25 Eye Diagram displays only Freeze Halts updates to the trace selected by the Trace setting Present for the Constellation P25 Constellation display only display only Points Symbol Select how many points to use between symbols when connecting the dots Values 1 2 4 8 Content Select whether to display the trace as vectors points connected by lines points P25 Constellation and P25 Freq Dev amp Time displays only symbols only without lines or lines lines drawn between symbols but no symbols are displayed The choices available depend on the display Trace Type P25 Constellation and P25 Eye Digram displays only Select to specify whether the plots in the Constellation and Eye Diagram displays are shown as vs Q or as Frequency Deviation Scale Tab
381. nal to display Analysis Time Tab see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Trace see page 200 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale Tab see page 201 Specifies the vertical subcarrier for non b standards only and symbols scale and position settings Prefs Tab see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed WLAN Phase Error Display The WLAN Phase Error display shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Phase Error values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency NOTE For 802 11b analysis the subcarrier graph is not displayed To show the WLAN Phase Error display 1 Ifyouare analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 3 In the Select Displays dialog select WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the WLAN Phase Error icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN Phase Error icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays ge qx om od Click OK to show the WLAN Phase Error display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal
382. nction selections for the selected trace Detection is always Peak for Settling Time measurements 14 Show Controls whether the selected Trace is visible or not When trace is Off the box is not checked 15 Trace Selects a trace Touching here displays a menu that shows the available traces and whether they are enabled or not If you select a trace that is not currently enabled it will be enabled Measurement Readout Text Color The measurement readouts can appear in either black text or red text Measurement results that appear in black text indicate B the signal is settled AND m the signal is settled longer than the minimum settled duration AND m the settling time is valid OR the settling time from trigger is valid If any of the conditions listed are not met the measurement results text is red 136 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Settling Time Displays Elements of the Frequency Settling Time Graph The following illustration shows the various indicators that appear in the Frequency Settling Time graph La Tolerance DEI m E Settled frequency A Minimum settled duration 0070 038 Frequency settling time Settling time from trigger NOTE The blue vertical bar that indicates the end of the previous settled state may not always appear For frequency settling time this can happen because the starting frequency is outside the measureme
383. ncy Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Advanced Params see page 342 Specifies additional parameters Find see page 346 Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch word Analysis Time see page 346 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Trace see page 348 Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Scale see page 350 Specifies the horizontal and vertical scale settings Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Frequency Deviation vs Time Display To show a Frequency Deviation vs Time display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 3 From the Measurements box select Frequency Deviation vs Time 4 Double click the Frequency Deviation vs Time icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Frequency Deviation vs Time icon to the Selected displays box 316 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Frequency Deviation vs Time Display 5 Click the OK button This displays
384. nd analysis Show Recalled trace Displays a saved trace instead of a live trace Detection Detection refers to the method of processing the data acquisition points when creating a trace The IQ samples in a data acquisition can be detected in a variety of ways The number of IQ samples available to each trace point varies with both analysis length and trace length For example with Spectrum Length set to Auto in the Analysis menu the instrument analyzes just enough samples to produce one IQ sample pair per trace point In this case the detection method chosen has very little effect as the Peak Peak and Avg VRMS are all equal Changing the Spectrum Length causes the available detection methods to differ in value because they have a larger set of samples for the various detection methods to process The available detection methods are m Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the positive peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point B Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the negative peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point m Avg VRMS Average Vgys Each point on the trace is the result of determining the RMS Voltage value for all of the IQ samples available to the trace point When displayed in either linear Volts Watts or Log dB dBm the correct RMS value results When the averaging function is applied to a trace the
385. ndows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement Top of Graph control Sets the frequency indicated at the top of the graph Since the Position value at the vertical center of this graph remains constant as the Top of Graph value is adjusted the Vertical Scale increases as the Top of Graph value increases which also affects the bottom of graph readout Vertical Scale can also be controlled from the Settings control panel s Scale tab Position Specifies the frequency shown at the center of the graph display Changing this value moves the trace up and down in the graph which affects the Top of Graph and Bottom of Graph values as well Bottom of Graph Readout Displays the frequency value at the bottom of the graph Measurement readouts Displays numeric values for the Pk positive frequency deviation Pk negative frequency deviation RMS RMS value of the deviation Pk Pk peak to peak frequency deviation and Pk Pk 2 peak to peak frequency deviation divided by two Position Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display Scale Clear Adjusts the time range of the graph By decreasing the scale full scale time over 10 divisions the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the acquisition record by adjusting the horizontal posit
386. neral Signal Viewing folder Setup gt Displays Some tabs are shared by all the displays some tabs are shared by only a couple of displays For some tabs the control values are shared across all the General Signal Viewing displays For other control values each display has unique values for the controls Details are provided for the specific tabs Common controls for general signal viewing displays Settings tab Description Freq amp Span see page 72 Sets the frequency and span parameters Trace see page 73 Sets the trace display parameters Traces Math see page 76 Sets the traces used to create the Math trace BW see page 76 Sets the Bandwidth Method used for setting the measurement bandwidth Scale see page 78 Sets the Vertical and Horizontal scale and offset parameters Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible Freq amp BW Tab Freq vsTime Phase vs Time RF amp Q vs Time Display The Freq amp BW tab provides access to settings that control frequency settings for the Freq vs Time Phase vs Time RF I amp Q vs Time display Freq amp BW Traces Scale Prefs Measurement BW no filter SOO MHz 7 Link to Span Measurement Freq Set to max Bw RUE Set to max ew SignalVu PC Printable Help 71 General Signal Viewing Setting Freq amp Span Tab Description Measurement Freq The frequency at the which measurements a
387. nformation is specific to this measurement This result can be viewed in P25 Summary and P25 Power vs Time displays B This measurement is done in two steps First by calculating tOB sync using HDQPSK data the ISCH pattern is looked for and then by using the result to calculate tIB sync using HCPM data the SACCH pattern is looked for The first step is done by choosing Time Alignment tOB sync measurement in the Trig Meas tab in the Settings control panel SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis When the second step Time Alignment t error 0 calculation or t error 1 calculation is selected in the Trig Meas tab of the control panel there is an option to override the tOB sync value calculated in the first step When this measurement is chosen only this result is provided in the P25 Summary display You must provide the ultraframe boundary to the trigger of the analyzer An autocorrelation of the input RF signal with the reference patterns is performed to get the peak that will determine tOB sync measured and t error O ort error 1 from the trigger point HCPM Tx Logical Channel Peak ACPR Phase 2 HCPM This measures the ratio of total transmitter power under prescribed conditions and modulation to the peak power that falls in a prescribed bandwidth centred on the nominal frequency of the adjacent channel during the transmitter power ramping interval This applies only to inbound signals This measurem
388. ng both data and setup returns the instrument to the same state it was in at the time you saved the file Acquisition Data CSV These files contain IQ sample data before it has been processed by a measurement The acquisition data points are saved as IQ pairs Use this format to import the acquisition data into Microsoft Excel for further analysis Acquisition Data mat These files contain IQ sample data before it has been processed by a measurement The acquisition data points are saved as IQ pairs Use this format to import the acquisition data into MATLAB for further analysis Range file CSV These files contain a list of settings that describe how the instrument is set up for the Spurious measurement The file contains the number of ranges enabled the start and stop frequencies for each enabled range the limits for each enabled range the mask type and more SignalVu PC Printable Help 411 Managing Data Settings and Pictures Data Settings and Picture File Formats 412 Results Export File Format The Results Export format contains trace points and or scalar results produced by the measurement The file contains general information about the measurement settings at the top of the file and the results data in the second part of the file Groups of settings or results are headed with text as described below At the top of the file is the measurement name and the date and time data was acquired
389. ng edge specified by the Ref setting Start Range 100 ms Resolution 3 digits inc dec small 1 ns large 1 2 5 10 Default 0 Length L Length specifies the period of time that is used for pulse measurements The measurement time begins at the Start point and continues for the amount of time specified by Length Relative time method Length In the Relative time method Length specifies the percentage of the top of the pulse that is used for measurements The instrument automatically determines the pulse top The measurement length is centered within the pulse ON time Impulse Response Params Define Levels Freg Estimation Scale Prefs Measurement s Impulse Response Time method Absolute M Ref R 100 V Apply ampl corrections A E wm ES Start 5 0 000 s Keep out time 0 000 s EET f Length L 1 00 us SignalVu PC Printable Help 241 Pulsed RF Setting Define Tab Description Apply ampl corrections Enable disable corrections that remove errors due to the window function and to the time offset of the side lobe Keep out time The Keep out time specifies a region that is ignored when the trace is analyzed for side lobes The setting defines a region to the left and to the right of the center of the main lobe Lobes that fall within this time region are not eligible to be the highest side lobe Time method Specifies how measurement parameters ar
390. ngs changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 22 8 Scale 1 840 ms Position 24 7 m Position 160 000 us Autoscale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Scale Changes the range shown between the top and bottom of the graph Position Adjusts the phase shown at the center of the graph Autoscale Resets the Position so that the entire trace in the graph Horizontal Scale Changes the range shown between the left and right sides of the graph Position Adjusts the phase shown at the left edge of the graph Autoscale Resets the Scale and Position settings to show the entire trace within the graph 102 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Prefs Tab Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the PM display Parameters Trace Scale Prefs V Show graticule Setting Max trace points 100K M 4 Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Description Show graticule Shows or hides the graticule Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area Max trace points The trace in the PM display can be set to a maximum of 100 000 points however the actual number of
391. ngs require a wider data bandwidth SignalVu PC Printable Help 429 Reference Error and Information Messages 430 m Select the display that you are interested in and it will change the acquisition to meet its own needs Increase the acquisition bandwidth manually or by changing the selected display s settings to cause the wider bandwidth No Math trace unmatched trace lengths A math trace could not produced because the traces selected to generate the math trace do not have the same number of points This can easily happen if both traces are recalled but were saved under different Points settings This can also occur if one of the selected traces is a live trace and the other trace is a recalled trace Ina Spectrum display as long as one trace is live you can change the Points setting Setup gt Settings gt Freq amp Span tab to match the recalled trace If you are using two recalled traces to generate the Math trace You must recreate at least one of the traces No burst detected The Burst Detection Mode see page 346 is On but no burst was detected in the signal Check that the Threshold setting is properly set Not enough samples for current setup The measurement was not able to run because the combination of analysis length offset and measurement bandwidth relative to acquisition bandwidth were such that not enough samples were available for the measurement to analyze This can occur when t
392. ns the measurement bandwidth about the measurement frequency and looks for the highest powered signal This is defined as the carrier frequency In Manual Auto is deselected the carrier frequency is specified by adding subtracting the specified Frequency offset from the measurement frequency Range Measurement BW 1 1 2 to Measurement BW 1 1 2 If the Load from Marker button is pressed the frequency offset is determined from the phase difference between the two markers on screen compared to the time between the two markers This function is useful for removing frequency slope from the phase modulated signal Load from Marker When the Auto check box is selected the instrument scans the measurement bandwidth about the center frequency and looks for the highest powered signal This is defined as the carrier frequency When the Auto check box is deselected the carrier frequency is specified by adding subtracting the specified Frequency offset from the center frequency Pressing the Load from Marker button loads the marker frequency into the Frequency offset box SignalVu PC Printable Help 91 Analog Modulation Trace Tab 92 Trace Tab The Trace Tab allows you to set the display characteristics of displayed traces Parameters Trace Scale Prefs J Show Freeze Save Trace As Detection Peak z Function Normal x ux Setting Description Show Shows hides the trace If the instrument continues to ru
393. ns without considering any trigger conditions It is a fast and easy way to see the signals Free Run is usually adequate for the Spectrum display unless you need to specify a particular time at which to collect the data record SignalVu PC Printable Help 397 Controlling the Acquisition of Data Triggering 398 Triggered In the Triggered mode the instrument initiates an acquisition when a trigger event is recognized The conditions that define a trigger event depend on the selected trigger source If the RF input is the selected trigger source Power is the trigger type and you can select the slope and level of the trigger point If External is selected as the trigger source you can select the slope as the trigger point You can define the following event parameters by selecting the respective tab in the Trigger control panel B Event source and event type E Advanced parameters define where a trigger occurs within the acquired memory or trigger each segment in the swept acquisition mode Actions set parameters for the Save on trigger function Save on Trigger An additional feature of the triggering capability is to save acquisition data when a trigger event occurs When the analyzer is run in Triggered mode you can configure the instrument to save acquisition data to a file You can also set the instrument to save a picture of the screen when the trigger event occurs See Action Tab Triggering see page 402 for details on conf
394. nt bandwidth Elements of the Phase Settling Time Graph The following illustration shows the various indicators that appear in the Phase Settling Time graph For most phase settling time measurements there is not a previous settled state within the measurement period making it impossible to measure the settling time from the previous settled value However the settling time from trigger is typically available SignalVu PC Printable Help 137 RF Measurements Settling Time Displays 138 Tolerance N Settled phase Minimum settled duration Settling time from trigger 0070 38 NOTE The blue vertical bar indicating the measurement start time may not appear Zero phase is referenced to the measured hop as the phase will not typically have a settled value during the previous hop Measuring Settling Time 1 2 3 Select the Displays button Select RF Measurements from the Measurements box Double click the Freq Settling icon or Phase Settling icon in the Available displays box Click OK to complete your selection Select General Signal Viewing from the Measurements box Double click the Time Overview icon in the Available displays box Click OK to complete your selection Press the front panel Freq button and use the front panel keypad or knob to adjust the frequency to that of the signal you want to measure Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measure
395. nt for the rising and falling edges allowing for more accurate measurements on pulses with droop 50 Level Select Voltage to use 6 dB as the 50 point Select Power to use 3 dB as the 50 level Freq Estimation Tab Use the Freq Estimation tab to specify parameters used for determining frequency offset SignalVu PC Printable Help 245 Pulsed RF 246 Freq Estimation Tab Params Define Levels Freq Estimation Scale Prefs Modulation type Pulse Frequency Reference Freq Offset 169 1 Hz 4 Auto Linear Chirp Chirp Slope 0 0000 Hz us v Auto Setting Description Modulation type Specifies which algorithm to use for estimating frequency error Pulse Frequency Reference Specifies the method used to determine the pulse frequency error and if applicable the chirp slope Auto Selecting Auto causes the instrument to calculate the frequency offset and if applicable the chirp slope Freq Offset If Auto is not enabled specify the value for frequency offset here If Auto is enabled the offset is set to zero and this readout displays the calculated frequency error Chirp BW If Auto is not enabled specify the value for Chirp Slope here If Auto is enabled this readout displays the calculated Chirp slope This setting is used only when the modulation type is set to Linear Chirp Modulation Type Frequency estimation is performed by the instrument using selectable methods depending on signal
396. nt is made Define Time Params Mask Trace Scale Prefs Meas Freq 2 44700 GHz Target reference auto ss Offset 0 0000 Hz Meas BW 40 00 MHz Tolerance 500 0 kHz actual 40 00 MHz Meas Freq Select the frequency of the signal to be measured Measurement Frequency can be selected as the target frequency see Target Reference NOTE If Lock Center Frequency of Spectrum Display to Measurement Frequency is unchecked then Measurement Frequency is independent of Center Frequency Range Entire input frequency of the instrument Meas BW This control limits the bandwidth of the Settling Time measurement You use the measurement bandwidth setting to improve the signal to noise ratio of the measurement resulting in lower measurement uncertainty However if the measurement bandwidth is set too low resulting in fewer samples per second it can reduce the number of points within the measurement length below the 256 stable samples required thus causing the analysis to fail The measurement bandwidth depends on the oscilloscope on which the recalled file was acquired To see the effect of measurement bandwidth on measurement uncertainty see the RSA6100B Series Specifications and Performance Verification Reference Tektronix part number 077 0647 XX This manual can be downloaded from www tek com manuals SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Define Tab for Settling Time Displays Target Reference The target ref
397. nt s Measurement Frequency Auto is used to select the method for determining the carrier frequency When Auto is selected the instrument determines the carrier frequency by analyzing the signal When Auto is deselected you can set the carrier frequency offset using Frequency Offset Load A from Marker Pressing this button disables the Auto Frequency Offset function and sets the Frequency offset to the frequency offset calculated from the difference between MR the marker reference and the selected marker or M1 if MR is currently the selected marker Phase offset Displays the phase offset When Auto is selected the instrument determines the phase offset When Auto is deselected the user sets the phase offset with this control Load from marker Pressing this button sets the phase offset to the phase offset of the selected marker Pressing this button automatically deselects Auto Frequency Offset In Auto Auto is selected the instrument scans the measurement bandwidth about the Measurement Frequency and looks for the highest powered signal This is defined as the carrier frequency In Manual Auto is deselected the carrier frequency is specified by adding subtracting the specified Frequency offset from the Measurement Frequency Range Measurement BW 1 1 2 to Measurement BW 1 1 2 If the Load A from marker button is pressed the frequency offset is determined from the phase difference between the two markers on screen comp
398. ntrol panel Available when connected to an RSA306 Acquire see page 393 Displays the Acquire control panel Analysis see page 377 Displays the Analysis control panel Amplitude see page 389 Displays the Amplitude control panel Audio see page 291 Displays the Audio demodulation panel Available when connected to an RSA306 Presets Menu The Presets menu provides you access to instrument presets and preset options Command Main see page 13 Description Resets the instrument to factory defaults Acquisition data and settings that have not been saved will be lost DPX Standards Presets Recalls the DPX presets Recalls the Standards presets Application see page 15 Recalls the Application presets User see page 15 Recalls the User presets Preset Options see page 13 Tools Menu Displays a control panel where you can configure options for Presets Provides access to several utilities for controlling instrument functions Command Description Mask Test see page 371 Enables you to locate and highlight specified signal levels in specified displays Activate License Used to activate SignalVu PC Manage Licenses Used to activate a demo license or deactivate a license used to move the license between PCs Options Displays the Options control panel Live Link Menu Live Link allows you to connect your PC
399. nts Measurement Params for ACPR and MCPR Displays Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Regures triggered synchronous signal Average Time Domain Number 10 Channel Filter Root raised Cosine v Correct for Noise Floor Power Reference Total active channels Filter Parameter 0 22 Chip Rate 3 84 MHz Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Average Frequency Domain Number 10 Channel Filter Root raised Cosine Correct for Noise Floor Parameter Filter Parameter 0 35 Chip Rate 1 MHz Description Average Enables disables measurement averaging Averaging can be enabled in either the Frequency Domain or Time Domain Frequency domain This setting takes the average linear value of the traces so that rms values are preserved The number of averages is user defined Frequency domain averaging is available in spans larger or smaller than the maximum real time bandwidth This is the mode to use unless you need to extract maximum dynamic range from an ACPR measurement Time domain This setting takes the average linear value of the traces It is useful if you need to extract maximum dynamic range from an ACPR measurement The number of traces is user defined But the signals must be triggered and repeating That is the signal needs to be exactly the same for each acquisition When this condition is met each waveform con
400. nts by 2 to prevent exceeding the 100 000 trace point limit Since only one value can be selected for each trace point an algorithm must be used to select detect the appropriate value to use The IQ samples in a data acquisition can be detected in a variety of ways The number of IQ samples available to each trace point varies with both analysis length and trace length For example with Spectrum Length set to Auto in the Analysis menu the instrument analyzes just enough samples to produce one IQ sample pair per trace point In this case the detection method chosen has very little effect as the Peak Peak Avg VRMS and Sample values are all equal Changing the Spectrum Length causes the available detection methods to differ in value because they have a larger set of samples for the various detection methods to process The available detection methods depending on the display are SignalVu PC Printable Help 51 General Signal Viewing Trace Tab Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the positive peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the negative peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point Peak Selects the highest and lowest values of all the samples contained in two consecutive acquisition intervals Avg VRMS Average Vgys Each point on the trace is the result of deter
401. nts of the graphs are displayed WLAN EVM Display The WLAN EVM display shows the data symbols individual subcarrier Error Vector Magnitude values versus symbol interval time and subcarrier frequency NOTE For 802 11b analysis the subcarrier graph is not displayed To show the WLAN EVM display 1 Ifyouare analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step 2 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 3 In the Select Displays dialog select WLAN EVM in the Measurements box 4 In the Available displays box double click the WLAN EVM icon or select the icon and click Add The WLAN EVM icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the WLAN EVM display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel ge Eo m uU Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard as appropriate Set the Standard Guard Interval Channel Bandwidth and Subcarrier Spacing controls as appropriate for the input signal 9 If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file 176 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN EVM Settings Elements of the Display 5 Start 0 Symbol 0519 049 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph Sets the EVM val
402. number of points in the exported trace and the displayed precision of the settling time measurement Settling Time Displays Shared Measurement Settings The control panel tabs in this section are shared by the Frequency and Phase Settling Time displays These control panel tabs are not shared with other RF Measurement displays With few exceptions each display shares values for each of the controls on these tabs For example Vertical Scale values are independent for each of the displays degrees for Phase Settling Time and Hertz for Frequency Settling Time SignalVu PC Printable Help 141 RF Measurements Define Tab for Settling Time Displays Common controls for settling time measurement displays Settings tab Description Define see page 142 Specifies the parameters that characterize the settling time measurement Time Params see page 144 Specifies the Measurement length and minimum settled duration for the settling time measurement Mask see page 145 Specifies the parameters used for Mask testing Trace see page 145 Specify which traces to show and how they are computed Scale see page 148 Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale settings Prefs see page 149 Specifies display parameters of the Settling Time displays Define Tab for Settling Time Displays 142 The Define tab for the Frequency Settling Time measurement controls several parameters that affect how the measureme
403. o longer appear under Available displays Click OK to display the Occupied Bandwidth 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 121 Occupied BW amp x dB BW Display RF Measurements Elements of the Display LLL toca Autoscale E om erm Da dim 2 67 9 o dBjdiv 99 0 10 0 dB x dB BW Lx d 100 00 dBm t Pos 2 70000 GHz Scale 11 00 MHz Freg Error 108 1 kHz OBW Level left 55 85 dBm OBW Level right 54 89 dBrn OBW Ref Power 18 27 dBm total power 0519 025 122 Clear a SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Item 1 Display element Check mark indicator Occupied BW amp x dB BW Display Description The check mark indicator denotes the display for which the acquisition hardware is optimized This indictor appears only when the display is the selected display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement Averaging readout Appears when averaging is enabled Settings gt Parameters tab gt Average results Displays Avg n of m while averaging the results and Avg m once the requested number of results have been averaged Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings so t
404. o that the entire trace fits in the view 4 Horizontal Offset Adjusts the horizontal position of the trace 5 Max and Min readouts Displays the maximum and minimum value of the phase error within the analysis times and the times at which they occurred 6 Horizontal Scale Sets the time spanned by the graph 7 Clear button Restarts multi trace functions Avg Hold 8 Trace function Shows the trace function as set on the Settings gt Trace tab Changing the Phase vs Time Display Settings see page 68 Phase Vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar x The settings for the Phase vs Time display are shown in the following table 68 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing RF I amp Q vs Time Display Settings tab Description Freq amp BW see page 71 Sets the frequency and bandwidth parameters Trace see page 73 Sets the trace display parameters Scale see page 78 Sets the Vertical and Horizontal scale and offset parameters Prefs see page 79 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible RF amp Q vs Time Display This is a plot of the baseband In Phase I and Quadrature Q components of a modulated carrier The plot is in the time domain with I and or Q values the Y axis Note that the trace s in the RF I amp Q vs Time display can be set to a maximum of 100 000 points however the actual number of trace points can extend up to 1 0
405. occurred while exporting Results The file was not created B Export the results again Export failure unable to open results file for export File not saved The Export Results file could not be opened for writing so the export of results was not completed B Verify that there is sufficient free space on hard disk Insufficient data for CISPR Acquire while display is selected This message appears when a measurement is not the selected measurement and CISPR filters are selected Set the measurement to be the selected measurement and reacquire the signal IQ Processing Error 8012 This message occurs in GP Digital Modulation displays The most likely cause for this message is that there are not enough symbols to analyze This can happen if m The Analysis Length is set too short Increase the Analysis Length on the Analysis Time tab m The Analysis Offset has pushed the Analysis Time so far out that the actual Analysis Length is too short even though the user requested Analysis Length would have been long enough without the excessive offset Decrease the Analysis Offset on the Analysis Time tab m The input signal is bursted and the burst does not contain enough symbols Needs swept acq or larger Acq BW Acquire data while display is selected The display has one of two problems It is not the selected display which prevents it from controlling the hardware acquisition parameters and setting the acquisition mode to Swept or its setti
406. of frequencies over which the performance of the instrument is specified Frequency Span A continuous range of frequencies extending between two frequency limits Frequency Settling Time The time measured from a reference point to when the signal of interest settles to within user defined tolerance GPIB Acronym for General Purpose Interface Bus the common name for the communications interface system defined in IEEE Std 488 Graticule The calibrated grid overlaying the display screen of analyzers oscilloscopes and other test instruments Grayed Out An on screen control is Grayed Out if it is not adjustable SignalVu PC Printable Help 447 Glossary 1 Q Q Acronym for In phase Quadrature Acronym for Intermediate Frequency Import Bring data into the application from a file of some format other than application native Impulse Response The Impulse Response trace display shows normalized power on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis Input Impedance The impedance at the desired input terminal Usually expressed in terms of VSWR return loss or other related terms for low impedance devices and resistance capacitance parameters for high impedance devices LISN Acronym for Line Impedance Stabilization Network Local Oscillator LO An oscillator which produces the internal signal that is mixed with an incoming signal to produce the IF signal 448 Signal Vu PC Printable Help
407. of the data The file is saved as a plain text file but the contents are formatted as CSV comma separated values Results files can be opened from applications such as Microsoft Excel and MATLAB Measurement Settings xt Measurement settings files contain a list of settings that describe how the instrument is set up for the selected measurement The list contains measurement settings for example Span trace settings for example whether or not a trace is selected and global settings for example Frequency and Reference Level The list of settings contained in the file varies depending on which display is selected Selected Trace varies with display Trace files contain the trace results data in binary format These files are only readable by the SignalVu PC application Several of the instrument s measurements allow you to recall a Trace file for visually comparing a saved trace to a live trace Acquisition Data with Setup iq These files contain the acquisition data record and complete instrument setup in binary format Use these files to save data for later recall and analysis When you save an Acquisition Data file the current Setup is always saved with the file At the time of recall you will be asked whether you want to restore only the acquisition data or both data and setup If the instrument is already set up for a specific measurement you will probably want to recall only the acquisition data Recalli
408. ogram Time Time Overview Selected displays Spectrum To select displays 1 Select Setup gt Displays or click the displays icon 2 Select one of the choices under Measurements The measurement chosen determines the choices available in Available displays 3 Double click the desired display in the Available displays box or select the desired display and click Add 4 Click OK SignalVu PC Printable Help 27 Using the Measurement Displays Selecting Displays 28 SignalVu PC Printable Help Taking Measurements Available Measurements Available Measurements The automatic measurements available include RF power measurements OFDM analysis WLAN analysis APCO P25 analysis audio analysis analog modulation measurements digital modulation measurements and pulsed RF measurements Power measurements Measurement Description Channel Power The total RF power in the selected channel located in the Chan Pwr and ACPR display Adjacent Channel Power Ratio ACPR Measure of the signal power leaking from the main channel into adjacent channels Multi Carrier Power Ratio MCPR The ratio of the signal power in the reference channel or group of channels to the power in adjacent channels Peak Avg Ratio Ratio of the peak power in the transmitted signal to the average power in the transmitted signal located in the CCDF display CCDF The Complementary Cumulative Distribu
409. oints value the trace is decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export You can set the Max trace points on the Settings Prefs tab To display Phase vs Time 1 2 3 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select General Signal Viewing in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the Phase vs Time icon or select the icon and click Add The Phase vs Time icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the Phase vs Time display SignalVu PC Printable Help 67 General Signal Viewing Elements of the Display Phase Vs Time Settings v Peak Normal o 250 Position 0 000 250 Autascale Position 965 472 us Max 1980 0 964 6 us Min 179 4 e 4059ms a Scal 521 753 us 0519 020 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph adjustment Adjusts the vertical scale Use the knob to adjust the value of the top of the graph 2 Vertical offset adjustment Adjusts the phase error shown at the vertical center of the display 3 Autoscale button Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings s
410. ols or Seconds Analysis Offset Use analysis offset to specify where measurements begin Be aware that you cannot set the Analysis Offset outside the range of time covered by the current acquisition data all time values are relative to the Time Zero Reference You can set the Analysis Length so that the requested analysis period falls partly or entirely outside the current range of acquisition data settings When the next acquisition is taken its Acquisition Length will be increased to cover the new Analysis Length as long as the Sampling controls are set to Auto If the Sampling parameters are set to manual or if the instrument is analyzing saved data the actual analysis length will be constrained by the available data length but in most cases measurements are able to be made anyway The instrument will display a notification when measurement results are computed from less data than requested Range 0 to end of acquisition Analysis Length Resolution 1 effective sample or symbol Analysis Length Use the analysis length to specify how long a period of time is analyzed As you adjust this value the actual amount of time for Analysis Length in Symbol or Seconds units is shown below the control in the Actual readout This setting is not available when Auto is checked Range minimum value depends on modulation type Resolution 1 symbol Time Zero Reference All time values are measured from this point such as marker p
411. olts multiply the individual values by the Scaling value in the DataDescription The binary data starts at an offset into the file the offset attribute in the DataFile element This offset number will always start at the 19th character into the file starting with 1 and will always be 9 characters long NOTE You should not casually modify the XML header because this will change the offset to the start of the binary data SignalVu PC Printable Help Managing Data Settings and Pictures Data Settings and Picture File Formats Acquisition Data Files csv The acquisition data files have two sections At the top of the file is the following information SamplingFrequency The sampling frequency in Hertz m NumberSamples The number of IQ samples in the file DateTime When the data was acquired m Frequency The center frequency in Hertz B AcquisitionBandwidth The acquisition bandwidth Hz Following the AcquisitionBandwidth are the data The data are IQ pairs in volts Groups of settings or results are headed with some text The first thing in the file is the measurement name and the date time when the acquisition was taken The first group Parameters are global parameters Measurement Bandwidth in this group is the measurement bandwidth used by the General Signal Viewing measurements Spectrum Amplitude vs Time etc It also includes some source settings like Acq BW Dither Preamp and RF Attenuatio
412. om audio filter using a text or CSV file to specify the desired filter frequency response To use a custom audio filter 1 Verify that Audio Spectrum or Audio Summary is the selected display Click the Settings icon or select Setup gt Settings 2 3 Select the Audio Filters tab 4 Click the File button 5 Click the button and navigate to the location of the custom audio filter file you wish to use Select the file you want to use and click Open 6 Acquire a new trace or replay a saved file to see the effect of the custom filter Creating a Custom Audio Filter A custom audio filter file is either a plain text file or a CSV format file The file contains frequency in Hz and amplitude in dB value pairs which specify the filter frequency response shape Each pair must be on a separate line The filter response between the points 1s interpolated using a cubic spline fit The following table shows the first few lines of a custom audio filter text file 0 100 16 66 85 50 63 100 41 200 21 300 10 6 SignalVu PC Printable Help 301 Audio Analysis Scale Tab 400 6 3 500 3 6 600 2 700 0 9 800 0 Format and rule checking on custom audio filter files is performed as follows The maximum number of frequency and amplitude pairs is 1000 Column 1 frequency values in Hertz Non negative values only zero is allowed Strictly increasing order of frequencies
413. on Auto Detect Symbol analysis offset 0 5 Settings Channel Estimation Preamble z Pilot tracking J Phase Amplitude Timing SwapI amp O Description Constellation determination Symbol analysis offset Specifies the method used to detect the constellation Auto Detect analyzes the signal to determine the appropriate constellation Manual allows you to specify the constellation type Manual choices are BPSK QPSK 16QAM and 64QAM Specifies the analysis offset in the symbol interval This value is a percentage of the Guard Interval The allowable range is 100 to 0 100 positions the FFT to start at the beginning of the Guard Interval 0 positions it to start at the end of the Guard Interval Default value is 50 which usually gives the best measurement results Channel Estimation Preamble Specifies the method used to estimate channel frequency response and equalization This control can be used to diagnose changes in frequency response over the signal packet When you select Preamble the instrument uses only the Preamble to estimate channel frequency response This response is then used to equalize the entire signal packet Preamble Data When you select Preamble Data the instrument makes an initial channel frequency response estimate from the Preamble Then estimates the channel response for each data symbol using the decoded data content to derive equalization for each symbol individual
414. on test patterns m The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail B This measurement result is not shown in the P25 Summary display when trigger measurements are chosen NOTE Read about important information related to HCPM bursty data measurements here see page 262 P25 Test Patterns A variety of test patterns are specified in the TIA 102 documents for use in performance testing of transmitters These test patterns allow the software to compare the measurement result to the standards limit Test engineers can select from the test patterns described in the following tables NOTE Although this table gives the test patterns for measurements as recommended by the Standard other measurement results are also be provided as additional information for a given test pattern For example Modulation Fidelity results can also be provided for High Deviation and Low Deviation test patterns 260 SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis Table 3 P25 test patterns Phase 1 C4FM TIA 102 Phase 1 C4FM test pattern Phase 1 C4FM measurement Standard transmitter RF Output Power Operating Frequency Accuracy Modulation Emission Spectrum Unwanted Emissions Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Modulation Fidelity Transmitter Power and Encoder Attack Time Standard Busy Transmitter Power and Encoder
415. only applies to High Deviation or Low Deviation test patterns Test patterns are selected in the Test Patterns tab in the Settings control panel To check if the results are consistent with the symbol rate used the measurement 1s done based on the number of zero crossings when a High Deviation or Low Deviation test pattern 1s used The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail This measurement only applies to High Deviation or Low Deviation test patterns If this measurement is run for any other test patterns comparisons for limits will result in N A being shown as the measurement will not be valid Common Trigger Related Measurements The measurements covered in this subsection have some common information These measurements are Transmitter Power and Encoder Attack Time Phase 1 This measurement is the time required for a transmitter to prepare and transmit information on the radio channel after changing state from standby to transmit applies to conventional mode This measurement result can be seen in the P25 Summary display A graphical representation of these results can be seen in the P25 Power vs Time display Transmitter Power and Encoder Attack Time with Busy Idle Operations Phase 1 This measures the time required for a transmitter to prepare and transmit information on the radio channel after the receiving channel changes state from busy to idle
416. oo close to the acquisition BW Increase the frequency range of the measurement for example Span RBW too small large for current Acq BW If the RBW is set manually it is possible for the acquisition bandwidth to be incompatible with the RBW setting m Change the RBW setting Adjust the Acq BW setting either directly Setup gt Acquire gt Sampling Params select on of the manual modes or by adjusting the measurement bandwidth of the selected display Setup gt Acquire gt Sampling Params All Auto Recall error Setup not completely restored An error occurred while recalling a Setup file Thus the current setup may be a combination of settings from the Setup file and the previous Setup SignalVu PC Printable Help 431 Reference Error and Information Messages 432 Recall the setup again Recall failure problem with file or file contents An error occurred while recalling a Setup Trace or Data file This can occur because of a problem opening the file operating system error or because of a problem with the contents of the file E Recall the file again Restoring acquisition data This is a status message displayed while data is being restored from a file Save failure file not saved An error occurred while saving a Setup or Data file E Save the file again Saving acquisition data This is a status message displayed while data is being saved to a file Selected VBW does not use full Spectrum Length This
417. ormat Displays the packet format DSSS 1M DSSS 2M CCK 5 5M or CCK 11M Data Modulation Displays the modulation used in the PSDU Data packet segment Chips EVM Avg Power Displays the number of chips EVM RMS and average power of the Preamble Header and Data portions of the packet Header Data Displays he decimal values of the received packet Header s Signal Service Length and CRC fields The CRC Pass Fail result indicates if the received CRC value is equal to the CRC value computed from the received Signal Service and Length values WLAN Summary Settings Application Toolbar Z2 The settings for the WLAN Summary display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 191 WLAN Measurements WLAN Symbol Table Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 195 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 196 Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays EVM see page 203 Specifies the EVM units dB or and Max Bursts to Avg The EVM is generally me
418. ory usage 395 Actions tab Search 376 Triggering 402 activating SignalVu PC 435 adaptive equalizer 340 Adjacent Channel Power measurement 108 Adjacent Channel Power Ratio 29 Advanced Params tab OFDM Analysis displays 224 Advanced Params Tab GP Digital Modulation displays 342 Advanced tab Triggering 401 SignalVu PC Printable Help AM 33 AM display 33 AM AM display 33 AM display 81 AM measurements 33 Ampl Scale tab DPXOgram display 45 Amplitude control panel 389 Amplitude vs Time display 63 Amplitude vs Time display Settings 64 Analysis control panel 377 analysis length 441 Analysis Params tab P25 Analysis displays 283 WLAN Analysis displays 196 analysis time 441 Analysis Time tab GP Digital Modulation displays 346 OFDM Analysis displays 225 Options control panel 18 P25 Analysis displays 283 WLAN Analysis displays 199 Analysis Time tab Analysis control panel 377 APCO P25 measurements 34 Application preset modulation analysis 15 pulse analysis 16 spectrum analysis 17 Time Frequency analysis 17 application presets saving 403 Application presets 13 Apply ampl corrections 241 APSK parameters 344 arranging windows 426 ASK 442 Index Audio BW 297 setting 297 Audio Demod tab 291 audio filters custom 301 Audio Filters tab Audio Analysis displays 299 Audio Freq Audio Summary display 294 Audio Spectrum display 292 Audio Spectrum settings 293 Aud
419. osition or horizontal position in Y vs Time displays Choices are Acquisition Start or Trigger When a trigger measurement is chosen from the Trig Meas tab of the Settings control panel Time Zero Reference is forced to Trigger Parameter Description Acquisition Start Time zero starts from the point at which acquisition begins Trigger Time zero starts from the trigger point SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Test Patterns Tab P25 Test Patterns Tab P25 Test patterns allow the software to compare the measurement result to the standards limit The list of available test patterns varies depending on which standard and modulation type is selected Modulation Params Analysis Params Analyss Time Test Patterns Trace Scale Prefs Test Patterns Standard Transmitter Test Pattern Outbound Standard Tone Test Pattern Low Devation Test Patter High Devation Test Pattern Other Settings Description Test Patterns Use this drop down list to select an appropriate test pattern The list varies depending on which standard and modulation type is selected You can read more about test patterns here see page 260 SignalVu PC Printable Help 285 APCO P25 Analysis Trace Tab P25 Trace Tab P25 The Trace tab allows you to set the trace display characteristics of the P25 trace display The selections vary depending on the selected display The following image shows the tab for the Constellatio
420. ourier transform algorithms such as FFT Fast Fourier Transform or CZT Chirp Z Transform are generally employed to transform time domain signals into frequency domain spectra There is an assumption inherent in the mathematics of Discrete Fourier Transforms that the data to be processed is a single period of a periodically repeating signal The discontinuities between successive frames will generally occur when the periodic extension is made to the signal These artificial discontinuities generate spurious responses not present in the original signal which can make it impossible to detect small signals in the presence of nearby large ones This phenomenon is called spectral leakage Applying a filter such as Kaiser to the signal to be transformed is an effective method to combat the spectral leakage problem Generally the filter has a bell shape Multiplying the transform frame by the filter function eliminates or reduces the discontinuities at the ends of the frame however at the expense of increased RBW Filter Shape Characteristics The choice of filter shape depends on its frequency response characteristics such as side lobe level equivalent noise bandwidth and maximum amplitude error Use the following guidelines to select the best filter shape Filter Shape Characteristics Kaiser RBW Best side lobe level shape factor closest to the traditional Gaussian RBW 6dB RBW MIL These filters are specified for bandwidth at
421. ows the following results For non bursty signals RF output power For bursty signals Power Info Offslot Power and Power Envelope results and Time Info P25 Power vs Time Settings Application Toolbar i The settings for the P25 Power vs Time display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 269 APCO P25 Analysis Settings tab P25 Summary Display Description Modulation Params see page 280 Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters Analysis Params see page 283 Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal Analysis Time see page 283 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for P25 Analysis displays Trig Meas see page 288 Enables you to select from various trigger measurements The trigger selections vary by signal type Test Patterns see page 285 Specifies the type of test pattern being used Some analysis differs based on the selected test pattern Available test patterns vary depending on the selected standard and modulation type Scale see page 286 Defines the vertical and horizontal axes Prefs see page 289 Specifies the radix of the marker readout and whether elements of the graphs are displayed P25 Summary Display The P
422. p GP Digital Modulation Freq amp BW Tab For Transmit Filter Root Raised Cosine RRC Measurement Filter RRC the Reference Filter RRC 2 Raised Cosine B For Transmit Filter Raised Cosine RC Measurement Filter None the Reference Filter Raised Cosine When the Measurement Filter None the Reference Filter Transmit Filter For Transmit Filter Gaussian Measurement Filter None the Reference Filter Gaussian Filter Parameter The filter parameter specifies the alpha for the Root Raised Cosine or Raised Cosine filter or the bandwidth time product BT for the Gaussian filter when selected as the Reference filter Some filter types have a fixed parameter value that is specified by industry standard while other filter types by definition have no filter parameter For filter types with no filter parameter there is no filter parameter control present in the control panel Freq amp BW Tab The Freq amp BW tab specifies a group of settings that affect how measurements are made Modulation Params Freq amp BW Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Frequency Error 123 3 HZ 7 Auto Measurement BW 30 72 MHZ Auto Frequency Deviation 465 7 AH 4 Auto Freq amp BW tab with nFSK or CAFM modulation type selected and Frequency Error readout enabled Auto selected Modulation Params Freq amp BW Advanced Params Find
423. p Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Symb Table icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Symbol icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Symbol Table display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you area analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 221 OFDM Analysis OFDM Symbol Table Settings 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 f n D D D D 1 1 i 1 1 1 001010 111110 111101 101001 100000 1 111111 100001 010011 001011 110100 2 001010 110111 000011 000010 101111 1 111111 101110 000000 110001 111110 3 110011 110110 110001 010101 111110 1 011000 011111 011011 011011 010001 4 l 110100 001011 001011 110000 110101 n 101100 001110 111110 011010 D11101 ti 101010 100100 002100 011000 111101 QO 111001 110010 001010 010010 010011 6 011011 111010 011010 100000 110011 D 010000 010111 010001 110100 011000 l 100111 111111 110001 001011 111100 i oooo00 100000 1010
424. pecifies additional parameters that are less frequently used Find see page 346 Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch word Analysis Time see page 346 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Trace see page 348 Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Demod amp Q vs Time Display The Demod I amp Q vs Time displays demodulated I and Q vs Time You can choose to display I only Q only or both Elements of the Display To show the Demod I amp Q vs Time display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Select the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays dialog box 2 3 From the Measurements box select GP Digital Modulation 4 Double click the Demod I amp Q vs Time icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Demod I amp Q vs Time icon to the Selected displays box d Click the OK button This shows the Demod I amp Q vs Time display 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file 310 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Demod I amp Q vs Time Display
425. ph The Reference Level is adjusted in the Toolbar and the Ampl control panel By default Vert Position Ref Level 1b Position dB Sets the vertical position value The maximum value is 20 00 dB The readout indicates the subcarrier for non b standards only or frequency shown at the bottom of the display 1c Bottom of graph readout Indicates the magnitude at the bottom of the top graph This value changes with the dB and vertical Position settings 2 Phase graph bottom graph 2a Top of graph Sets the phase value indicated at the top of the graph Since the Position value at the vertical center of this graph remains constant as the Top of Graph value is adjusted the Vertical Scale increases as the Top of Graph value increases which also affects the bottom of graph readout 2b Position Specifies the phase shown at the center of the graph display Changing this value moves the trace up and down in the graph which affects the Top of Graph and Bottom of Graph values as well 2c Bottom of bottom graph Indicates the phase at the bottom of the bottom graph This value readout changes with the Position setting 3 Autoscale Adjusts the Vertical and Horizontal scaling to optimize the trace display on screen 4 Start Position Shifts the trace left or right in the graph The readout indicates the subcarrier for non b standards only or frequency shown at the left edge of the display 5 Stop Scale Specifies the number of subcarriers for
426. play The Settings control panel for the Spectrum display is shown in the following figure Spectrum Freq amp Span Bw Traces Scale Prefs Settings Center 1 9000 GHz Span 85 0 MHz Max Span Start 1 8575 GHz Stop 1 9425 GHz Restore Step Size 5 0000 MH 7 Auto Defaults The control panel for the CCDF display is shown in the following figure CCDF Settings Parameters Traces Prefs rJ Measurement Time S Single use Analysis Length Total Time 20 000 ms Span 85 0 MHz Restore Continuous Defaults Settings Control Panels ACPR Settings see page 108 438 SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Settings Acquire see page 393 AM Settings see page 82 Amplitude vs Time Settings see page 64 Analysis Settings see page 377 Audio Spectrum Settings see page 293 Audio Summary Settings see page 295 CCDF Settings see page 127 Channel Power and ACPR Settings see page 108 OFDM Channel Response Settings OFDM see page 207 WLAN see page 115 Constellation Settings see page 309 DPX Spectrum Settings see page 42 EVM vs Time Settings see page 313 Eye Diagram Settings see page 316 FM Settings see page 89 Frequency Deviation vs Time Settings see page 318 Frequency vs Time Settings see page 66 Magnitude Error Settings see page 320 MCPR Settings see page 115 Occupied Bandwidth S
427. play mode Run actions not available in SignalVu PC Beep The analyzer beeps when the test condition is met Stop The analyzer stops when the test condition is met During Run Only Actions specified here are taken only during Run mode while acquiring live data Save acquisition data Saves acquisition data to a file when the test condition is met Use the drop down list to specify the format of the saved data The available file formats are TIQ CSV and MAT see page 403 Save trace Saves Trace data to a file when the test condition is met Save picture Saves a screen capture to a file when the test condition is met Use the drop down list to specify the format of the saved picture The available file formats are PNG JPG and BMP see page 403 Note that no trace will be saved if the tested trace isn t a saveable trace type For example a Spurious trace is not saveable Max files Specifies the number of times a test action stores a file After this limit is reached no more files are saved The instrument will continue to run but no additional files are saved when test conditions are met Keep in mind when setting this number that picture files are counted as part of the total number of files For example if you set Max files to 100 the instrument will save 100 acquisitions if only acquisitions are saved or only pictures are saved But if both acquisitions and pictures are saved
428. play of a legend in the measurements area that shows the Detection method and Function setting for displayed traces The color of the legend text matches the color of the associated trace Show graticule Select to display or hide the graticule Navigator View Time Overview Display only Places the Time Overview display across the top of the application window above all other active displays Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Shows or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area Show timestamp in graph selected line Show Power Trigger Level For spectrogram displays this readout shows or hides the timestamp associated with the selected line or marker position Displays or hides a green line in the graph that indicates the level at which the power trigger is set The line is not displayed if Trigger is set to Free Run Marker Noise mode Select to enable or disable the Marker Noise mode Use this mode to measure noise on the trace See Using Noise Markers in the Spectrum Display see page 367 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Overview Overview The displays in Analog Modulation Displays gt Measurements gt Analog Modulation are E AM E FM m PM The Analog Modulation displays provide measurements and time domain trace displays AM Display The Amplitude Modulation Display is a graph of Modulation Factor vs Time The AM display includes three
429. plitude vs Time m DPX Spectrum B Frequency vs Time EB Phase vs Time m RFI amp OQ vs Time B Spectrogram B Spectrum m Time Overview These displays provide extensive time correlated multi domain views that connect problems in time frequency phase and amplitude for enabling you to more quickly understand cause and effect when troubleshooting DPX Display Overview The DPX display enables you to see how traces change over time and thus displays signal events that cannot be seen on a swept spectrum analyzer A DPX Spectrum indicates how traces change in two ways First it uses color shading to show how consistent the shape of a trace is Second it uses persistence to hold signals on the screen so you can see them longer DPX Display The DPX display works by using a two dimensional array to represent points on the display Each time a trace writes to a point on the display a counter in the array 1s incremented A color is assigned to each point in the display based on the value of its counter Thus as acquisitions occur over time a colored waveform the Bitmap develops on the display that shows how frequently each display point has been written to An important feature of the DPX display is dot persistence Dot persistence sets how long a point on the display will be visible You can set the Dot Persistence to be Variable or Infinite In variable persistence mode you specify a decay period that limits how long a point will be displa
430. point on the trace is the result of detecting the negative peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point m Avg VRMS Average Vgys Each point on the trace is the result of determining the RMS Voltage value for all of the IQ samples available to the trace point When displayed in either linear Volts Watts or Log dB dBm the correct RMS value results When the averaging function is applied to a trace the averaging 1s performed on the linear Voltage values resulting in the correct average for RMS values SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Trace Tab Trace Processing Traces can be processed to display in different ways The Function setting controls trace processing Normal Each new trace is displayed and then replaced by the next trace Each data point contains a single vertical value B Average Each trace point is computed by averaging together the multiple results points it represents EB Peak Each trace point represents the highest vertical value among the results it includes m Peak Each trace point represents the lowest vertical value among the results it includes Saving Traces To save a trace for later analysis 1 Select the Save Trace As button This displays the Save As dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired folder or use the default 3 Typea name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces You can recall a previously saved trace for analysis or
431. product use your browser to go to www tektronix com software Search by the product model number To add additional software options or features you will need an option key from Tektronix In some instances you may need to upgrade the product software before adding the new option key Follow the installation instructions provided with your software option Activating SignalVu PC options in evaluation mode If you don t have a license for one or any SignalVu PC options you can activate each option in evaluation mode for a period of 30 days 434 SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Activating SignalVu PC Options NOTE Each option has its own evaluation period To activate an option in evaluation mode 1 Launch SignalVu PC 2 Go to Tools gt Manage Licenses displaying the License Management dialog 3 Select the option you want to evaluate the select Start 30 day evaluation License Management x Option SignalVu Education SignalVu PCEDU Current Status Not enabled Start 30 day evaluation Requires an Internet connection The Current Status box will change to display the number of days remaining for evaluation Repeat this procedure for each of the SignalVu PC options you wish to evaluate Activating SignalVu PC Options Activating SignalVu PC options requires internet access However you can activate SignalVu PC on a PC that does not have internet access by using a second PC th
432. qual to the peak peak AM value divided by 2 Measurements for FM modulation Measurement Description Pk Positive peak frequency deviation Pk Negative peak frequency deviation RMS RMS value of the frequency deviation Pk Pk 2 Peak to peak frequency deviation divided by 2 Pk Pk Peak to peak frequency deviation SignalVu PC Printable Help 33 Taking Measurements 34 Available Measurements Measurements for PM modulation Measurement Description Pk Positive peak phase deviation Pk Negative peak phase deviation RMS RMS value of the phase deviation Pk Pk Peak to peak phase deviation APCO P25 measurements Measurement Description MCPR The Reference Power and the ratio of each adjacent channel to the Reference Power You can select whether the Reference Power is the total of all active channels or a single channel Constellation Measure of the signal power leaking from the main channel into adjacent channels Eye Diagram Time Overview The digitally modulated signal overlapped on itself to reveal variations in the signal The entire acquisition record and how the spectrum time and analysis time fit within the acquisition record Freq Dev vs Time Measures the deviation of the measured frequency of the modulated signal with the ideal frequency over time Power vs Time Measures the signal power amplitude over time Summary Shows several measur
433. r 326 GP Digital Modulation displays 339 459 Index Frequency Offset GP Digital Modulation displays 339 frequency range 447 Frequency Reference 396 frequency settling time 447 measuring 138 Frequency Settling Time display 133 Frequency Settling Time settings 141 frequency span 447 Frequency tab 379 Frequency vs Time display 65 Frequency vs Time Settings 66 Full Screen 422 G Gain Imbalance 326 GPIB 447 graticule 447 Graticule On Off RF Measurements displays 167 grayed out 447 H Hanning Filter Shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 Help Menu 426 Hide sensitive readouts 18 Hide Sensitive readouts 19 Histogram readout Pulsed RF displays 248 HPF Audio Filters tab 300 Hum amp Noise Audio Summary display 304 I Q 448 IF 448 Ignore Region Params2 tab 299 import 448 Impulse Response Amplitude 36 Impulse Response setting 241 460 Impulse Response Time 36 Information messages 427 input impedance 448 Installed options 3 Internal attenuator Internal Settings tab 389 IQ Origin Offset 326 IQ Sampling Parameters tab 395 IQ vs time view 69 is greater than Test 372 is greater than mask 371 is inside mask 371 is inside mask Test 373 is less than Test 372 is less than mask 371 is outside mask 371 is outside mask Test 373 K Kaiser RBW Filter Shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 Keep out time 241 Keypad 422 L LAN connection
434. r 4 010 T 110 5TT 4 111 3rr 2 101 71 4 100 Pi 2 DBPSK Phase shift Symbol value radians binary TT 2 0 T 2 1 DQPSK Phase shift Symbol value radians binary 0 00 Ti 2 01 TT 11 3rr 2 10 Pil4 DQPSK Phase shift Symbol value radians binary TT 4 00 37T7 4 01 T 4 10 m 4 11 352 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Symbol Maps MSK Phase shift Symbol value direction binary 0 1 DOO Pe Pao fe EOOOOE SignalVu PC Printable Help 353 GP Digital Modulation Symbol Maps EXIEXEHCIETERE EIGEEENEENE EICEREENEIERESS EIEEEEIEXERES EIDGEREJEBIEIESS EIBEIEEIENERES 0169 012 128QAM EIEBEDBOOD BDOBODOUOO pogocccccaca pococcocadca pogocococaaca poooocoacaca EIGIEEIEIEIEREREREREIES BGOGDOBODBEODOEIO DHDEOBDDBOBBDO Pole ef fm f em fe fe BO EIESERERES DODDDDHO 0169 017 354 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Symbol Maps 256QAM Left Right ISI 5BSBIEPBLEDELERBEDBIL DICIECIEREICIEIEHEREIEIICHICIICIE CICICREREREREIEIEREECIEIICHCIHCIE DIOEODODDEIDEEEEEENEE CICICHEREREREIERERERETERICHCHETECI DICIESEREREREIEJERETETERICHCIHETES BOBS cele lm fel e olo gt elo ERCRERERERERERERERESCIERICHCIHCTEZ EICIEEREREREIEXEJERETERICHENHIETESS DICIEREEEIEESEHETEREIHOHEIES CICIERERERERERETERERECIHEIICHESICIES CICIERCREREREREIERECCICHRCHCIHCTCI ESCIESESESENEXEXEIERETCIHEHCHEIEGS DICOROEEIEJEIETEIERCHEIIEIES DODEODOEBEEBEEEDDENOE 0169 013
435. r frequency error measurement BW and Frequency Deviation Each of these settings is set internally when set to Auto Alternatively you can specify values appropriate for specific measurement needs Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 Find see page 346 Specifies additional parameters Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch word Analysis Time see page 346 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Trace see page 348 Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Scale see page 350 Specifies the horizontal and vertical scale settings Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Phase Error vs Time Display The Phase Error vs Time display shows the phase angle of the symbol error over time The phase is plotted along the vertical axis while time is plotted along the horizontal axis NOTE A maximum of approximately 80 000 samples can be analyzed by the General Purpose Digital Modulation measurements the actual value varies with modulation type To show the Phase Error display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Press the Displ
436. r function that uses n points in the trace to determine the smoothed value For example in the case of n 3 3 consecutive points are averaged to determine the result of the smoothed output This is very useful for single shot signals that contain significant noise where multiple trace averages cannot be used However smoothing does have limits and the user should visually determine whether smoothing is removing noise from the measurement or if it is affecting the signal The following illustration shows the effect smoothing has on the displayed trace Smooth off Smooth 3 0070 0 The range for the Smooth function is 271000 The setting resolution is 1 The knob increments this value by 1 and the arrow keys increment it in steps of 1 2 5 10 When smoothing is enabled it applies to both traces Smooth is turned off by default Average This sets the number of acquisitions to be averaged together to produce the result Averaging reduces random variations but maintains the correct waveshape for repeating signal aberrations To use averaging the signal must be repetitive For example the tuning direction must always be same for each measurement SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Trace Tab for Settling Time Displays to be averaged Signals that vary in tuning direction will tend to average positive going effects with negative going effects and the settling time characteristics will cancel out The range for the Average f
437. r peak detectors in the CISPR documents Trace Processing Traces can be processed to display in different ways The Function setting controls trace processing SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Traces Tab Normal Each new trace is displayed and then replaced by the next trace Each data point contains a single vertical value B Average Multiple traces are averaged together to generate the displayed trace which will contain just one vertical value for each underlying frequency data point Once the specified number of traces have been acquired and averaged to generate the displayed trace additional traces contribute to the running average except in Single Sequence run mode In the case of Single Sequence the instrument stops running after the specified number of traces have been averaged together The Number of Traces setting specifies how many traces are averaged The averaging is performed on the linear Voltage values resulting in the correct RMS average m Max Hold Displays the maximum value in the trace record for each display point Each new trace s display point is compared to the previous maximum value and the greater value is retained for display and subsequent comparisons m Min Hold Displays the minimum value in the trace record for each display point Each new trace s display point is compared to the previous minimum value and the lesser value is retained for display and subsequent comparisons S
438. r set Range 1 20 Default 5 Trace Processing The trace can be processed to display in different ways The Function setting controls trace processing Max Hold Displays the maximum value in the trace record for each display point Each new trace display point is compared to the previous maximum value and the greater value is retained for display and subsequent comparisons Normal Displays the trace record for each display point without additional processing m Avg VRMS Average Vgys Each point on the trace is the result of determining the RMS Voltage value for all of the IQ samples available to the trace point When displayed in either linear Volts SignalVu PC Printable Help 163 RF Measurements Traces Tab Watts or Log dB dBm the correct RMS value results When the averaging function is applied to a trace the averaging is performed on the linear Voltage values resulting in the correct average for RMS values B Avg of logs This is a trace function used to emulate legacy spectrum analyzer results and for the specification of displayed average noise level In older swept analyzers a voltage envelope detector is used in the process of measuring signal level and the result is then converted to Watts and then to dBm Averaging is then applied to the resultant traces For CW signals this method results in an accurate power measurement However with random noise and digitally modulated carriers errors re
439. r to be displayed Range Specifies a range of subcarriers to be displayed Start Specifies the start value of the range to be displayed Stop Specifies the ending value of the range to be displayed Max symbols to analyze Specifies how many symbols are analyzed You can use this setting to speed analysis by limiting the number of symbols being analyzed Data Range tab for 802 11b standards Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time Traces Scale Prefs Displayed Results Chips All J Max no of chips to analyze 2500 Chip 198 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements Analysis Time Tab WLAN Settings Description Chips Specifies which symbols are displayed in the graphs All Select All to display all chips Preamble Only Select to include only the Preamble in the display Header Only Select to include only the Header in the display Data Only Select to include only the Data in the display Max number of chips to analyze Specifies how many chips are analyzed You can use this setting to speed analysis by limiting the number of chips being analyzed Check this box and then enter the maximum number of chips to analyze Analysis Time Tab WLAN The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define how the signal is analyzed in the WLAN Analysis displays 1 Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range Analysis Time EVM Prefs Analysis Length 200 000 Symbol V Auto Un
440. r where the result is followed by Auto or it could be Freq Offset where the result is followed by Manual This choice between Freq Error and Freq Offset is made from the Analysis Params tab in the Settings control panel P25 Eye Diagram Settings Application Toolbar x The settings for the P25 Eye Diagram display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 267 APCO P25 Analysis P25 Power vs Time Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters page 280 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 283 Analysis Time see page 283 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for P25 Analysis displays Trig Meas see page 288 Enables you to select from various trigger measurements The trigger selections vary by signal type Test Patterns see page 285 Specifies the type of test pattern being used Some analysis differs based on the selected test pattern Available test patterns vary depending on the selected standard and modulation type Trace see page 286 Specifies the trace type Vectors Points and Lines the number of points per symbol when chosen to view as Vectors or Lines and to control
441. r which hop to measure First adjust the main Analysis Offset control to a point in time slightly earlier than the transition you wish to measure Do this in the Time Overview display or the Analysis Settings control panel Then adjust the Measurement Length so the end of the Settling Time measurement falls within the apparent settled period after the signal transition The reason it is important for the user to set this control is that the Settling Time measurements start at this point and look backwards in time towards the signal transition to find the latest trace point that is not inside the tolerance band NOTE If your signal does not settle to within your tolerance bands make sure that the measurement time ends during the settled portion of the waveform Min Settled Duration The minimum settled duration is the amount of time the signal must remain within the tolerance band to be considered settled Some user specifications require that the signal be settled for a minimum period If this is not required in your application set this value to the default of 0 seconds 144 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Mask Tab for Settling Time Displays Mask Tab for Settling Time Displays The Mask tab is used to specify the parameters used for Mask testing Define Time Params Mask Trace Scale Prefs Mask time reference Time Limit 4 Start 1 0 0000 s 500 0 kHz E Enable mask test Trigger Start 2 100 0 us
442. rage Method A Average Ey KT Median Method A Median Ey KT In both cases the instrument computes the average and the median over the analysis period It should be noted that the two methods give the same result for sinusoidal modulation where the sampling frequency is much higher than the modulation frequency Trace Tab 84 The Trace Tab allows you to set the display characteristics of a trace Parameters Trace Scale Prefs 4 Show Freeze Save Trace As Detection 4Peak Function Normal v uu Setting Description Show Shows hides the trace If the instrument continues to run the measurement results below the graph display continue to update even if the trace is hidden Detection Sets the Detection method used for the trace Available detection methods are Peak Peak and Avg VRMS Not available for saved traces Function Selects the trace processing method The only available setting is Normal Freeze Halts updates to the trace Save Trace As Saves the trace to a file for later recall and analysis Show recalled trace Displays a saved trace instead of a live trace SignalVu PC Printable Help Analog Modulation Trace Tab Detection Detection refers to the method of processing the data acquisition points when creating a trace The IQ samples in a data acquisition can be detected in a variety of ways The number of IQ samples available to each trace point varies with both ana
443. range The identification of t n is done by looking for a significant frequency deviation after a certain power level has been achieved A manual override for the t n is also provided in the Trigger Meas tab of the Settings control panel when a Transient Frequency Behavior measurement is chosen This allows you to manually override the t that is calculated by releasing the Auto Option and place it appropriately based on the P25 Freq Dev vs Time display The same is true for to when the measurement is being done for the On to Off behavior t and t regions are identified after t and t before tor for the On to Off behavior The mean and max frequency deviation is reported in the regions identified A Pass or Fail is also reported by comparing the Mean frequency deviation with the recommended values given in the standard A red band is shown if a particular region s result is less than the performance recommendation The following image shows this measurement Pass 2 15 0 kHz a Postion 0 000 Hz 15 0 kHz Autoscale s Postion 2 000 ms Scale 45 029 ms P25 Freq Dev vs Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Trig Meas Test Patterns Trace Scale Prefs Time Settngs ts Ls Trigger Measurements Phasel Transient Frequency Behavior x Transient Frequency Transient Frequency Behaviour Off to On 4 966 ms V Auto HCPM Tx Logical Channel Time Alignment Phase 2 HCPM The following i
444. rate values for the controls that appear on the Prefs tab Some parameters appear with most displays while others appear with only one display For example in the following image the Show Marker readout in graph check box appears in the Prefs tab for every display However the Show Power Trigger level check box only appears on the Amplitude vs Time Prefs tab Freq amp Span BW Traces scale Prefs Show Start Stop Trace points 01 v Show graticule 4 Show Marker readout in graph selected marker Marker Noise mode Requires dBm Ampl units and wal Show trace legend Average trace detect The following image shows the Prefs tab for the Time Overview display Scale Trace Prefs _ Navigator View Max trace points 100K V Show graticule v Show Marker readout in graph selected marker E Show trace legend The following table explains the controls that can appear on the Prefs tab SignalVu PC Printable Help T9 General Signal Viewing 80 Setting Prefs Tab Description Show Selects the horizontal settings that appear below the graph area You can choose Start Stop or Center Span Trace points Sets the number of trace points used for marker measurements and for results export Max trace points Time Overview Display only Sets the maximum number of trace points used for marker measurements and for results export Show trace legend Enables dis
445. re appropriate throughout the help system This help is also available in a PDF format for printing NOTE Many of the screen illustrations in this document are taken from the vector signal analysis software version that runs on the RSA51000 Series Real time Signal Analyzers These instruments support additional hardware based functionality and buttons that are not present in the SignalVu M or SignalVu PC application SignalVu PC Printable Help 1 Welcome Welcome 2 SignalVu PC Printable Help About the Tektronix Signal Analyzer Product software Product software You can obtain the SignalVu PC software two ways B You can download the software from the Web When you purchase the software you will receive an email with option keys that enables you to activate the software and options B You can purchase the software and choose to have it shipped to you on a DVD The package you receive will contain a document with an option key that enables you to activate the software NOTE If you purchased an MDO4000B Series instrument or an RSA306 spectrum analyzer a 30 day free trial of the SignalVu PC software is included Occasionally new versions of software may become available at our Web site Visit www tektronix com downloads for information Options To view a listing of the software options installed in your software select Help gt About Tektronix Real Time Signal Analyzer Options can be added to your software For the
446. re made This value is the same as the setting for Frequency in the Application bar Measurement BW This control limits the bandwidth of measurements You use the measurement bandwidth setting to improve the signal to noise ratio of the measurement resulting in lower measurement uncertainty However if the measurement bandwidth is set too low resulting in fewer samples per second it can reduce the number of points within the measurement length below the 256 stable samples required thus causing the analysis to fail Link to Span When enabled the measurement bandwidth of the RF amp Q display is determined by the span of the analyzer When unchecked the measurement bandwidth is specified by the user and no additional filter is applied Set to max BW Sets the measurement bandwidth to the maximum acquisition bandwidth of the instrument Freq amp Span Tab 72 The Freq amp Span tab provides access to settings that control frequency settings for the trace display The control values set in this tab are shared by all the General Signal Viewing displays Setting Description Center The frequency at the center of the selected Span Start The lowest frequency in the span Stop The highest frequency in the span Step Size Sets the increment decrement size for Center Start and Stop values Span The difference between the start and stop frequencies This is the measurement bandwidth for the general signa
447. reference is calculated The reference filter is applied to the internally generated ideal reference signal before the EVM is calculated How to Select Filters In a signal transmitter receiver system the baseband signal might be filtered for bandwidth limiting or for another kind of necessary shaping that needs to be applied Normally a filter in the transmitter Ft and a filter in the receiver Fr are applied The Measurement Filter setting in the analyzer corresponds to the baseband filter in the receiver Fr This setting tells the analyzer what filter your receiver uses When the analyzer is set to the same filter used by the receiver the analyzer sees the signal as your receiver would The Measurement Filter setting should be the same as the filter used in the receiver under normal operation as opposed to testing The Reference Filter setting in the analyzer corresponds to the baseband filter in the transmitter receiver combination Fr Ft The baseband filter for the transmitter receiver combination is often referred to as the System Filter This filter is called the reference filter because it is used to recreate a reference signal that is compared to the received signal This recreated reference signal is the ideal signal with Fr Ft applied differences between this ideal signal and the received signal enables the determination of signal quality such as EVM measurements The following is an example of a hypothetical signal th
448. req Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings enable the 3 D Waterfall display and set the color scheme used for the spectrogram trace SignalVu PC Printable Help 61 General Signal Viewing Time amp Freq Scale Tab Freq amp Span BW Trace Amplitude Scale Time amp Freq Scale Prefs Vertical Time Normal Horizontal Frequency Time div 72 0 us Scale 10 00 MHz Overlap 94 Visible elapsed time 396 7 us Position 12 3 div Position 2 44530 GHz Spectrum Monitor Time at position 1 261 ms Om 1s Reset Scale Autoscale Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Time Normal For most Spectrogram applications Primary time scale control is Time div Time scale can be zoomed in or out Spectrum Monitor For long term signal monitoring applications In spectrum monitor mode each line in the spectrogram represents the period of time specified by the Time update parameter Time scale can be zoomed out but not zoomed in no overlap Time update Sets the time in minutes and seconds represented by each line of the spectrogram Only available in Spectrum Monitor Reset Scale Resets the Time div and Pos settings to their default values Autoscale Scales the vertical time axis to compress all existing trace lines into the visible area of the graph Resets the Position value to zero placing the most recent spectrogram line at the bottom of the spectrogram
449. results time mag phase symbol marker and symbol value of the point with the selected marker 2 Measurement results readout These readouts are located to the left or below of the Constellation plot depending on the window size The readout shows Modulation Fidelity 96 and Frequency Error Hz The second readout can either be Freq Error where the result is followed by Auto or it could be Freq Offset where the result is followed by Manual This choice between Freq Error and Freq Offset is made from the Analysis Params tab in the Settings control panel 3 Plot Shown as either vs Q or as Frequency Deviation The trace type is controlled from the Settings gt Trace tab P25 Constellation Settings Application Toolbar i The P25 Constellation Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the Constellation Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the input signal standard and additional user settable signal parameters page 280 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 283 Analysis Time see page 283 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds and Time Zero Reference Trigger or Acquisition Start for P25 Analysis displays Test Patterns see page 285 Specifies the type of test pattern being
450. rror icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Phase Error display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 215 OFDM Analysis OFDM Phase Error Settings Elements of the Display d Scale 12 Sym 2 60 Autoscale 5 Posh 26 Subc 0519 007 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph Sets the Phase Error value that appears at the top of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Bottom of graph Sets the Phase Error value that appears at the bottom of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Pos Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position OFDM Phase Error Settings Application Toolbar E The settings for the OFDM
451. rs The SEM wireless standard masks that are applied to the WLAN signal depend on the standard you select when you configure the preset Once you select a standard and bandwidth the application will automatically load the mask that best fits the signal for which the standard applies All mask parameters are derived from IEEE standards and loaded for you This provides you the assurance that you are evaluating the signal with the most appropriate mask WLAN Displays The displays in WLAN Analysis Setup gt Displays gt Measurements are m SEM see page 149 B WLAN Channel Response see page 171 B WLAN Constellation see page 174 m WLAN EVM see page 176 B WLAN Magnitude Error see page 178 m WLAN Phase Error see page 180 B WLAN Power versus Time see page 182 B WLAN Spectral Flatness see page 185 170 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Channel Response Display m WLAN Summary see page 187 m WLAN Symbol Table see page 192 WLAN Channel Response Display The WLAN Channel Response display plots the channel response magnitude and phase versus the subcarrier or frequency Here the channel refers to all sources of signal frequency response impairment up to the analyzer input including the transmitter itself as well as any transmission medium through which the signal travels between the transmitter and the analyzer NOTE WLAN Channel Response is only availa
452. rs can all be placed on the same trace or they can be placed on different traces There are three types of Markers Reference Delta and Power Markers The Marker Reference labeled MR in the graph makes absolute measurements and is also used for calculating differences when Delta or Power readouts are enabled The Delta Markers labeled M1 to M4 in the graph are used to measure other points on the trace or the difference between the Marker Reference and the Delta marker The Power Markers labeled M1 to M4 in the graph function the same way as the Delta Markers except they show power density and integrated power density dBm Hz instead of power level dBm The following two tables show the appearance of the four types of marker readouts Marker Reference Absolute Marker Power Marker Readout Delta Marker Readout Readout Readout Reference Marker label Absolute Marker label Delta Marker label Power level at marker Power level at marker Difference in power level between Delta Marker and Power densityat Power Marker Marker Reference Difference in frequency between Power Markerand Reference Marker Integrated power value from points between and including Reference Markerto Power Marker Difference in frequency between Delta Marker and Marker Reference Frequency at marker Frequency at marker Integrated power density value from points betweenand including Reference Marker to Power Marker The following table shows the appear
453. rs menu appears when you right click on a marker The SignalVu PC Markers menu enables you to assign a marker to a different trace and pan the trace to place the marker at the measurement frequency Pan to marker Attach to trace Icon Menu a Pan to marker Assign to trace Description Adjusts horizontal position of the waveform to locate the selected marker at the measurement frequency Assigns the selected marker to Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 or the Math trace A trace must be enabled to assign a marker to it SignalVu PC Printable Help Orientation Elements of the Display Elements of the Display The main areas of the application window are shown in the following figure Menu bar Application toolbar Trace controls and readouts lH File View Replay Markers Setup resets Tools LiveLink Window Help ax 4 E d Rx amp TH Fre ency 600 0000 MHz Reflev 0 00 dBm Confection Il FRR ph Replay Replay toolbar amp e AcqData 04 4 gt DID Select All Select 69 1 1 1 0001 0 0 0 00 Time 15 4 e Analysis z Offset 7 520 ms Length 4 6 94 000 ms dB div 10 0 dB nn Vertical scale controls and other 1 HR measurement controls and readouts ES 84 6 r Autoscale utoscde Position 0 000 s a Scale 120 000 ms Makes Defne MR Frequency 1 849575 GHz To Center Pelk e a Table x Stopper Not calibrated RealTime Free Run Ref Int fitten 10 dB 1
454. rtical lines indicating length of the packet Rising Edge zooms the display into the interval around the packet rising edge with vertical lines indicating the 1096 to 9096 Power On Ramp time Falling Edge zooms the display into the interval around the packet falling edge with vertical lines indicating the 90 to 10 Power Down Ramp time 4 Bottom of graph readout Shows the Power level at the bottom of the graph in dBm 5 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 6 Bottom of graph left side Sets the starting time of the graph in seconds 7 Bottom of graph right side Sets the scale width of the graph in seconds 8 Table below graph Burst Power Average power of the burst packet in dBm Burst Width Measured time width of the burst packet from Power On to Power Down or end of waveform if that occurs before Power Down in seconds NOTE Power On Ramp Time and Power Down Ramp Time values are only available for 802 11b analysis Power On Ramp Time Time interval for signal level to increase from 10 to 90 of maximum packet power in seconds Power Down Ramp Time Time interval for signal level to decrease from 90 to 10 of maximum packet power in seconds This value is not available is the analysis record does not include the packet power down portion WLAN Power vs Time Settings Application Toolbar e The settings for the WLAN Power vs Time display are shown in the following tab
455. s NOTE The Detection setting does not affect the trace until the spectrum length is longer than the Auto setting Saving Traces To save an Ogram trace for later analysis 1 Select the Save Trace As button This displays the Save As dialog box SignalVu PC Printable Help 43 General Signal Viewing 44 Traces Tab 2 Type a name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces CO E CASignalVu PC Files X 4 Search SignalVu Organize v New folder Name i Date modified Type d Sample Data Records 10 2 201311 35 AM File folder d User Presets 10 2 2013 11 35 AM File folder 3 File name Save as type Selected trace dpx Hide Folders You can recall a previously saved trace for comparison to a live trace First specify a trace for recall and second enable Show Recalled Trace To select a trace for recall 1 Click the button to display the Open dialog box Show recalled trace m 2 Navigate to the desired file and click Open 3 Check the Show Recalled Trace check box 4 Verify that the trace s Show check box is selected either on this tab or next to the drop down list located at the top left corner of the graph SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Amplitude Scale Tab Amplitude Scale Tab The Amplitude Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings enable the 3 D Waterfall display and set th
456. s Main Channels Number 1 BW 12 500 kHz 12 500 kHz Setting Main Channels F Mi Adj Chans Add Chan BW Offset L Limit U Limit 12 500 kHz 0 000 Hz Al 6 000 kHz 12 500 kHz 67 00 dB A2 6 000 kHz 62 500 kHz 67 00 dB A3 6 000 kHz 87 500 kHz 67 00 dB A4 6 000 kHz 150 000 67 00 dB as amp nnn bus 1 950 ann 67 00 dB 67 00 dB 67 00 dB 67 00 dB 67 nn do amp 7 nn do Description Number Sets the number of Main channels BW Sets the bandwidth of the Main channels Spacing Sets the frequency difference between the centers of the Main channels Inactive Selected channels are ignored by the measurement routine Adj Chans Add Opens the Edit Channel Parameters dialog which you use to specify the parameters of a new pair of adjacent channels You can add up to 50 adjacent channel pairs Edit Opens the Edit Channel Parameters dialog box You must first select a channel to enable the Edit button Delete Deletes the selected main channel or adjacent channel pair Channel Definition table A table of the parameters for every channel Offset is the frequency difference between the Center Frequency and center of the selected channel Nothing in the table is editable directly You can set the upper and lower limits by clicking on the Add button The following figure illustrates the settings controlled from the Channels tab SignalVu PC Printable Help 119 RF Mea
457. s Menu Bar Setup gt Settings The Setup control panel tabs for MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio are Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Main Channels Adj Chans n Chan BW Offset L Limit U Limit Es Number 1 FM Mi 12 500 kHz 0 000 Hz Al 6 000 kHz 12 500 kHz 67 00dB 67 00dB8 BW 12 500 kHz Edit A2 6 000 kHz 62 500 kHz 67 00 dB 67 00 dB A3 6 000 kHz 87 500 kHz 67 00dB 67 00dB 12 500 kHz A4 6 000 kHz 4 150 000 67 00dB 67 00 dB AS amp nnn bus 11950 ann amp 7 nn do amp 7 nn AD h SignalVu PC Printable Help 115 RF Measurements MCPR Settings Settings tab Description Freq amp RBW see page 117 Specify the frequency and resolution bandwidth used for the MCPR measurements Measurement Params see Specifies parameters controlling how the MCPR measurement is made page 117 Channels see page 119 Specifies the parameters of the channels to be measured Scale see page 166 Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale and offset values Prefs see page 167 Specifies whether or not certain display elements are shown Restore defaults Sets parameters for a 4 carrier WCDMA measurement 116 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Freq amp RBW Tab for ACPR and MCPR Displays Freq amp RBW Tab for ACPR and MCPR Displays The Freq amp RBW tab specifies frequency parameters for the Channel Power amp ACPR m
458. s RF Measurements Shared Measurement Settings esses 161 WLAN Measurements WLAN OVe rVIeW iere arr HERE COTE EE MERE SET enna TESTERE TISERE tre RE REN T T 169 WLAN Chan Response WLAN Channel Response Display 0ccc cece eee e cece eee ne meme mes mese 171 WLAN Channel Response Settings csssssssssssssssssssssese e eese ese eme eese 173 WLAN Constellation WLAN Constellation Display ccc cece nce siipiin EE me menm nere 174 WLAN Constellation Settings ccc cece cece nee nnn nee nnn messen 175 WLAN EVM WLAN EVM Display 5 re Lise RT e PERI UE MU EM IUE IM PME ER 176 bU BOAT DICENTE m 177 WLAN Mag Error WLAN Magnitude Error Display cc cece cece eee eee e me me mese menn 178 WLAN Magnitude Error Settings 0 0 ccc cece cece eee nee eee me me messe ehe nee 179 WLAN Phase Error WLAN Phase Error Display cess seas cag ccasaeceta aoe Cec dasadicueslennada sea RN C Ede mr v eren ren 180 WLAN Phase Error Settings ccciidssmnindded ada andawitiieninadadleawcsd Dus DU Dust dd ere e EORR 181 WLAN Power vs Time WLAN Power vs Time Display 00 ccc cece eee enn nnn n me messen nennen 182 WLAN Power vs Time SettingS 0 00 cccc ese e eee n eee enn nee mese messe ehe ene 184 WLAN Spectral Flatness WLAN Spectral Flatness Display e cece cece eee een nen enn mense mener 185 WLAN Spectral Flatne
459. s changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency Modulation Params Freq amp BW Equalizer Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 200 mv Scale 128 00 Sym Position 0 000 V Position 1 00 Sym Autoscale v Auto Autoscale Setting Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Scale Changes the vertical scale units Position Position adjusts the reference level away from top of the graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to contain the complete trace Horizontal Controls the span of the trace display and position of the trace Scale Allows you to in effect change the span Position Allows you to pan a zoomed trace without changing the Measurement Frequency Position is only enabled when the span as specified by Freq div is less than the acquisition bandwidth Autoscale Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to contain the complete trace Auto A Note About Units The Units used for the horizontal scale can be either Seconds or Symbols To set the units for the horizontal scale display the Analysis Time tab On the tab select the appropriate units from the Units drop down list Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change appearance characteristics of the GP Digital Modulation displays 350 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Di
460. s APCO P25 Analysis Retain Current Center Frequency This setting becomes available when P25 is the selected preset in the Standards Preset window You can access this window by selecting Presets gt Standards and then selecting P25 from the Preset drop down menu To activate the Retain current Center Frequency Setting check the box This setting allows you to retain the previously used center frequency By default the box is unchecked and therefore the four P25 preset displays will load with a center frequency of 850 MHz Preset P25 Preset displays MCPR Time Overview P25 Summary P25 Constellation Standard Phasel X Bandwidth 12 5 KHz Modulation Type C4FM z 4 Retain current Center Frequency setting To go directly to a preset in the future use Tools Options Presets Preset action NN The default adjacent channels table for MCPR is different for RF frequencies in the range of 769 to 806 MHz called 700 MHz band and for frequency ranges outside it The option of retaining center frequency in Standards Preset is therefore useful if you want to load the default table for center frequencies in the 700 MHz band MCPR channel and limit parameters The MCPR ACPR standard channel and limit parameters that are applied to the P25 signal depend on the standard you select when you configure the preset Once you select a standard and center frequency the application will automatically load the parameters and default
461. s Tab The Parameters tab enables you to specify parameters that control the Occupied BW measurement Freg amp RBW Parameters Scale Prefs Occupied BW Power 99 0 Max Hold spectral data x dB level 26 0 dB Count Measurement BW 10 00 MHz Yet Eos 7 Setting Description Occupied BW Power Specifies the proportion of power within the occupied bandwidth referenced against the total power in the measurement bandwidth x dB level x dB level defines the x dB BW level search threshold Measurement BW Specifies the frequency range used by the measurement Max Hold spectral data Enables the Max Hold function Average results Enables disables results averaging Note that this is not an averaging of the trace but an averaging of the results Count Specifies the number of results averaged to calculate the Occupied BW Range 2 to 10 000 x dB Level The x dB level determines the x dB BW The instrument analyzes the spectrum trace to locate the frequencies at which the level is x dB down from the peak level calculated over the measurement bandwidth The frequency difference between the upper and lower crossing thresholds is the x dB BW Range 80 0 to 1 0 dB Resolution 0 1 Inc dec small 0 1 large 1 Default 26 dB Max Hold Spectral Data Max Hold displays the maximum value in the acquisition record for each display point Each new trace display point is compared to the previous maximum value and
462. s Time can also be used to check for the synchronization word The following image shows this measurement SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis 2 0 00 dBm dB div 10 0 dB 100 00 dBm 1 Autoscale 5 7 844 ms Power Info RF Output Power dBm P25 Power vs Modulation Params Analysis Params Analysis Time Trig Meas Test Patterns Scale Prefs Time Settings Trigger Measurements Phase1 Tx Power and Encoder Attack Time Standard Transmitter Throughput Delay Phase 1 The following information is specific to this measurement Select Tx Throughput Delay from the Trig Meas tab of the Settings control panel to get this measurement The original noise source is connected as input to this trigger and the acquisition is triggered when the input from the noise source exceeds the trigger level set by the user The actual input to the MDO4000B comes after the noise signal from the source has passed through the DUT and calibrated receiver as shown in the setup for this measurement in the measurement methods standard document The level in the Trigger control panel set by the user is used for analysis to determine that input to the RSA MDO4000B after it has gone through the DUT and calibrated receiver has hit the power levels desired The time difference between the trigger point and the point when the input to the RSA MDO4000B has exceeded the level set by the user for trigger
463. s Time see page 346 The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Prefs see page 350 The Prefs tab enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Symbol Table Display The Symbol Table Display is like the Constellation Display except that a text table is used to display data bits at a symbol rather than a graph The Synch Word characters if used are in bold font To display the Symbol Table 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Select the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This displays the Select Displays dialog box 2 3 From the Measurements box select GP Digital Modulation 4 Double click the Symbol Table icon in the Available Displays box This adds the Symbol Table icon to the Selected displays box os Click the OK button This displays the Symbol Table view 6 Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 329 GP Digital Modulation Symbol Table Settings Marker M1 Symbol 0 Time 0 00 Sym Value 10 Using Markers Markers are indicators in the display that you can position on a trace to measure values such as frequency power and time A Marker always displays its position and if the Delta readout is enabled will display the difference between its position and that of the Marker Reference With
464. s a smooth trace with no discontinuities at the region edges NOTE lf any relevant settings such as reference level frequency span RBW are changed once the noise reference is measured the following warning message will be displayed to notify you that Noise Correction was not applied Noise correction not applied select Measure Noise Floor for new noise correction Measurement Type Specifies the type of measurement for the reference channel used as a reference for the offsets Total Power Sets the reference to the integrated power of the reference channel within the reference s integration bandwidth PSD Sets the reference to the mean of the power spectral density dBm Hz of the reference channel The trace and the absolute and relative limits line are also in dBm Hz Peak Sets the reference to the Peak power of the reference channel Offset definition Defines the relative position of the start stop frequency of an offset Choose the offset definition based on the standard Ref center to OS center Specifies that the start stop frequencies are defined from the center frequency of the reference channel to the center of the filter BW Ref center to OS edge Ref Edge to OS center Specifies that the start stop frequencies are defined from the center frequency of the reference channel to the center of the inner edge of the filter BW of the offset Specifies that the start stop frequencies are defined from th
465. s allow you to selectively display the analysis results to help locate trouble spots in the signal WLAN Standards The following options support the given standards Option SV23 Supports IEEE 802 11a g j and p OFDM signals and 802 11b DSSS CCK signals Option SV24 Supports IEEE 802 11n signals with bandwidths of 20 MHz and 40 MHz Option SV25 Supports IEEE 802 11ac signals with bandwidths of 20 40 80 and 160 MHz WLAN Standards Presets The Standards Presets button located on the WLAN Settings Control Panel allows you to recall preconfigured displays for the standards and bandwidths that you select You can also access these presets from Presets on the display menu bar You can read more information about the Standards Presets see page 13 The following table shows the center frequency and displays that are automatically loaded for each of the listed standards and bandwidths SEM masks are also loaded and are explained here see page 251 SignalVu PC Printable Help 169 WLAN Measurements WLAN Overview Table 1 WLAN presets standards bandwidths center frequencies and displays Center Bandwidth frequency Standard MHz GHz Displays loaded 802 11a 20 5 18 SEM Time Overview WLAN Constellation WLAN 802 11g 20 2 412 Summary 802 11 10 5 18 20 802 11p 5 5 8 10 20 802 11n 20 2 412 40 802 11ac 20 5 18 40 5 19 80 5 21 160 5 25 802 11b 2 412 SEM mask paramete
466. s displays Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 195 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 196 Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Trace see page 200 Enables you to display or hide the measurement or average trace Scale see page 201 Specifies the vertical subcarrier for non b standards only and symbols scale and position settings EVM see page 203 Specifies the EVM units and max burst averages Prefs see page 204 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed Modulation Params Tab WLAN The Modulation Params tab specifies the type of modulation used by the input signal and other parameters that define the signal format Modulation Params Analysis Params Data Range l Analysis Time l Trace Scale Prefs Standard 802 11g Guard Interval Auto from SIG X Channel Bandwidth 20 MHz Subcarrier Spacing 312 500 kHz v Auto FFT Sample Rate 20 000 MS s FFT Length 64 SignalVu PC Printable Help 195
467. s on modulation type to Acquisition Length Resolution 1 effective sample or symbol Time Zero Reference The analysis offset is measured from this point Choices are Acquisition Start or Trigger Point Parameter Description Acquisition Start Offset is measured from the point at which acquisition begins Trigger Point Offset is measured from the trigger point SignalVu PC Printable Help Analyzing Data Spectrum Time Tab Spectrum Time Tab This tab controls whether the Spectrum display uses the same Analysis Time parameters as all the other views or uses a different Offset and Length Analysis Time Spectrum Time Frequency Units Spectrum Time Mode Spectrum Time Spectrum Offset 80 000 ns 7 Aut Independent 2 me Spectrum Length 1 520 ms vl Use Analysis Time settings E Actual 1 520 ms Settings Description Spectrum Time Mode Independent Causes the spectrum analysis views to use the settings unique to those displays Use Analysis Time settings Causes the spectrum analysis views to use the settings on the Analysis Time tab Spectrum Time only available when Independent is selected Spectrum Offset Sets the beginning of Spectrum Time with respect to the selected time reference point selectable in the Analysis Time tab as either Acquisition Start or Trigger Spectrum Length The amount of data in terms of time from which spectrum traces are computed Auto When enabled causes
468. s suggested by the standard can be loaded by using the P25 Standards Preset option for which MCPR is one of the four displays The default adjacent channels table for MCPR is different for RF frequencies in the range of 769 to 806 MHz called 700 MHz band and for frequency ranges outside it To load the default adjacent channels table of a 700 MHz band first set the center frequency Next select Presets Standards to view the Standards Preset window Lastly check the Retain current Center Frequency Setting box By default the Retain Center Frequency box is unchecked and therefore the four P25 preset displays will load with a center frequency of 850 MHz and load the adjacent channels table for non 700 MHz band By default only six adjacent channels on either side will be shown when 700 MHz band is analyzed in P25 for visual clarity However analysis is done for all the ten channels and results will be available in the table just under the display You can zoom out to see the remaining bands SignalVu PC Printable Help 253 APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis 254 Frequency Deviation Phase 1 C4FM and Phase 2 HCPM This measurement shows the amount of frequency deviation that results for a Low Deviation and High Deviation test pattern This measurement is shown in the P25 Summary display This measurement only applies to HCPM and CAFM signals and High Deviation or Low Deviation test patterns If this measurement is run for
469. s tab Math Trace General Signal Viewing displays 76 Transform Window Spectrum display BW tab 76 Trellis Diagram display settings 333 Trig Meas tab P25 Analysis displays 288 Trigger position 401 auto 401 Trigger settings 399 Advanced tab 401 Event tab 400 Triggering 397 Tutorials YouTube videos 4 U Uniform None Filter Shape Spectrum display BW tab 76 Jnits tab 382 SB connection Live Link 425 User Filters file format 357 loading 356 User presets 13 User Symbol Map 344 cc V VBW 121 RF Measurements displays 162 Spectrum display BW tab 76 vector signal analyzer 456 vertical scale factor vertical display factor 456 Video tutorials 4 Index View Navigator View 422 View Menu 422 violation 456 W Waterfall Spectrogram DPXogram 61 Spectrogram DPXogram display 45 waveform file formats supported 404 Window menu 426 Windows Event Viewer 433 WLAN presets 13 video tutorials 4 WLAN Channel Response display 171 settings 171 WLAN Constellation display 174 settings 175 WLAN EVM display 176 settings 177 WLAN Mag Error display 178 settings 179 WLAN Phase Error display 181 WLAN Power vs Time display 182 settings 184 WLAN Spectral Flatness display 185 settings 186 WLAN Summary display 187 settings 191 WLAN Symbol Table display 192 settings 194 X x dB BW Ref Power 121 x dB Level 125
470. s the Detection method used for the trace Available detection methods are Peak Peak and Avg VRMS Save Trace As Saves the Ogram trace to a file for later recall and analysis SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Traces Tab Detection Trace Detection occurs when the trace is being decimated by the measurement For example if the maximum number of trace points is 100 000 and the selected analysis region is 200 000 samples the measurement must decimate the 200 000 resulting trace points by 2 to prevent exceeding the 100 000 trace point limit Since only one value can be selected for each trace point an algorithm must be used to select detect the appropriate value to use The available detection methods are B Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the positive peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point m Peak Each point on the trace is the result of detecting the negative peak value present in the set of IQ samples available to that trace point B Avg VRMS Average Vrms Each point on the trace is the result of determining the RMS Voltage value for all of the IQ samples available to the trace point When displayed in either linear Volts Watts or Log dB dBm the correct RMS value results When the averaging function is applied to a trace the averaging is performed on the linear Voltage values resulting in the correct average for RMS value
471. s the Sampling controls are set to Auto If the Sampling parameters are set to manual or if the instrument is analyzing saved data the actual analysis length will be constrained by the available data length but in most cases measurements are able to be made anyway The instrument will display a notification when measurement results are computed from less data than requested Range 0 to end of acquisition Analysis Length Resolution 1 effective sample or symbol Analysis Length Use the analysis length to specify how long a period of time is analyzed by a measurement As you adjust this value the actual amount of time for Analysis Length in Symbol or Seconds units is shown below the control in the Actual readout This setting is not available when Auto is checked Range minimum value depends on modulation type Resolution 1 symbol A maximum of approximately 80 000 samples can be analyzed the actual value varies with modulation type Time Zero Reference All time values are measured from this point such as marker position or horizontal position in Y vs Time displays Choices are Acquisition Start or Trigger SignalVu PC Printable Help 347 GP Digital Modulation Trace Tab Parameter Description Acquisition Start Offset is measured from the point at which acquisition begins Trigger Offset is measured from the trigger point Trace Tab Menu Bar Setup gt Settings gt Trace The Trace tab allows you to set th
472. s the selected marker to the lower level peak in absolute terms on the trace Next Higher absolute Moves the selected marker to the higher level peak in absolute terms on the trace Marker to Center Frequency Changes the center frequency to match the frequency of the selected marker Enabling Markers and Setting Marker Properties The Define Markers Control Panel is used to enable markers and set their properties You can set up to five markers including the marker reference Markers are shown in most displays Markers have three types of on screen readouts Absolute Delta and Power When Readouts is set to Absolute each readout displays only the marker s position on the trace In Frequency displays this means the marker readout shows the frequency and power of the trace at the marker position When Readouts is set to Delta each delta marker M1 M4 readout displays both the marker s position on the trace and the difference between its position and the position of the Reference Marker MR When Readouts 364 SignalVu PC Printable Help Marker Measurements Enabling Markers and Setting Marker Properties is set to Power each delta marker M1 MA readout displays the marker s position on the trace the difference between its position and the position of the Reference Marker MR the point power density and the integrated power density Defining Markers Define Markers Marker Properties Define Peaks Reference Delta M
473. s to the selected trace Save Trace As Saves the selected trace to a file for later recall and analysis Trace minus Trace Selects which traces serve as Trace A and Trace B BW Tab The BW bandwidth tab allows you to change Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth settings and set the windowing method used by the transform process by selecting a filter shape not present for all displays Freq amp Span BW Traces Scale Prefs RBW 500 kHz J Auto Span RBW ratio 100 Filter Shape Kaiser RBW v vl VBW 500 kHz 76 Signal Vu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing BW Tab Setting Description RBW Sets the Resolution Bandwidth value to be used in the spectrum analysis view The value is italicized when Auto is selected Auto When Auto is checked the RBW is calculated as a percentage of the Span Kaiser is selected as the windowing method When Auto is unchecked the RBW is set by the user Selecting any Window other than Kaiser changes the RBW setting to manual Span RBW ratio If Auto is checked this value is used to calculate the RBW If Auto is unchecked this setting is not selectable Filter Shape Specifies the windowing method used for the transform when Auto is unchecked Spectrum and Spectrogram displays only VBW Adjusts the VBW Video Bandwidth value Spectrum and Spectrogram displays only Filter Shape Settings In the analyzer computationally efficient discrete F
474. see Specifies additional parameters that are less frequently used page 342 Find see page 346 Used to set parameters for finding a burst within the data record and for entering a Synch word Analysis Time see page 346 Contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Seconds or Symbols for the GP Digital Modulation displays Trace see page 348 Allows you to set the trace display characteristics Prefs see page 350 Enables you to set characteristics of the measurement display Standard Settings Button 334 On every GP Digital Modulation control panel there is a button labeled Standard Settings This button is used to recall settings optimized for analyzing the selected standard See the following table for a list of the standards for which standard settings are available Choosing a standard from the dialog box changes only settings for GP Digital Modulation displays All of the presets in the Standard Settings Dialog make the following settings m Analysis Length Auto B Points per Symbol 4 m Data Differential No m Burst Mode Off Burst Detection Threshold 10 dBc Signal Vu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Modulation Params Tab Parameter values set by presets in the standard settings dialog Standard Modula Symbol Meas Reference Filter Other tion Rate Filter Filter Parameter 8
475. seeee meme me ee menn 433 Upgrading the Product Software How to Find Out if Software Upgrades are Available sss 434 Activating a License Activating SignalVu PC options in evaluation Mode ccc cece eee eeee eee ee ences tee ene eens 434 Activating Signal Vu PC Options 00 cece ccc een eee enn eens ene esee nene 435 Activating with Internet Access 0 ce cece cence eee ene e nen nnn ne sehen 435 Activating without internet access ccc cece cece enn ee esee mese esee 436 Managing Licenses Managing SignalVu PC Licenses esner eresse re eee mese messe ehe nene 437 Changing Settings Setting S cosa haaienas eos pa ee ells SRRES ETHER ete O OH UD pes redi diede eder tax et s Penates inr eea a aa 438 Glossary Index SignalVu PC Printable Help ix Table of Contents X SignalVu PC Printable Help Welcome Welcome Welcome This help provides in depth information on how to use the SignalVu PC Vector Signal Analysis Software Using the signal analysis engine of the RSA5100 and RSA6100 Series real time signal analyzer SignalVu PC vector signal analysis software helps you move your analysis of acquisitions off the instrument But with SignalVu PC s Live Link feature you can connect to an RSA306 USB Spectrum Analyzer or an MDO4000B oscilloscope acquiring live data Several features and settings become available in Signal VU PC once connected to one of these instruments These are noted whe
476. select from the following standards groups Application Preset Modulation Analysis The Modulation Analysis application preset opens the following displays m DPX display Shows you a continuous spectrum monitoring of the specified carrier frequency Signal Quality Shows a summary of modulation quality measurements EVM rho Magnitude Error Phase Error and others Constellation Shows the I and Q information of the signal analyzed in an I vs Q format Symbol Table Shows the demodulated symbols of the signal To use the Modulation Analysis preset assuming the Preset action is set to Show list in the Presets tab of the Options control panel SignalVu PC Printable Help 19 Using SignalVu PC Presets 16 1 Select Presets Application Select Modulation Analysis and then click OK 2 Setthe reference level so that the peak of your signal is about 10 dB below the top of the DPX display 3 Setthe modulation parameters for your signal This includes the Modulation Type Symbol Rate Measurement Filter Reference Filter and Filter Parameter All of these settings are accessed by selecting Tools gt Settings For most modulated signals the Modulation Analysis application preset should present a stable display of modulation quality Additional displays can be added by selecting Setup gt Displays and other settings can be modified to better align with your signal requirements Application Preset Pulse Analysis The Pulse An
477. ses in the signal m Make sure the analysis length see page 377 includes at least one complete pulse cycle from before one rising edge until after the next rising edge Pulse Detection Error The instrument was unable to detect a pulse The pulse Measurement Filter see page 238 needs to be smaller Try reducing the bandwidth and or selecting the Gaussian filter Detection threshold is not set to the proper level for the signal Adjust the Power threshold to detect pulses see page 238 The pulse interval is too long for the current settings Try decreasing the filter bandwidth see page 238 as this may reduce the number of data points to a manageable quantity RBW conflict Increase Span or Analysis Length The measurement is not running because the actual RBW used by the measurement is too large for the current acquisition span Typically the analysis length is too short as well B Either increase the span or increase the Analysis Length RBW decreased The current span or acquisition bandwidth is too small to allow a wider RBW filter Increase the span or acquisition bandwidth if the decreased RBW is not acceptable RBW increased The current Spectrum Length or Analysis Length 1f Spectrum Length is not Independent is too small to allow the requested RBW Increase the Spectrum Length or Analysis Length if the increased RBW is not acceptable RBW limited by AcqBW to XX Hz The requested RBW is t
478. si 10 0 dBm b To add a new point check the box next to the target mask located below the Auto draw button c Select Add points located below the Open button d Select the target mask Upper Mask Table or Lower Mask Table from the drop down menu e Click in the desired location on the plot to add the point Reference TI X New Open Save Save As Done E ectrum Trace 1 j ju J J to be in list a trace must be showing in a display Click in Add points f j X Margin 5 000 MHz raph Next X Undo ee Edit Points O went Y Margin 10 000 dBm 0 00 dBm Auto draw 4 Upper Mask Offset Freq Amplitude 2 3 508 MHz 5 36 dBm 1 785 MHz 12 5 dBm 8 000 MHz 5 00 dBm 1 100 00 dBm 16 000 MHz 5 00 dBm Offset 0 Hz Scale 40 00 MHz 20 000 MHz 10 0 dBm f To use the auto draw feature to automatically place points on the chosen mask enable the desired mask from the drop down menu and then click the Auto draw button 374 SignalVu PC Printable Help Mask Testing Define Tab Mask Test Reference Spectrum Trace 1 to be in list a trace must be showing in a display New Open Save save ts Done Click in Add points X Margin 5 000 MHz graph Next Ine to Edit Points l Y Margin 10 000 dBm Enable Upper Mask Upper Mask Table vj V Lower Mask Offset Freq Amplitude 15 350 MHz 20 1 dBm 15 400 MHz 20 4 dBm
479. sides per offset which results in 12 offsets Mask violations can occur in any of these offsets The failure percentage is calculated as follows Fail percentage Number of offsets with mask violations x 100 Total number of enabled offsets SignalVu PC Printable Help 151 RF Measurements SEM Display For example Assume there are three enabled offsets A B C and all these offsets have both lower and upper sides Thus the total number of enabled offsets is equal to six Suppose there are mask violations in the offsets AL and CU then the number of offsets having mask violations is equal to 2 Therefore Fail percentage 2 100 6 3395 Results Display The Results Display shows the measurement results for the SEM display z Peak Abs Margin Abs Pesk Rel Margin Rel Imeg Abs Ref Total Power Row Offset Start Freq Stop Freq ium eB B9 8 rea Pech 1 EL 12 500 MHz 8 000 MHz 73 83 62 33 91 81 8 010000 MHz 5844 DL 8 000 MHz 4 000 MHz 3347 61 67 91 16 gt 7 460000MHz 67 61 3 a 4 000 MHz 3 515 MHz 87 63 63 13 105 62 E 3965444 MHz 77 11 BL 3 515 MHz 2715 MHz 87 77 3517 105 76 a 272200MHz 75 14 5 AL 2715MHz 2 515 MHz 70 18 57 68 88 16 2515000MHz 7074 6 AU 2 515 MHz 2 715 MHz 70 73 58 23 87 67 E 2 515000 MHz 7054 7 BU 2 715 MHz 3 515 MHz 87 66 67 24 104 59 3 243000 MHz 7472 8 cu 3 515 MHz 4 000 MHz 88 01 63 51 106 3976356 MHz 7704 lt m 16 93 dBm
480. signal a sine wave DANL Acronym for Displayed Average Noise Level See Sensitivity see page 454 dBfs A unit to express power level in decibels referenced to full scale Depending on the context this is either the full scale of the display screen or the full scale of the analog to digital converter ADC dBm A unit of expressed power level in decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt dBmV A unit to express voltage levels in decibels referenced to 1 millivolt dBuV A unit to express voltage levels in decibels referenced to 1 microvolt Decibel Ten times the logarithm of the ratio of one electrical power to another 444 SignalVu PC Printable Help Glossary Detection Detection The process by which a long waveform is decimated reduced down to the desired number of trace points by dividing the waveform into intervals and choosing a single value to represent each interval in the trace Display Reference Level A designated vertical position representing a specified input level The level may be expressed in dBm volts or any other units Distortion Degradation of a signal often a result of nonlinear operations resulting in unwanted signal components Harmonic and intermodulation distortion are common types Dynamic Range The maximum ratio of the levels of two signals simultaneously present at the input which can be measured to a specified accuracy EVM Acronym for Error Vector Magnitude Export
481. signal Positive values represent a gain and negative values represent a loss The range is 50 to 30 dB Resolution is 0 1 dB NOTE Selecting Preset clears the check box but it does not change the value External Loss Tables Use an External Loss Table to apply a frequency dependent gain loss correction to the signal When an External Loss Table is selected the analyzer adjusts the signal according to the values in the table An external loss table allows you to compensate the signal level for variations in cable loss antenna frequency response or preamp frequency response You can create external loss tables from the analyzer application and save them as files External loss tables are saved as plain text files in CSV Comma Separated Value format The tables have a CSV file extension You can change the title for each table However note that the title 1s only a label It is not tied to the file name of any table you may have loaded or saved SignalVu PC Printable Help 389 Amplitude Corrections External Gain Loss Correction Tab 390 NOTE If you are using an External Loss Table for antenna corrections be sure to set the Amplitude units Setup gt Analysis gt Units to dBuA m or dBuV m Creating an External Loss Table You can create an external loss table with the analyzer application No external application is required To create an external loss table 1 Click Edit to display the Table Editor oi Ta
482. signal and the reference signal magnitude Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Phase Error The RMS phase difference between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Power vs Time Summary The signal power amplitude versus time For 802 11b signals the packet Power On and Power Down ramp times are also measured Shows several measurements of WLAN signal quality Symbol Table Shows decoded data values for each data symbol in the analyzed signal packet For OFDM non 802 11b signals results are presented with subcarrier frequency indices in the horizontal dimension and symbol time intervals in the vertical dimension For 802 11b signals the Preamble Header and Data PSDU symbol values are presented sequentially with symbol indices in the left column SignalVu PC Printable Help Taking Measurements Available Measurements Digital Modulation measurements Measurements for all modulation types except nFSK C4FM OQPSK and SOQPSK Measurement Description EVM The normalized RMS value of the error vector between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal over the analysis length The EVM is generally measured on symbol or chip instants and is reported in units of percent and dB EVM is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed These estima
483. sis Table 4 P25 test patterns Phase 2 Inbound and Outbound cont TIA 102 Phase 2 test pattern Phase 2 measurement Inbound Symmetrical Time Slot RF Output Power Modulation Emission Spectrum Modulation Fidelity HCPM Peak ACPR HCPM Off slot power HCPM Power envelope Unwanted Emissions Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Low Deviation Inbound Frequency deviation for HCPM Symbol Rate Accuracy Low Deviation Outbound Symbol Rate Accuracy High Deviation Inbound and Outbound Symbol Rate Accuracy Other Can be used for measurements such as RF Output Power Operating Frequency User created test pattern Accuracy Modulation Fidelity and ACPR Analysis of HCPM Bursty Data It important to take into account the following information when analyzing HCPM bursty data 262 It is mandatory that at least one complete on slot and off slot region including the ramp up and ramp down portion have to be included in the analysis window for HCPM measurement results to be analyzed If HCPM is the chosen standard in Standards Presets then a minimum length of 94 ms is set for the analysis window This is to ensure that a full on slot and off slot region is available irrespective of the selected analysis offset Do not use the High Deviation or Low Deviation test patterns for bursty signals Test patterns are selected in the P25 Settings control panel on the Test Patterns tab If selected analy
484. sis would look for a bursty pattern High Deviation and Low Deviation test patterns are not bursty and therefore do not have the above analysis length restriction If you try to set the analysis length to less than 94 ms the following status message will display P25 HCPM Minimum Analysis Length should be gt 94 ms Most measurements that are required to be done on on slot regions are done centered at the on slot region of HCPM bursty data SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis P25 Constellation Display When HCPM bursty data 1s analyzed the following status message will appear on all relevant displays P25 HCPM modulation analysis is done only on on slot regions P25 Constellation Display The P25 Constellation Display shows the P25 signal modulation amplitude For the HCPM and HDQPSK standards you can view this display as frequency deviation or as I and Q For the CAFM standard only the frequency deviation applies To show the P25 Constellation display you can select Presets gt Standards gt P25 or do the following 1 2 3 4 10 If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select P25 Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the P25 Constellation icon or select the icon and click Add The P25 Constellation icon will appear in the Selec
485. splay is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Time div Sets the length of time represented by each vertical division Divisions are indicated by tick marks along the left edge of the graph 3 RBW Sets the resolution bandwidth Note that when the RBW is set to Auto its value is italicized 4 VBW Enables the VBW Video Bandwidth filter See Setup gt Settings gt BW Tab see page 76 5 3 D checkbox Enables and disables the 3 D view 6 Selected records indicators Shows the positions of the start and stop records selected on the Select data records tab Drag the indicators to select which records will be played by Replay All Note that these are not visible while acquisitions are running the instrument must be stopped for the indicators to be visible 7 T Trigger indicator This icon indicates the trigger point within the current acquisition 8 Pos Position indicates the bottom line visible in graph Changing this setting scrolls the window up and down through the displayed acquisition records 9 Autoscale Resets Vertical and Horizontal scale and Pos to default values 10 CF Sets the Center Frequency 11 Span Sets the span of the spectrogram display 12 Current data record indicator A blue line indicates the current data record When the an
486. splay summarize results for the selected pulse measurement SignalVu PC Printable Help 235 Pulsed RF Pulse Statistics Display Elements of the Pulse Statistics Display v Result Rise Pulse 26 70 26 ns Max 71 49 ns Min 69 44 ns Avg 70 64 ns cese j 69 3 ns gt T 5 Trend Autoscale 5 1 236 SignalVu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Pulse Statistics Settings Item Display element Description 1 Check mark indicator The check mark indicator in the upper left hand corner of the display shows when the Pulse Statistics display is the optimized display NOTE When Best for multiple windows is selected in the Amplitude control panel s RF amp IF Optimization control none of the measurement displays shows a checkmark as there is not a single optimized measurement 2 Result Use this list to select which measurement statistics to display The measurement chosen here selects the same result to be displayed in the Pulse Trace display and the Pulse Table display Selecting a result in any of these views causes the same result to be selected in all of them 3 Pulse Selects which pulse s result is shown Like the Result this selection is shared with the Statistics and Table views 4 Statistics summary Display of measurement statistics for the selected Result 5 Vertical range Located at the top of the left graph edge and at the bottom of the left graph edge use
487. ss Settings 0 0 c ccc cece cece seme ee mene 186 SignalVu PC Printable Help iii Table of Contents WLAN Summary WLAN Summary Display 2 eter rera e ese dene irte EEE E ERO eren e eile dtes tiia 187 WEAN Summary Settih Serene ocior Er RR E Fe e e USER e u vendesi insu 191 WLAN Symb Table WLAN Symbol Table Display 0 cece cece cee I nee meme eem 192 WLAN Symbol Table Settings csse eee e me ese eme ee mee 194 Common Controls for WLAN Analysis Displays WLAN Analysis Shared Measurement Settings sss 194 OFDM Analysis OVERVIEW ceon UUEUTMIMTMT 205 OFDM Chan Response OFDM Channel Response Display sss me eene 205 OFDM Channel Response Settings 0 ccc cece ence e cece nee eee ene se meses 207 OFDM Constellation OFDM Constellation Display 0 0 cccasceas cuss cree IIb er e e Ue her RAW Rp eae ien n a 208 OFDM Constellation Settings ccce nee i anaE E PO eene hh resa ener 209 OFDM EVM OFDM EVM Display eterno ra anre ua e de E Ra RA ORI n ERR ER erRE RU eH ETE 209 OFDM EVM Settings eec trie epe e IS ERRER ER Eae Ue ea ex Pa dioe dee oed st nes 210 OFDM Flatness OFDM Spectral Flatness Display ssssssssssssssssssse m meme emen 211 OFDM Spectral Flatness Settings cc ccc ccc cece cece ence ene eme eme memes 212 OFDM Mag Error OFDM Magnitude Error Display 0 0 cece ence cere nnn I me eee esee 213 OFDM Magnitude
488. ssaddaaadncd et boe reso derent einst DE nie a GENE en ados 97 RF Measurements OVERVIEW PT 105 Channel Power and ACPR Channel Power and ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Display ssesesssss 105 Channel Power and ACPR Settings c ccc cece cece cece eee erent ene ene eee esee 108 MCPR MCPR Multiple Carrier Power Ratio Display e ccc ccc cece ence en eseese mme 111 MCPR Issue MT 115 i Signal Vu PC Printable Help Table of Contents Occupied BW amp x dB BW Occupied BW amp x dB BW Display 0 0 cece cece nce eem me eme me eee 121 Occupied BW amp x dB BW Settings 2 0 0 0 0 ccc cece cence eee eee ee ene eee eene 124 CCDF S ODIUM 126 CCDF Settings reca ra E T E E E 127 Settling Time Measurements Settling Time Measurement Overview isses seme mene e eese een 128 Settling Time Displays Settling Time Displays eerte ree utet ERR V Pe AUN rera D V ere RR ace ng 133 Settling Time Settnps isis dis cete e eee x nir E esee redi o dde e xv e e ed oque TE Ur pee RNa 141 Common Controls for Settling Time Displays Settling Time Displays Shared Measurement Settings sss 141 SEM Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Display MH 149 Spectrum Emission Mask Settings 0 cc cece eeens essers rsrsr ne en eee ee mene eene eese 153 Common Controls for RF Measurements Display
489. st if you wish to use a custom value For LPF and HPF the listed frequencies represent the 3dB cutoff point of the filter 4 Ifyou select User from the drop down list enter a value in the text entry box that appears To disable all filtering 1 Select the Pre defined Filters option button 2 Deselect all four filter check boxes Table 6 Predefined audio filters Filter type Available settings LPF Low Pass Filter 5th order Butterworth response HPF High Pass Filter 5th order Butterworth response 300 Hz 3 kHz 15 kHz 30 kHz 80 kHz 300 kHz User 1 20 Hz 50 Hz 300 Hz 400 Hz User 1 300 Signal Vu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Table 6 Predefined audio filters cont Filter type De emphasis FM only Audio Filters Tab Available settings 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 ps User Range 25 us to 10 ms Standard CCITT C message 1 User entered values are restricted to maximum of 0 9 Audio BW and will automatically adjust downward to meet this limit if required when AudioBW is decreased Standard Use this setting to specify the telecom weighting filter The characteristics of these filters are described in ITU T Recommendation O 41 Psophometer for Use on Telephone type Circuits Using Custom Audio Filters If you want to use audio filters that have a different response shape than the pre defined filters you can create a cust
490. stellation plot or below it depending on the size of the window If markers are enabled the marker readout shows the time mag phase symbol marker and symbol value of the point with the selected marker EVM Readouts The EVM readouts are located below the Constellation plot The readout shows EVM Peak 96 and location RMS 96 4 Plot Constellation graph Changing Constellation Settings see page 309 Constellation Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar ie The settings for the Constellation view are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 309 GP Digital Modulation Demod I amp Q vs Time Display NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Constellation display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation symbol rate and filters to be used in demodulating page 335 the input signal Freq amp BW see page 339 Sets values for frequency error offset measurement bandwidth and frequency deviation not every control is present for every modulation type Equalizer Tab see page 340 Enable the Equalizer and adjust its parameters Advanced Params see page 342 S
491. story for replay 1 10 3 10 2010 4 47 51 74 This readout shows information about the data record being replayed The information displayed shows the acquisition and frame number and time stamp for the current data record o The Info button displays the Acquisition Info tab of the Replay control panel The Acquisition Info tab displays information about the acquisition data such as acquisition bandwidth sampling rate and acquisition length All data records in the acquisition history were acquired with identical parameters When any of these parameters are changed all records in history are deleted as soon as the first record acquired under the new parameter values is received 388 SignalVu PC Printable Help Amplitude Corrections Amplitude Settings Amplitude Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Amplitude The Amplitude control panel provides access to power related settings that are used by all displays within the SignalVu PC application Amplitude External Gain Loss Correction Mod External Loss Tables Loss gt 0 Gain lt 0 External Gain value 0 TR Apply external corrections to Edit uberi eat Setting Description External Gain Loss Correction Specifies whether a correction is applied to the signal to compensate for the use of see page 389 external equipment External Gain Loss Correction Tab External Gain Value Use the External Gain Value setting to apply a flat gain loss correction to the
492. sult from this average of logs method For random noise the average of logs methods results in power levels 2 51 dB lower than that measured with a power meter or with a spectrum analyzer that measures the rms value of a signal and performs averaging on the calculated power in Watts and not dBm or other log power units This detector should be used when following a measurement procedure that specifies it or when checking the Displayed Averaged Noise Level DANL of the instrument The average of logs detection and trace function is used for DANL specification to provide similar results to other spectrum signal analyzers for comparison purposes Use of the Average of Logs method of measurement is not recommended for digitally modulated carriers as power measurement errors will occur NOTE The Detection setting does not affect the trace until the spectrum length is longer than the Auto setting Saving Traces To save a trace for later analysis 1 Select the Save Trace As button This displays the Save As dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired folder or use the default 3 Typea name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces You can recall a previously saved trace for analysis or comparison to a live trace To select a trace for recall 1 Select the trace into which the recalled trace will be loaded from the Trace drop down list 2 Check the Show check box 3 Click the button to display the Open dialog box
493. surements Channels Tab for MCPR 120 Lower Upper Adjacent 1 Main 1 Main 2 Main 3 Adjacent 1 Adj Chan Main Chan Main Chan Main Chan Adj Chan Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth im re Channel Spacing Channel Spacing Channel Spacing Channel Spacing l gt gt gt gt Editing Channel Parameters To edit the offset or bandwidth of a Main channel 1 2 3 4 Select the value in the BW or Spacing number entry boxes Adjust the value as required All the Main channels share the same BW and Spacing Select the appropriate check box to make a channel Inactive as appropriate Click the Close button when you have finished making changes To edit the offset or bandwidth of an Adjacent channel 1 2 3 4 Select the channel to be edited in the channel definition table Select Edit This displays the Edit Channel Parameters dialog box Adjust the values for the Frequency Offset Bandwidth and upper and lower Limits as required Click the Close button when you have finished making changes Adding Channels To add a main channel 1 2 3 Select the Number entry box Use the knob to enter a value for the desired number of Main channels Click the Close button when you have finished making changes To add an adjacent channel pair Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements
494. surements Settling Time Measurement Overview 132 Phin atan Se The instantaneous frequency is the derivative of the phase Fsampling Frin Pha ay Phin x Qx2PI Data smoothing is applied if selected by the user This filtering method uses n adjacent samples to produce an average value that is used to replace the values of the original 2n samples An example is shown below Smooth off Smooth 3 0070 0 If averaging is turned on the smoothed data array is averaged with data arrays of previous acquisitions on a point by point basis Smoothing has the advantage of reducing noise like variations in the measurement but carries the risk of masking real measurement data The amount of smoothing applied must be determined by evaluating the waveform you see for artifacts that result from the process Next Settled Frequency is calculated Settled frequency is the average frequency determined by looking back in time from the point set by the Measurement Length control over a minimum of 256 samples This value is used to determine the frequency level about which to center the Tolerance range The measurement then searches backward through the data until it finds the first point that exceeds the tolerance range A maximum of 20 million acquisition data samples can be processed by the measurement Settling Time is measured as the time from the start reference to the point where the frequency remains within the toleranc
495. t EVM 0 197 0 398 65 00 Sym 54 106 dB 47 996 dB Phase Error 0 131 D 422 161 50 Sym Mag Error 0 139 0 380 160 00 Sym MER RMS 53 426 dB Rho 0 999991 IQ Origin Offset 70 413 dB Frequency Error 401 5 Hz Gain Imbalance 0 014 dB Quadrature Error 0 012 Signal Quality display for OQPSK and SOQPSK modulation types Signal Vu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation v Bld Signal Quality Peak FSK Err 4 043 RMS FSK Err 1 814 Freq Deviation 99 90 kHz Peak Mag Err 5 791 RMS Mag Err 2 363 Deviations 3 4 Freq Error 1 e S Je 470 8 Hz 3 Max 104 301 kHz 34 866 kHz 34 623 kHz 103 370 kHz Min 96 517 kHz 32 408 kHz 31 454 kHz 97 410 kHz Avg 100 366 kHz 33 300 kHz 33 066 kHz Signal Quality display for nFSK modulation type Signal Quality Modulation Fidelity RMS Error Magnitude 0 116 Carrier Frequency Error 111 2 mHz Deviation 399 2 Hz Length 128 Sym Signal Quality display for C4FM modulation type SignalVu PC Printable Help 99 425 kHz Signal Quality Display 325 GP Digital Modulation 326 Elements of the Display Signal Quality Display Measurements for all modulation types except nFSK C4FM OQPSK and SOQPSK Measurement Description EVM The normalized RMS value of the error vector between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal over the analysis len
496. t setup center frequency sample rate SignalVu PC Printable Help 405 Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures Table 10 SignalVu on oscilloscopes file formats supported by SignalVu PC cont What Open All Settings and v SignalVu PC with Measurements are can do with settings Recalled this format Automatically Y Sets Span Center Frequency Open as Uses settings from v v data only SignalVu PC when opened Notes This is the native format for Recommend saving as SignalVu PC It contains all tiq file after opening information needed to open and analyze all displays available Table 11 Performance Oscilloscope without SignalVu file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by MSO DPO DSA5000 7000 70000 File type wim File description Amplitude vs Time includes sample rate information What SignalVu PC Open with All Settings and can do with this settings Measurements are Recalled format Automatically Sets Span Center Frequency Open as data Uses settings from only SignalVu PC when opened v Notes Prior to opening Preset SignalVu PC Set span and center frequency After opening save as tiq file Reopen the tiq file for further changes to the measurement settings and opening additional displays Table 12 Bench Oscilloscope file formats supported by SignalVu PC Generated by MSO DPO 2000 3000 4000
497. ta to use with external software Acquisition data export CSV or MAT either CSV comma separated value or MAT MATLAB format Saving Files Saving files follows the same procedure regardless of the type of data being saved To save setups including application presets pictures results or acquisition data 1 Select Save As from the File menu to open the Save As dialog box 2 Navigate to the folder where you want to save the setups or use the default location To save setups so that they appear in the Application Presets window save your setup in the folder C SignalVu PC Files User Presets The saved setup will appear in the Application Presets window with the name you give the file 3 Enter a file name 4 Select the type of file to save from the Save as type drop down list 5 Click Save SignalVu PC Printable Help 403 Managing Data Settings and Pictures Saving and Recalling Data Settings and Pictures Recalling Files You can recall three types of files Setup files Selected Trace and Acquisition data with setup Recalling data follows the same procedure regardless of the type of data being recalled 1 Select Recall from the File menu to open the Open dialog box 2 Navigate to the folder containing the file you want to recall 3 Select the type of file to recall from the Files of type drop down list This selection determines the files that appear in the Open dialog box 4 Select the file to recall
498. tage value for all of the collected traces values for the same point 156 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Ref Channel Tab Ref Channel Tab The Ref Channel tab controls how the measurement of the Reference channel is performed Parameters Processing Ref Channel Offsets amp Limits Table Scale Prefs Power 3 Reference 10 02 d8m 7 Auto Channel width Channel Filter 8 500 MHz Root raised Cosine X pE 100 000 kriz Integration BW Filter param 0 220 2 125 MHz 7 VBW 30 000 kHz Chip rate 3 84 MHz Settings tab Description Power Reference The value used to calculate relative measurements Auto When Auto is unchecked you can enter a value for the reference power and the measured reference power is not used or displayed RBW Sets the RBW for the Reference Channel VBW Enables disables the Video Bandwidth filter VBW is used in traditional swept analyzers to reduce the effect of noise on the displayed signal The VBW algorithm in the analyzer emulates the VBW filters of traditional swept analyzers When the checkbox next to VBW is not checked the VBW filter is not applied SEM standards specify what value of VBW should be applied if any Channel width Specifies the width of the reference channel Integration BW Specifies the integration bandwidth used to compute the total power in the reference channel Channel Filter Specifies the measurement filter used in the Reference Ch
499. tains the same signal but the random noise changes from acquisition to acquisition and the average value of the random noise is lowered while the signal value remains constant Time domain averaging is not available in spans wider than the maximum real time bandwidth Number Specifies the number of acquisitions to be averaged when Averaging is set to Frequency Domain Specifies the number of successive capture records that are averaged when Averaging is set to Time Domain Power Reference Specifies power against which the results are compared Choices available are each of the existing main channels and Total active channels Only present when MCPR is the selected display Channel Filter Specify the channel filter used Select between None default and Root raised Cosine Filter Parameter Value entry box for the Root raised Cosine filter Adjacent Channel Filter Present only when the Channel Filter is set to Root raised Cosine Chip Rate Value entry box for the Root raised Cosine chip rate Present only when the Channel Filter is set to Root raised Cosine 118 Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Channels Tab for MCPR Channels Tab for MCPR Path Setup gt Settings gt Channels Application Toolbar Front Panel Settings The Channels tab is where you specify the parameters for the channels measured in the MCPR display Freq amp rew Measurement Params Channels Scale Pref
500. tal Modulation Modulation Params Tab Modulation type Description QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 8PSK 8 Phase Shift Keying D8PSK Differential Eight Phase Shift Keying D16PSK Differential Sixteen Phase Shift Keying PI 2DBPSK Pi 2 Differential Binary Phase Shift Keying DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying PI ADQPSK Pi 4 Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 16QAM 16 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 32QAM 32 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 64QAM 64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 128QAM 128 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 256QAM 256 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation MSK Minimum Shift Keying 2FSK 2 Frequency Shift Keying 4FSK 4 Frequency Shift Keying 8FSK 8 Frequency Shift Keying 16FSK 16 Frequency Shift Keying CPM Continuous Phase Modulation SOQPSK Shaped Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying SBPSK Shaped Binary Phase Shift Keying C4FM Constant Envelope 4 Level Frequency Modulation Symbol Rate Specifies the symbol rate for demodulating digitally modulated signals The symbol rate and the bit rate are related as follows Symbol rate Bit rate Number of bits per symbol For example the number of bits per symbol is 3 for 8PSK Measurement and Reference Filters The available measurement and reference filters depend on the selected modulat
501. te for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 213 OFDM Analysis OFDM Magnitude Error Settings Elements of the Display 6 50 Scale 12 Sym 2 a 4 60 autoscale 9 26 Subc 0519 005 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph Sets the Magnitude Error value that appears at the top of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Bottom of graph Sets the Magnitude Error value that appears at the bottom of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Pos Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position OFDM Magnitude Error Settings Application Toolbar 99 The settings for the OFDM Mag Error display are shown in the following table 214 SignalVu PC Printable Help OFDM Analysis OFDM Phase Error Display
502. ted displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the P25 Constellation display Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Modulation Type and Measurement and Reference filters as appropriate for the input signal For Phase 2 signals select the Trace tab and set the Trace Type to Freq Dev or IQ Select the Test Patterns tab and select the desired test pattern as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the Display The following image shows the P25 Constellation display set to IQ for a HDQPSK signal SignalVu PC Printable Help 263 APCO P25 Analysis P25 Constellation Display Mill P25 Constelietion Tracel 4 Show Vectors Mod Fidelty 0 100 Freq Error 27 96 uHz Auto The following image shows the same signal as the previous image but with the display set to Frequency Deviation lil P25 Constellation Tracel Show Vectors Mod Fidelty 0 100 Freq Error 27 96 uHz Auto 264 Signal Vu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis P25 Constellation Settings Item Display element Description 1 Marker Readout Located to the left of the constellation plot or below it depending on the size of the window If markers are enabled the marker readout will show frequency deviation results or IQ
503. ter Specifies the filter used as a reference Filter Parameter Enter a value used for defining the Reference Filter Not present for some filter types Symbol Rate This is a readout that shows the symbol rate for demodulating digitally modulated signals based on the standard This rate is always 4 8 kHz for Phase 1 signals and 6 kHz for Phase 2 signals Symbol Rate Specifies the symbol rate for demodulating digitally modulated signals based on the standard The symbol rate and the bit rate are related as follows Symbol rate Bit rate Number of bits per symbol The bit rate used for Phase 1 CAFM is 9600 bps For Phase 2 HCPM and HDQPSK it is 12000 bps There are two bits per symbol for all above mentioned modulation types Therefore the symbol rate is 4800 Hz for Phase 1 and 6000 Hz for Phase 2 Measurement and Reference Filters The available measurement and reference filters depend on the selected modulation type The following table shows the recommended filters for the specified modulation types CAUTION Although there are other filter types listed in the drop down menu if you select any filter other than that which is recommended the measurement results may not be accurate Modulation type Measurement filters Reference filters HDQPSK HDQPSK P25 None HPCM None None C4FM C4FM P25 RaisedCosine Filter parameter 0 2 The measurement filter is applied before the demodulation bit is detected
504. tes are made over the analysis length Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Phase Error The RMS phase difference between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Mag Error The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value MER RMS The MER is defined as the ratio of I Q signal power to I Q noise power the result is indicated in dB IQ Origin Offset The magnitude of the DC offset of the signal measured at the symbol times It indicates the magnitude of the carrier feed through signal Frequency Error The frequency difference between the measured carrier frequency of the signal and the user selected center frequency of the instrument Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error The gain difference between the and Q channels in the signal generation path Constellations with gain imbalance show a pattern with a width that is different form height The orthogonal error between the and Q channels The error shows the phase difference between and Q channels away from the ideal 90 degrees expected from the perfect I Q modulation Not valid for BPSK modulation type Rho The normalized correlated power of the measured signal and the ideal reference signal Like EVM Rho is a measure of modulation quality The value of Rho is less th
505. test functions provide pass fail results Greater Than Less Than Tests for Spectrum If you select a greater than less than test you also specify the level that defines a violation When you select either is greater than or is less than a text entry box appears to the right of the drop down list Use the text entry box to specify the signal level you wish to test for While not as flexible as mask testing this type of test is quicker to set up The following figure shows the results of an is greater than test The vertical red bar highlights results that match the test definition SignalVu PC Printable Help Mask Testing Define Tab Mask Test v 7 Trace 1 V Show Peak Normal Clear 1 00 dBm dB div 10 0 dB 8 RBW 10 0 kHz 4 VBW 500 Hz 99 00 dBm Autoscale CF 1 900000 GHz 2 Span 1 000 MHz Outside Inside Mask Tests If you specify a mask based test then you need to edit the mask to specify the levels that define a violation When you select is outside mask or is inside mask an Edit limits button is displayed Click the Edit limits button to display the Mask Test Editor window n Gl Mask Test Editor Maskt TNR T RR meram File Reference New Open Save Save As Done Spectrum Traced to be in list a trace must be showing in a dis Click in Add points X Margin 0 000 Hz graph Next X to
506. the selected record or frame in the current acquisition was acquired Select All button Selecting Select All resets the Start and Stop values The Start value is reset to the first acquisition or frame of the current acquisition The Stop value is reset to the last acquisition or frame in the current acquisition Select DPX Spectra Tab The Select DPX Spectra tab is used to select which DPXogram spectra to replay A spectra is the smallest DPXogram unit that can be replayed It is equivalent to one line in the DPXogram display Select data records Select DPX Spectra Acquisition Info Replay Speed Select spectra Select All 1 9 29 2011 17 36 53 05 9 29 2011 S E 17 36 53 05 9 29 2011 Bongo 17 37 7 82 602 9 29 2011 17 37 7 82 Date and Time Stamps The line that appears above the Start box is a date stamp that displays the date and time the first DPX spectra in the current acquisition was acquired The line that appears below the Stop box is a date stamp that displays the date and time the last DPX Spectra in the current acquisition was acquired The line that appears to the right of each Start box displays the date and time the selected DPX Spectra was acquired The line that appears to the right of each Stop box displays the date and time the selected DPX Spectra in the current acquisition was acquired Select All button Selecting Select All resets the Start and Stop values The Start value is reset to the first DP
507. the P25 Summary Display is the average RF Output Power of all the bursts selected in the analysis window If only one on slot region is chosen in the analysis window then the RF Output Power of only the chosen on slot is reported For non bursty data the entire duration of analysis window is considered to obtain RF Output Power The result shown in the P25 Summary display does not account for any attenuation introduced by a user Ensure that this attenuation is accounted for when you enter limits for comparison The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail This measurement result is not shown in the P25 Summary display when Trigger Measurements are selected NOTE Read about important information related to HCPM bursty data measurements here see page 262 Operating Frequency Accuracy Phase 1 and Phase 2 The Operating Frequency Accuracy is the ability of the transmitter to operate on its assigned frequency This measurement is presented as a scalar result in the P25 Summary display SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis For bursty HCPM Phase 2 Inbound signals the operating frequency accuracy is measured only during the on slot regions centered at the middle of the on slot The result shown in the P25 Summary display is the average of all the bursts selected in the analysis window If only one on slot region is
508. the frequency deviation Select Auto to make the instrument do this automatically Deselect Auto to enter a value manually This setting is present for only nFSK and C4FM modulation types Equalizer Tab 340 The Equalizer tab enables you to apply an adaptive equalizer to a digitally modulated signal to compensate for linear distortions in the signal The Equalizer is available only for displays in the GP Digital Modulation folder Select Displays window The analyzer implements a decision directed feed forward FIR filter to correct linear distortion in the input signal Modulation Params Freq amp BW Equalizer Advanced Params Find Analysis Time Trace Scale Prefs Enable Equalization Mode Train Taps Symbol 2 Reset Equalization Convergence 0 0005 Taps 41 V Enable EQ Export Length 21 Symbol SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Equalizer Tab Parameter Description Enable Equalization This setting turns the Equalizer on and off Reset Equalization Initializes the equalizer filter for training Enable EQ Export Exports a text file with equalizer taps in I Q pairs Mode Specifies whether the equalizer is in learning Train mode or analysis Hold mode Convergence Specifies the update rate Maximum value 0 002 Default value 0 0005 Taps Symbol The number of filter coefficients per symbol used by the filter Available choices are 1 2 4 and 8 Taps The
509. the icon and click Add The P25 Symbol icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the P25 Symbol Table display Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Modulation Type and Measurement and Reference filters as appropriate for the input signal Select the Test Patterns tab and select a test pattern The available test patterns in the drop down list depend on the standard and modulation type you have selected If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file P25 Symbol Table The following image shows the P25 Symbol Table for HCPM bursty signals For this signal type the symbols are arranged as Bursts vs Symbols The analysis is done only on the on slot regions of the bursty HCPM data and 160 symbols centered at the middle of the burst are reported on the symbol table for every on slot region You can read more about specific measurements here see page 252 o ou umwN eo N ooowwnwenNn N U O N U N QU O QU QU O e QU m lid Edd dad d d d d d od d od dd d Marker MR Symbol 18 Time 69 411 ms Vale 0 The following image shows the P25 Symbol Table for C4FM non bursty signals For this signal type and for HDQPSK there is no grouping into bursts and all symbols that are analyzed are shown 274 Signal
510. the parameters appropriate for typical P25 analysis tasks Application Modulation Analysis see page 15 The Modulation Analysis setup application preset provides you with the most common displays used during modulation analysis Only present when Option 21 is installed Pulse Analysis see page 16 Time Frequency Analysis see page 17 The Pulse Analysis application preset provides you with the most common displays used during pulse analysis and makes changes to the default parameters to settings better optimized for pulsed signal analysis The Time Frequency preset configures the instrument with settings suited to analyzing signal behavior over time Spectrum Analysis see page 17 The Spectrum Analysis application preset provide you with the settings commonly used for general purpose spectrum analysis Spur Search Multi Zone 9k 1GHz see page 18 The Spur Search application preset sets the instrument to display all spurs that exceed the Threshold and Excursion values for the entire 9 k through 1 GHz range User see page 15 Setting the type to User displays Presets you have created Initially this field contains the following presets User Preset 1 This preset sets the instrument to show these displays Frequency vs Time Time Overview Spectrogram and Spectrum User Preset 2 This preset sets the instrument to show the Spurious display Preset Options
511. then 50 acquisitions and 50 pictures will be saved AutoSave File Naming When one of the AutoSave actions is enabled the name of the saved file is automatically incremented even if the Automatically generate filenames option Tools gt Options gt Save and Export is not enabled When the file is saved it will be saved to C lt instrument name gt Files SignalVu PC Printable Help Analyzing Data Analysis Settings Analysis Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Analysis Application Toolbar a The Analysis control panel provides access to settings that are used by all displays These settings affect only post processing and they do not control hardware settings Analysis Analysis Time Spectrum Time Frequency Units CJ Analysis Offset 80 000 ns vl Auto Time Zero Reference Acquisition Start Analysis Length 1 000 us V Auto Actual 1 000 us Setting Description Analysis Time see page 377 Specifies the length of time to use in measurements Spectrum Time see page 379 Specifies whether the Spectrum Analysis display uses the same Analysis Time parameters as all the other displays or if it uses a different Offset and Length Frequency see page 379 Specifies the measurement frequency center frequency Units see page 382 Specifies the Power units for all displays Analysis Time Tab The Analysis Time tab contains parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is
512. these controls to adjust the values at the top of the graph and the bottom of the graph 6 Plot Selects from Trend Time Trend FFT and Histogram for the graph 7 Autoscale Set the axes to values that show all trace points 8 Horizontal offset Adjusting this value moves the graph right or left 9 Trigger indicator Indicates the trigger point on the pulse train if the trigger occurred during the time frame of the pulse measurements 10 Pulse indicator For Trend and Time Trend plot types this indicates the pulse selected by the Pulse setting For the FFT plot type this indicator marks the trace point at the selected frequency For Histogram plot types this indicator marks the selected results bin 11 Scale Adjusts the horizontal scale Changing the Pulse Statistics Display Settings see page 237 Pulse Statistics Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar i The settings for the Pulse Statistics Display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 237 Pulsed RF Pulsed RF Shared Measurement Settings Settings tab Description Params see page 238 Specifies several parameters that control how pulses are counted and defined Define see page 240 Specifies parameters that control where measurements are taken on a pulse Levels see page 245 Specifies parameters that control the method and levels used to calculate some pulse values Freq Estimation see Speci
513. tion Function CCDF CCDF shows how much time a signal spends at or above a given power level relative to the average power of a measured signal OFDM analysis Measurement Description Channel Response Plots the channel response magnitude or phase versus the subcarrier or frequency Here the channel refers to all sources of signal frequency response impairment up to the analyzer input including the transmitter itself as well as any transmission medium through which the signal travels between the transmitter and the analyzer Constellation Measure of the signal power leaking from the main channel into adjacent channels EVM The normalized RMS value of the error vector between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal over the analysis length The EVM is generally measured on symbol or chip instants and is reported in units of percent and dB EVM is usually measured after best fit estimates of the frequency error and a fixed phase offset have been removed These estimates are made over the analysis length Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Flatness Ratio of the peak power in the transmitted signal to the average power in the transmitted signal Mag Error The RMS magnitude difference between the measured signal and the reference signal magnitude Displays RMS and Peak values with location of Peak value Phase Error The RMS phase difference between the measured sign
514. tions are met the instrument can perform actions such as stopping acquisitions or saving data Mask Test Settings Menu Bar Tools gt Mask Test Selecting Mask Test displays the Mask Test control panel These settings define test parameters and specify actions to be performed when the test conditions are met Checking the Enable Test box sets the application to perform the test once the conditions are defined Mask Test Define Actions gn Enable Test Search in Spectrum Trace 1 Test for is greater than x 20 00 dBm Setting Description Enable Test Select to perform a test then set the test conditions Define see page 371 Specifies which result to test and what to test for Actions see page 376 Specifies the action to take when the test condition is met Define Tab Mask Test The Define tab sets the parameters for tests From this tab you specify which result to test and what kind of violation to test for The following image shows the Define tab with is great than selected After you select that test you will enter the desired signal level The procedure is the same if you select is less than Mask Test Define Actions v Search in Spectrum Trace 1 Test for is greater than x 20 00 dBm SignalVu PC Printable Help 371 Mask Testing Define Tab Mask Test 372 The following image shows the Define tab with is outside mask selected After you select that
515. tled duration parameters Define Time Params Mask Trace Scale Prefs Measurement length 1 000 ms from Analysis Offset to End of Measurement Marker actual 938 4 us Min settled duration 0 0000 s from Settled Point to End of Measurement Marker Measurement Length Measurement length locates the end of the measurement period for settling time This value is set independently of the analysis period for other measurements in the analyzer This allows other measurements to display multiple frequency hops during an analysis while focusing the settling time analysis on a single hop You can set the measurement length either by entering a value in the entry box or by dragging the magenta bar to the desired location in the graph Traces and the display to the right of the measurement time are shown in grey to indicate that this section of the waveform is not being used in the measurement If your signal does not settle to within your tolerance band make sure that the measurement time ends during the settled portion of the waveform The beginning of the settling time measurement is set with the analysis offset control the same as other measurements in the instrument Use analysis offset to exclude earlier hops from the measurement See Analysis Time see page 377 for setting the analysis offset control If there is more than one phase or frequency hop in the signal to be analyzed use the Measurement Length control to instruct the analyze
516. to indicate the Ref Level 8 Vertical scale Sets the vertical scale value Signal Vu PC Printable Help Pulsed RF Pulse Trace Settings Changing the Pulse Trace Display Settings see page 235 Pulse Trace Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar z The Setup settings for the Pulse Trace display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Params see page 238 Specifies several parameters that control how pulses are counted and defined Define see page 240 Specifies parameters that control where measurements are taken on a pulse Levels see page 245 Specifies parameters that control the method and levels used to calculate some pulse values Freq Estimation see Specifies the reference used for computing frequency error page 245 Scale see page 247 Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale settings Prefs see page 248 Specifies whether on not certain display elements are shown Pulse Statistics Display The Pulse Statistics view displays a plot of a pulse measurement s values for every pulse in the analysis period For example the Pulse Statistics display will show the rise time measurement for each of 30 pulses with rise time on the Y axis and pulse number on the X axis Alternatively the Statistics Display can show an FFT trace for the values of a measurement over all the pulses analyzed Numeric readouts of Max Min and Average in this di
517. to the related measurement When the cell is selected the value is shown along with the units SignalVu PC Printable Help Audio Analysis Overview Overview Audio Analysis measures basic time and frequency domain parameters of analog audio signals modulated on a carrier AM FM and PM modulation or unmodulated non carrier audio signals Direct For modulated signals the measurement analysis first demodulates the signal to provide the Audio signal waveform Direct input signals bypass the demodulation step For FM and PM demodulation the carrier frequency error is estimated during demodulation The Audio signal waveform excursions are then measured to determine the Peak and RMS waveform parameters Next the analysis detects the highest amplitude frequency component within the audio bandwidth and makes a high accuracy frequency measurement of the frequency component This value is called the Audio Frequency A spectral analysis of the Audio signal waveform is performed to determine the presence and level of harmonically and or non harmonically related narrowband spurs and wideband noise The Audio signal harmonic and non harmonic spurs and noise level data are combined to produce signal summary parameters including SINAD Modulation Distortion Signal to Noise Total Harmonic Distortion and Total Non Harmonic Distortion Controls are provided to allow the user to select audio filters of Low Pass High Pass FM De emphassis or
518. trace points can extend up to 500 000 points if Max trace points is set to Never Decimate If the Analysis Length includes more than the selected Max trace points value the trace is decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export SignalVu PC Printable Help 103 Analog Modulation Prefs Tab 104 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Overview Overview The displays in RF Measurements Displays gt Measurements gt RF Measurements are m CCDF m Channel Power and ACPR B Frequency and Phase Settling Time Option SVT MCPR m Occupied Bandwidth The RF Measurements power measurements and signal statistics help you characterize components and systems With Option 11 the RF Measurements also includes Phase Noise and Jitter Measurements Power Measurements Measurement Description Channel Power The total RF power in the selected channel located in the ACPR display Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Measure of the signal power leaking from the main channel into adjacent channels Multi Carrier Power Ratio The ratio of the signal power in the reference channel or group of channels to the power in adjacent channels Peak Avg Ratio Ratio of the peak power in the transmitted signal to the
519. trace points value the trace 1s decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export You can set the Max trace points on the Settings gt Prefs tab To display the Frequency vs Time Display 1 Select the Displays button or Setup gt Displays 2 In the Select Displays dialog select General Signal Viewing in the Measurements box 3 Inthe Available displays box double click the Frequency vs Time icon or select the icon and click Add The Frequency vs Time icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays 4 Click OK to display the Freq vs Time display SignalVu PC Printable Help 65 General Signal Viewing Frequency Vs Time Settings Elements of the Display OF v Peak Normal Position 0 000 Hz 5 00 MHz m 7 Butoscale Position 350 000 us t Scale 4 000 ms Max 4 813MHz G 2 605ms Mn 4 461MHz Q L538ms 0519 019 Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph adjustment Use the knob to adjust the frequency range displayed on the vertical axis 2 Offset adjustment Adjusts the frequency shown at the center of the display 3 Autoscale button Adjusts the offset and range for both vertical
520. tream to File aM 8 kHz x 1 0 Activate 0 5 Run Browse Mute 0 0 Setting Description Demodulation Sets both the demodulation type and bandwidth Run Starts and stops the live audio demodulation process Volume Adjusts the volume of the demodulated audio signal played out through the PC speakers Mute Inhibits the audio from playing out through the PC speakers Stream to File These controls allow you to stream the demodulated audio file directly to disc The audio file is saved as a WAV file File Displays the current location where the audio file is saved Browse Use the Browse button to navigate to a location to save the audio file Activate This enables the Stream to File function When checked anytime the Run button is pressed the audio stream to file begins Audio Spectrum Display The Audio Spectrum display shows audio modulation characteristics You can choose to show just the spectrum of the audio signal or show the audio spectrum of the signal and the results of distortion measurements The Audio Spectrum display can show a table listing the frequency of a Harmonic Distortion HD and Non Harmonic Distortion NHD and its level The Spectrum graph indicates these harmonics and non harmonics with special markers To display the Audio Spectrum display 1 Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays This shows the Select Displays d
521. trol is used to decimate the result This setting applies to both the Reference channel and offsets Show Marker readout in graph Adjusts the reference level away from top of the graph Show limits Controls the appearance of mask limits in the graph Shaded Shows limits using a shaded area Green shading is used to identify Absolute limits Blue shading is used to indicate Relative limits Line only Shows limits using only a line A green line is used to identify Absolute limits A blue line is used to indicate Relative limits None No lines or shading are used to indicate limits in the graph Violations of the mask are still identified by red shading RF Measurements Shared Measurement Settings The control panel tabs in this section are shared by multiple displays in the RF Measurement folder Setup gt Displays With few exceptions each display maintains separate values for each of the controls on these tabs For example Scale values are independent for each of the displays SignalVu PC Printable Help 161 RF Measurements Freq amp RBW Tab Common controls for RF measurement displays Settings tab Description Freq amp RBW see page 162 Traces see page 163 Allows you to specify the Center Frequency Step size and RBW Specifies trace parameters such as detection method and whether smoothing in enabled Traces can also be saved and loaded for reference from this tab Scale see page 166
522. ts and frequency domain traces can include up to 10K points When the analysis produces a results array longer than the selected trace length the trace is decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export Settling Time decimal places Frequency and Phase Settling Time displays only Specifies the number of decimal places shown in the results readout below the graph This setting does not affect the precision of internal calculations Show trace legend Phase Noise display only Displays or hides the trace legend SignalVu PC Printable Help 167 RF Measurements Prefs Tab 168 SignalVu PC Printable Help WLAN Measurements WLAN Overview WLAN Overview The WLAN Analysis option allows you to evaluate WLAN signals performing standards based transmitter measurements in the time frequency and modulation domains WLAN measurements can be made on signals defined by 802 11a b g j n p standard IEEE 802 11 2012 and 802 11ac draft IEEE P802 11ac D4 0 or later User controls allow you to modify signal parameters for analysis of signals The analysis results give multiple views of WLAN signal characteristics to allow the diagnosis of signal imperfections and impairments quickly and easily Display control
523. ts the 100 probability that the signal will be at or above the average signal level 2 Power level select Adjust to display the value of the CCDF curve at a specific power level The selected power level is indicated by a small triangle on the CCDF curve 3 CCDF value Readout of the value of the CCDF curve at the selected power level 4 Avg Readout of the Average power level and the CCDF value at the Average power level 5 Readout Table Readout of the CCDF curve at six points 6 Pk Avg Readout of the Peak to Average power ratio 7 Measurement time Readout of the length of time used for the measurement Displays s when the Measurement time is set to continuous Changing the CCDF Display Settings see page 127 CCDF Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar i The control panel tabs for the CCDF Display are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Parameters see page 128 Specifies the time to be measured Traces see page 163 Select the trace to be measured and select reference trace for display Prefs see page 167 Specifies whether on not certain display elements are shown Restore defaults Sets the CCDF parameters to their default values SignalVu PC Printable Help 127 RF Measurements Parameters Tab Parameters Tab The Parameters tab enables you to specify several parameters that control signal acquisition for the CCDF Display
524. ttings Options 3 Setthe Reference Level to place the peak of the signal approximately 0 10 dB down from the top of the Spectrum graph 4 If the signal is transient in nature you might need to set a trigger to capture it You will need to use an oscilloscope triggering function to capture the signal Option CON with Live Link required to connect to an MDO4000B When the signal has been captured the spectrogram shows an overview of frequency and amplitude changes over time To see frequency transients in greater detail use the Frequency vs Time display The Time Frequency Analysis preset sets the analysis period to 5 ms The Spectrum Span is 40 MHz The RBW automatically selected for this Span is 300 kHz For a 300 kHz RBW the amount of data needed for a single spectrum transform is 7 46 us A 5 ms Analysis Length yields 671 individual spectrum transforms each one forming one trace for the Spectrogram to display as horizontal colored lines This preset scales the Spectrogram time axis vertical axis to 2 which means that the Spectrogram has done two levels of time compression resulting in one visible line for each four transforms This results in 167 lines in the Spectrogram for each acquisition each covering 29 84 us Application Preset Spur Search Multi Zone 9k 1GHz The Spur Search Multi Zone 9k 1GHz application preset opens the Spurious display which is set to display all spurs that exceed the Threshold and Excursion values for t
525. ttling Time 142 Meas Frequency Frequency Settling Time 142 Measurement BW no filter 71 Measurement Filter GP Digital Modulation displays 335 Params tab 239 Measurement Frequency 379 Frequency tab 380 Measurement Length Time Params tab 144 Measurement Params tab Channel Power amp ACPR display MCPR display 117 Measurement point 242 Measurement settings export 403 Measurements 29 Measurements tab 233 measuring settling time 138 Menus 416 MER RMS 31 min hold 449 Min Settled Duration Time Params tab 144 Mod Distor Audio Summary display 295 Mode Equalizer tab 341 modulate 449 modulating signal 449 modulation 450 Modulation analysis application presets 15 modulation measurements 307 Modulation measurements 31 SignalVu PC Printable Help Modulation Params tab GP Digital Modulation displays 335 OFDM Analysis displays 223 P25 Analysis displays 280 WLAN Analysis displays 195 Modulation types supported 335 moving windows 426 Multi Carrier Power Ratio 29 Multiple Carrier Power Ratio 115 N Navigator View 422 nFSK modulation type measurements 33 nFSK signal quality measurements 327 No of Harmonics Params2 tab 299 No of Non Harmonics Params2 tab 299 noise 450 noise bandwidth NBW 450 noise floor 450 Noise markers 367 Non Harmonic Excursion Params2 tab 299 Non Harmonic Threshold Params2 tab 299 Numeric keypad 422 O OBW Level Left Right 121 OBW Ref Pow
526. u Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar i The settings for the Channel Power and ACPR display are shown in the following table 108 SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Channels Tab for ACPR Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Meas Freq 1 50000 GHz RBW 30 000 kHz 4 Auto Step 2 0000 Mhz 4 Auto VBW Settings tab Description Freq amp RBW see page 117 Specify the frequency and resolution bandwidth used for the ACPR measurement Measurement Params see Specify several parameters that control the measurement such as channel filter chip page 117 rate averaging and correcting for noise floor Channels ACPR see This tab specifies the BW and offset parameters of the Channels for the selected ACPR page 109 measurement Scale see page 166 Specifies the vertical and horizontal scale settings Prefs see page 167 Specifies whether certain display elements are visible Restore defaults Sets parameters for a 1 channel WCDMA measurement Channels Tab for ACPR The Channels tab is where you specify parameters for the channels measured in the ACPR display Freq amp RBW Measurement Params Channels Scale Prefs Number of adjacent pairs 1 Channel Bandwidth 1 000 MHz Channel Spacing 2 000 MHz Setting Description Number of adjacent pairs Specifies the number of adjacent channel pairs Range 1 50 Resolution 1 Channel Bandwidth Spec
527. uce the desired measurement result peak or average and to reduce the results of a measurement to the desired number of trace points Avg VRMS For each sweep each point of the trace is the result of determining the RMS voltage value for the last n counts of the collected traces for the same point When n count has not been reached partial averaging results are displayed Peak Selects the Peak detection method With this method the highest value is selected from the results to be compressed into a trace point Offsets Specifies the detection method used for the offsets Avg VRMS Selects the Average Vrms detection method With this method each point on the trace in each offset is the result of determining the RMS Voltage value for all of the results values it includes Peak Selects the Peak detection method With this method the highest value in each offset is selected from the results to be compressed into a trace point Function across multiple sweeps Function Selects the trace processing method Available settings are Normal Avg VRMS and Hold Normal When a new trace has been computed it replaces the previous trace Max Hold With each sweep each trace point in the new trace is compared to the point s value in the old trace and the greater value is retained for display and subsequent comparisons Avg VRMS For each sweep each point on the trace is the result of determining the RMS Vol
528. ue of the magnitude error the RMS value of the magnitude error and the time at which it occurs within the acquisition Units can be either Symbols or Seconds Settings gt Analysis Time tab gt Units 6 Horizontal Scale Sets the time spanned by the graph Units can be either Symbols or Seconds Settings gt Analysis Time tab gt Units 7 Freq Error Freq Error is the difference between the Center Frequency and the measured frequency of the signal being tested This readout will be Freq Offset if the Freq Offset parameter on the Settings gt Advanced Params see page 342 tab is set to Manual Changing Magnitude Error vs Time Display Settings see page 320 Magnitude Error vs Time Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar s 320 SignalVu PC Printable Help GP Digital Modulation Phase Error vs Time Display The Setup settings for Magnitude Errors vs Time are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Magnitude vs Time display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 Settings tab Description Modulation Params see page 335 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings fo
529. ue that appears at the top of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 2 Bottom of graph Sets the EVM value that appears at the bottom of the graph This is only a visual control for panning the graph 3 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 4 Start Position Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 5 Stop Scale Adjusts the horizontal range of the graph By decreasing the scale the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the analysis results by adjusting the position WLAN EVM Settings Application Toolbar x The settings for the WLAN EVM display are shown in the following table SignalVu PC Printable Help 177 WLAN Measurements WLAN Magnitude Error Display Settings tab Description Modulation Params see Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters page 195 Analysis Params see Specifies parameters used by the instrument to analyze the input signal page 196 Data Range see page 198 Specifies which symbols and subcarriers of the signal to display Analysis Time see page 199 Specifies parameters that define the portion of the acquisition record that is used for analysis Also allows you to specify the Units Symbols or Seconds for WLAN Analysis displays Trace see page 200 Enables you to freeze the display or hide the measurement or av
530. uisition record by adjusting the offset 8 Freq Error This readout can show Freq Error or Freq Offset When it displays Freq Error it shows the difference between the instrument Frequency setting and the measured value of the signal s carrier frequency When it displays Freq Offset it shows the frequency offset specified on the Settings gt Freq amp BW see page 339 tab If Freq Error is displayed it also indicates that the Carrier frequency detection setting is Auto If Freq Offset is displayed it indicates that the Carrier frequency detection setting is manual SignalVu PC Printable Help 311 GP Digital Modulation Demod I amp Q vs Time Settings Changing Demod I amp Q Settings see page 312 Demod amp Q vs Time Settings EVM vs Time Display 312 Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar z The settings for the Demod I amp Q vs Time display are shown in the following table NOTE You might be able to save time configuring the Demod I amp Q display by pressing the Standard Settings button from the Settings control panel This allows you to select a preset optimized for a standard from the Select Standard dialog box See Standard Settings Button see page 334 Settings tab Description Modulation Params see page 335 Specifies the type of modulation used for the input signal and other parameters Freq amp BW see page 339 Specifies settings for frequen
531. ulses in the Analysis Time than the specified number the analyzer measures the specified number of pulses and ignores the rest The range for this setting is 1 10000 The setting resolution is 1 If this setting 1s not checked the analyzer will measure all pulses within the Analysis Time up to a maximum of 10000 pulses To determine the maximum number of pulses that can be analyzed use the following equation Maz number of pulses that can analyzed Pulse Rate x capacity where m Pulse rate is the number of pulses per second frequency B Capacity is a length of time which is displayed on the Acquire gt Sampling Parameters tab Note that the maximum number of pulses is affected by several parameters For example measurement bandwidth affects the sample rate The measurement algorithm also can reduce the maximum number of pulses that can be analyzed by increasing the sample rate based on the characteristics of the signal Additionally when FastFrame is enabled determining the maximum number of pulses is even more challenging In FastFrame mode the signal analyzer samples the signal around events of interest and SignalVu PC Printable Help 239 Pulsed RF Define Tab ignores the signal between events of interest Thus if the instrument 1s only looking at pulses and ignoring the signal between pulses the number of pulses that can be analyzed depends strongly on the characteristics of the pulse itself for example fewer wide puls
532. ults and perform actions such as stopping or saving data when the defined condition occurs See Mask Test Limits Settings see page 371 for details on configuring Mask Test Frequency Settling Time Theory of Operation The following paragraphs describe how a frequency and phase settling measurement is made SignalVu PC Printable Help 129 130 RF Measurements Acquisition H W Obtain 1 Q data at MeasF MeasBW Compute Freq vs Time waveform Apply smoothing Add to average Estimated settled frequency averaged waveform Analyze to waveform measurement index Get numerical results Frequency settling time flow diagram Apply detection Get trace to display Settling Time Measurement Overview DSP HOST HOST Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Settling Time Measurement Overview Acquisition HW Obtain Q data at MeasF MeasBW Filter Q N A Estimated settled frequency current I Q data measurement index Compute Phase vs Time waveform Apply tilt User correction offset Apply smoothing DSP Add to average Analyze to waveform Apply detection Get numerical results Get trace to display HOST Phase settling time flow diagram Acquisition hardware collects I and Q samples at the measurement frequency Sample Rate is based on the measurement bandwidth setting The instantaneous phase is computed as SignalVu PC Printable Help 131 RF Mea
533. unction is 2 1000 The resolution is 1 When averaging is enabled it applies to both traces Average is turned off by default Trace Selects a trace for display Choices are Trace 1 and 2 Either trace can be a recalled trace Saving Traces To save a trace for later analysis 1 Select the Save Trace As button This displays the Save As dialog box 2 Navigate to the desired folder or use the default 3 Typea name for the saved trace and click Save Recalling Traces You can recall a previously saved trace for analysis or comparison to a live trace To select a trace for recall 1 Select the trace into which the recalled trace will be loaded from the Trace drop down list 2 Check the Show check box 3 Click the button to display the Open dialog box J 4 Navigate to the desired file and click Open 5 Check the Show Recalled Trace check box 6 Verify that the trace s Show check box is selected either on this tab or next to the drop down list located at the top left corner of the graph SignalVu PC Printable Help 147 RF Measurements Scale Tab for Settling Time Displays Scale Tab for Settling Time Displays The Scale tab allows you to change the vertical and horizontal scale settings Changing the scale settings changes how the trace appears on the display but does not change control settings such as Measurement Frequency In effect these controls operate like pan and zoom controls Define Time Params
534. urce Internal External 10 MHz Setting Internal Uses the internal 10 MHz clock of the RSA306 as the reference frequency External 10 MHz Uses a 10 MHz clock signal applied to the Ref In connector of the RSA306 as the reference frequency Record Record lets you record the acquisition data directly to a file to be read by an application of your choice such as MATLAB NOTE Do not change any SignalVu PC settings while recording is active IQ Sampling Parameters Frequency Reference Record Record to disk Location CASgnaMu PC Fies Start Base file name Max saved files per run SAVED 10 Data structure 7 Fie Length 1 msec v Formatted v 396 SignalVu PC Printable Help Controlling the Acquisition of Data Triggering Setting Record to disk Record now Data recording starts immediately when the Start button is pressed Data is Record on trigger continuously recorded until either stopped by the Start Stop button or the File Length condition is met If File Length is disabled recording continues until the Stop button is pressed or the specified save location runs out of space Data recording starts when an appropriate trigger signal is received when Triggering is set to Triggered Start The Start button is enabled when the Record to disk is set to Record now Pressing Start begins the data recording The button changes to Stop and recording continu
535. used for analysis Also allows you to specify the time units Symbols or Seconds for OFDM Analysis displays Prefs Tab see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed SignalVu PC Printable Help 207 OFDM Analysis OFDM Constellation Display OFDM Constellation Display Display shows the OFDM signal subcarriers amplitude and phase in IQ constellation form To show the OFDM Constellation display 1 2 3 4 SF 9 dU If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM Constellation in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Constellation icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Constellation icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Constellation display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval and Spacing and Bandwidth controls as appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a stored data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the Display Markers Define m Time js To Center
536. ut signal For Phase 2 signals select the Trace tab and set the Trace Type to Freq Dev or IQ Select the Test Patterns tab and choose a test pattern appropriate for the input signal If you are analyzing a data file press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Elements of the Display The following image shows the P25 Eye display with Trace Type set to IQ 2 50 Position 0 000 2 50 Freq Error 27 96 uHz Auto Autoscale 9 Symb 5 Scale 4 Symbol The following image shows the P25 Eye display with Trace Type set to Freq Dev 266 SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis Freq Error 27 96 uHz Auto P25 Eye Diagram Settings 2 2 50 kHz Position 0 000 Hz 2 50 kHz Scale 4 Symbol Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph The vertical scale is normalized with no units for IQ and with Hz for Freq dev 2 Position Specifies the value shown at the center of the graph display 3 Bottom Readout Displays the value indicated by the bottom of graph 4 Autoscale Adjusts the vertical and horizontal settings to provide the best display 5 Position Displays the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display 6 Scale Adjusts the span of the graph in symbols 7 Freq Error Displays the difference between the maximum and minimum measured values of the signal frequency during the Measurement Time The readout can either be Freq Erro
537. uted for each acquisition taken by the instrument As each transform completes it is incorporated into the current spectrogram line How each 62 SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Amplitude Vs Time Display line of the spectrogram is created in spectrum monitor mode depends on the detection setting Settings gt Trace For example if Detection is set to Peak each spectrogram line is effectively a peak hold display of all the spectral data captured since the prior line Amplitude Vs Time Display The Amplitude vs Time display plots the signal amplitude against time The amplitude appears on the vertical axis while time is plotted along the horizontal axis Note that the trace s in the Amplitude vs Time display can be set to a maximum of 100 000 points however the actual number of trace points can extend up to 1 000 000 points if Max trace points is set to Never Decimate If the Analysis Length includes more than the selected Max trace points value the trace is decimated using the method specified with the Detection control to be equal to or less than the Max trace points setting except when Max trace points is set to Never Decimate This decimated or undecimated trace is what is used for marker measurements and for results export You can set the Max trace points on the Settings gt Prefs tab To show Amplitude vs Time display 1 Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays 2 In the Select Displ
538. utton or select Setup gt Displays From the Measurements box select RF Measurements Settling Time Displays Double click the Freq Settling icon or the Phase Settling icon in the Available displays box This adds the selected display to the Selected displays box and removes it from the Available displays box Click the OK button Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file Displays Markers settinas Trig _Acq Ana Freq 2 44700 GHz 2 RefLev 0 00 dBm Cry Clear 7 Trace1 Show Sample Normal 2 4498 GHz e lt 2 4468 GHz e 377 500 us 0070 035 Frequency settling time display SignalVu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Settling Time Displays Dsplays markers Settings acg J na Freq 1 00000 GHz gt RefLev 15 00 dBm fare 2 v Trace 1 snow Sample Normal Position 3 3748 Scale 19 952 ms 0519 030 Settled Phase 106 69 m Settied Freq 1000 0000 J Phase settling time display SignalVu PC Printable Help 135 RF Measurements Elements of the Display Settling Time Displays Item Display element Description 1 Top of graph Sets the frequency phase that appears at the top of the graph However note that the top of graph setting vertical scale setting Settings gt Scale tab and Vertical Position settings interact Ad
539. value of the phase deviation Position Specifies the horizontal position of the trace on the graph display Scale Adjusts the time range of the graph By decreasing the scale full scale time over 10 divisions the graph essentially becomes a window that you can move over the acquisition record by adjusting the horizontal position Clear Clears the measurement results Trace Detection readout Displays the Trace Detection setting see Settings gt Trace gt Detection Freq Error This readout can show Freq Error or Freq Offset When it displays Freq Error it shows the difference between the instrument Frequency setting and the measured value of the signal s carrier frequency When it displays Freq Offset it shows the frequency offset specified on the Settings gt Parameters tab If Freq Error is displayed it also indicates that the Carrier frequency detection setting is Auto If Freq Offset is displayed it indicates that the Carrier frequency detection setting is manual Changing the PM Settings see page 97 PM Settings Menu Bar Setup gt Settings Application Toolbar i The PM Settings control panel provides access to settings that control parameters of the PM Display SignalVu PC Printable Help 97 Analog Modulation Parameters Tab Parameters Trace Scale Prefs Frequency offset 383 2 Hz Auto Burst detect threshold 100 dBc Load a from marker
540. ver you can set the instrument to collect multiple spectra per line allowing you to zoom in later on this high time resolution data 10 x Time Division 500 When the DPXogram display is stopped the analyzer can display the full resolution of the captured data The Time Resolution readout applies only when the DPXogram is running Time Resolution Effects of Changing Time Resolution The Time Resolution control affects acquisition parameters for the DPX hardware This means that if you change the Time Resolution value while the instrument is stopped the new value applies to the NEXT acquisition and might not represent the results currently shown in the display Time resolution can be changed either directly by manually adjusting the Time Resolution control or automatically by changing the Time div control Auto is the default yielding one spectrum per line in the display When the Time Resolution is decreased below its auto value multiple spectra are collected to create each line in the DPXogram graph Once you stop the instrument you can decrease the Time div value or use Zoom to see increased time resolution If the time resolution is set to a very small number while the Time div is set to a large value you might notice that there is a limit to the number of spectra that can be collected This limit depends on the number of trace points selected For 801 point spectra 60 000 underlying spectra can be collected The number of 24
541. veraged to generate the displayed trace Present only when Function is set to Average Min Hold or Max Hold Freeze Halts updates to the selected trace Save Trace As Saves the selected trace to a file for later recall and analysis Show Recalled trace Displays a saved trace instead of a live trace Trace Available traces for Spectrum are Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Math and Spectrogram Other displays support fewer traces Traces 1 3 are based on the input signal and enable you to display the input signal using different processing For example you could display Trace 1 with Function set to Normal Trace 2 with Function set to Max Hold and Trace 3 with Function set to Min Hold The Math trace is the result of subtracting one trace from another The Spectrogram trace applies only to the Spectrum display and is available only 1f the Spectrogram display is shown The Spectrogram trace shows the trace selected in the Spectrogram as a spectrum trace Detection Trace Detection is used to reduce the results of a measurement to the desired number of trace points For example if the maximum number of trace points is 100 000 and a measurement over the selected analysis length yields 200 000 points the measurement must decimate these 200 000 trace points by 2 to prevent exceeding the 100 000 trace point limit Since only one value can be represented for each trace point an algorithm must be used to select detect the appropriate value to use
542. viShow Sample Normal 2 4503 GHz gt Position 2 4468 GHz 2 4433 GHz Position 0 000 s Scale 1 025 ms Settling Time 200 50 us Settled Freq 2 445308 GHz from Trigger 196 93 us Frequency settling time display before setting the measurement length 140 Signal Vu PC Printable Help RF Measurements Settling Time Settings v Trace1 Show Sample Normal 2 4503 GHz Position 2 4468 GHz gt 2 4433 GHz Position 20 000 ns Scale 374 220 us Settling Time 48 40 us Settled Freq 2 448388 GHz from Trigger 44 83 us Frequency settling time display after setting the measurement length Settling Time Settings Application Toolbar at The settings for the Frequency and Phase Settling Time displays are shown in the following table Settings tab Description Define see page 142 Sets the measurement parameters that characterize the settling time measurement Time Params see page 144 Sets measurement end time and minimum settled duration parameters Mask see page 145 Enable or disables mask testing and sets the parameters that specify the three zones used for mask testing Trace see page 145 Specifies trace display characteristics and which traces are displayed Scale see page 166 Sets vertical and horizontal scale and position parameters Prefs see page 167 Specifies whether or not to show certain display elements the maximum
543. viation and the expected deviation for the transmitted symbols This measurement is shown in the P25 Summary and P25 Constellation displays This measurement is done on the first on slot region in the analysis window for bursty HCPM data The analysis is done on 160 symbols centered at the burst This measurement is done on all of the data chosen in the analysis window for non bursty modulation types A warning message is issued if the data is less than 164 symbols the standard recommends at least 164 symbols be present for the measurement of non bursty signals This measurement is done by performing the frequency demodulation after taking the signal through relevant shaping filters and comparing it with expected frequency deviation points The Limits tab in the P25 Summary Settings control panel allows you to compare the results against limits set for Pass Fail This measurement result is not shown in the P25 Summary display when Trigger measurements are selected NOTE Read about important information related to HCPM bursty data measurements here see page 262 SignalVu PC Printable Help APCO P25 Analysis APCO P25 Analysis Symbol Rate Accuracy Phase 1 and Phase 2 Symbol Rate Accuracy measures the ability of the transmitter to operate at the assigned symbol rate 4 8 kHz for Phase 1 6 kHz for Phase 2 It is a scalar result shown in the P25 Summary display This measurement result appears in the P25 Summary display and
544. wer should be relatively constant For many measurements this may not be the case and the Power Measurement results will vary as the signal varies SignalVu PC Printable Help 107 RF Measurements Channel Power Average power is the square root of the sum of the squares of the voltage samples over the measurement time The defined channel width for the Power Measurement defines the bandwidth and shape of the filter used to remove any RF power on frequencies outside of the channel bandwidth Channel Power The total RF power in the selected frequency band The detection type used for measuring channel power is Average This means that the average of the linear pre log samples is used to determine the channel power To measure channel power use the ACLR measurement and set the number of adjacent channels to zero This results in only the channel power being measured Average Channel Power The total RF power in the selected channel located in the ACPR display Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ratio Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio ACLR is the ratio of the mean power centered on the assigned channel frequency to the mean power centered on an adjacent channel frequency In the 3GPP specification both the main channel and adjacent channels are required to be filtered with RRC Root Raised Cosine filters Adjacent Channel Power Measure of the signal power leaking into nearby channels Channel Power and ACPR Settings Men
545. wo or more displays are shown and one display requires a wide acquisition bandwidth and another display requires a much narrower bandwidth The display requiring the much narrower bandwidth must decimate and filter the acquisition record which can result in too few samples left for the measurement B Increase the Analysis Length to provide more samples Close any displays you don t currently need Not enough samples try increasing MeasBW The measurement was not able to run because there are not enough samples available for the measurement to analyze The Settling Time measurement requires at least 256 samples This can occur when two or more displays are shown and one display requires a wide acquisition bandwidth and another display requires a much narrower bandwidth The display requiring the much narrower bandwidth must decimate and filter the acquisition record which can result in too few samples left for the measurement B Increase the Analysis Length to provide more samples Close any displays you don t currently need No FFT not all pulses have results If a pulse cannot be measured because its shape is too indistinct or it does not meet the parameters that define a pulse see page 238 its results will be for every measurement on that pulse The instrument cannot compute an FFT No pulses found SignalVu PC Printable Help Reference Error and Information Messages The instrument was unable to find any complete pul
546. ws or hides the readout for the selected marker in the graph area selected marker Settling Time decimal places Specifies the precision of the settling time measurement readout that appears below the graph This setting does not affect the precision of internal calculations SEM Display The SEM Spectrum Emission Mask display measures out of band emissions immediately outside the channel bandwidth that result from the modulation process and non linearity in the transmitter The Spectrum Emission Mask display allows you to define up to six pair of masks or offsets that specify the limits for out of band emissions and performs a pass fail tests of the signal against the defined offsets and limits To show the Spectrum Emission Mask display 1 2 3 4 gn Recall an appropriate acquisition data file Select Displays or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select RF Measurements or WLAN Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the SEM icon or select the icon and click Add The SEM icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the Spectrum Emission Mask display Press the Replay button to take measurements on the recalled acquisition data file SignalVu PC Printable Help 149 RF Measurements SEM Display v Pass 10 00 dBm dB div 10 0 dB Ref Detection Avg VRMS Normal C
547. xample for the Spectrum display uses power dBm units and frequency Hz units the Amplitude vs Time display uses power dBm and time seconds units and the Phase vs Time display uses phase degrees and time seconds units Freg amp Span BW Traces Scale Prefs Vertical Horizontal Scale 100 00 dB Zoom Start 1 857 GHz Position 0 00 dBm Reset Scale Zoom Stop 1 942 GHz Autoscale Log Autoscdle Setting Description Vertical Controls the vertical position and scale of the trace display Scale Changes the vertical scale Offset Vertical Offset adjusts the reference level away from top of the graph Autoscale Resets the scale of the vertical axis to contain the complete trace Horizontal Controls the span of the trace display and position of the trace Zoom Start Sets the starting frequency for Zoom Stop Sets the stop frequency for Log Resets the scale of the horizontal axis to contain the complete trace Reset Scale Resets all settings to their default values 78 Signal Vu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Prefs Tab Prefs Tab The Prefs tab enables you to change parameters of the measurement display The parameters available on the Prefs tab vary depending on the selected display but include such items as enabling disabling Marker Readout switching the Graticule display on off and Marker Noise mode Each of the General Signal Viewing displays maintains its own sepa
548. y ien breE e aU PADb Ie tee ide ted aletgobnbnneiadontudd us Dre nn UR IR en 312 EVM vs Time Settings eicere pha E ee RA dri T NR Re PEN E I Ea 313 Eye Diagram Eye Diagram Display oerte tree c RD IR UIS dius deealetabonbwats dived mee vtt Ae s 314 Eye Diagram Settings osinaren o pena ROSA E RIA e RE te iid ected esca NOI RES TP EXE EUU ERA 316 Frequency Deviation vs Time Frequency Deviation vs Time Display 0 0 ccc cece cece ence e ene enn ee me eee 316 Frequency Deviation vs Time Settings c ccc ccc eee ce eee cence me mene eese 318 Magnitude Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Display c ccc cece e cece enn eee me ese meme mee 319 Magnitude Error vs Time Settings 0 0 00 ccc e cece eee ee ene ene ener e eden mee mee 320 Phase Error vs Time Phase Error vs Time Display ker te e nete conus Eu EFE Eve TE EXE saceebares tema 321 Phase Error vs Time Settings iiie cce th eese Rose QUSE ded UR ORARE PA ROIEEI MR DEN ER TE na 322 Signal Quality Signal Quality Display reii prr rrr p reU SEES Pew OUEST UD Ed CHE EUCEEE E PONE 323 Signal Quality Settings etos er Re RE ache ciaa aa IRR DOE PER e sees DES e s ER CU RRESA ES 328 Symbol Table Symbol Table Displ y 2 tree ER ree uar EI DU ES T TUrM ee T rU C AU EER 329 Symbol Table Settings resti tree cenare uas I OO De arbi de ete ER QNA AR P Ce rn rv elas 330 Trellis Diagram Trellis Diagram Display ir eR E pobre HE OLET EO EET E
549. y Pulse frequency is calculated across the time defined by the Frequency Domain Linearity setting in the Define tab The measurement is available for modulation types CW Constant Phase CW Changing phase and Other manual setting in the Freq Estimation tab The measurement is not specified for chirp or other signals and no answer is retumed when frequency estimation is set to Chirp If frequency estimation is set to Other then Frequency Offset must be set to 0 Hz and the Range can be set to 40 of the acquisition bandwidth A least square fit of slope of phase vs time over the measurement period is used for the measurement of the individual pulse frequency Frequency difference is calculated as the difference between the reference frequency and the calculated frequency of the pulse Phase Deviation The Phase Deviation is the difference between the maximum and minimum Phase values measured during the ON time of a pulse Impulse Response Amplitude The difference in dB between the levels of the main lobe and highest side lobe Impulse Response Time The difference in time between the main lobe and highest side lobe Time This is the time in seconds relative to the time reference point in the first acquisition record in the data set SignalVu PC Printable Help General Signal Viewing Overview Overview The displays in General Signal Viewing Displays gt Measurements gt General Signal Viewing are Am
550. y hovering the mouse indicator over the E 10 Connect a DUT device under test to the MDO 11 Use SignalVu PC to configure the MDO Frequency Amplitude Span Bandwidth and Time Scaling parameters for the RF channels can only be changed using SignalVu PC NOTE Press F1 on your keyboard to open the SignalVu PC help for information about configuring and using the application You can also click on Help gt User Manual in the SignalVu PC menu bar to open the help 12 When you are ready to connect to a different instrument select Disconnect From Instrument to first end the current connection SignalVu PC Printable Help Using SignalVu PC Connectivity NOTE For more search options using TekVISA go to the Visa Resource Manager double click in the applications tray SignalVu PC Printable Help 25 Using SignalVu PC Connectivity 26 SignalVu PC Printable Help Using the Measurement Displays Selecting Displays Selecting Displays Menu Bar Setup gt Displays Application Toolbar Use the Select Displays dialog to choose the displays that appear on the screen Choose any combination below or use an Application Preset Application Presets Measurements Available displays General Signal Viewing AMPL FREQ 5 Analog Modulation P Digital Modulation sedens Amplitude vs DPX Frequency Phase vs OFDM Analysis Time vs Time Time Pulsed RF EI D E ID mm Audio Analysis WLAN Analysis RFI amp Q vs Spectr
551. y or hide the measurement or average trace Scale see page 227 Specifies the vertical subcarrier and symbols scale and position settings Prefs see page 229 Specifies the units of the display and whether elements of the graphs are displayed OFDM Spectral Flatness Display The OFDM Spectral Flatness display shows the average power levels of subcarriers across the signal bandwidth and indicates 1f they remain within the limits defined for a particular standard The averaged subcarrier level is shown as a line on the display while the individual subcarrier levels are shown as points The Pass or Fail result indicates whether the average line remains between the upper and lower limit mask boundaries To show the OFDM Spectral Flatness display 1 2 3 4 wo uu 9 oU If you are analyzing a stored data file recall the data file now Otherwise go to the next step Press the Displays button or select Setup gt Displays In the Select Displays dialog select OFDM Analysis in the Measurements box In the Available displays box double click the OFDM Flatness icon or select the icon and click Add The OFDM Flatness icon will appear in the Selected displays box and will no longer appear under Available displays Click OK to show the OFDM Flatness display Set the Frequency appropriate for the signal Select Setup gt Settings to display the control panel Select the Modulation Params tab Set the Standard Guard Interval Sub
552. yed In infinite persistence mode once a point in the display has been written to it will remain visible indefinitely The DPX display can plot the trace in the following views SignalVu PC Printable Help 37 General Signal Viewing DPX Display Spectrum This view plots power on the vertical axis versus frequency on the horizontal axis This display is similar to a standard Spectrum display In SignalVu PC this display appears as part of the Split view In the Split view the only trace that can be displayed is the Ogram Line DPXogram This view is a spectrogram version time plotted along the vertical axis versus frequency on the horizontal axis of the DPX Spectrum trace DPX spectrogram on the instrument that created the DPX acquisition data creates the spectrogram in real time and does not require an acquisition to be transferred into memory and analyzed Because of this real time processing there are no gaps in the spectral lines even for monitoring periods that can last for several days Split This view consists of two DPX views A DPXogram view appears on the top half of the display and a DPX Spectrum view appears on the bottom half of the display To display a DPX view 1 2 3 4 5 6 Recall a DPX waveform acquisition data file Select Frequency and set the measurement frequency Select the Displays icon or Setup gt Displays This displays the Select Displays dialog box From the Measurements box select Genera
553. ys Connectivity 20 Live Link allows you to connect your PC with SignalVu PC installed to the following instruments m MDO4000B Series instrument via USB wireless or LAN Option CON for SignalVu PC required RSA306 Spectrum Analyzer via USB 3 0 Connecting to an RSA306 Spectrum Analyzer USB3 connection To establish a Live Link connection using USB perform the following procedures in the order given 1 Power on the PC and wait until the PC has fully completed its start up cycle 2 Connect a USB 3 0 cable from the PC to the RSA306 After the USB cable is connected the RSA306 starts its boot up cycle The indicator light turns green when the RSA306 is ready for use Signal Vu PC Printable Help Using SignalVu PC Connectivity NOTE Your PC may notify you that it has found a new USB device and has loaded the device drivers If you see these notifications wait until the drivers are loaded before continuing to the next step 3 Double click the SignalVu PC icon on the Desktop to start the application NOTE The signalVu PC software version must be at or above the version provided with the RSA306 The latest version of software is available from the Tektronix web site www tektronix com downloads 4 Click Live Link on the menu bar to view the drop down menu NOTE See Elements of the Display see page 9 for information about menus and toolbars 5 Select Connect To Instrument You should see the USB
554. ys all the selected data records The set of selected records may comprise a single record all records in acquisition history or a subset of the records in history Replay Current Record Selecting Replay current record replays the current data record You can identify the current acquisition record by looking at the Replay toolbar The first number to the right of the Select button identifies the current data record For example if the number is 2 10 it means the current record is the tenth frame of the second acquisition in history 386 SignalVu PC Printable Help Analyzing Data Replay from Selected Replay from Selected Select Replay from selected to replay records as selected from the submenu The records replayed can be from the acquisition memory history or from a saved acquisition data file that has already been recalled as the current acquisition data Pause Select Pause to suspend playback Selecting Pause again restarts the replay at the point it was paused Stop Select Stop to halt the replay of data Selecting any Replay action restarts replay of records from the beginning Select All Select Select all to select all data records for replay Select Records from History Selecting Select records from history displays the Select data records tab of the Replay control panel The Select data records tab allows you to specify which records in the acquisition history will be used when the Replay button is selected

Scale Tab

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents